JP7076831B2 - Pachinko machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

Conventionally, in a gaming machine, a starting port and a large winning opening are provided in a game area where a gaming ball can flow down, and a special symbol is displayed in a variable manner on a special symbol display when the gaming ball wins a prize at the starting opening, and a big hit. When the jackpot symbol indicating the result of the lottery is stopped and displayed, the jackpot game advantageous to the player is executed. When the special symbol is variablely displayed, the game effect is performed by the lighting / blinking operation of the effect image displayed on the image display device, the sound output from the speaker, and the light emitting body such as the lamp.

In the conventional gaming machine, a special effect suggesting the expectation that the jackpot game will be executed is performed on the condition that the operation of the operating means is performed at a predetermined timing during the operation valid period. For example, in Patent Document 1, a special effect suggesting a change in the gaming state is performed when an operation input of an operation means is performed when an operation promotion effect for urging a player to operate a button is performed.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2014-188506

By the way, there is still room for improvement in order to improve the interest of the game by directing using the operating means.
An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of a game by producing a game using an operating means.

The present invention has the following configurations. The reference numerals indicate an example of the correspondence with the components shown in the drawings for the purpose of promoting understanding of the present invention, and do not limit the technical scope of the present invention.
The game machine of the present invention has a determination means for determining whether or not to perform a special game based on the game information acquired by the acquisition means when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and the game information before the determination is performed. The player can operate the pre-determination means for preliminarily determining whether or not to perform the special game based on the above, and the effect control means capable of executing the game effect according to the result of the determination and the result of the pre-determination. The effect control means is provided with various operation means and a plurality of movable effect objects (movable effect members), and the effect control means is an operation promotion effect (display of an operation promotion image) for urging a player to operate the operation means. , The vibration effect that vibrates the operating means and the accessory effect that operates the effect accessory can be executed. The vibration effect includes the first vibration effect (vibration with button operation) and the first vibration effect. The second vibration effect (vibration without button operation) in which the vibration effect and the effect mode (vibration intensity / vibration time) are different, and the third vibration effect (button vibration notice at the start of fluctuation) executed based on the above-mentioned prior determination: FIG. 36. -FIG. 38, button vibration notice effect at the time of winning: S665 in FIG. 36, FIG. 59), and the first vibration effect (button operation) is more than the case where the second vibration effect (vibration without button operation) is executed. When the presence vibration is executed, the execution period (operation valid period) of the operation promotion effect (display of the operation promotion image) is longer and easier to be executed, and the third vibration effect (button vibration notice at the start of fluctuation) is more likely to be executed. The first vibration effect (vibration with button operation: decision) is easier to execute for a longer period of time than the button vibration notice at the time of winning (button vibration at the start of fluctuation 1 second (weak notice) and 3). Seconds (strong notice), Fig. 51), the first vibration effect (vibration with button operation: decision) is executed more than when the third vibration effect (button vibration at the start of fluctuation, button vibration at the time of winning) is executed. It is characterized in that a predetermined bonus effect (decision bonus action: two or more bonuses are activated) is more easily executed (FIG. 37, FIG. 38, FIG. 51, FIG. 67 (7)). And.

According to the present invention, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

It is a front view of the gaming machine which concerns on this embodiment. It is a perspective view which shows the normal state, the protruding state, and the pressed state of an effect button. It is an enlarged front view of the game information display device. It is a block diagram which showed the structure of a game control device. It is a block diagram of an image control unit. It is a figure which shows (1) the jackpot determination table for the 1st special symbol, and (2) the jackpot determination table for the 2nd special symbol. It is a figure which shows (1) special symbol determination table for big hit, (2) special symbol determination table for loss. It is a figure which shows the jackpot game control table. It is a figure which shows the big prize opening open / close control table. It is a figure which shows the game state setting data table. It is a figure which shows the special figure variation pattern determination table for the non-time saving game state. It is a figure which shows the special figure variation pattern determination table for the time saving game state. It is a figure which shows (1) the pre-determination table for a non-time saving game state, and (2) the pre-determination table for a time-saving game state. (1) A hit determination table for a normal symbol, (2) a stop symbol determination table for a normal symbol, (3) a variation pattern determination table for a normal symbol, and (4) an opening mode determination table for a second start port are shown. It is a figure. It is a flowchart of a timer interrupt process by a main control board. It is a flowchart of the input control process by a main control board. It is a flowchart of the 1st start port detection switch input process by a main control board. It is a flowchart of the 2nd start port detection switch input process by a main control board. It is a flowchart of a gate detection switch input process by a main control board. It is a flowchart of the special figure special electric control processing by the main control board. It is a flowchart of a special symbol memory determination process by a main control board. It is a flowchart of a jackpot determination process by a main control board. It is a flowchart of special symbol variation processing by a main control board. It is a flowchart of the special symbol stop processing by a main control board. It is a flowchart of a jackpot game process by a main control board. It is a flowchart of the special game end processing by a main control board. It is a flowchart of the general electric control process by the main control board. It is a flowchart of ordinary symbol variation processing by a main control board. It is a flowchart of auxiliary game processing by a main control board. It is a figure which shows the type of the command transmitted from the main control board to the staging control board. It is a figure which shows the type of the command transmitted from the main control board to the staging control board. It is a flowchart of the main processing by a staging control unit. It is a flowchart of a timer interrupt process by a staging control unit. It is a flowchart of a command analysis process by a staging control unit. It is a flowchart of a command analysis process by a staging control unit. It is a flowchart of the continuous notice effect determination process by the effect control unit 130m. It is a figure which shows the continuous notice effect type determination table for a normal mode. It is a figure which shows the continuous notice effect type determination table for a probability change / time saving mode. It is a figure which shows the continuous notice scenario determination table for a normal mode. It is a figure which shows the continuous notice scenario determination table for a probability change / time saving mode. It is a flowchart which shows the variation effect pattern determination process. It is a figure which shows the variation effect pattern determination table for a normal mode. It is a figure which shows the variation effect pattern determination table for a probability change / time saving mode. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot notice effect decision process. It is a figure which shows the advance notice decision table before reach. It is a figure which shows the dialogue notice pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows the step-up notice pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows the pseudo-continuous production pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows the development production pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows the cut-in effect pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows the determination effect pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows the information table for a decision success production. It is a figure which shows the execution start timing and the end timing of a decision success effect. It is a figure which shows the vibration effect information table for jackpot symbol matching. It is a figure which shows the re-lottery effect pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows the number of executions of a button vibration after the decision success production is started. It is a figure which shows the final production pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows the revival effect pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect when the continuous advance notice effect and the step-up advance notice effect are executed. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect when the continuous advance notice effect and the step-up advance notice effect are executed. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect when the button vibration advance notice effect and the line advance notice effect are executed. It is a figure which shows the effect example when the pseudo-continuous effect is executed. It is a figure which shows the production example when the development production is executed and develops into SP reach production. It is a figure which shows the production example when the development production is executed and develops into SPSP reach production. It is a figure which shows the effect example which the cut-in effect is executed during the SP reach effect. It is a figure which shows the production example which continued with FIG. 65. It is a figure which shows the production example when the decision production is executed during the SPSP reach production (battle production). It is a figure which shows the example of the effect when the decision effect is executed during the SPSP reach effect (mission effect). It is a figure which shows the production example when the promotion is successful in the re-lottery production. It is a figure which shows the continuation example of the effect of FIG. 67, FIG. 68, and FIG. 69. It is a figure which shows the effect example when the resurrection effect is executed. It is a figure which shows the effect example 1 when the setting is changed from a normal mode to a time saving mode. It is a figure which shows the effect example 2 when the setting is changed from a normal mode to a time saving mode. It is a figure which shows the production example when the operation means is operated while waiting for a customer. It is a figure which shows the various vibration effects performed in a specific effect. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing by a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the initial setting process by a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the setting change process by a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the RWM clear process by a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the setting confirmation process by a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the performance display data setting process by a main control board. It is a figure which shows the display information of the information display in each game section. It is a figure which shows the specific example in the case of initial operation of various drive sources after a setting change. It is a figure which shows the specific example in the case of initial operation of various drive sources after the setting confirmation. It is an operation comparison table at various operation timings of various drive sources. It is a flowchart which shows the initial setting process by the main control board of the 1st modification. It is a flowchart which shows the setting change process by the main control board of the 1st modification. It is a flowchart which shows the RWN clear process by the main control board of the 1st modification. It is a flowchart which shows the setting confirmation process by the main control board of the 1st modification. It is a figure which shows the specific example at the time of initial operation of various drive sources while changing a setting. It is a figure which shows the specific example at the time of initial operation of various drive sources during RWN clear preparation. It is a figure which shows the specific example at the time of initial operation of various drive sources during setting confirmation. It is an operation comparison table at various operation timings of various drive sources. It is a flowchart which shows the initial setting process by the main control board of the 2nd modification. It is a figure which shows the specific example in the case of initial operation of various drive sources after clearing RWM. It is a flowchart which shows the initial setting process by the main control board of the 3rd modification. It is a figure which shows the specific example at the time of initial operation of various drive sources during RWN clear preparation. It is a flowchart which shows the initial setting process by the main control board of 4th modification. It is a figure which shows the specific example in the case of initial operation of various drive sources after clearing RWN. It is a figure which shows an example of the processing performed by the main control unit and the staging control unit when the gaming machine recovers from the power off state. It is a figure which shows an example of the processing performed by the main control unit and the staging control unit when the gaming machine recovers from the power off state. It is a figure which shows an example of the processing performed by the main control unit and the staging control unit when the gaming machine recovers from the power off state. It is a figure which shows an example of the processing performed by the main control unit and the staging control unit when the gaming machine recovers from the power off state. It is a figure which shows an example of the processing performed by the main control unit and the staging control unit when the gaming machine recovers from the power off state. In process example 1, the period from when the power off state of the pachinko gaming machine is resolved until the customer waiting image is displayed, and in process example 2, the customer waiting image is displayed after the power off state of the pachinko gaming machine is resolved. It is explanatory drawing of the period until it is done. It is a figure which shows one aspect of the variation effect of a decorative pattern performed by an effect control unit using an image display unit. It is a figure which shows one aspect of the variation effect of a decorative pattern performed by an effect control unit using an image display unit. It is a figure which shows one aspect of the variation effect of a decorative pattern performed by an effect control unit using an image display unit. It is a figure which shows one aspect of the variation effect of a decorative pattern performed by an effect control unit using an image display unit. It is a figure which shows one aspect of the variation effect of a decorative pattern performed by an effect control unit using an image display unit. It is a figure which shows one aspect of the variation effect of a decorative pattern performed by an effect control unit using an image display unit. It is a figure which shows one aspect of the variation effect of a decorative pattern performed by an effect control unit using an image display unit. It is a figure which shows one aspect of the variation effect of a decorative pattern performed by an effect control unit using an image display unit. It is a figure which shows one aspect of the variation effect of a decorative pattern performed by an effect control unit using an image display unit. It is a figure which shows one aspect of the variation effect of a decorative pattern performed by an effect control unit using an image display unit. It is a figure which shows one aspect of the variation effect of a decorative pattern performed by an effect control unit using an image display unit. It is a figure which shows one aspect of the variation effect of a decorative pattern performed by an effect control unit using an image display unit. It is a figure which shows one aspect of the variation effect of a decorative pattern performed by an effect control unit using an image display unit. It is a figure which shows the modification of the variation effect example 6. It is a figure which shows the modification of the production in a jackpot game. It is a figure which shows the modification of the production in a jackpot game. It is a figure which shows the modification of the production in a jackpot game. It is a figure which shows the modification of the production in a jackpot game. It is a figure which shows the example of the non-initialization test operation process in the case where the operation failure of a movable accessory occurs. It is a figure which shows the example of the non-initialization test operation process in the case where the operation failure of a movable accessory occurs. It is a figure which shows the example of the non-initialization test operation process in the case where the operation failure of a movable accessory occurs. It is a figure which shows the example of the non-initialization test operation process in the case where the operation failure of a movable accessory occurs. It is a figure which shows one aspect of the variation effect of a decorative pattern performed by an effect control unit using an image display unit. It is a figure explaining the event when a signal line becomes unconnected. It is a figure explaining the event when a signal line becomes unconnected. It is a figure explaining the event when a signal line becomes unconnected.

Hereinafter, this embodiment will be specifically described with reference to the drawings.

(Composition of gaming machine)
First, the configuration of the gaming machine 1 will be specifically described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 4. FIG. 1 is an example of a front view of the gaming machine 1 in the present embodiment.
In the pachinko gaming machine as the game machine 1, an opening / closing frame 2B (game frame) is openably / closably attached to an outer frame 2A attached to the island structure of the game hall, and an opening / closing door 3 is openably / closably attached to the opening / closing frame 2B. ing. A window 3a is formed in the opening / closing door 3, and a transparent plate 3b is attached to the window 3a. The left end of the opening / closing door 3 is rotatably supported around the vertical axis center at the left end of the opening / closing frame 2B, and a key cylinder 3c that locks the opening / closing door 3 to the opening / closing frame 2B is attached to the right end of the opening / closing door 3. Has been done. A game board 4 is attached to the opening / closing frame 2B, a game area 4a through which a game ball can flow down is formed between the game board 4 and the transparent plate 3b on the front side thereof, and the game area 4a is opened / closed by the opening / closing door 3. ..

The opening / closing door 3 has an audio output device 9 consisting of a speaker on the upper side of the window 3a, a frame lighting device 27 having a plurality of decorative lamps (LEDs), and a storage tray 5 (receiver) for storing game balls on the lower side of the window 3a. ) Is provided, and the storage tray 5 is provided with an effect button device 6A and a selection button device 6B that function as input devices for performing determination operations and selection operations related to various effects. Further, at the left end of the opening / closing door 3, an effect lever device 6C that functions as an input device for performing operations related to various effects is provided.

The audio output devices 9 are provided at two locations above the opening / closing door 3, and output BGM (background music), SE (sound effect), etc. to produce music and sound effects. Further, the plurality of decorative lamps (LEDs) of the frame lighting device 27 are provided on the peripheral portion of the window 3a, and the illumination is performed by changing the irradiation direction and emission color of the light of each of the plurality of decorative lamps (LEDs). Performs light emission production. Further, the frame lighting device 27 is a notification LED controlled to light / blink when an opening / closing door 3 is opened or a payout abnormality in which the game ball cannot be paid out from the payout device 100 (see FIG. 4) occurs. It is equipped with.

The effect button device 6A includes an effect button 6a capable of performing a decision operation (operation input) and a button operation effect, an effect button detection switch 6b (see FIG. 4) for detecting a pressing operation on the effect button 6a, and the effect button device 6A. A button drive motor 6c (see FIG. 4) for changing the effect button 6a into a normal state and a protruding state located above the normal state, and a vibration state in which the effect button 6a vibrates in a normal state and a predetermined mode. A button vibration motor 6d (see FIG. 4) for changing the effect button 6d and a button light emitting LED 6e (see FIG. 4) for changing the effect button 6a into a light emitting state and a light emitting state for emitting light in a predetermined mode are provided. By operating the effect button 6a in a predetermined operation mode, the player can input predetermined information to the game machine 1.

The effect button 6a has a normal state (non-protruding state) (FIG. 2 (a)), which is a normal operation position, and a projecting state (FIG. 2 (b)), which protrudes to an operation position above the normal state. The state at the time of detecting the pressing operation can be changed to the pressing state (FIG. 2 (c)) in which the pressing operation is moved downward from the normal state.

The normal state is shown in FIG. 2A, in which only the tip portion slightly protrudes upward from the surface around the storage dish 5.
The protruding state is shown in FIG. 2B, in which the storage dish 5 protrudes several times (about 7 to 10 times) upward from the surface around the storage dish 5.
In the pressed state shown in FIG. 2 (c), the pressing operation is detected by slightly moving downward from the surface around the storage plate 5.
The effect button device 6A has a structure in which the effect button 6a can be changed into a normal state, a protruding state, and a pressed state in which a pressed operation is detected. When the effect button 6a in the normal state or the protruding state is pressed and enters the pressed state, the pressed operation is detected, and then when the pressed operation is released, the pressed state returns to the normal state. The direction in which the effect button 6a moves between the position in the normal state, the position in the protruding state, and the position in which the pressing operation is detected (pressing position) is defined as the advancing / retreating direction of the effect button 6a.

The predetermined operation mode of the effect button 6a is "single hit" in which the effect button 6a is operated once from the position in the normal state or the protruding state to the pressed position, "long press" in which the effect button 6a is continuously operated to the pressed position, and the effect. It is classified as "continuous hitting" in which the button 6a is continuously operated a plurality of times from the position in the normal state to the pressed position. It should be noted that the effect button detection SW6b can detect any operation mode of "single hit", "long press", and "continuous hit". In the case of "long press", the duration of the long press operation is detected, and in the case of "continuous hit", the number of operations is detected.

The effect button 6a has a transparent member that can transmit light as a housing, and when the button light emitting LED 6e emits light in a predetermined color (white, blue, red, rainbow, etc.), the light of the predetermined color is emitted to the outside of the effect button 6a. The effect button 6a is illuminated (light-emitting) by being transmitted.

The effect button 6a can vibrate in a predetermined effect mode (vibration time, vibration intensity, vibration pattern, etc.) by the driving force of the button vibration motor 6d. The effect button 6a can be operated even when the button vibration motor 6d is vibrating.
When it is difficult for the player to visually determine whether or not the effect button 6a is vibrating, the player can confirm the presence or absence of vibration by touching the effect button 6a.

The selection button device 6B includes a cross key button 6f (hereinafter, cross key 6f) (up key button, down key button, right key button, left key button) as a selection button capable of performing operations such as selection operation. , A cross key detection switch 6g (see FIG. 4) for detecting the operation of the cross key 6f is provided, and the player can input predetermined information to the game machine 1 by operating the cross key 6f. ..

The effect lever device 6C defines the effect lever 6h capable of performing a determination operation (operation input) and the lever operation effect, the effect lever detection switch 6i for detecting the operation of the effect lever 6h, and the effect lever 6h as a normal state. A vibration motor 6j for changing to a vibrating state that vibrates in a mode, a lever light emitting LED 6k for changing a production lever 6h into a dimming state and a light emitting state that emits light in a predetermined mode, and a production lever 6h in a normal state and a normal state. A lever drive motor (not shown) is provided to change the state to a protruding state located above the state.

The staging lever device 6C has a structure in which the staging lever 6h can be changed into a normal state, a protruding state, and a tilted state.
The effect lever 6h has an operation rod that can be instructed and operated in multiple directions (for example, four directions of front, back, left and right, and eight directions including diagonal) by the player grasping and tilting the lever. A trigger button (not shown) is provided at a predetermined position of the operation culm (for example, a position where the index finger of the operator touches when the player grips the operation culm).

When the player grasps the operation culm with the operating hand and tilts it, and pushes and pulls the trigger button with a predetermined operating finger (for example, the index finger), the effect lever detection switch 6i tilts the operating culm and pushes and pulls the trigger button. When the operation is detected, predetermined information can be input to the control unit of the gaming machine 1.
A vibration motor 6j is built in the operation culm of the effect lever 6h, and there are cases where the operation culm vibrates when it is tilted and cases where it vibrates without tilting.

The effect lever 6h can be changed into a normal operating position (non-protruding state: FIG. 1) by the driving force of the lever drive motor and a protruding state protruding to the operating position above the normal state. ..

A firing handle 7 is attached to the lower right side of the storage plate 5. When the firing handle 7 is rotated, the game balls introduced at the firing position are fired from the storage plate 5, and when a plurality of game balls are stored in the storage plate 5, the plurality of game balls are approximately 0. It is fired continuously at 6 second intervals. The launched game ball is guided by the guide rail 8 and introduced into the upper part of the game area 4a. The launch of the game ball is temporarily stopped by the player operating the launch stop button (not shown) provided on the launch handle 7. A vibration motor that vibrates the launch handle 7 may be provided inside the launch handle 7 to vibrate the launch handle 7.

As shown in FIG. 1, in the game area 4a, in addition to a large number of obstacle nails K, a first starting port 10, a starting port device 11 having an opening / closing second starting port 11a, a gate 12, and an opening / closing type big prize A large winning opening device 13 having a opening 13a and a plurality of general winning openings 14 are provided in the arrangement shown in the figure so that a game ball can be entered (winning), respectively. As shown in FIG. 4, the first starting port 10, the gate 12, and the plurality of general winning openings 14 have, respectively, a first starting port detection switch 10a for detecting a game ball that has entered, a gate detection switch 12a, and a plurality of general winning openings 14. A general winning opening detection switch 14a is attached. In the embodiment, the terms "winning ball" and "winning" include "passing".

The start port device 11 opens and closes the second start port 11a, the opening / closing member 11b for opening / closing the second starting port 11a, the second starting port detection switch 11c for detecting the game ball winning in the second starting port 11a, and the opening / closing member 11b. The second starting port opening / closing solenoid 11d for driving is provided, and the second starting port 11a can operate in a closed state in which the game ball is difficult to win or cannot be won, and an open state in which the game ball is easy to win.

A winning port lamp NR (FIG. 4) for causing the periphery of the first starting port 10 and the second starting port 11a to emit light in a predetermined manner is provided between the first starting port 10 and the second starting port 11a. It is possible to produce light emission by emitting light from the winning opening lamp NR.

The large winning opening device 13 is a large winning opening 13a, an opening / closing member 13b for opening / closing the large winning opening 13a, a large winning opening detection switch 13c for detecting a game ball winning in the large winning opening 13a, and a large opening / closing member 13b. The winning opening opening / closing solenoid 13d is provided, and the large winning opening 13a can operate in a closed state in which the game ball is difficult or impossible to win, and an open state in which the game ball is easy to win.

In the game machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the player rotates the launch handle 7 to launch the game ball into the game area 4a, the game ball is launched by the rotation operation amount (rotation angle) of the launch handle 7. By adjusting the strength, it is possible to distinguish between so-called "left-handed" and "right-handed". In "left-handed", the game ball falls on the left game area 4a1 located on the left side of the center accessory 15, and in "right-handed", the game ball passes through the right-handed passage formed on the upper side of the center accessory 15. It moves to the right side gaming area 4a2 side located on the right side of the center accessory 15, and falls toward the downstream direction of the right side gaming area 4a2.

When a game ball launched into the game area 4a wins in any of a plurality of winning openings 10, 11a, 13a, 20a, 14, the winning openings 10, 11a, 13a, 20a, 14 for each winning opening of the game ball. A set number of game balls (several to ten or more) were paid out to the storage plate 5 as prize balls, and none of the plurality of winning openings 10, 11a, 13a, 20a, 14 was awarded. In this case, it is finally discharged to the outside of the game area 4a from the discharge port 28 formed in the most downstream portion of the game area 4a.

When the game ball wins in the starting openings 10 and 11a, a big hit lottery (special game determination) is performed, and when the game ball wins in the big hit lottery, a big hit game (special game) in which the big winning opening 13a opens occurs. When the game ball passes through the gate 12, a winning lottery is performed, and when the winning lottery is won, an auxiliary game is generated in which the second starting port 11a is opened in a predetermined manner.

A center accessory 15 is attached to the substantially center of the game board 4. The center accessory 15 is provided with a frame body (decorative frame body) 15a that restricts the entry of the game ball into the inside, and the frame body 15a is fitted and mounted in an opening (not shown) formed in the game board 4. A warp device 15b capable of introducing a game ball flowing down the game area 4a into the frame body 15a is provided on the left side portion of the frame body 15a. A center stage 15c on which the game ball can roll is provided at the lower part of the frame body 15a, and the game ball introduced inside the frame body 15a by the warp device 15b passes through the warp passage of the warp device 15b to the center stage 15c. It rolls at and flows down below the frame body 15a.

A first image display device 16 (main liquid crystal) composed of a liquid crystal display is provided on the central inner portion side of the effect space 15A defined inside the frame body 15a of the center accessory 15. On the upper side of the staging space 15A, there is a second image display device consisting of a first movable staging member 17A (staging character) imitating a "sword" and a liquid crystal display in a shape imitating the "signature" of the title of the game machine 1. A second movable staging member 17B (staging accessory) having 18 (sub liquid crystal display) is provided. The second movable effect member 17B is arranged in front of the first movable effect member 17A. Further, on the right end side of the staging space 15A, a third movable staging member 17C (staging accessory) imitating a "sword" having a size larger than the "sword" of the first movable staging member 17A is provided.

The first movable staging member 17A is composed of a sheath portion imitating a sheath and a blade portion housed in the sheath portion, and the blade portion can be moved in the left-right direction by being driven by a stepping motor. From the state where the blade is housed in the sheath, the blade can be moved to the left and the blade can be pulled out from the sheath.

The second movable effect member 17B can move in the vertical direction by being driven by a stepping motor, moves downward from the upper side of the effect space 15A, and appears on the front side of the screen of the image display device 16. It is possible to do.

The third movable staging member 17C is composed of a sheath portion imitating a sheath and a blade portion housed in the sheath portion, and the blade portion can be moved in the vertical direction by being driven by the board drive device 17. It is possible, and it is possible to perform a staging operation in which the blade portion is moved up and down from the state where the blade portion is housed in the sheath portion, and the blade portion is pulled out from the sheath portion. In FIG. 1, the blade portion is housed in the sheath portion.

Further, the third movable effect member 17C can tilt the blade portion with the lower end portion of the movable effect member 17C as a fulcrum by being driven by the panel drive device 17, and the blade portion is removed from the sheath portion. It is possible to perform an effect operation such as tilting toward the front side of the screen center region of the first image display device 16 and slashing the opponent with a sword.

Further, the third movable effect member 17C is driven by a stepping motor, and the blade portion can be tilted with the lower portion of the third movable effect member 17C as a fulcrum, and the image is displayed from the state where the blade portion is pulled out from the sheath portion 17. It is possible to perform an effect operation such as tilting toward the front side of the screen center area of the device 16 and slashing the opponent with a sword.

Further, the first movable effect member 17A, the second movable effect member 17B, and the third movable effect member 17C are each provided with a plurality of LEDs (light emitting units), and a predetermined mode is provided during standby or during execution of the effect operation. It is possible to perform a light emission effect in which the blade and logo emit light.

The first image display device 16 performs various effect displays according to the progress (development) of the game. As the effect display, a customer waiting effect performed while the special symbol variable display is not executed on the special symbol display described later, a variable effect that produces a special symbol variable display on the special symbol display, and a jackpot game are being executed. There is a big hit production etc. performed in.

On the screen of the first image display device 16, a variable display area (left side area, center area, right side area) for displaying three effect symbols 16a (left symbol, middle symbol, right symbol), and the progress of the variable effect. A mode display area or the like indicating the effect mode is formed.

The effect symbol 16a includes an identification unit consisting of code information of numbers or characters indicating "1" to "9" or "1" to "9", and a character image attached to the periphery (near) of the identification unit (nearby). For example, there is a staging pattern composed of a decorative part composed of predetermined decorative information (accompanying information) such as an animal character such as a cat or a dog) or a decorative frame image, and a staging pattern composed of only an identification part.

In the stop display of the effect symbol 16a, the effect symbol 16a is stopped for a predetermined time in a predetermined mode (missing mode, jackpot mode) indicating the result of the jackpot determination. The jackpot mode is a combination of the same staging symbols 16a such as "777", and the loss mode is another mode.

In the present embodiment, the mode of the variable display of the effect symbol 16a is scrolling in the vertical direction, but it may be scrolling in the horizontal direction, and switching or rotation (rotation) on the spot, etc. May be.

Further, during the execution of the variation effect including the variation display of the effect symbol 16a, various effect images (moving images) such as a background image and a character are displayed according to the result of the jackpot determination, so that the jackpot determination can be made. It is designed to increase the player's expectation of winning the result.

On the screen of the first image display device 16, the first hold icon display area 16b for displaying the number of first hold icons (for example, “◯”) corresponding to the first special figure hold number (U1), the second For the second hold icon display area 16c for displaying the number of second hold icons (for example, "●") corresponding to the special figure hold number (U2), and for variable display of the special symbol (effect symbol 16a) being executed. The variable icon display area 16d or the like for displaying the corresponding variable icon (for example, “⊚”) is formed.

Further, on the screen of the first image display device 16, the first reserved number display area 16e for displaying the first reserved number indicating the current first special symbol reserved number (U1) and the current second special symbol are displayed. The second hold number display area 16f for displaying the second hold number indicating the hold number (U2), the special symbol TZ which is variablely displayed corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol and the variable display of the effect symbol 16a are displayed. A special symbol display area for the purpose is formed.

The special symbol TZ is composed of only the identification unit consisting of the code information of the numbers "1" to "9", and is displayed in a reduced size smaller than the effect symbol 16a. The variable display of the special symbol TZ in the special symbol display area has a certain display mode (numbers are switched in order) during the period from the start of the variable display of the special symbol and the variable display of the staging symbol 16a to the stop display. It is continuously displayed in the display mode), and is always displayed in a visually recognizable state without disappearing from the screen or being shielded by the staging operation of the movable staging members 17A to 17C.
On the other hand, the variable display of the effect symbol 16a may become invisible from the screen as the effect progresses. The variable display of the special symbol corresponds to the variable display of the staging symbol 16a, and since it continues to be displayed in a visible state regardless of the progress of the staging, it also has a function as a variable display of the staging symbol.

Further, the display of the reserved numbers in the first and second reserved number display areas 16e and 16f is not obscured by the effect operation of the movable effect member 17 or disappears from the screen as in the special symbol, and is always visually recognized. Displayed as possible.

The first hold icon display area 16b is partitioned from the side closer to the variable icon display area 16d in the form of a first display unit, a second display unit, a third display unit, a fourth display unit, and the first display unit. On the fourth display unit, the number of first hold icons corresponding to the first special figure hold number (U1) is displayed.

The second hold icon display area 16c is partitioned from the side closer to the variable icon display area 16d in the form of a first display unit, a second display unit, a third display unit, a fourth display unit, and the first display unit. A number of second hold icons corresponding to the second special figure hold number (U2) is displayed on the fourth display unit.

The second image display device 18 can be operated in a predetermined direction by a panel drive device 17 composed of a solenoid, a motor, or the like.
Specifically, between the standby position (first position) located near the upper end of the first image display device 16 and the staging position (second position) located near the center of the first image display device 16. By moving (up, down) in the vertical direction, the movement effect is performed. The moving direction of the second image display device 18 may be the left-right direction or the front-back direction, or the moving effect may be performed by operating the effect button 6a.

A first game information display device 19 for displaying game information regarding the progress of the game is provided on the lower left outside the game area 4a and outside the guide rail 8 on the outside of the game board 4.
As shown in FIG. 3A, the first game information display device 19 has a plurality of LEDs (light emitting units) arranged in four inclined rows along the left end and the lower end of the outer guide rail 8 and the game board 4. have. These plurality of (32) LEDs (light emitting units) include a first special symbol first display 19a, a second special symbol first display 19b, a normal symbol first display 19c, and a first special symbol hold first display. Instrument 19d, 2nd special symbol hold 1st display 19e, normal symbol hold 1st display 19f, high probability game state display 19g, time saving game state display 19h, round number display 19i, right-handed 1st display 19j, the status confirmation display 19k is configured.
As shown in FIG. 4, the first game information display device 19 is controlled by the main control board 110.

The first special symbol 1st display 19a is composed of 6 LEDs (light emitting units), and a big hit lottery for the 1st special symbol is performed on condition that a game ball wins (wins) in the 1st starting port 10. Then, in the first special symbol 1st display 19a, the variation display of the 1st special symbol in which 6 LEDs (light emitting units) blink at predetermined intervals or in order is performed, and the result of the jackpot lottery is shown after the lapse of a predetermined time. The stop display of the first special symbol in which the LED (light emitting unit) is lit in the combination (big hit mode, lost mode) is performed, and the result of the jackpot lottery of the first special symbol is notified. In the case of a big hit, the type of big hit, which will be described later, can be identified by the combined lighting display of the six LEDs.

The second special symbol 1st display 19b is composed of 6 LEDs (light emitting units), and a big hit lottery for the 2nd special symbol is performed on condition that a game ball wins (wins) in the 2nd starting port 11a. Then, on the second special symbol 1st display 19b, 6 LEDs (light emitting units) blink at predetermined intervals or in order to perform variable display of the 2nd special symbol, and the result of the jackpot lottery after a predetermined time elapses. The stop display of the second special symbol in which the LED (light emitting unit) is lit in the combination indicating the above (big hit mode, lost mode) is performed, and the result of the big hit lottery of the second special symbol is notified. In the case of a big hit, the type of big hit, which will be described later, can be identified by the combined lighting display of the six LEDs.

In the present embodiment, the "big hit" means a state in which it is decided to execute the big hit game in the big hit lottery of the first special symbol or the big hit lottery of the second special symbol. The "big hit game" is an opening game, a round game in which the big winning opening 13a is converted from a closed state to an open state in a predetermined mode, and a predetermined number of round games (for example, 4 times, 16 times, etc.) are completed. It means to perform an ending game that indicates the end of the jackpot game.

Although the maximum number of open times and the maximum opening time of the large winning opening 13a in each round game are predetermined, a predetermined number of game balls are set in the large winning opening 13a even before the maximum number of opening times and the maximum opening time are reached. When (for example, 9 pieces) wins, one round game ends. In this embodiment, it is possible to generate any of a plurality of types of jackpot games having different degrees of advantage to the player.

The normal symbol 1st display 19c is composed of three LEDs (light emitting units), and when a winning lottery for the normal symbol, which is performed on condition that the game ball passes through the gate 12, is performed, the normal symbol 1st display 19c Then, a variable display of a normal symbol in which three LEDs (light emitting units) blink at predetermined intervals or in order is performed, and after a predetermined time elapses, the LEDs are lit in a combination (hit mode, loss mode) indicating the result of the winning lottery. The stop display of the normal symbol is performed and the result of the winning lottery of the normal symbol is notified. In the case of winning, the type of winning, which will be described later, can also be determined by the combined lighting display of the three LEDs.

The first special symbol hold 1 display 19d is composed of two LEDs (light emitting units), and is the number of first special symbol hold stored when a game ball wins in the first start port 10. It is for displaying the number of special figure reservations, and is lit or blinks in a mode indicating the number of first special drawing reservations. It should be noted that the first special figure hold is stored up to four, but may be less than four.

The second special symbol hold 1 display 19e is composed of two LEDs (light emitting units), and is the number of second special symbol hold stored when the game ball wins in the second start opening 11a. It is for displaying the number of special figure reservations, and is lit or blinks in a mode indicating the number of second special figure reservations. It should be noted that the second special figure hold is stored up to four, but may be less than four.

The normal symbol hold first display 19f is composed of two LEDs (light emitting units), and is for displaying the number of normal symbol hold, which is the number of normal symbol hold stored when the game ball passes through the gate 12. It lights up or blinks in a manner indicating the number of reserved figures. It should be noted that, although the maximum number of reserved drawings can be stored up to four, the number may be less than four.

Regarding the number of 1st special symbol hold, 2nd special symbol hold number and normal figure hold number, 1st special symbol hold 1st display 19d, 2nd special symbol hold 1st display 19e, normal symbol hold 1st display 19f Both of the two LEDs (light emitting parts) are turned off and the number of holds is "0", only one LED (light emitting part) is turned on and the number of holds is "1", and so on. Only one LED (light emitting part) is lit and the number of hold is "2", both LEDs (light emitting part) are lit and the number of hold is "3", and both LEDs (light emission) Part) flashes to notify that the number of pending numbers is "4".

The high-probability gaming state display 19g is composed of one LED (light emitting unit), and is for displaying that the high-probability gaming state is in the high-probability gaming state described later, and when the high-probability gaming state is reached. The LED (light emitting unit) starts lighting, the lighting display of the LED (light emitting unit) continues during the high-probability gaming state, and the LED (light emitting unit) turns off when the high-probability gaming state ends.

The time-saving game state display 19h is composed of one LED (light emitting unit), and is for displaying that the time-saving game state is in the time-saving game state (high-probability time-saving game state or low-probability game state). When the time-saving game state is reached, the LED (light emitting unit) starts lighting, the LED (light emitting unit) continues to light during the time-saving game state, and the LED (light emitting unit) turns off when the time-saving gaming state ends.

In the high-probability time-saving game state, both the LEDs (light emitting units) of the high-probability game state display 19a and the time-saving game state display 19h are turned on. In the low-probability time-saving game state, the LED (light emitting unit) of the time-saving game state display 19h lights up. In the low-probability non-time-saving game state, the LEDs (light emitting units) of the high-probability game state display 10a and the time-saving game state display 19h do not light up.

The round number display 19i is composed of seven LEDs (light emitting units), and is for displaying the number of rounds when a big hit state (special game state) occurs, and the number of rounds is set in a predetermined mode at the start of the big hit game. The LED (light emitting unit) starts lighting at, the LED (light emitting unit) continues to light during the jackpot game, and the LED (light emitting unit) turns off at the end of the jackpot game. For example, if the number of rounds is 16 jackpot games, the 4th to 6th LEDs (light emitting parts) from the top light up, and if the number of rounds is 4 jackpot games, the 1st and 3rd from the top. The sixth and sixth LEDs (light emitting parts) light up. That is, the number of rounds is displayed by a combination of turning on and off each of the seven LEDs (light emitting units) predetermined for each number of rounds.

The right-handed first display 19j is composed of one LED (light emitting unit), and is for displaying whether or not the so-called “right-handed” state of launching a game ball into the right game area 4a2 is recommended. The LED is lit when the game state is "short-time game state", or when a jackpot game (special game) is being performed, that is, when "right-handed" is recommended. However, when right-handed is not recommended (that is, so-called "left-handed" is recommended), the LED is turned off.

The right-handed first display 19j starts lighting the LED (light emitting part) at the start of the opening effect in the jackpot game regardless of the type of jackpot (probability variation jackpot, normal jackpot), and the LED (light emitting part) is started during the jackpot game. The light emitting unit) is continuously lit, and the LED (light emitting unit) is turned off when the high-probability time-saving game state or the low-probability time-saving game state, which shifts after the end of the big hit game, is completed. In addition, if the jackpot lottery is won during the high-probability time-saving game state or the low-probability time-saving game state, the LED (light emitting unit) continues to light. Further, if the state does not shift to the high-probability time-saving game state or the low-probability time-saving game state after the big hit game, the LED (light emitting unit) is turned off after the big hit game is completed. That is, once the LED (light emitting unit) is turned on, the right-handed first display 19j continues to light the LED (light emitting unit) until the gaming state in which the right-handed LED (light emitting unit) is to be turned on ends. ..

The status confirmation display 19k is composed of one LED (light emitting unit), and is for indicating that it is set to the setting change mode described later or the setting confirmation mode described later, and is set to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. When the transition is made, the LED starts to light up, and when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends, the LED turns off. As described above, since the status confirmation display 19k indicating that the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is set is provided on the front surface (front surface) of the gaming machine 1, the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is set. It is possible to easily confirm whether or not it is. The status confirmation display 19k may be installed in any place on the front surface (front surface) of the gaming machine 1.

Further, in the present embodiment, the display is performed in the same display mode (lighting display) regardless of whether the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is set, but which mode is set? May be displayed recognizable. For example, when the setting change mode is set, the status confirmation display 19k may be lit and displayed, and when the setting confirmation mode is set, the status confirmation display 19k may be blinked. And vice versa.

Further, in the present embodiment, the status confirmation display 19k is provided as a dedicated display to indicate that the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is set, but it may also be used as another display. For example, in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, the first special symbol 1st display 19a, the 2nd special symbol 1st display 19b, the 1st special symbol hold 1st display 19d, and the 2nd special symbol hold 1st. Since the display 19e, the normal symbol hold first display 19f, the status display 19g, 19h, the round number display 19i, etc. are turned off, even if one or more LEDs of these displays are turned on. good.

As shown in FIG. 1, game information relating to the progress of the game is outside the game area 4a and below the first game information display device 19 at the lower left outside the guide rail 8 outside the game board 4. A second game information display device 20 for displaying the above is provided.

As shown in FIG. 3B, the second game information display device 20 has a plurality of (10) LEDs (light emitting units) arranged in a triangular shape. These plurality of LEDs (light emitting units) include a first special symbol second display 20a, a second special symbol second display 20b, a normal symbol second display 20c, a first special symbol holding second display 20d, and a first. 2 The special symbol holding second display 20e, the normal symbol holding second display 20f, and the right-handed second display 20g are configured.
As shown in FIG. 4, the second game information display device 20 is controlled by the staging control board 130.

The first special symbol second display 20a is composed of one LED (light emitting unit), and the LED (light emitting unit) blinks as the first special symbol changes in the first special symbol first display 19a. Is started, and the LED (light emitting unit) continues blinking during the variable display of the first special symbol. Then, when the fluctuation of the first special symbol is stopped on the first special symbol first display 19a, the LED is turned on or off to notify the result of the jackpot lottery of the first special symbol.
When the jackpot lottery of the first special symbol is won, the LED (light emitting unit) is lit, and the LED (light emitting unit) continues to be lit until the next variation display is started after the end of the jackpot game.
If the first special symbol is lost in the big hit lottery, the LED (light emitting unit) is turned off, and the LED (light emitting unit) continues to be turned off until the next variable display is started.

The second special symbol second display 20b is composed of one LED (light emitting unit), and the LED (light emitting unit) blinks as the second special symbol changes in the second special symbol first display 19b. Is started, and the LED (light emitting part) keeps blinking during the variable display of the second special symbol. Then, when the fluctuation of the second special symbol is stopped on the second special symbol first display 19b, the LED is turned on or off to notify the result of the jackpot lottery of the second special symbol.
When the second special symbol jackpot lottery is won, the LED (light emitting unit) is lit, and the LED (light emitting unit) continues to be lit until the next variable display is started after the jackpot game is completed.
If the second special symbol is lost in the big hit lottery, the LED (light emitting unit) is turned off, and the LED (light emitting unit) continues to be turned off until the next variable display is started.

The display of the first special symbol 2nd display 20a or the 2nd special symbol 2nd display 20b is displayed in the center area of the first effect symbol 16a displayed in the left side area of the screen of the first image display device 16. Since it is the fourth effect symbol following the displayed second effect symbol 16a and the third effect symbol 16a displayed in the right area area, it may be called the fourth effect symbol.
The fluctuation start timing and fluctuation stop timing of the first and second special symbol second displays 20a and 20b are synchronized with the fluctuation start timing and fluctuation stop timing of the effect symbol 16a displayed on the first image display device 16. ing.

The effect control board 130 receives a special symbol variation pattern designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 when the variation display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol 1st display 19a is started, and the effect control board Display control data is created based on the setting of special symbol variation display data in the effect control unit 130 m of 130, and the created display control data is output to the second game state display device 20, so that the first The effect control board 130 receives the first special symbol confirmation command transmitted from the main control board 110 when the variation display on the special symbol second display 20a is started and the variation display of the first special symbol is stopped. , Display control data is created based on the setting of the special symbol stop display data, and the created display control data is output to the second game state display device 20 to display the first special symbol second. The fluctuation of the vessel 20a stops.
The display mode of the second special symbol second display 20b is also the same as the above-mentioned display mode of the first special symbol second display 20a.

In addition, the mode (lighting or extinguishing) of the special symbol 1st display 19a, 19b when the special symbol is stopped is determined according to the special symbol variation pattern designation command, and the effect control is performed according to the end of the variation display of the special symbol. The board 130 may be stopped in a predetermined display mode of the staging pattern.

The normal symbol 2nd display 20c is composed of one LED (light emitting unit), and the LED (light emitting unit) starts blinking as the normal symbol changes in the normal symbol 1st display 19c, and the normal symbol starts blinking. The LED (light emitting part) keeps blinking during the fluctuation display of. Then, the LED turns on or off as the fluctuation of the normal symbol 1st display 19c stops, and the result of the winning lottery of the normal symbol is notified.
When the winning lottery of the normal symbol is won, the LED (light emitting unit) is lit, and the LED (light emitting unit) continues to be lit until the next variation display is started after the end of the winning game.
If the lottery for winning a normal symbol is lost, the LED (light emitting unit) is turned off, and the LED (light emitting unit) continues to be turned off until the next variable display is started.

The effect control board 130 receives a command for specifying a normal symbol variation pattern transmitted from the main control board 110 when the variation display of the normal symbol on the normal symbol first display 19c is started, and the effect control of the effect control board 130 is performed. Display control data is created based on the setting of the normal symbol variation display data in the unit 130 m, and the created display control data is output to the normal symbol second display 20c, so that the normal symbol second display is displayed. When the variation display of 20c is started and the variation display of the normal symbol is stopped, the effect control board 130 receives the normal symbol confirmation command transmitted from the main control board 110, and the effect control unit 130m of the effect control board 130 receives the normal symbol confirmation command. Display control data is created based on the setting of the normal symbol stop display data, and the created display control data is output to the second game state display device 20, so that the normal symbol second display 20c fluctuates. Stops.

The first special symbol holding second display 20d is composed of two LEDs (light emitting units) like the above-mentioned first special symbol holding first display 19d, and a game ball wins (wins) in the first starting port 10. The purpose is to display the number of 1st special figure reservations, which is the number of 1st special figure reservations stored in the case of a ball), and is lit or blinks in an manner indicating the number of 1st special figure reservations. It should be noted that the first special figure hold is stored up to four, but may be less than four.

Regarding the first special figure hold number, both of the two LEDs (light emitting part) are turned off and the hold number is "0", and only one LED (light emitting part) is turned on and the hold number is "1". That is, only the other LED (light emitting part) is lit and the number of hold is "2", and both LEDs (light emitting part) are lit and the number of hold is "3". Both LEDs (light emitting units) are blinked to indicate that the number of holds is "4".

The effect control board 130 receives a special symbol storage designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 when the number of first special symbol hold increases or decreases, and the effect control unit 130 m of the effect control board 130 receives the first special symbol hold display data. Display control data is created based on the setting of, and the created display control data is output to the second game status display device 20 to display (light up) the first special symbol hold second display 20d. , Blinking or turning off) is performed.

The display (lighting, blinking) timing and the erasure (off) timing of the first special symbol hold 2nd display 20d are synchronized with the display timing and the erasure timing of the 1st hold icon displayed on the 1st image display device 16. , It is synchronized with the numerical value change timing of the first reserved number display area 16e.

The second special symbol holding second display 20e is composed of two LEDs (light emitting units) like the above-mentioned second special symbol holding first display 19e, and a game ball wins (wins) in the second starting port 11a. It is for displaying the number of the second special figure hold, which is the number of the second special figure hold stored in the case of a ball), and is lit or blinks in a mode indicating the number of the second special figure hold. It should be noted that the second special figure hold is stored up to four, but may be less than four.

Regarding the second special figure hold number, both of the two LEDs (light emitting part) are turned off and the hold number is "0", and only one LED (light emitting part) is turned on and the hold number is "1". That is, only the other LED (light emitting part) is lit and the number of hold is "2", and both LEDs (light emitting part) are lit and the number of hold is "3". Both LEDs (light emitting units) are blinked to indicate that the number of holds is "4".

The effect control board 130 receives a special symbol storage designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 when the number of second special symbol hold increases or decreases, and the effect control unit 130 m sets the second special symbol hold display data. Display control data is created based on the above, and the created display control data is output to the second game status display device 20 to display (light, blink or turn off) the second special symbol hold second display 20e. Is done.

The display (lighting, blinking) timing and the erasure (off) timing of the second special symbol hold second display 20e are synchronized with the display timing and the erasure timing of the second hold icon displayed on the first image display device 16. , It is synchronized with the numerical change timing of the second reserved number display area 16f.

The normal symbol hold second display 20f is composed of two LEDs (light emitting units) like the above-mentioned normal symbol hold first display 19f, and is stored when the game ball passes through the gate 12. It is for displaying the number of reserved figures, which is the number of reserved figures, and is lit or blinks in a manner indicating the number of reserved figures. It should be noted that, although the maximum number of reserved drawings can be stored up to four, the number may be less than four.

The effect control board 130 receives the normal symbol storage designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 when the number of normal symbol hold increases or decreases, and displays based on the fact that the normal symbol hold display data is set by the effect control unit 130 m. The control data is created, and the created display control data is output to the second game state display device 20, so that the normal symbol hold second display 20f is displayed (lit, blinked, or turned off).

Regarding the number of holdings in the normal figure, both of the two LEDs (light emitting part) are turned off and the number of holdings is "0", and only one of the LEDs (light emitting part) is turned on and the number of holdings is "1". That, only the other LED (light emitting part) is lit and the number of holdings is "2", and both LEDs (light emitting part) are lit and the number of holdings is "3", both of them. The LED (light emitting unit) flashes to indicate that the number of holds is "4".

The right-handed second display 20g is composed of one LED (light emitting unit), and when the gaming state becomes the "high probability time-saving gaming state" or the "low-probability time-saving gaming state", the second starting port 11a is set in the right gaming area 4a2. Since "right-handed" is recommended due to the board structure provided with, the LED starts to light up and continues to light up until the high-probability time-saving game state or the low-probability time-saving game state ends. Then, when the gaming state is the "low probability non-time saving gaming state", the LED does not light because "left-handed" is recommended due to the board structure provided with the first starting port 10 in the left gaming area 4a1. ..

Specifically, the effect control board 130 receives a game state designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 when controlling a game in a low-probability time-saving game state or a high-probability time-saving game state, and the effect control unit 130m strikes right. A display control command is created based on the display data being set, and the created display control command is output to the second game status display device 20, so that the display of the right-handed second display 20g is started. , The effect control board 130 receives the game state designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 when the game state is changed, and the game state is not the low-probability time-saving game state or the high-probability time-saving game state in the effect control unit 130 m. When it is determined that the right-handed erasure data is set, the display control data is created, and the created display control data is output to the second game status display device 20, so that the right-handed second display 20 g is displayed. To finish.

When the right-handed second display 20g is in the "big hit game state", the LED is turned on because the "right-handed" state is recommended due to the board structure provided with the big winning opening 13a in the right side game area 4a2. The LED continues to light until the jackpot game state ends.

Specifically, when the jackpot game (opening) is started, the staging control board 130 receives the opening designation command transmitted from the main control board 110, and the staging control unit 130m sets the right-handed display data. When a display control command is created based on the above, and the created display control command is output to the second game status display device 20, the display of the right-handed second display 20 g is started and the game status is changed. The staging control board 130 receives the game state designation command transmitted from the main control board 110, and the staging control unit 130 m determines that the game state is not a low-probability time-saving game state, a high-probability game state, or a jackpot game state. The right-handed erasure data is set, the display control data is created, and the created display control data is output to the second game status display device 20, so that the display of the right-handed second display 20g is terminated.

Here, there is a notation of "right-handed" in the vicinity (upper side) of the right-handed second display 20g, and "right-handed" is recommended when the LED (light emitting part) of the right-handed second display 20g lights up. It is clearly shown that it is in the state of being. Therefore, the right-handed display is easier for the player to see than the right-handed first display 19j of the first game information display device 19 in which nothing is written.

The second game information display device 20 may be provided closer to the first image display device 16 than the first game information display device 19. In this case, since the second game information display device 20 is in a prominent position with respect to the player, the second game information display device 20 is easier to see than the first game information display device 19.

(Control configuration of gaming machine 1)
Next, the control configuration of the gaming machine 1 will be specifically described. FIG. 4 is a block diagram of the entire gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment.

The control configuration of the present embodiment includes a main control board 110 that comprehensively controls the progress (basic operation) of the game, and a payout control that controls the payout of the game ball based on the reception of the payout control command from the main control board 110. The board 120, the staging control board 130 that controls the staging related to the game based on the reception of the staging control command from the main control board 110, and the power supply board that supplies power to the main control board 110, the payout control board 120, and the staging control board 130. It has 160.

The communication between the main control board 110 and the payout control board 120 is configured so that commands can be transmitted and received in both directions, and the communication between the main control board 110 and the staging control board 130 is controlled by the staging control board 110. It is configured so that commands can be sent to the board 130 in only one direction.

The main control unit 110A of the main control board 110 includes a main CPU 110a for performing arithmetic processing, a main ROM 110b in which a game control program and the like are stored, a main RAM 110c serving as a work area during arithmetic processing, and an input / output port.

The input / output ports of the main control board 110 include a general winning opening detection switch 14a, a gate detection switch 12a, a first starting opening detection switch 10a, a second starting opening detection switch 11c, a second starting opening opening / closing solenoid 11d, and a large winning opening. Detection switch 13c, prize opening opening / closing solenoid 13d, magnetic detection sensor 58a, radio wave detection sensor 58b, RAM clear switch 58c, setting key switch 58d, out ball detection switch 58e, first special symbol first display 19a, second special Symbol 1st display 19b, normal symbol 1st display 19c, 1st special symbol hold 1st display 19d, 2nd special symbol hold 1st display 19e, normal symbol hold 1st display 19f, high probability gaming state A display 19g, a time-saving game status display 19h, a round number display 19i, a right-handed first display 19j, a status confirmation display 19k, a game information output terminal board 90, a payout control board 120, and an effect control board 130 are connected. ing.

The main CPU 110a receives the operation clock from the crystal oscillator, reads out the game control program stored in the main RAM 110b, and performs arithmetic processing related to the game while utilizing the main RAM 110c as a work area. Thereby, in order to control the control process according to the detection signal from various input devices (detection switch, detection sensor, etc.) and various output devices (solenoid, various displays 19a to 19k of the first game information display device 19, etc.). Control processing, control processing for transmitting and receiving various control commands, control processing for transmitting game information to the outside of the game machine 1 (hall computer, etc.) via the game information output terminal plate 90, and the like.

The information display 113 connected to the main control board 110 is composed of four 7-segment displays for displaying performance information and set values that enable the actual performance of the gaming machine 1 to be grasped. Then, the identification segment for displaying the identification information indicating the type (data type) of the performance information is configured by the two 7-segment displays, and the set value and the numerical value of the performance information are shown by the remaining two 7-segment displays. A numerical segment for displaying numerical information is configured.

The payout control board 120 includes a payout control unit 121 that drives the payout device 100 to control the payout of the game ball, and a launch control unit 122 that drives the launcher 26 to control the launch of the game ball.
The payout control unit 121 includes a payout CPU 121a that performs arithmetic processing, a payout ROM 121b in which a payout program and the like are stored, a payout RAM 121c that serves as a work area during arithmetic processing, an input / output port, and the like.

The input / output port of the payout control unit 121 includes an open / close detection switch 31a of the opening / closing door 3, a saucer full detection switch 32a, a payout ball detection switch 100a for detecting a game ball to be paid out from the payout device 100, and a game from the payout device 100. A payout motor 100b for paying out the balls and a ball presence detection switch 101a for detecting that the game balls are stored in the game ball storage unit 101 are connected.

The payout CPU 121a receives the operation clock from the crystal oscillator, reads out the payout control program stored in the payout ROM 121b, and performs arithmetic processing related to the payout of the game ball while utilizing the payout RAM 121c as a work area. As a result, control processing for paying out the game ball from the payout device 100 in response to the payout control command from the main control board 110, control processing for transmitting a command based on the result of the arithmetic processing to the main control board 110, and the like are performed. conduct.

The launch control unit 122 includes a control circuit, an input / output port, and the like. A ball feed solenoid 43, a touch sensor 7a, a firing volume 7b, a firing solenoid 26a, and the like are connected to the input / output ports of the firing control unit 122.

When the launch control unit 122 detects that the player's hand is touching the launch handle 7 by the touch signal input from the touch sensor 7a, the launch control unit 122 allows the ball feed solenoid 43 and the launch solenoid 26a to be energized and launches. When it is detected that the rotation angle of the firing handle 7 has changed due to the detection signal from the volume 7b, the ball feed solenoid 43 is driven and the firing solenoid has a firing strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the firing handle 7. The 26a is driven to launch a game ball (99.9 pieces / minute).

The staging control board 130 displays an image based on the reception of the staging control unit 130m from the staging control unit 130m and the staging control unit 130m that comprehensively controls the progress of the staging based on the reception of the staging control command from the main control board 110. Image control unit 140 that controls the audio output, and lamp control that controls various light emitting members (LEDs, etc.) and various drive sources (solders, motors, etc.) based on the reception of the effect control command from the effect control unit 130 m. The part 150 is provided.

The effect control unit 130m includes a sub CPU 130a that performs arithmetic processing, a sub ROM 130b that stores an effect control program, a sub RAM 130c that serves as a work area during arithmetic processing, and an input / output port.
The input / output port of the effect control unit 130 m has an effect button detection switch 6b, a cross key detection switch 6 g, an effect lever detection switch 6i, a first special symbol second display 20a, a second special symbol second display 20b, and normal. The symbol 2nd display 20c, the 1st special symbol holding 2nd display 20d, the 2nd special symbol 2nd display 20e, the normal symbol holding 2nd display 20f, and the right-handed 2nd display 20g are connected.

The sub CPU 130a of the staging control unit 130m receives an operation clock from the crystal oscillator, reads out the staging control program stored in the sub ROM 130b, and performs arithmetic processing related to the staging while utilizing the sub RAM 130c as a work area. As a result, control processing for determining the effect mode of the variation effect, control process for transmitting the effect control command based on the determination result to the image control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and various input devices (detection switches, etc.) Control processing according to the detection signal of the above, control processing for controlling various output devices (lighting device, motor, various indicators 20a to 20g of the second game information display device 20, etc.) are performed.

(Structure of image control unit)
Here, the configuration of the image control unit 140 will be described with reference to FIG.
FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the image control unit 140.
The image control unit 140 controls the image display of the image display devices 16 and 18 and the sound of the sound output device 9, so that the control CPU 141, the control RAM 142, the control ROM 143, the CGROM 144, the crystal oscillator 145, the VRAM 146, and the VDP (Video Display Processor) ) 200 (drawing control unit) is provided. The VDP 200 includes a voice control circuit 300 including a voice ROM including a voice control unit (voice LSI) for controlling the voice output in the gaming machine 1.

The general CPU 141 instructs the VDP 200 to display the image data stored in the CGROM 144 on the image display devices 16 and 18 based on the effect pattern designation command to be described later received from the effect control unit 130 m. Such an instruction is given by setting data in the control register 201 of the VDP 200 and outputting a display list composed of drawing control commands.
Further, when the integrated CPU 141 receives the V blank interrupt signal or the drawing end signal from the VDP 200, the integrated CPU 141 performs interrupt processing as appropriate.

The control CPU 141 also instructs the voice control circuit 300 included in the VDP 200 to output the music or voice based on the predetermined voice data to the voice output device 9 based on the effect pattern designation command received from the effect control unit 130 m. ..
The control RAM 142 is built in the control CPU 141, functions as a work area for data during arithmetic processing of the control CPU 141, and temporarily stores the data read from the control ROM 143.

Further, the control ROM 143 is composed of a mask ROM, and is used to generate a control processing program of the control CPU 141, a symbol arrangement information in which the symbol number of the effect symbol 16a and the type of the effect symbol 16a are associated with each other, and a display list. A display list generation program, animation pattern information for displaying an animation of an effect pattern, animation scene information, etc. are stored.

The animation pattern is referred to when displaying the animation of the production pattern, and stores the combination of the animation scene information included in the production pattern, the display order of each animation scene information, and the like. In addition, information such as wait frames (display time), target data (sprite identification number, transfer source address, etc.), parameters (sprite display position, transfer destination address, etc.), drawing method, etc. are stored in the animation scene information. is doing.

The CGROM 144 is composed of a flash memory, EEPROM, EPROM, a mask ROM, etc., and compresses and stores image data (sprites, movies), etc., which are a collection of pixel information in a predetermined range of images (for example, 32 × 32 pixels). ing. The pixel information is composed of color number information for designating a color number for each pixel and an α value indicating the transparency of an image. Further, the CGROM 144 stores the palette data in which the color number information for designating the color number and the display color information for actually displaying the color are associated with each other without compression. The CGROM 144 may be configured to compress only a part of the image data without compressing all the image data. Further, as the movie compression method, various known compression methods such as MPEG4 can be used. In addition, a large amount of voice data is also stored in the CGROM 144.

The crystal oscillator 145 outputs a pulse signal to the clock generation circuit 205 of the VDP 200, and by dividing the pulse signal, the system clock and image display devices 16 and 18 for the VDP 200 to control the clock generation circuit 205. A synchronization signal or the like for synchronizing with is generated.

The VRAM 146 is composed of an SRAM having a high speed of writing or reading image data. Further, the VRAM 146 draws or displays an image, a display list storage area 146a for temporarily storing the display list output from the control CPU 141, and an expansion storage area 146b for storing the image data expanded by the expansion circuit 206. It has a first frame buffer 146c and a second frame buffer 146d for the purpose. Palette data is also stored in the VRAM 146. The first and second frame buffers 146c and 146d alternately switch between the "drawing frame buffer" and the "display frame buffer" at each start of drawing.

The VDP 200 is a so-called image processor, and is based on an instruction from the control CPU 141 to read image data from any of the first and second frame buffers 146c and 146d (display frame buffer), and based on the read image data. , A video signal (RGB signal, etc.) is generated and output to the image display devices 16 and 18. Further, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the VDP 200 is not only an image processor but also has an audio output function.

The VDP200 includes a control register 201, a CG bus I / F202, a CPUI / F203, a clock generation circuit 205, an extension circuit 206, a drawing circuit 207, a display circuit 208, a memory controller 209, and a voice control circuit 300. And have.

The control register 201 is a register for the VDP 200 to control drawing and display, and drawing control and display control are performed by writing and reading data to the control register 201. The control CPU 141 can write and read data to and from the control register 201 via the CPUI / F203.
The control register 201 includes a system control register that makes basic settings necessary for the VDP 200 to operate, a data transfer register that makes settings necessary for data transfer, and drawing that makes settings for drawing control. There are 6 types of registers, a bus interface register that makes settings necessary for bus access, an extension register that makes settings necessary for decompressing compressed images, and a display register that makes settings for display control. It has a register.

The CG bus I / F202 is an interface circuit for communication with the CGROM 144, and image data from the CGROM 144 is input to the VDP 200 via the CG bus I / F202.
Further, the CPUI / F203 is an interface circuit for communication with the control CPU 141, and the control CPU 141 outputs a display list to the VDP200, accesses a control register, and various types from the VDP200 via the CPUI / F203. The control CPU 141 inputs an interrupt signal.

The data transfer circuit 204 transfers data between various devices.
Specifically, data transfer between the control CPU 141 and VRAM 146, data transfer between CGROM 144 and VRAM 146, and data transfer between various storage areas (including frame buffers) of VRAM 146 are performed.
The clock generation circuit 205 inputs a pulse signal from the crystal oscillator 145 and generates a system clock that determines the arithmetic processing speed of the VDP 200. Further, a clock for generating a synchronization signal is generated, and the synchronization signal is output to the image display devices 16 and 18 via the display circuit 208.

The decompression circuit 206 is a circuit for decompressing the image data compressed in the CGROM 144, and stores the decompressed image data in the expansion storage area 146b.
The drawing circuit 207 is a circuit that performs sequence control by a display list composed of drawing control commands.
The display circuit 208 generates an RGB signal (analog signal) indicating the color data of the image as a video signal from the image data (digital signal) stored in the "display frame buffer" in the VRAM 146, and the generated video signal (the generated video signal). This is a circuit that outputs (RGB signals) to the image display devices 16 and 18. Further, the display circuit 208 also outputs synchronization signals (vertical synchronization signal, horizontal synchronization signal, etc.) for synchronizing the image display devices 16 and 18 to the image display devices 16 and 18.
In the present embodiment, as the video signal, the RGB signal obtained by converting the digital signal into an analog signal is output to the image display devices 16 and 18, but the video signal may be output as the digital signal.
The memory controller 209 controls to switch between the "drawing frame buffer" and the "display frame buffer" when the control CPU 141 gives an instruction to switch the frame buffer.

The voice control circuit 300 reads a predetermined program based on the command transmitted from the effect control board 130, and controls the voice output in the voice output device 9.
The voice control circuit 300 outputs music or voice using the voice data stored in the CGROM 144. In this case, the CGROM 144 includes a sound source ROM for storing audio data. The voice control circuit 300 is not included in the VDP 200 and may be independently provided in the image control unit 140.

As shown in FIG. 4, the lamp control unit 150 includes a lamp CPU 150a that performs arithmetic processing, a lamp ROM 150b that stores a lamp control program, a lamp RAM 150c that serves as a work area during arithmetic processing, and an input / output port. ..
A panel drive device 17, a panel lighting device 23, a frame lighting device 27, a button drive motor 6c, a button vibration motor 6d, and a button light emitting LED 6e are connected to the input / output ports of the lamp control base 150.

The lamp CPU 150a receives an operation clock from the crystal oscillator, reads out a lamp control program stored in the lamp ROM 150b, and performs arithmetic processing related to light emission effect and accessory effect while utilizing the lamp RAM 150c as a work area. As a result, the panel drive device 17 (movable effect members 17A to 17C), the panel lighting device 23, the frame lighting device 27, the button drive motor 6c, the button vibration motor 6d, the button light emitting LED 6e, the lever vibration motor 6j, and the lever light emitting Control processing of LED 6k is performed.

The lamp ROM 150b has lighting / blinking pattern data and emission color pattern data of the panel lighting device 23 and the frame lighting device 27 according to the effect content set by the effect control unit 130 m, and operation patterns of the movable effect members 17A to 17C. Data, the protrusion operation pattern of the effect button 6a, the vibration operation pattern data of the effect button 6a, the vibration operation pattern data of the effect lever 6h, and the like are stored.

The power supply board 160 generates a main power supply (operating power supply) necessary for the operation of the gaming machine 1 from the power supply voltage supplied from the power supply plug 161 and uses the main power supply as the gaming machine 1 (main control board 110, payout control board 120). , Production control board 130, various electronic components). The power supply board 160 detects whether or not a power failure (power failure) has occurred, and outputs a power failure detection signal to the main control board 110 based on the occurrence of the power failure (power failure). A backup power supply circuit 163 for supplying backup power to the main control board 110 at the time of (power failure) is provided.

The power failure detection circuit 162 monitors the power supply voltage supplied to the gaming machine 1, and outputs a power failure detection signal to the main control board 110 when the power supply voltage becomes a predetermined value or less. More specifically, the main CPU 110a in which the power failure detection signal is at a high level is in an operable state, and when the power failure detection signal is in a low level, the main CPU 110a is in an operation stopped state.

The backup power supply circuit 163 includes a capacitor that stores electricity when the game machine 1 is energized, and when a power failure (power failure) occurs, the backup power supply voltage stored in the capacitor is applied to the main RAM 110c of the main control board 110. And supply. As a result, the stored contents of the main RAM 110c and the payout RAM 121c are retained even when the power is cut off (power failure), and the control state of the game is changed to the state before the power cut (power failure) after the recovery from the power failure (power failure). It can be restored. The backup power may be supplied to the payout control board 120 and the staging control board 130.

(Explanation of game status)
Next, the game state when the game progresses will be described.
The gaming states that can be taken as a gaming machine are "low-probability gaming state" or "high-probability gaming state" as a state related to a special symbol jackpot lottery, and "non-time-saving gaming" as a state related to the operation of the opening / closing member 11b of the second starting port 11a. There is a "state" or a "short-time game state". The state related to the jackpot lottery (low-probability gaming state, high-probability gaming state) and the state related to the operation of the opening / closing member 11b (non-short-time gaming state, short-time gaming state) can be related to each other and should be independent. You can also. in short,
(1) In the case of "low probability gaming state" and "time saving gaming state",
(2) In the case of "low probability gaming state" and "non-time saving gaming state"
(3) In the case of "high probability gaming state" and "time saving gaming state",
(4) In the case of "high probability gaming state" and "non-time saving gaming state",
Can be provided.
In this embodiment, the gaming states (1) to (3) above can be obtained.
The gaming state when the game is started, that is, the initial gaming state of the gaming machine 1, is set to the "low-probability gaming state" and the "non-time-saving gaming state", and this gaming state is set to the present embodiment. In the above, it is referred to as "normal gaming state".

In the present embodiment, the "low probability gaming state" means that the jackpot winning probability is the jackpot winning probability in the jackpot lottery of the special symbol performed on the condition that the gaming ball enters the first starting port 10 or the second starting port 11a. For example, it means a game state set as low as 1/299. On the other hand, the "high probability gaming state" means a gaming state in which the jackpot winning probability is improved as compared with the low probability gaming state, and the jackpot winning probability is set as high as, for example, 1 / 59.8. .. Therefore, in the "high-probability gaming state", it is easier to win the jackpot than in the "low-probability gaming state", and the gaming state is advantageous for the player. It should be noted that the change from the low-probability gaming state to the high-probability gaming state is performed after the jackpot game is completed. In the present embodiment, the jackpot that triggers the transition to the high-probability gaming state is referred to as "probability variation jackpot", and the jackpot that triggers the transition to the low-probability gaming state is referred to as "normal jackpot".

In the present embodiment, the "non-time saving game state" means that in the winning lottery of the normal symbol performed on the condition that the game ball passes through the gate 12, the average fluctuation time of the normal symbol corresponding to the lottery result is ". It is a gaming state that is set longer than the "time-saving gaming state" and that the opening time of the second starting port 11a when a winner is won is short and easy to set. For example, when the game ball passes through the gate 12, a lottery for winning a normal symbol is performed, and a variable display of the normal symbol is performed on the first display of the normal symbol. Stop display after 30 seconds. Then, when the lottery result is a hit, the second start port 11a is controlled in the open mode for, for example, 0.2 seconds after the stop display of the normal symbol.

On the other hand, the "time saving game state" means that the average fluctuation time of the normal symbol corresponding to the lottery result is "non-" in the winning lottery of the normal symbol performed on the condition that the game ball passes through the gate 12. It refers to a gaming state in which the opening time of the second starting port 11a is set to be shorter than the "time-saving gaming state" and when a winning is won. Furthermore, in the "non-time saving game state", the probability of winning in the normal symbol winning lottery is set as low as 1/128, for example, and in the "time saving game state", the probability of winning in the normal symbol winning lottery is set. For example, it is set as high as 127/128. Therefore, in the "time saving game state", when the game ball passes through the gate 12, the second starting port 11a is more likely to be controlled in the open mode than in the "non-time saving gaming state". As a result, in the "short-time game state", the player can advantageously advance the game without consuming the game ball.

In the embodiment, the "time-saving gaming state" has more advantages than the "non-time-saving gaming state" in terms of the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, the opening time of the second starting port 11a, and the winning probability of the winning lottery of the normal symbol. Is set to. However, the "time saving game state" may be set so that only one of the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, the opening time of the second starting port 11a, and the winning probability of the winning lottery of the normal symbol is advantageous. Further, in the "non-time saving game state", the winning probability may be set to, for example, 0/128 in the winning lottery of the normal symbol.

Next, the details of various tables stored in the main ROM 110b will be described with reference to FIGS. 6 to 14.

(Big hit judgment table)
FIG. 6 is a diagram showing a jackpot determination table. Specifically, FIG. 6 (1) is a jackpot determination table for the first special symbol triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first start opening 10, and FIG. 6 (2) is the second start. In the tables of FIGS. 6 (1) and 6 (2), which are the jackpot determination tables for the second special symbol triggered by the entry of the game ball into the mouth 11a, the probability of being determined to be a jackpot (big hit winning). Probability) is the same.

As shown in FIGS. 6 (1) and 6 (2), the jackpot determination table shows the probability game state, the jackpot determination acquired when the game ball wins the first starting port 10 or the second starting port 11a. The jackpot determination value for determining the random value is associated with the result of the jackpot determination.

The main CPU 110a referred to the jackpot determination table for the first special symbol shown in FIG. 6 (1) or the jackpot determination table for the second special symbol shown in FIG. 6 (2), and acquired the current stochastic gaming state. Based on the jackpot determination random value, it is determined whether the jackpot is "big hit" or "missing".

For example, according to the jackpot determination table for the first special symbol shown in FIG. 6 (1), one jackpot determination random number value of "3" is determined to be "big hit" in the low probability gaming state. .. On the other hand, in the high-probability gaming state, the 10 jackpot determination random values of "3", "7" ... "128", and "250" are determined to be "big hits". If the random value is other than the above, it is determined to be "missing". Therefore, since the random number range of the random number value for jackpot determination is 0 to 299, the probability of being determined to be a jackpot in the low probability gaming state is 1/300, and it is determined to be a jackpot in the high probability gaming state. The probability is increased by 10 times to 10/300.

(Special symbol judgment table)
FIG. 7 is a diagram showing a special symbol determination table for determining a stop symbol of the special symbol corresponding to the result of the jackpot determination. Specifically, FIG. 7 (1) is a special symbol determination table for a jackpot that is referred to for determining a stop symbol of a special symbol at the time of a jackpot, and FIG. 7 (2) is a special symbol determination table at the time of loss. It is a special symbol determination table for loss referred to for determining a stop symbol of a special symbol.

As shown in FIG. 7 (1), in the special symbol determination table for big hits, the type of the starting port when the game ball wins and the game ball enters the first starting port 10 or the second starting port 11a. The jackpot symbol judgment value (special symbol judgment random value) for determining the special symbol judgment random value for the jackpot, the judgment result (type of special symbol), and the special symbol (special symbol stop) acquired at the time of The symbol data) and the effect symbol designation command transmitted to the effect control board 130 as information indicating the type of the special symbol are associated with each other.

As shown in FIG. 7 (2), in the special symbol determination table for loss, the type of the starting port when the game ball wins and the game ball enters the first starting port 10 or the second starting port 11a. Loss symbol judgment value ((special symbol judgment random value), judgment result (type of special symbol), and special symbol (special symbol) for determining the special symbol judgment random value for loss acquired at the time of The stop symbol data) and the effect symbol designation command transmitted to the effect control board 130 as information indicating the type of the special symbol are associated with each other so that a plurality of lost special symbols can be determined even in the case of loss. A plurality of lost special symbols and special symbol determination values may be associated with each other.

The specific first special symbol for loss (specific loss symbol) shown in FIG. 7 (2) is a symbol that triggers the setting change of the gaming state to the low-probability time-saving gaming state, and is determined with a probability of 1/150. Is set to be done.

The main CPU 110a refers to the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 7, and determines the type of special symbol (special symbol stop symbol data) based on the type of the starting port in which the game ball has won and the random value for determining the jackpot symbol. It will be decided. Then, at the start of the change of the special symbol, the effect symbol designation command as the information indicating the type of the special symbol is determined based on the determined type of the special symbol (special symbol stop symbol data). Here, in the effect symbol specification command, one command is composed of two bytes of data, one byte of MODE data for identifying the classification of the control command, and one byte of DATA indicating the content of the control command to be executed. It consists of data. This also applies to the fluctuation pattern specification command and the like, which will be described later.

Here, as will be described later, since the type of the jackpot game and the game state after the jackpot game is completed are determined by the type of the special symbol (stop symbol data), the types of the special symbol are the type of the jackpot game and the jackpot game. It can be said that the game state after the end is determined.

(Big hit game control table)
FIG. 8 is a diagram showing a jackpot game control table for determining the progress of a jackpot game when a jackpot is determined as a result of the jackpot determination. In the jackpot game control table, the type of special symbol (special symbol stop symbol data), the opening time of the jackpot game, the opening designation command to be transmitted to the staging control board 130 at the start of the opening, and the opening / closing mode of the jackpot 13a are determined. The big winning opening open / close control table information, the ending time of the big hit game, and the ending designation command to be transmitted to the effect control board 130 at the start of the ending are associated with each other.

The main CPU 110a will refer to the jackpot game control table shown in FIG. 8 and determine the opening time, the winning opening opening / closing control table, and the ending time based on the special figure stop symbol data. Since the number of round games in the jackpot game is determined by determining the type of the jackpot opening / closing control table, FIG. 8 supplementarily describes the number of round games in the jackpot game. There is.

(Large winning opening opening / closing control table)
FIG. 9 is a diagram showing a big winning opening open / close control table that is referred to when a big hit is determined as a result of the big hit determination. In the big winning opening open / close control table, the maximum number of round games in the big hit game, the maximum number of winnings in the big winning opening 13a in one round game, the maximum number of opening of the big winning opening 13a in each round game, and each The opening time of the large winning opening 13a for one opening of the round game and the closing interval time for closing the large winning opening 13a after the end of the round game are associated with each other.

The main CPU 110a specifies the type of the large winning opening open / close control table based on the special figure stop symbol data. Specifically, when the special figure stop symbol data is "01" or "04", the first special winning opening open / close control table (TBL.No01) is specified, and the first special winning opening open / close control table is referred to. Then, the first big hit game is executed, and when the special figure stop symbol data is "02" or "05", the second big winning opening open / close control table (TBL.No02) is specified, and the second big winning opening is specified. The second big hit game is executed with reference to the open / close control table, and when the special figure stop symbol data is "03" or "06", the third big winning opening open / close control table (TBL.No03) is specified. The third big hit game is executed with reference to the third big winning opening opening / closing control table.

According to the first large winning opening opening / closing control table (TBL. No. 01), the opening / closing member 13b is operated to open / close the large winning opening 13a a plurality of times (K = 3) per round. (The big winning opening 13a repeats opening for 3.000 seconds and closing for 1.000 seconds) Performs a big hit game of 10 rounds (R).
However, if a specified number (9) of game balls win the large winning opening 13a before the maximum number of open times (K) is reached, one round game is completed. Then, when the game of 10 rounds is completed, the first big hit game is completed. The first jackpot game is a jackpot game with a high degree of advantage because the number of rounds is larger than that of the second and third jackpot games.

According to the second large winning opening opening / closing control table (TBL. No. 02), the opening / closing member 13b is operated to open the large winning opening 13a for up to 29.5 seconds per round (R). Perform the second jackpot game.
However, if a specified number (9) of game balls win the large winning opening 13a by the time the opening time elapses, one round game is completed. Then, when the four rounds of the game are completed, the second big hit game is completed.

According to the third large winning opening opening / closing control table (TBL. No. 03), the opening / closing member 13b is operated to open / close the large winning opening 13 a plurality of times (K = 3) per round. (The big winning opening 13a repeats opening for 3.000 seconds and closing for 1.000 seconds) The third big hit game of 4 rounds (R) is executed.

Since the opening and closing mode of the big winning opening 13a is the same in the first big hit game and the third big hit game, the prize ball is won by the third closing time of the big winning opening 13a in the fourth round. For example, the first image display device 16 can perform a promotion effect suggesting whether or not the possible round games are increased.

Specifically, in the first jackpot game, after performing a promotion success production that makes it appear that the number of round games that can win prize balls has been successfully increased in the final phase of the promotion production, 5 of the 5 rounds of the big prize opening 13a. After the 6th round, when the prize ball can be won, the jackpot game will be advanced. On the other hand, in the third jackpot game, the jackpot game ends after executing the promotion failure effect that makes it appear that the increase in the round games that can win the prize ball has failed in the final phase of the promotion effect. By doing so, the player's expectation for the promotion production is raised.

(Game status setting data table)
FIG. 10 (1) is a diagram showing a game state setting data table for setting a game state after the end of the big hit game. In the game state setting data table, the special figure stop symbol data, the winning state data indicating the game state at the time of winning the jackpot lottery, the time-saving game flag indicating that the game state is in the time-saving game state, and the time-saving game state can be executed. The number of time-saving games (J) indicating the number of times of variable display of a special symbol, the high-probability game flag indicating that the game is in a high-probability gaming state, and the number of times of variable display of a special symbol that can be executed in the high-probability gaming state are shown. It is associated with the high probability number of games (X).

Here, the "winning state data" is information indicating the gaming state at the time of winning the big hit. The gaming state is composed of a combination of a non-time-saving gaming state, a time-saving gaming state, a low-probability gaming state, and a high-probability gaming state.

The main CPU 110a refers to the game state setting data table shown in FIG. 10 (1), and based on the special figure stop symbol data and the winning state data, the time saving game flag, the time saving game number (J), and the high probability. The game flag and the number of high-probability games (X) are determined.

When the high-probability gaming state is set, the high-probability gaming number (X) may be set to 50,000 times, but in the high-probability gaming state, the winning probability in the jackpot lottery is 10/300. Therefore, since the next jackpot winning is substantially confirmed, the first jackpot game and the second jackpot game are advantageous jackpot games for the player whose next jackpot game is confirmed.

When the low-probability time-saving game state is set, 100 times are set as the number of time-saving games (J), but there may be no upper limit.

FIG. 10 (2) shows a game state setting data table for setting the game state after the specific loss symbol predetermined in the variation display of the first special symbol is stopped in the low-probability non-time-saving game state. It is a figure which shows. In the game state setting data table, the special symbol stop symbol data, the symbol stop game state data indicating the game state when the specific lost symbol is stopped, the time-saving game flag indicating that the game state is in the time-saving game state, and the time-saving game state The number of time-saving games (J) indicating the number of times of variable display of the special symbol that can be executed in, the high-probability game flag indicating that the game is in the high-probability gaming state, and the variable display of the special symbol that can be executed in the high-probability gaming state. It is associated with the high-probability game number (X) indicating the number of times.
Although the number of time-saving games (J) has no upper limit (that is, until a big hit), an upper limit may be set (for example, up to 1200 times).

FIG. 10 (3) is a diagram showing a game state setting data table for setting a game state after the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches a predetermined number of times in a low-probability non-time-saving game state. be. In the game state setting data table, the number of symbol fluctuations, the game state data when the number of fluctuations reached, which indicates the game state when the predetermined number of symbol fluctuations is reached, the time-saving game flag indicating that the game state is shortened, and the time-saving game state are displayed. Changes in the special symbol that can be executed in the game state The number of time-saving games (J) that indicates the number of times of display, the high-probability game flag that indicates that the game is in the high-probability game state, and the fluctuation of the special symbol that can be executed in the high-probability game state. It is associated with the high-probability game number (X) indicating the number of times of display.
Although the number of time-saving games (J) has no upper limit (that is, until a big hit), an upper limit may be set (for example, up to 1200 times).

The number of symbol fluctuations is such that in a low-probability non-time-saving game state, a jackpot lottery (a jackpot lottery that is the result of a lost lottery) is continuously performed a predetermined number of times with the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 10 as a trigger. It shows the number of times of change of the 1st special symbol executed corresponding to.
Although the number of time-saving games (J) has no upper limit (that is, until a big hit), an upper limit may be set (for example, up to 1200 times).

(Special figure fluctuation pattern determination table)
FIG. 11 is a special figure variation pattern determination table for the non-time saving gaming state for determining the variation pattern of the special symbol in the non-time saving gaming state.
FIG. 12 is a special figure variation pattern determination table for the time-saving gaming state for determining the variation pattern of the special symbol in the time-saving gaming state.

As shown in FIGS. 11 and 12, in the special symbol variation pattern determination table, the type of the special symbol (starting port) for displaying the variation, the jackpot determination result, the special symbol determination result (stop special symbol data), and Reach judgment random number value, first special figure hold number (U1) or second special figure hold number (U2), special figure fluctuation pattern judgment random value, special figure fluctuation pattern as judgment result, special symbol The fluctuation time of is associated with the special map fluctuation pattern specification command indicating the special map fluctuation pattern.
Therefore, it can be said that the "special symbol variation pattern" can specify the type of special symbol, the jackpot determination result, the type of special symbol, and the variation time of the special symbol.

The main CPU 110a refers to the special figure fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 11 and 12, and refers to the jackpot determination result, the special symbol determination result (stop special figure data), the reach determination random number value, and the first special figure hold number (U1). ) Or the special figure fluctuation pattern is determined based on the second special figure hold number (U2) and the random number value for determining the special figure fluctuation pattern, and the special figure fluctuation pattern designation command according to the special figure fluctuation pattern is issued to the effect control board 130. It is designed to be sent to.

Further, in the effect control board 130, as will be described later, the content (effect mode) of the variation effect accompanied by the variation display of the effect symbol 16a is determined according to the variation pattern designation command (big hit determination result, special symbol determination result, etc.). Therefore, in the rightmost column of the special figure pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 11 and 12, the effect contents that can be executed by the variable effect are described as a reference.

As the effect contents shown in the special figure variation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 11 and 12, "normal variation", "shortening variation", "ultra-shortening variation", and "long variation" are three effect symbols 16a separated. It means that it fluctuates at high speed and stops without reaching.

Further, "reach" is a possibility that a jackpot game is executed in which a part of the combination of the jackpot effect symbols 16a for notifying that the jackpot is a jackpot is temporarily stopped and the other effect symbols 16a fluctuate. It means a variation mode that makes the player expect that there is. For example, when the combination of the symbol matching of "777" is set as the combination of the jackpot effect symbol 16a for notifying that it is a jackpot, the same effect symbol 16a temporarily stops at "7" in the left side region and the right side region. The remaining effect symbol 16a is fluctuating in the central region.

The "temporary stop" means that the effect symbol 16a sways slightly or the effect symbol 16a is slightly deformed to make the player appear as if the effect symbol 16a is stopped (completely stopped). (Not).

Further, "normal reach" means a reach effect in which the same effect symbol 16a is temporarily stopped in the left side area and the right side area, and the remaining one effect symbol 16a fluctuates in the center area. It is a production.

Further, "SP reach" and "special SP reach" are super reach effects having a higher expectation of big hits than normal reach, and development effects are executed from the normal reach effects, and then executed. For example, the two effect symbols 16a are reduced and moved to the corners of the first image display device 16, and a special reach effect is performed using almost the entire display area of the first image display device 16. .. In addition, "special SP reach" is performed with a special effect than "SP reach".

Further, "SPSP reach" and "SPSP" 7 "reach" are special reach effects having a higher expectation of a big hit than super reach, and are executed after the normal reach effect or the super reach effect. For example, the development effect is executed from the normal reach effect, and then the three effect symbols 16a are reduced and moved to the corner of the first image display device 16, and almost the entire display area of the first image display device 16 is used. It is designed to produce a more special reach than "SP Reach". In "SPSP reach", the reach effect is executed by the effect symbol 16a other than "7", and in "SPSP" 7 "reach", the reach effect is executed by the effect symbol "7".

In addition, "full rotation reach" is a reach in which a big hit is confirmed, and is executed after the normal reach production. For example, a development effect is executed from a normal reach effect, and then the three effect symbols 16a are all the same and fluctuate at a low speed in a state of being aligned, and "SPSP reach" is performed using almost the entire display area of the first image display device 16. And "SPSP" 7 "reach", a special reach production (reach production with a big hit confirmed) is performed.

In addition, "special reach" is a reach in which either a normal reach effect that is more special than "normal reach", an SP reach effect that is more special than "SP reach", or an SPSP reach effect that is more special than "SPSP reach" is executed. It has become.

The first feature of the special figure variation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 11 and 12 is that when the number of reserved first special figures increases to 2 or 3 during the non-time saving gaming state, the variation pattern of the first special symbol is shortened. While it becomes easier to determine the fluctuation, even if the number of reserved second special symbols increases to 2 or 3 during the non-time saving game state, the shortened fluctuation is not determined as the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol. By doing so, it is possible to improve the time efficiency (execution efficiency) of the variable display of the special symbol when hitting left than when hitting right in the non-time saving state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Become.

The second feature of the special figure variation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 11 and 12 is that even if the number of reserved first special figures increases to 1 to 3 during the time-saving gaming state, the variation pattern of the first special symbol is used. While the (super) shortening variation is not determined, if the number of reserved 2nd special symbols increases to 1 to 3 during the time-saving gaming state, the (long) shortening variation is likely to be determined as the variation pattern of the 2nd special symbol. Be done. By doing so, it is possible to improve the time efficiency (execution efficiency) of the variable display of the special symbol when hitting right than when hitting left in the short-time game state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Become.

The third feature of the special figure fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 11 and 12 is as follows.
In the case of a loss judgment result when a game ball wins in the first starting port 10 during a normal game state, two special figure fluctuation patterns (variation time 4 seconds or 8 seconds (no reach)) in which the fluctuation time differs depending on the number of holdings. (In the case of))), but if the game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 10 during the time-saving game state and the judgment result is a loss, the same special figure fluctuation pattern (regardless of the number of holdings) Fluctuation time: 8 seconds) is determined. Therefore, it is possible to perform an appropriate game according to the type of the game state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The fourth feature of the special figure variation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 11 and 12 is that in the case of a game ball winning a prize in the first starting port 10 during a normal gaming state and a jackpot determination result, a plurality of variation times differ. One of the types of special figure fluctuation patterns (variation time: 40 seconds, 70 seconds, 90 seconds ...) is determined, but the game ball wins a prize at the first starting port 10 during the time-saving game state and is a big hit. In the case of the determination result, one of the special figure fluctuation patterns having fewer types of fluctuation time than in the normal gaming state is determined. Therefore, it is possible to perform an appropriate game according to the type of the game state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in the case of a game ball winning a prize in the first starting port 10 during the time-saving game state and the judgment result of loss, two special figure fluctuation patterns (variation time: 8 seconds and 40) having different fluctuation times regardless of the number of holdings are held. Seconds) may be determined. In this case, the rate of determination of the special symbol fluctuation pattern having a short fluctuation time is higher than that of the special symbol fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation time.

(Preliminary judgment table)
FIG. 13 (1) is a non-time-saving game for preliminarily determining (pre-reading) the special figure determination information acquired based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 10 or the second starting port 11a during the non-time-saving game state. It is a pre-judgment table for the state.
FIG. 13 (2) is for a time-saving state for pre-determining (pre-reading) the special figure determination information acquired based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 10 or the second starting port 11a during the time-saving gaming state. It is a preliminary judgment table.

As shown in FIG. 13, in the pre-judgment table, the type of special symbol (starting port), the jackpot determination result, the special symbol determination result, the reach determination random value, and the special symbol variation pattern determination random value are displayed. , The special map schedule fluctuation pattern as a determination result and the look-ahead designation command indicating the special map schedule fluctuation pattern are associated with each other.
Therefore, it can be said that the "special symbol fluctuation pattern" can specify the type of the special symbol, the determination result of the jackpot determination, the type of the special symbol, and the special symbol fluctuation pattern scheduled to be executed.

The main CPU 110a refers to the pre-judgment table shown in FIG. 13, and is based on a random value for jackpot determination, a random value for special symbol determination, a random value for reach determination, and a random value for determining a special figure variation pattern. The pattern is determined, and the look-ahead designation command corresponding to the special figure schedule fluctuation pattern is transmitted to the staging control board 130.

In the pre-determination table shown in FIG. 13, the pre-determination (look-ahead) is executed when the game ball wins the first start opening 10 in the time-saving gaming state, but it may not be executed.

FIG. 14 is a diagram showing a table relating to a normal symbol and an opening / closing member 11b of the second starting port 11a.
FIG. 14 (1) is a diagram showing a collision determination table for ordinary symbols. FIG. 14 (2) is a stop symbol determination table of the ordinary symbol corresponding to the winning lottery result of the ordinary symbol. FIG. 14 (3) is a diagram showing a variation pattern determination table of ordinary symbols. FIG. 14 (4) is a diagram showing an opening mode determination table for the second starting port.

(Hit judgment table for ordinary symbols)
As shown in FIG. 14 (1), in the hit determination table, the presence / absence of the time-saving game state, the hit determination random value acquired when the game ball passes through the gate 12, and the determination result of the hit lottery are displayed. It is associated.
The main CPU 110a refers to the hit determination table and determines whether it is "hit" or "missing" based on the current time-saving gaming state and the acquired random value for hit determination.

According to the hit determination table, in the non-time saving game state, one hit determination random value of "19" is determined to be a hit, and in the time saving game state, 19 pieces of "0" to "18". The random value for hit determination is determined to be a hit. Therefore, the rate of being determined to be a hit is higher in the time-saving game state than in the non-time-saving game state.

(Ordinary design determination table)
As shown in FIG. 14 (2), in the stop symbol determination table, the presence / absence of the time-saving gaming state, the winning symbol determination random value acquired when the gaming ball passes through the gate 12, and the type of the normal symbol ( The stop symbol data) is associated with a normal symbol designation command transmitted to the staging control board 130 as information indicating the type of the normal symbol.
The main CPU 110a refers to the stop symbol determination table, and causes the normal symbol first display 19c to stop and display the normal symbol based on the current game state, the lottery result of the winning lottery, and the acquired random number value for the winning symbol. And the normal figure stop symbol data is decided. Then, at the start of the fluctuation of the normal symbol, the normal symbol designation command as information indicating the type of the normal symbol is determined based on the determined type of the normal symbol (normal symbol stop symbol data) and transmitted to the staging control board 130. ..

(Fluctuating pattern determination table for ordinary symbols)
As shown in FIG. 14 (3), the fluctuation pattern determination table shows the presence / absence of a time-saving game state, the result of hit determination (win lottery), and the fluctuation of the normal map acquired when the game ball passes through the gate 12. A random value for pattern determination, a fluctuation time of a normal symbol, and a command for specifying a normal symbol fluctuation pattern transmitted to the effect control board 130 as information indicating the fluctuation time of the normal symbol are associated with each other.
The main CPU 110a refers to the variation pattern determination table, and determines the variation time of the normal symbol based on the presence / absence of the time-saving gaming state, the result of the winning lottery, and the random value for determining the variation pattern of the normal map. Then, at the start of the fluctuation of the normal symbol, a command for designating the normal symbol fluctuation pattern as information indicating the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is determined based on the determined fluctuation time and transmitted to the effect control board 130.

(Opening mode determination table for the second starting port)
As shown in FIG. 14 (4), the opening mode determination table of the second starting port 11a includes a normal symbol (stop symbol data) and a maximum number of times (S) of opening the second starting port 11a (opening / closing member 11b). , The first opening time and closing time of the second starting port 11a (opening / closing member 11b), the interval time between the first closing time and the second opening time, and the second opening time and closing time. It is associated.
The main CPU 110a refers to the opening mode determination table, and based on the stop symbol data, the maximum number of times the second starting port 11a (opening / closing member 11b) is opened, the first opening time and closing time, the second opening time and closing. Determine the time.

In the opening mode determination table, the opening mode based on the normal symbol stop symbol data = 02 (normal symbol 2) is more advantageous to the player than the opening mode based on the normal symbol stop symbol data = 01 (normal symbol 1). The opening mode based on the normal symbol stop symbol data = 03 (normal symbol 3) is more advantageous to the player than the opening mode based on the normal symbol stop symbol data = 02 (normal symbol 2). There is.
Since the most advantageous normal symbol stop symbol data = 03 (normal symbol 3) is determined when a hit occurs in the time-saving game state, it is more advantageous for the player than the non-time-saving game state in the time-saving game state. The second starting port 11a (opening / closing member 11b) is operated so as to be.

Next, the progress of the game in the gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to a flowchart.

(Timer interrupt processing on the main control board)
FIG. 15 is a flowchart illustrating a timer interrupt process by the main control board 110.
The reset clock pulse generation circuit provided on the main control board 110 generates clock pulses at predetermined cycles (4 ms), so that the timer interrupt process described below is executed.

First, in step S101, the main CPU 110a saves the information stored in the register to the stack area. Next, in step S102, the main CPU 110a updates the special symbol time counter, the special game timer counter such as the opening time of the special electric accessory, the normal symbol time counter, and the normal electric opening time counter. Performs time control processing for updating various timer counters such as update processing. Specifically, the main CPU 110a performs a process of subtracting "1" from the special symbol time counter, the special game timer counter, the normal symbol time counter, and the normal power release time counter.

In step S103, the main CPU 110a includes a random number value for jackpot determination, a random number value for special symbol determination, a random number value for special symbol variation pattern determination, a random number value for hit determination, a random number value for normal symbol determination, and a random number for normal symbol variation pattern determination. Performs random number update processing of numerical values. Specifically, "1" is added to each random number counter to update the random number counter. If the result of the addition exceeds the maximum value of the random number range, the random number counter is returned to "0", and if the random number counter makes one round, the random number is updated from the value of the initial value random number at that time.

In step S104, the main CPU 110a performs an initial random number value update process for updating the initial random number value for jackpot determination, the initial random number value for special symbol determination, the initial random number value for hit determination, and the initial random number value for normal symbol determination.

In step S105, the main CPU 110a performs an input control process. In this process, the main CPU 110a has an input to each of the first start port detection switch 10a, the second start port detection switch 11c, the gate detection switch 12a, the large winning opening detection switch 13c, and the general winning opening detection switch 14a. Performs input control processing to determine. The details of the input control process will be described later.

In step S106, the main CPU 110a has acquired special figure determination information (big hit determination random value, special symbol determination random value, reach) based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 10 or the second start port 11a. Judgment (random value for judgment, random value for judgment of fluctuation pattern), fluctuation display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, opening / closing of the big winning opening 13a, setting of the game state, etc. conduct. The details of the special figure special electric control process will be described later.

In step S107, the main CPU 110a determines the normal figure determination information acquired based on the passage of the game ball to the gate 12, displays the fluctuation of the normal symbol, opens and closes the second starting port 11a (auxiliary game), and the like. Performs Fuden control processing.

In step S108, the main CPU 110a performs a payout control process. In this process, the main CPU 110a refers to various prize ball counters stored in the main RAM 110c, and performs a payout control process for transmitting a payout number designation command corresponding to various winning openings to the payout control board 120. conduct. As a result, the payout control board 120 executes a process for paying out the prize balls from the payout device 100.

In step S109, the main CPU 110a performs an abnormality determination process. In this process, the main CPU 110a detects the occurrence of a magnetic error or a radio wave error based on the input signals from the magnetic detection sensor 58a and the radio wave detection sensor 58b, and if detected, a magnetic error error detection command or a radio wave abnormality error detection. The command is transmitted to the effect control board 130.
Further, the main CPU 110a detects the door open state based on the detection signal from the open detection switch 31a, and if detected, transmits a door open error detection command to the staging control board 130.
Further, the main CPU 110a detects the jamming of the game ball in the passage where the game ball is discharged from the storage portion of the game ball based on the detection signal from the saucer full detection switch 32a, and if detected, the dish full error detection command. Is transmitted to the effect control board 130.

Further, when it is detected that the error state is canceled by the state of the input signal and the detection signal, the main CPU 110a transmits an error release command to the effect control board 130. Further, the effect control board 130 transmits a signal for notifying the image control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150 of error detection and error cancellation.
The main CPU 110a does not transmit an error release signal depending on the type of error generated in the gaming machine 1. That is, the error release signal is transmitted when the dish is full, the door is open, and the ball is jammed, but the error release signal is not transmitted when the illegal radio wave is detected.

In step S110, the main CPU 110a has external output data (game information) output from the game information output terminal plate 90, drive control data output to the second start opening opening / closing solenoid 11d, the winning opening opening / closing solenoid 13d, and the first special symbol. 1st display 19a, 2nd special symbol 1st display 19b, normal symbol 1st display 19c, 1st special symbol hold 1st display 19d, 2nd special symbol hold 1st display 19e, normal symbol hold 1st Data creation such as 1 display 19f, high probability game state display 19g, time saving game state display 19h, round number display 19i, right-handed first display 19j, status confirmation display 19k, etc. Perform processing.

In step S111, the main CPU 110a is the normal medium payout number, which is the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of the game balls to the various winning openings 10, 11a, 14 during the low-probability non-time-saving game state, and the low-probability non-time-saving game state. Counts game performance information such as the number of normal medium outs, which is the number of game balls detected by the out ball detection switch 58e, and the total number of outs, which is the number of game balls detected by the out ball detection switch 58e regardless of the game state. Performs game ball counting processing for. The total number of outs, the number of normal payouts, and the number of normal outs are not affected even if the set value is changed (regardless of the set value), so these are counted. By setting it, it becomes possible to calculate the performance information excluding the influence of the set value, and it becomes possible to use it for grasping the performance of the gaming machine 1.

In step S112, the main CPU 110a calculates a normal base value ((normal payout number ÷ normal middle out number) × 100) in the current game section divided by the total number of outs, and is set in the storage area of the main RAM 110c. The normal base value calculation process is performed to save the normal base value rounded to the first decimal place in the first area of the base storage area. The game section is updated every time the total number of outs reaches 60,000, and the base storage area is once with the first area where the normal base value in the current game section is stored. The second area for storing the normal base value in the previous game section, the third area for storing the normal base value in the game section two times before, and the normal base value in the game section three times before are stored. A fourth area is provided for this purpose, and the normal base value of the four game sections including the present is saved in each area.

In step S113, the main CPU 110a has a performance for displaying on the information display 113 while switching the normal base values for the four game sections calculated in step S112 above and saved in the base storage area every 5 seconds. Performance for setting display data Performs display data setting processing.

In step S114, the main CPU 110a performs an output control process for outputting the external output data created in step S110, the drive control data signal, and the performance display data signal created in step S113. Further, an output process for a display device for outputting a signal such as display control data created in step S110 is performed. Further, a command output process for outputting the command set in the transmission buffer of the main RAM 110c to another board is performed.

In step S115, the main CPU 110a returns the information saved in step S101 to the register of the main CPU 110a, and ends the timer interrupt processing this time.

(Input control processing)
FIG. 16 is a flowchart illustrating an input control process by the main control board 110.
First, in step S121, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the detection signal from the general winning opening detection switch 14a is input, that is, whether or not the game ball has entered the general winning opening 14. When the detection signal is input from the general winning opening detection switch 14a, the main CPU 110a adds predetermined data to the general winning opening counter used for the prize ball and updates it.

In step S122, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the detection signal from the large winning opening detection switch 13c is input, that is, whether or not the game ball has entered the large winning opening 13a. When the detection signal is input from the large winning opening detection switch 13c, the main CPU 110a adds and updates predetermined data to the large winning opening prize ball counter used for the winning ball, and also wins the large winning opening 13a. Large winning opening ball entry counter (C) for counting the game balls that have been played The counter in the storage area is added and updated.

In step S123, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the detection signal from the first start port detection switch 10a is input, that is, whether or not the game ball has entered the first start port 10.

In step S124, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the detection signal from the second start port detection switch 11c is input, that is, whether or not the game ball has entered the second start port 11b.
When the detection signal from the second start port detection switch 11c is input, the main CPU 110a performs the same processing as in step S123.
However, in this second start port detection switch input process, "1" is added to the second special symbol hold number (U2) storage area, and the extracted jackpot determination random value, special symbol determination random value, and reach determination are performed. The random value is stored in the second special symbol storage area. That is, the first start port detection switch input process and the second start port detection switch input process differ only in the storage area for storing various data, and all other processes are the same.

In step S125, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the detection signal from the gate detection switch 12a has been input, that is, whether or not the game ball has passed through the gate 12.
In step S126, the main CPU 110a performs a winning confirmation detection switch input process. In this prize confirmation detection switch input process, it is determined whether or not the detection signal from the prize confirmation detection switch (not shown) has been input, and "1" is subtracted from the ball entry counter (D) to update (D ← D). -1) Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the ball entry counter (D) is within the range of the predetermined determination value (lower limit value <D <upper limit value), and if it is outside the range of the determination value, Assuming that an abnormal prize has occurred, the error specification command for abnormal prize is set in the transmission data storage area for production. If it is within the range of the determination value, the winning confirmation detection switch input process is terminated. As a result, the error designation command for abnormal winning is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the sub CPU 130a of the effect control board 130 that has received the error designation command for abnormal winning notifies the abnormal winning error and indicates that the abnormal winning error has occurred. Notify.

(1st start port detection switch input processing)
FIG. 17 is a flowchart illustrating a first start port detection switch input process by the main control board 110.
First, in step S131, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the detection signal from the first start port detection switch 10a has been input. When the detection signal from the first start port detection switch 10a is input (step S131; Yes), the process is transferred to step S132, and when the detection signal from the first start port detection switch 10a is not input (step S131; No), the first start port detection switch input process is terminated.
In step S132, the main CPU 110a performs a process of adding and updating predetermined data to the starting opening prize ball counter used for the prize ball.

Next, in step S133, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the number of reserved items set in the first special symbol reserved number (U1) storage area is less than 4. When the number of reserved items set in the first special symbol reserved number (U1) storage area is less than 4 (step S133; Yes), the process is transferred to step S134 and the first special symbol reserved number (U1) storage area is stored. If the number of reserved pieces set is not less than 4 (step S133; No), the first start port detection switch input process is terminated.

In step S134, the main CPU 110a adds "1" to the first special symbol reservation number (U1) storage area and stores it.
In step S135, the main CPU 110a acquires a random value for jackpot determination, searches for an empty storage unit in order from the first storage unit in the first special symbol storage area, and acquires it in the empty storage unit. Stores the random value for jackpot judgment.
In step S136, the main CPU 110a acquires a random value for determining a special symbol, searches for a vacant storage unit in order from the first storage unit in the first special symbol storage area, and enters the vacant storage unit. The acquired random number value for a special symbol is stored.

In step S137, the main CPU 110a acquires a game random value (a reach determination random value and a variation pattern determination random value), and is a storage unit that is vacant in order from the first storage unit in the first special symbol storage area. Is searched, and the acquired random number values for games (random value for reach determination and random value for fluctuation pattern determination) are stored in a vacant storage unit.
In step S138, the main CPU 110a performs the first pre-determination process. The first start for showing the determination information of the first start port in advance based on each random number value acquired in the above steps S135 to S137 with reference to the advance determination table (not shown) corresponding to the current gaming state. Determine the winning information.

In step S139, the main CPU 110a sets the first start opening winning designation command based on the first start winning information determined in the first pre-determination process of step S138 in the effect transmission data storage area.

As a result, the first start winning information can be transmitted to the effect control board 130 as the first start opening winning designation command, and the sub CPU 130a of the effect control board 130 that has received the first start opening winning designation command is the first start. Analyzes the mouth prize designation command, and a predetermined advance notice effect is performed from before the start of the variable display of the special symbol corresponding to the first start mouth prize designation command to one or more variable displays executed before that. It is possible to execute a look-ahead effect such as a continuous notice for executing the command or a hold change notice for changing the display mode of the hold icon.

However, the first pre-determination process is determined only according to the gaming state at the time when the gaming ball enters the first starting port 10. Therefore, if the game state is changed before the first hold reserved by the ball is processed, the result of the jackpot determination process described later may be different from the result of the first pre-determination process. ..

In step S140, the main CPU 110a refers to the value stored in the first special symbol hold number (U1) storage area, and is the first special corresponding to the first special symbol hold number (U1) updated in step S134. Set the symbol memory specification command in the transmission data storage area for production.

In step S141, the main CPU 110a sets the first special symbol hold display data for displaying the first hold number (LED lighting or blinking) on the first special symbol hold first display 19d in a predetermined processing area. Then, the input process of the first start port detection switch is completed. As a result, when the first special symbol hold display data is set in the predetermined processing area, the display control data is created in step S110, and the created data is output in step S111, so that the first special symbol is output. The first hold number is displayed on the symbol hold first display 19d.

(Second start port detection switch input processing)
FIG. 18 is a flowchart illustrating a second start port detection switch input process by the main control board 110.
First, in step S151, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the detection signal from the second start port detection switch 11c has been input. When the detection signal from the second start port detection switch 11c is input (step S151; Yes), the process is transferred to step S152, and when the detection signal from the second start port detection switch 11c is not input (step S151; No), the second start port detection switch input process is terminated.
In step S152, the main CPU 110a performs a process of adding and updating predetermined data to the starting opening prize ball counter used for the prize ball.

Next, in step S153, the main CPU 110a adds "1" to the ball entry counter (D) indicating the number of game balls that have entered the second starting port 11a and updates (D ← D + 1).
In step S154, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the auxiliary game is in progress. If the auxiliary game is in progress (step S154; Yes), the process is transferred to step S159, and if the auxiliary game is not in progress (step S154; No), the process is transferred to step S155.

In step S155, the main CPU 110a adds "1" to the illegal entry counter (E) for monitoring the illegal entry into the second starting port 11a and updates (E ← E + 1).
In step S156, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the value of the illegal entry counter is larger than the specified number (10). If the number is greater than the specified number (step S156; Yes), the process is transferred to step S157, and if the number is less than the specified number (step S156; No), the process is transferred to step S160.

In step S157, the main CPU 110a sets an illegal entry error designation command in the effect transmission data storage area assuming that an illegal entry has occurred. As a result, the illegal entry error designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the sub CPU 130a of the effect control board 130 that has received the illegal entry error designation command issues an illegal entry error notification and an illegal entry error occurs. Notify that you have done so.

In step S158, the main CPU 110a clears the value of the illegal entry counter (E) to "0".
In step S159, the main CPU 110a adds "1" to the second start port entry counter (L) and updates (L ← L + 1).

Next, in step S160, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the number of reserved items set in the second special symbol reserved number (U2) storage area is less than 4. When the number of reserved items set in the second special symbol reserved number (U2) storage area is less than 4 (step S160; Yes), the process is transferred to step S154 and the second special symbol reserved number (U2) storage area is stored. If the number of reserved pieces set is not less than 4 (step S160; No), the second start port detection switch input process is terminated.

In step S161, the main CPU 110a adds "1" to the first special symbol reservation number (U1) storage area and stores it.
In step S162, the main CPU 110a acquires a random value for jackpot determination, searches for a vacant storage unit in order from the first storage unit in the second special symbol storage area, and acquires the vacant storage unit in the vacant storage unit. Stores the random value for jackpot judgment.
In step S163, the main CPU 110a acquires a random value for determining a special symbol, searches for a vacant storage unit in order from the first storage unit in the second special symbol storage area, and enters the vacant storage unit. The acquired random number value for the special symbol is stored.

In step S164, the main CPU 110a acquires a game random value (a reach determination random value and a variation pattern determination random value), and is a storage unit that is vacant in order from the first storage unit in the second special symbol storage area. Is searched, and the acquired random number values for games (random value for reach determination and random value for fluctuation pattern determination) are stored in a vacant storage unit.
In step S165, the main CPU 110a performs a second pre-determination process. The second start for showing the determination information of the second start port in advance based on each random number value acquired in the above steps S162 to S164 with reference to the advance determination table (FIG. 13) corresponding to the current gaming state. Determine the winning information.

In step S166, the main CPU 110a sets the second start opening winning designation command based on the second start winning information determined in the second pre-determination process of step S165 in the effect transmission data storage area.

As a result, the second start winning information can be transmitted to the effect control board 130 as the second start opening winning designation command, and the sub CPU 130a of the effect control board 130 that has received the second start opening winning designation command is the second start. Analyzes the mouth prize designation command, and a predetermined advance notice effect is performed from before the start of the variable display of the special symbol corresponding to the second start mouth prize designation command to one or more variable displays executed before that. It is possible to execute a look-ahead effect such as a continuous notice for executing the command or a hold change notice for changing the display mode of the hold icon.

However, the second pre-determination process is determined only according to the gaming state at the time when the gaming ball enters the second starting port 11a. Therefore, if the game state is changed before the second hold reserved by the ball is processed, the result of the jackpot determination process described later may be different from the result of the second pre-determination process. ..

In step S167, the main CPU 110a refers to the value stored in the second special symbol hold number (U2) storage area, and the second special corresponding to the second special symbol hold number (U2) updated in step S161. Set the symbol memory specification command in the transmission data storage area for production.

In step S168, the main CPU 110a sets the second special symbol hold display data for displaying the second hold number (LED lighting or blinking) on the second special symbol hold first display 19e in a predetermined processing area. Then, the input process of the second start port detection switch is completed. As a result, when the second special symbol hold display data is set in the predetermined processing area, the display control data is created in step S110, and the created data is output in step S111, so that the second special symbol is output. The second hold number is displayed on the symbol first display 19e.

(Gate detection switch input processing)
FIG. 19 is a flowchart illustrating a gate detection switch input process by the main control board 110.
First, in step S171, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the detection signal from the gate detection switch 12a has been input.

When it is determined that the detection signal from the gate detection switch 12a has been input (step S171; Yes), the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the normal symbol hold number (G) is less than 4 in step S172.
When the detection signal from the gate detection switch 12a is not input (step S171; No), the main CPU 110a ends the gate detection switch input process.
In the present embodiment, when the game ball passes through the gate 12, the variation display of the normal symbol is performed, and the upper limit number of holdings of the right of the variation display of the normal symbol is set to "4".

When it is determined in step S172 that the normal symbol hold number (G) is less than 4 (step S172; Yes), in step S173, the main CPU 110a is stored in the normal symbol hold number (G) storage area. The value obtained by adding "1" to the hold number (G) is stored as a new normal symbol hold number (G). When it is determined in step S172 that the number of reserved symbols (G) is not less than 4 (step S172; No), the gate detection switch input process is terminated.

In step S174, the main CPU 110a acquires a hit determination random value, searches for a vacant storage unit in order from the first storage unit in the normal symbol hold storage area, and acquires the vacant storage unit in the vacant storage unit. Stores the random value for collision detection.

In step S175, the main CPU 110a acquires a random value for symbol determination, searches for a vacant storage unit in order from the first storage unit in the normal symbol reservation storage area, and acquires the vacant storage unit in the vacant storage unit. Stores the random value for symbol determination.

In step S176, the main CPU 110a acquires a random value for determining a normal symbol fluctuation pattern, searches for a vacant storage unit in order from the first storage unit in the normal symbol reservation storage area, and vacant storage unit. The random value for determining the fluctuation pattern of the normal map acquired in is stored in.
As described above, the hit determination random value, the symbol determination random value, and the normal symbol variation pattern determination random value are stored in the predetermined storage unit of the normal symbol reservation storage area.

In step S177, the main CPU 110a refers to the value stored in the normal symbol hold number (G) storage area, and produces a normal symbol storage designation command corresponding to the normal symbol hold number (G) updated in step S173. Set in the transmission data storage area.

In step S178, the main CPU 110a sets the normal symbol hold display data for displaying (lighting or blinking the LED) the normal symbol hold number on the normal symbol hold first display 19f in a predetermined processing area, and this time. Gate detection switch Ends the input process. As a result, when the normal symbol hold display data is set in the predetermined processing area, the display control data is created in step S110, and the created data is output in step S111, so that the normal symbol first display is performed. The number of reserved figures is displayed on the vessel 19f.

(Special figure special electric control processing)
FIG. 20 is a flowchart illustrating a special figure special electric control process by the main control board 110.
First, in step S181, the main CPU 110a loads the value of the special figure special electric processing data, and refers to the branch address from the special figure special electric processing data loaded in step S182.

In step S183, if the special figure special electric processing data = 0 (step S183; Yes), the main CPU 110a shifts the processing to the special symbol storage determination processing (step S184).
When the special figure special electric processing data = 0 in step S183 (step S183; No), in step S185, the main CPU 110a determines whether the special figure special electric processing data = 1.
If the special figure special electric processing data = 1 in step S185 (step S185; Yes), the main CPU 110a shifts the processing to the special symbol variation processing (step S186).

In step S185, when the special figure special electric processing data = 1 (step S185; No), the main CPU 110a determines whether the special figure special electric processing data = 2 in step S187.
In step S187, if the special figure special electric processing data = 2 (step S187; Yes), the main CPU 110a shifts the processing to the special symbol stop processing (step S188).
When the special figure special electric processing data = 2 in step S187 (step S187; No), in step S189, the main CPU 110a determines whether the special figure special electric processing data = 3.

If the special figure special electric processing data = 3 in step S189 (step S189; Yes), the main CPU 110a shifts the processing to the jackpot game processing (step S190).
When the special figure special electric processing data = 3 in step S189 (step S189; No), in step S191, the main CPU 110a determines whether the special figure special electric processing data = 4.
If the special figure special electric processing data = 4 in step S191 (step S191; Yes), the main CPU 110a shifts the processing to the jackpot game end processing (step S192).
If the special figure special electric processing data = 4 is not set in step S191 (step S191; No), the main CPU 110a ends the special figure special electric control process.

(Special symbol memory judgment processing)
FIG. 21 is a flowchart illustrating a special symbol storage determination process by the main control board 110.
First, in step S201, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner. Here, when the variation of the special symbol is being displayed, that is, when the special symbol time counter is not "0" (step S201; Yes), the special symbol storage determination process is terminated and the special symbol time counter is "0" (step S201). ; No), the process is transferred to step S202.

In step S202, the main CPU 110a determines whether the second special symbol reserved number (U2) storage area is "1" or more, and determines that the second special symbol reserved number (U2) storage area is not "1" or more. If this is the case (step S202; No), the main CPU 110a shifts the process to step S204, and if it is determined that the second special symbol hold number (U2) storage area is “1” or more (step S202; Yes), the step. The process is transferred to S203. As a result, the second special symbol storage area is given priority processing over the first special symbol storage area.

In step S203, the main CPU 110a subtracts "1" from the value stored in the second special symbol hold number (U2) storage area and stores it.
In step S204, the main CPU 110a determines whether the first special symbol reservation number (U1) storage area is “1” or more. If it is determined that the first special symbol reservation number (U1) storage area is not "1" or more (step S204; No), the process is transferred to step S215, and the first special symbol reservation number (U1) storage area is ". If it is determined that the value is 1 ”or higher (step S204; Yes), the process is transferred to step S205.
In step S205, the main CPU 110a subtracts "1" from the value stored in the first special symbol hold number (U1) storage area and stores it.

In step S206, the main CPU 110a shifts the data stored in the special symbol hold storage area corresponding to the special symbol hold number (U) storage area subtracted in steps S202 to S205. Specifically, the data stored in the first storage unit to the fourth storage unit in the first special symbol storage area or the second special symbol storage area is shifted to the previous storage unit.

Here, the data stored in the first storage unit is shifted to the determination storage area (0th storage unit). At this time, the data stored in the first storage unit is written in the determination storage area (0th storage unit), and the data already written in the determination storage area (0th storage unit) is stored in the special symbol hold storage. It will be erased from the area.

In step S207, the main CPU 110a is based on the data (big hit determination random value, special symbol determination random value) written in the determination storage area (0th storage unit) of the special symbol hold storage area in step S206. Execute the jackpot judgment process.

In step S208, the main CPU 110a sets the effect symbol designation command corresponding to the special symbol stop symbol data determined in step S207 in the effect transmission data storage area.

In step S209, the main CPU 110a performs a fluctuation pattern determination process.
In the variation pattern determination process, first, the variation pattern determination table based on the current gaming state is determined with reference to the gaming RAM area of the main RAM 110c. Specifically, in the case of the non-time-saving gaming state, the variation pattern determination table for the non-time-saving gaming state shown in FIG. 11 is determined, and in the case of the non-time-saving gaming state, the variation for the time-saving gaming state shown in FIG. Determine the pattern determination table. After that, the fluctuation pattern is determined based on the determined variation pattern determination table with reference to the jackpot determination random value, the special symbol determination random value, the reach determination random value, and the variation pattern determination random value.

In step S210, the main CPU 110a sets a variation pattern designation command corresponding to the determined variation pattern in the effect transmission data storage area.
In step S211 the game state at the start of the fluctuation is confirmed, and the game state designation command corresponding to the current game state is set in the transmission data storage area for staging.
In step S212, the main CPU 110a starts the variable display of the special symbol on the special symbol first display devices 19a and 19b. That is, the special symbol variation display data is set in the processing area. As a result, when the special symbol variation display data is set in the processing area, the display control data is created in step S110, and the created data is output in step S111 to display the first special symbol first. The variable display of the device 19a or the second special symbol first display 19b is started.

First, in step S213, when the main CPU 110a starts the variation display of the special symbol as described above, the special symbol time counter is set with the variation time (counter value) based on the variation pattern determined in step S208. Set it on the counter. The special symbol time counter is subtracted every 4 ms in step S102.

In step S214, the main CPU 110a sets 00H to the customer waiting state determination flag. That is, the customer waiting state determination flag is cleared. The customer waiting state determination flag = "00H" indicates that the special symbol is currently being displayed in a variable manner or is in a big hit game. On the other hand, when the special symbol is not displayed in a variable manner and is not in the jackpot game (non-game state), the customer waiting state determination flag = "01H" is stored. When the customer waiting state determination flag = "01H" is stored, the customer waiting state specification command is set in step S217 described later, and it is transmitted to the staging control board 130 that neither the variation display of the special symbol nor the jackpot game is in progress. Will be done.

In step S215, the main CPU 110a sets "1" in the special figure special electric processing data, and ends the special symbol storage determination processing.
In step S204, when the main CPU 110a determines that the first special symbol reservation number (U1) is "0", that is, the first special symbol reservation number (U1) and the second special symbol reservation number (U2). If none of the above is reserved, the main CPU 110a determines in step S215 whether or not 01H is set in the customer waiting state determination flag.

When 01H is set in the customer waiting state determination flag (step S216; Yes), the special symbol memory determination process is terminated, and when 01H is not set in the customer waiting state determination flag (step S216; No), the process is transferred to step S217.
In step S217, the main CPU 110a sets 01H to the customer waiting state determination flag so that the customer waiting state designation command is not set many times in step S218 described later.
In step S218, the main CPU 110a sets the customer waiting state designation command in the effect transmission data storage area, and ends the special symbol storage determination process.

(Big hit judgment process)
FIG. 22 is a flowchart illustrating a jackpot determination process by the main control board 110.
First, in step S221, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the jackpot determination process is performed based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 10. When the main CPU 110a determines that it is the first start port (step S221; Yes), the process is transferred to step S222, and when it is determined that it is not the first start port (step S221; No), the process is transferred to step 223. ..

In step S222, the main CPU 110a selects a jackpot determination table for the first special symbol. On the other hand, in step S223, the main CPU 110a selects the jackpot determination table for the second special symbol.
In step S224, the main CPU 110a refers to the current stochastic gaming state and the jackpot determination random value stored in the 0th storage unit of the special symbol storage area, and the selected jackpot determination table, and "big hit". It is determined whether it is "missing" or "missing".

In step S225, when the main CPU 110a determines "big hit" (step S225; Yes), the process is transferred to step S226, and when it is determined to be "missing" (step S225; No), the process is transferred to step S227.
In step S226, the main CPU 110a selects a special symbol determination table for big hits. On the other hand, in step S227, the main CPU 110a selects a special symbol determination table for loss.

In step S228, the main CPU 110a selects the type of the start port from which the jackpot determination is to be performed, the jackpot symbol determination random value stored in the 0th storage unit of the special symbol storage area, and the selected table. By collating, the type of special symbol (special symbol stop symbol data) is determined. The determined special symbol is used to determine the operation mode for opening and closing the big prize opening 13a in the big hit game process described later, and is used to determine the game state after the big hit game is completed.
In step S229, the main CPU 110a sets the special symbol stop symbol data corresponding to the special symbol determined in step S228 in the special symbol stop symbol data storage area, and ends the current jackpot determination process.

(Special symbol change processing)
FIG. 23 is a flowchart illustrating a special symbol variation process by the main control board 110.
First, in step S241, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the fluctuation time set in step S212 has elapsed (whether or not the special symbol time counter is "0"), and the fluctuation time has not elapsed. When it is determined (step S241; No), the current special symbol variation processing is terminated, and when it is determined that the variation time has elapsed (step S241; Yes), the processing is transferred to step S242.

In step S242, the main CPU 110a stops the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) determined in step S228 on the first special symbol first display 19a or the second special symbol first display 19b. Display. Specifically, the special symbol stop display data is set in a predetermined processing area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) are stopped and displayed on the first special symbol 1st display 19a or the 2nd special symbol 1st display 19b, and the player is notified of the result of the jackpot determination. Will be done.

In step S243, the main CPU 110a sets a special symbol confirmation command indicating that the special symbol has been stopped and displayed in the effect transmission data storage area. As a result, the special symbol determination command is transmitted to the staging control board 130.

In step S244, when the main CPU 110a starts the stop display of the special symbol as described above, the symbol stop time (0.5 seconds = 250 counter) is set in the special symbol time counter. The special symbol time counter is subtracted by "1" every 2 ms in step S110.
In step S245, the main CPU 110a sets "2" in the special figure special electric processing data, and ends the special symbol variation processing.

(Special symbol stop processing)
FIG. 24 is a flowchart illustrating a special symbol stop process by the main control board 110.
First, in step S251, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the symbol stop time set in step S244 has elapsed (whether or not the special symbol time counter is "0"), and the symbol stop time has elapsed. If it is determined that the case (step S251; Yes), the process is transferred to step S252, and if it is determined that the symbol stop time has not elapsed (step S251; No), the current special symbol stop process is terminated.

In step S252, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the time-saving game flag is "ON" in the time-saving game flag storage area (that is, whether or not the current game state is the time-saving game state), and determines whether or not the time-saving game state is the time-saving game state. When the time saving game flag is "ON" in the storage area (step S252; Yes), the process is transferred to step S253, and when the time saving game flag is "OFF" in the time saving game flag storage area (step S252; No). ), The process is transferred to step S258.

In step S253, the main CPU 110a is updated by subtracting "1" from the number of time-saving games (J) stored in the time-saving game number (J) storage area.
In step S254, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the new number of time-saving games (J) is "0", and determines that the number of time-saving games (J) is "0" (step S254; Yes). ), The process is transferred to step 255, and when it is determined that the number of time-saving games (J) is not "0" (step S254; No), the process is transferred to step S258.

In step S255, the main CPU 110a sets the time-saving game flag set in the time-saving game flag storage area to "OFF". As a result, the time-saving game state ends and the game shifts to the non-time-saving game state.

In step S256, the main CPU 110a sets the time-saving game state erasing data for erasing (turning off the LED) the display (LED on) of the time-saving game state display 19h in a predetermined processing area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, when the time-saving game state erasure data is set in the predetermined processing area, the display control data is created in step S110, and the created data is output in step S111, whereby the time-saving game state indicator is displayed. The display of 19h will be erased.

In step S257, the main CPU 110a sets the right-handed erasing data for erasing (turning off the LED) the display (LED on) of the right-handed first display 19j in a predetermined processing area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, when the right-handed erase data is set in the predetermined processing area, the display control data is created in step S110, and the created data is output in step S111, so that the right-handed first display is displayed. The display of 19j will be erased.

In step S258, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the high-probability game flag is "ON" in the high-probability game flag storage area (that is, whether or not the current game state is the high-probability game state). When the high-probability game flag is "ON" in the high-probability game flag storage area (step S258; Yes), the process is transferred to step S259, and the high-probability game flag is "OFF" in the high-probability game flag storage area. If so (step S258; No), the process is transferred to step S263.

In step S259, the main CPU 110a is updated by subtracting "1" from the high-probability game count (X) stored in the high-probability game count (X) storage area.
In step S260, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the new high-probability game count (X) is "0", and determines that the high-probability game count (X) is "0" (step S260). Yes), the process is transferred to step 261 and when it is determined that the high probability number of games (X) is not "0" (step S260; No), the process is transferred to step S263.

In step S261, the main CPU 110a turns the high-probability game flag installed in the high-probability game flag storage area "OFF". As a result, the high-probability gaming state ends and the game shifts to the low-probability gaming state.

In step S262, the main CPU 110a sets the high-probability gaming state erasing data for erasing (turning off the LED) the display (LED on) of the high-probability gaming state display 19g in a predetermined processing area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, when the high-probability gaming state erasure data is set in the predetermined processing area, the display control data is created in step S110, and the created data is output in step S111, so that the high-probability gaming state is obtained. The display of the display 19g will be erased.

In step S263, the main CPU 110a confirms the current game state and sets the game state designation command in the effect transmission data storage area. As a result, the game state designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130.

In step S264, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the special symbol displayed as stopped is a jackpot symbol. Specifically, when it is determined whether or not the special symbol stop symbol data stored in the special symbol stop symbol data storage area is a jackpot symbol (stop symbol data = 01 to 06), and it is determined that the special symbol is a jackpot symbol. (Step S264; Yes), the process is transferred to step S266, and when it is determined that the symbol is not a jackpot symbol (step S264; No), the process is transferred to step S277.

In step S277, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the special symbol that has been stopped and displayed is a specific lost symbol, or whether or not the predetermined number of fluctuations has been reached. Specifically, whether or not the special symbol stop symbol data stored in the special symbol stop symbol data storage area is a specific lost symbol (stop symbol data 20: specific first special symbol), or whether or not the special symbol stop symbol data is continuously lost. When it is determined whether or not the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol has reached 750 times and it is determined that the symbol is not a specific lost symbol or the predetermined number of fluctuations has not been reached, the main CPU 110a is subjected to the special symbol special electric processing in step S265. When "0" is set in the data, the special symbol stop processing this time is completed, and it is determined that the specific lost symbol or the predetermined number of fluctuations has been reached, the processing is transferred to step S278.

In step S278, the main CPU 110a performs a time saving game flag setting process. Subsequently, in step S279, the main CPU 110a confirms the game state with reference to the high-probability game flag storage area and the time-saving game flag storage area, and sets the game state designation command in the effect transmission data storage area. As a result, the game state designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130.

In step S266, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the time-saving game flag is "ON" in the time-saving game flag storage area, and if the time-saving game flag is "ON" (step S266; Yes), step S267. When the time saving game flag is "OFF" (step S266; No), the process is transferred to step S268.

In step S267, the main CPU 110a sets the time-saving game state erasing data in a predetermined processing area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, when the time-saving game state erasure data is set in the predetermined processing area, the display control data is created in step S110, and the created data is output in step S111, whereby the time-saving game state indicator is displayed. The display of 19h will be erased (LED will be turned off).

In step S268, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the time-saving game flag is "ON" in the high-probability game flag storage area, and if the high-probability game flag is "ON" (step S268; Yes). The process is transferred to step S269, and when the high probability game flag is "OFF" (step S268; No), the process is transferred to step S270.

In step S269, the main CPU 110a sets the high-probability gaming state erasing data in a predetermined processing area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, when the high-probability game state erasure data is set in the predetermined processing area, the display control data is created in step S110, and the created data is output in step S111, so that the high-probability game state is obtained. The display of the display 19g will be erased (the LED will be turned off).

In step S270, the main CPU 110a sets "3" in the special figure special electric processing data.
In step S271, the main CPU 110a resets the gaming state and the number of time reductions. Specifically, the data stored in the high-probability game flag storage area, the high-probability game number (X) storage area, the time-saving game flag storage area, and the time-saving game number (J) storage area are cleared.

In step S272, the main CPU 110a sets the large winning opening open / close control table. Specifically, the jackpot game control table shown in FIG. 8 is referred to, and the jackpot opening / closing control table corresponding to the special figure stop symbol data is set.

In step S273, the main CPU 110a sets the opening time in the special game timer counter based on the jackpot game control table and the special figure stop symbol data. The special game timer counter is decremented by 1 every 4 ms in step S102.

In step S274, the main CPU 110a determines the type of special game (first big hit to third big hit) based on the big winning opening opening / closing control table set in step S272, and opens according to the type of big hit game. Set the specified command in the transmission data storage area for production. As a result, the opening designation command of the jackpot game is transmitted to the effect control board 130.

In step S275, the main CPU 110a sets the round number display data for displaying the round number of the jackpot game (LED lighting) on the round number display 19i in a predetermined processing area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, when the round number display data is set in the predetermined processing area, the display control data is created in step S110, and the created data is output in step S111, whereby the round number display 19i is displayed. The number of rounds will be displayed.

In step S276, the main CPU 110a sets the right-handed display data for causing the right-handed first display 19j to display the right-handed display (LED lighting) in a predetermined processing area of the main RAM 110c, and performs the special symbol stop processing this time. To finish. As a result, when the right-handed display data is set in the predetermined processing area, the display control data is created in step S110, and the created data is output in step S111, so that the right-handed first display is displayed. Right-handed display will be performed at 19j.

(Big hit game processing)
FIG. 25 is a flowchart illustrating a jackpot game process by the main control board 110.
First, in step S281, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the opening is currently in progress. For example, if "0" is stored in the round game count (R) storage area, it is currently opening, so it is determined whether or not the round game count (R) storage area is currently being opened by referring to the round game count (R) storage area. When it is determined that the main CPU 110a is currently opening (step S281; Yes), the process is transferred to step S282, and when it is determined that the main CPU 110a is not currently opening (step S281; No), the process is transferred to step S286.

In step S282, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the preset opening time has elapsed. That is, it is determined whether or not the special game timer counter set in step S273 has become "0", and if the special game timer counter = 0, it is determined that the opening time has elapsed. When the opening time has not elapsed (step S282; No), the main CPU 110a ends the jackpot game process this time, and when the opening time has elapsed (step S282; Yes), the process shifts to step S283.

In step S283, the main CPU 110a performs a jackpot game start process. Specifically, "1" is added to the number of round games (R) stored in the round game count (R) storage area to update (R ← R + 1). Here, since the round game has not been performed even once, "1" is stored in the round game number (R) storage area.

In step S284, the main CPU 110a performs a large winning opening opening process. Specifically, first, "1" is added to the number of times of opening (K) stored in the number of times of opening (K) storage area (K) to update (K ← K + 1). Here, since the large winning opening 13a has not been opened yet, "1" is stored in the opening number (K) storage area. Further, in order to open the opening / closing member 13b of the large winning opening 13a, the large winning opening opening / closing solenoid energization start data for energizing the large winning opening opening / closing solenoid 13d is set. As a result, the opening / closing member 13b is converted from the closed state to the open state, and the large winning opening 13a is opened. In addition, referring to the large winning opening open / close control table set in step S272, the opening time of the large winning opening 13a is set to the special game timer counter based on the current number of round games (R) and opening times (K). Set to.

In step S285, the main CPU 110a sets the round designation command corresponding to the round game count (R) stored in the round game count (R) storage area in the effect transmission data storage area. As a result, the round designation command is transmitted to the staging control board 130. Here, since it is the first round of the jackpot game, the round designation command for the first open round is set.

In step S286, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the large winning opening 13a is currently open. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the energization data for energizing the large winning opening opening / closing solenoid 13d is set. When the main CPU 110a determines that the large winning opening 13a is open (step S286; Yes), the process is transferred to step S287, and when it is determined that the large winning opening 13a is not open (step S286; No), The process is transferred to step S289.

In step S287, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the "opening end condition" for ending the opening of the large winning opening 13a is satisfied.
This "opening end condition" is that the value of the large winning opening ball entry counter (C) has reached the maximum number (for example, 9) or the maximum opening time has elapsed (special game timer counter = 0). That) is applicable.
When the main CPU 110a determines that the "opening end condition" is satisfied (step S287; Yes), the process is transferred to step S288, and when it is determined that the "opening end condition" is not satisfied (step S287; No). , End this jackpot game process.

In step S288, the main CPU 110a performs a large winning opening closing process (interval process). Specifically, the large winning opening opening / closing solenoid energization stop data for converting the opening / closing member 13b of the large winning opening 13a into the closed state is set. As a result, the opening / closing member 13b is converted from the open state to the closed state, and the large winning opening 13a is closed. Further, with reference to the large winning opening open / close control table set in step S272 above, the closing time of the large winning opening 13a is set to the special game timer based on the current number of round games (R) and the number of openings (K). Set it on the counter. Further, a command for designating the closing of the winning opening, which indicates that the opening / closing member 13b is converted from the open state to the closed state, is set in the transmission data storage area for staging. As a result, the command for designating the closing of the winning opening is transmitted to the staging control board 130.

In step S289, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the large winning opening 13a is currently closed (during the interval). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the energization data for energizing the large winning opening opening / closing solenoid 13d is set. When the main CPU 110a determines that the large winning opening 13a is closed (step S289; Yes), the process is transferred to step S290, and when it is determined that the large winning opening 13a is not closed (step S289; No). The process is transferred to step S290.

In step S290, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the closing time of the large winning opening 13a has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the special game timer counter has become "0". When the closing time is completed (step S290; Yes), the main CPU 110a shifts the process to step S291, and when the closing time is not completed (step S290; No), the current jackpot game process is terminated.

In step S291, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not this round has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the large winning opening entry counter (C) has reached the specified number (9) or the number of openings (K) has reached the maximum number of openings. When the main CPU 110a determines that the current round has ended (step S291; Yes), the process shifts to step S293, and when it determines that the current round has not ended (step S291; No), the process proceeds to step S292. Move the process.

In step S292, the main CPU 110a performs a large winning opening opening process. Number of open times (K) "1" is added to the number of open times (K) stored in the storage area to update (K ← K + 1). Further, in order to open the opening / closing member 13b of the large winning opening 13a, the large winning opening opening / closing solenoid energization start data for energizing the large winning opening opening / closing solenoid 13d is set. As a result, the opening / closing member 13b is converted from the closed state to the open state, and the large winning opening 13a is opened. In addition, referring to the large winning opening open / close control table set in step S272, the opening time of the large winning opening 13a is set to the special game timer counter based on the current number of round games (R) and opening times (K). Set to.

In step S293, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the final round is over. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the number of round games (R) stored in the number of round games (R) storage area has reached the maximum number of round games of the current jackpot game. When the main CPU 110a determines that the final round is finished (step S293; Yes), the process is transferred to step S297, and when it is determined that the final round is not finished (step S293; No), the process is transferred to step S294. ..

In step S294, the main CPU 110a performs a round data setting process. Specifically, "0" is set in the open count (K) storage area and the large winning opening number of balls (C) storage area, and the round game count (R) is stored in the round game count (R). Is added by "1" and updated (R ← R + 1).

In step 295, the main CPU 110a performs a large winning opening opening process. Specifically, "1" is added to the number of times of opening (K) stored in the number of times of opening (K) storage area to update (K ← K + 1). Further, in order to open the opening / closing member 13b of the large winning opening 13a, the large winning opening opening / closing solenoid energization start data for energizing the large winning opening opening / closing solenoid 13d is set. As a result, the opening / closing member 13b is converted from the closed state to the open state, and the large winning opening 13a is opened. In addition, referring to the large winning opening open / close control table set in step S272, the opening time of the large winning opening 13a is set to the special game timer counter based on the current number of round games (R) and opening times (K). Set to.

In step S296, the main CPU 110a sets the round designation command corresponding to the round game count (R) stored in the round game count (R) storage area in the effect transmission data storage area. As a result, the round designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130.

In step S297, the main CPU 110 performs an ending transition process. Specifically, "0" is set in the open number (K) storage area, the large winning opening number of balls (C) storage area, and the round game number (R) storage area to clear the value of each storage area. In addition, the ending time is set in the special game timer counter based on the jackpot game control table and the special figure stop symbol data.

In step S298, the main CPU 110a sets the ending designation command corresponding to the special figure stop symbol data in the effect transmission data storage area. As a result, the ending designation command is transmitted to the staging control board 130.

In step S299, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the ending is currently in progress, and if the ending is in progress (step S299; Yes), the process is transferred to step S300, and if the ending is not in progress (step S299; No). The jackpot game process this time is finished.

In step S300, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the ending time has elapsed, and if it is determined that the ending time has elapsed (step S300; Yes), the process is transferred to step S301 and the ending time has not elapsed. If it is determined (step S300; No), the current jackpot game process is terminated.
In step S301, the main CPU 110a sets "4" in the special figure special electric processing data and ends the big hit game.

(Special game end processing)
FIG. 26 is a flowchart illustrating a special game (big hit game) end process by the main control board 110.
In step S321, the main CPU 110a loads the special symbol stop symbol data set in the special symbol stop symbol data storage area and the game information in the game state buffer.

In step S322, the main CPU 110a performs a high-probability game flag setting process. Specifically, referring to the game state setting data table shown in FIG. 10, the high-probability game flag is stored at the end of the jackpot game based on the special figure stop symbol data loaded in step S321 and the game information in the game state buffer. Process whether to set the high probability game flag in the area. For example, if the special figure stop symbol data is any one of "01", "02", "04", and "05", the high-probability game flag is set (turned on) in the high-probability game flag storage area.

In step S323, the main CPU 110a performs a high-probability game number setting process. Specifically, with reference to the game state setting data table shown in FIG. 10, the high probability game number (X) storage area is based on the special figure stop symbol data loaded in step S321 and the game information in the game state buffer. To set a predetermined number of times. For example, if the stop symbol data is "02", 50,000 times are set in the high probability game count (X) storage area.

In step S324, the main CPU 110a performs a time saving game flag setting process. Specifically, the time-saving game flag is set in the time-saving game flag storage area based on the stop symbol data loaded in step S321 and the game information in the game state buffer with reference to the game state setting data table shown in FIG. Performs the process of whether or not to make it. For example, if the stop symbol data is "02", a flag is set (turned on) in the time saving game flag storage area.

In step S325, the main CPU 110a performs a time-saving game number setting process. With reference to the game state setting data table shown in FIG. 10 (1), a predetermined number of times is stored in the time-saving game number (J) storage area based on the stop symbol data loaded in step S321 and the game information in the game state buffer. Let me set it. For example, if the stop symbol data is "02", 50,000 times are set in the time-saving game count (J) storage area.

In step S326, the main CPU 110a confirms the game state with reference to the high-probability game flag storage area and the time-saving game flag storage area, and sets the game state designation command in the effect transmission data storage area. As a result, the game state designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130.

In step S327, the main CPU 110a sets the round number erasing data for erasing the display (LED lighting) of the round number display 19i (LED turning off) in a predetermined processing area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, when the round number erasure data is set in the predetermined processing area, the display control data is created in step S110, and the created data is output in step S111, whereby the round number display 19i The display will be erased.

In step S328, the main CPU 110a sets "0" in the special figure special electric processing data, prepares to move the processing to the special symbol storage determination processing shown in FIG. 21, and ends the special game end processing this time.

(Fuzu Fuden control processing)
FIG. 27 is a flowchart illustrating a general-purpose electric power control process by the main control board 110.
First, in step S331, the main CPU 110a loads the value of the general-purpose electric processing data, and in step S332, the branch address is calculated from the loaded general-purpose electric processing data.

In step S333, if the normal symbol processing data = 0 (step S333; Yes), the main CPU 110a performs the normal symbol variation processing in step S334, and ends the current normal drawing control processing. If the normal power processing data is not 0 (step S333; No), it is determined that the normal power processing data = 1, the auxiliary game processing is performed in step S335, and the normal power control processing is terminated.

(Ordinary symbol fluctuation processing)
FIG. 28 is a flowchart illustrating a normal symbol variation process by the main control board 110.
First, in step S341, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the variation display of the normal symbol is in progress. When the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is being performed (the normal symbol time counter is not "0") (step S341; Yes), the process is transferred to step S358 and the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is not being performed (the normal symbol time counter is "0"). In the case of (step S341; No), the process is transferred to step S342.

In step S342, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the value of the normal symbol hold number (G) storage area that stores the normal symbol hold number is 1 or more, and determines whether or not the value of the normal symbol hold number (G) storage area is 1. When it is determined that the value is 1 or more (step S342; Yes), the process is transferred to step S343, and when it is determined that the value of the normal symbol hold number (G) storage area is not 1 or more (step S342; No). This normal symbol change processing is completed.

In step S343, the main CPU 110a is updated (G ← G + 1) by subtracting “1” from the value stored in the normal symbol hold number (G) storage area.
In step S344, the main CPU 110a shifts the data stored in the normal symbol hold storage area corresponding to the normal symbol hold number (G) storage area subtracted in step S343. Specifically, each data stored in the first storage unit to the fourth storage unit in the normal symbol storage area is shifted to the previous storage unit. Here, the data stored in the first storage unit is shifted to the determination storage area (0th storage unit). At this time, the data stored in the first storage unit is written in the determination storage area (0th storage unit), and the data already written in the determination storage area (0th storage unit) is normally stored in the symbol hold. It will be erased from the area. As a result, the hit determination random value, the hit symbol determination random value, and the normal figure fluctuation pattern determination random value used in the previous game are deleted.

In step S345, the main CPU 110a performs a hit determination process. Specifically, the current time-saving game state and the hit determination random value stored in the 0th storage unit of the normal symbol hold storage area are collated with the hit determination table of the normal symbol shown in FIG. 14 (1). Judgment as to whether or not it is a hit (a lottery for winning a normal symbol) is performed.

In step S346, the main CPU 110a performs a normal symbol determination process. Specifically, the figure shows whether or not the game is currently in a time-saving game state, the result of the hit determination in step S345, and the random value for stopping the normal figure stored in the 0th storage unit of the normal symbol hold storage area. The type of the normal symbol (normal symbol stop symbol data) is determined by collating with the stop symbol determination table of the normal symbol shown in 14 (2), and is set in the normal symbol stop symbol storage area.

In step S347, the main CPU 110a sets the normal map designation command corresponding to the normal map stop symbol data determined in step S346 in the effect transmission data storage area. As a result, the general map designation command is transmitted to the staging control board 130.

In step S348, the main CPU 110a performs a normal figure fluctuation pattern determination process. Specifically, the figure shows whether or not the game is currently in a time-saving game state, the result of the hit determination in step S345, and the normal symbol fluctuation pattern random value stored in the 0th storage unit of the normal symbol hold storage area. The fluctuation time (variation pattern) of the normal symbol is determined by collating with the fluctuation pattern determination table of the normal symbol shown in 14 (3).

In step S349, the main CPU 110a sets a normal map fluctuation pattern designation command corresponding to the fluctuation time (variation pattern) of the normal symbol determined in step S348 in the effect transmission data storage area. As a result, the normal map fluctuation pattern designation command is transmitted to the staging control board 130.

In step S350, the main CPU 110a sets the fluctuation time of the normal symbol determined in step S349 in the normal symbol time counter. The normal symbol time counter is decremented by 1 every 4 ms in step S102.

In step S351, the main CPU 110a sets the normal symbol variation display data for causing the normal symbol first display 19c to display the fluctuation display of the normal symbol (blinking of the LED) in a predetermined processing area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, when the normal symbol variation display data is set in the predetermined processing area, the display control data is created in step S110, and the created data is output in step S111, so that the normal symbol first display is performed. The variable display of the vessel 19c is started.

In step S352, the main CPU 110a sets the normal symbol storage designation command corresponding to the normal symbol hold number (G) in the effect transmission data storage area. As a result, the normal symbol storage designation command is transmitted to the staging control board 130.

In step S353, the main CPU 110a sets the above-mentioned normal symbol hold display data in a predetermined processing area of the main RAM 110c, and ends the current normal symbol variation processing. As a result, when the normal symbol hold display data is set in the predetermined processing area, the display control data is created in step S110, and the created data is output in step S111, so that the normal symbol hold first. The number of reserved figures is displayed on the display 19f.

In step S354, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the fluctuation time of the normal symbol has elapsed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol time counter set in step S350 is "0". When the main CPU 110a determines that the fluctuation time of the normal symbol has elapsed (S354; Yes), the process is transferred to step S355, and when it is determined that the fluctuation time of the normal symbol has not elapsed (S354; No), this time. Ends the normal symbol change processing of.

In step S355, the main CPU 110a sets the normal symbol stop display data for causing the normal symbol first display 19c to stop and display the normal symbol determined in step S346 in a predetermined processing area. As a result, when the normal symbol stop display data is set in the predetermined processing area, the display control data is created in step S110, and the created data is output in step S111, so that the normal symbol first display is performed. The normal symbol is stopped and displayed on the vessel 19c, and the player is notified of the determination result of the lottery.

In step S356, the main CPU 110a sets a normal symbol confirmation command indicating a stop display of the normal symbol in the effect transmission data storage area. As a result, the normal symbol confirmation command is transmitted to the staging control board 130.

In step S357, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the stop symbol data of the normal symbol is a hit stop symbol, and if it is a hit stop symbol (S357; Yes), shifts the process to step S358 and is not a hit stop symbol. In the case (S357; No), the current normal symbol variation processing is terminated.

In step S358, the main CPU 110a sets "1" in the normal drawing data and prepares to shift the processing to the auxiliary game processing shown in FIG. 29.

In step S359, the main CPU 110a performs an auxiliary game start process. In the auxiliary game start process, the main CPU 110a first sets the opening mode determination table of the second starting port of the main RAM 110c, and sets "1" in the opening count (S) stored in the open count (S) storage area. Add and update (S ← S + 1). Here, since the second starting port 11a has not been opened even once, "1" is stored in the opening number (S) storage area. Then, in order to open the opening / closing member 11b of the second starting port 11a, energization data for energizing the second starting port opening / closing solenoid 11d is set. As a result, the opening / closing member 11b is converted from the closed state to the open state, and the second starting port 11a is opened. Further, referring to the opening mode determination table of the second starting port, the opening time of the second starting port 11a is set in the auxiliary game timer counter based on the current number of times of opening (S), and the normal symbol variation processing of this time is performed. To finish. The auxiliary game timer counter is decremented by 1 every 4 ms in step S102.

(Auxiliary game processing)
FIG. 29 is a flowchart illustrating an auxiliary game process on the main control board 110.
First, in step S361, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the second starting port 11a is open. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the energization data for energizing the second start port opening / closing solenoid 11d is set. When the main CPU 110a determines that the second starting port 11a is open (step S361; Yes), the process shifts to step S362, and when it is determined that the second starting port 11a is not open (step S361; No). ), The process is transferred to step S367.

In step S362, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the opening end condition of the second starting port 11a is satisfied. Specifically, the value of the second starting port entry counter (L) has reached the specified number (10), or the opening time in the current number of opening times (S) has elapsed (auxiliary game timer counter = 0). ) Applies. When the main CPU 110a determines that the opening end condition is satisfied (step S362; Yes), the process is transferred to step S363, and when it is determined that the opening end condition is not satisfied (step S362; No), the auxiliary this time is performed. End the game process.

In step S363, the main CPU 110a performs the second starting port closing process. Specifically, the second start port opening / closing solenoid energization stop data for converting the opening / closing member 11b of the second starting port 11a into the closed state is set. As a result, the opening / closing member 11b is converted from the open state to the closed state, and the second starting port 11a is closed. Further, referring to the opening mode determination table of the second starting port set in step S359, the closing time of the second starting port 11a is set in the auxiliary game timer counter based on the current number of times of opening (S). .. When this process is completed, the auxiliary game process this time is completed.

In step S364, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the auxiliary game end condition is satisfied. The auxiliary game end condition is that the normal electric operation number (D) is the number of times the second starting port 11a is opened in advance, or the value of the second starting port entry counter (L) is a specified number (10). (Individual) has been reached. When the main CPU 110a determines that the auxiliary game end condition is satisfied (step S364; Yes), the process is transferred to step S365, and when it is determined that the auxiliary game end condition is not satisfied (step S365; No), this time. Ends the auxiliary game processing of.

In step S365, the main CPU 110a performs an auxiliary game end process. Specifically, "0" is set in the open count (S) storage area and the second start port entry counter (L) storage area of the second start port 11a to clear the value of each storage area.

In step S366, the main CPU 110a sets "0" in the normal symbol processing data, and prepares to shift the processing to the normal symbol variation processing shown in FIG. 28. When this process is completed, the auxiliary game process this time is completed.

In step S367, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the closing time of the second starting port 11a has elapsed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the auxiliary game timer counter has become "0". When the main CPU 110a determines that the closing time of the second starting port 11a has ended (step S367; Yes), the process is transferred to step S368, and when it is determined that the closing time of the second starting port 11a has not ended. (Step S367; No), this auxiliary game processing is terminated.

In step S368, the main CPU 110a performs the second starting port opening process. Specifically, the second start port opening / closing solenoid energization start data for energizing the second starting port opening / closing solenoid 11d in order to open the opening / closing member 11b of the second starting port 11a is set. As a result, the opening / closing member 11b is converted from the closed state to the open state, and the second starting port 11a is opened. Further, the opening time of the second starting port 11a is set in the auxiliary game timer counter based on the current number of times of opening (S) with reference to the opening mode determination table of the second starting port set in step S359.

(Explanation of command)
30 and 31 are diagrams showing the types of commands transmitted from the main control board 110 to the staging control board 130.
One command is composed of two bytes in the command transmitted from the main control board 110 to the staging control board 130. This command is composed of a 1-byte "MODE" as a first data unit and a 1-byte "DATA" as a second data unit. "MODE" indicates the type of command, and "DATA" indicates the value of the command. This command is transmitted from the main control board 110 to the staging control board 130 by using one serial signal and using pacing synchronization.

The "staging symbol designation command" indicates the type of the special symbol to be stopped and displayed, "MODE" is set to "E0H", and DATA information is set according to the type of the special symbol. Since the type of the special symbol eventually determines the type of the jackpot and the probabilistic gaming state, the effect symbol designation command can be said to indicate the type of the jackpot and the gaming state.

In this effect symbol designation command, when various special symbols are determined and the variable display of the special symbol is started, the effect symbol designation command corresponding to the determined special symbol is transmitted to the effect control board 130. Specifically, the effect symbol designation command corresponding to the special symbol determined when the variable display of the special symbol is started is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. Immediately after that, the effect symbol designation command set in the effect transmission data storage area is transmitted to the effect control board 130.

The "first special symbol storage designation command" indicates the number of reserved storages stored in the first special symbol reserved number (U1) storage area, "MODE" is set to "E1H", and the number of reserved storages is set. DATA information is set according to.

This first special symbol storage designation command is controlled by the first special symbol storage designation command corresponding to the reserved storage number when the reserved storage number stored in the first special symbol holding number (U1) storage area is switched. It is transmitted to the substrate 130. Specifically, when the value stored in the first special symbol holding number (U1) storage area increases or decreases in step S140 or step S206, the first special symbol storage corresponding to the reserved storage number after the increase or decrease is performed. The designated command is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. Immediately after that, the first special symbol storage designation command set in the effect transmission data storage area is transmitted to the effect control board 130. As the first special symbol storage designation command, for example, the first special symbol storage 1 designation command and the first special indicating that the number of reservations stored in the first special symbol storage number (U1) storage area is "1". The number of reserved symbols (U1) There is a first special symbol storage 2 designation command indicating that the number of reserved symbols stored in the storage area is "2".

The "second special symbol storage designation command" indicates the number of reserved storages stored in the second special symbol holding number (U2) storage area, "MODE" is set to "E1H", and the number of reserved storages is set. DATA information is set according to.

This second special symbol storage designation command is controlled by the second special symbol storage designation command corresponding to the reserved storage number when the reserved storage number stored in the second special symbol storage number (U2) storage area is switched. It is transmitted to the substrate 130. Specifically, when the value stored in the second special symbol holding number (U2) storage area increases or decreases in step S160 or step S206, the second special symbol storage corresponding to the reserved storage number after the increase or decrease is performed. The designated command is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. Immediately after that, the second special symbol storage designation command set in the effect transmission data storage area is transmitted to the effect control board 130. As the second special symbol storage designation command, for example, the second special symbol storage 1 designation command and the second special indicating that the number of reservations stored in the second special symbol storage number (U2) storage area is "1". The number of reserved symbols (U2) There is a second special symbol storage 2 designation command indicating that the number of reserved symbols stored in the storage area is "2".
In this embodiment, the "first special symbol memory designation command" and the "second special symbol memory designation command" are collectively referred to as a "special symbol memory designation command".

The "special symbol confirmation command" indicates that the special symbol has been stopped and displayed, "MODE" is set to "E2H", and the type of special symbol (either the first special symbol or the second special symbol). ), The DATA information is set, and if it is the first special symbol, "DATA" is set to "01H", and if it is the second special symbol, "DATA" is set to "02H". That is, as the special symbol confirmation command, there are a first special symbol confirmation command and a second special symbol confirmation command.

This special symbol confirmation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130 when the special symbol is stopped and displayed. Specifically, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol 1st display 19a or the 2nd special symbol 1st display 19b in step S243, the special symbol confirmation command is the effect transmission data of the main RAM 110c. Set in the storage area. Immediately after that, the special symbol determination command set in the effect transmission data storage area is transmitted to the effect control board 130.

The "normal symbol confirmation command" indicates that the normal symbol has been stopped and displayed, and "MODE" is set to "E2H" and "DATA" is set to "03H".
This normal symbol confirmation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130 when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed. Specifically, when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed on the normal symbol first display 19c in step S356, the normal symbol confirmation command is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. Immediately after that, the normal symbol determination command set in the effect transmission data storage area is transmitted to the effect control board 130.

The "first special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command" indicates the fluctuation time (variation mode) of the special symbol in the first special symbol first display 19a, and "MODE" is set to "E6H", and various types are used. DATA information is set according to the fluctuation pattern.

This first special symbol variation pattern designation command is a first special symbol variation pattern corresponding to the determined variation pattern of the special symbol when the variation display of the special symbol of the first special symbol first display 19a is started. The designated command is transmitted to the effect control board 130. Specifically, in step S208, the first special figure variation pattern designation command corresponding to the variation pattern of the first special symbol is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. Immediately after that, the first special figure variation pattern designation command set in the effect transmission data storage area is transmitted to the effect control board 130. As the first special symbol variation pattern specification command, the first special symbol variation pattern 01 designation command corresponding to the variation pattern of the loss with the variation time of 8 seconds in the non-time saving game state, the jackpot with the variation time of 40 seconds in the non-time saving game state. There is a first special symbol variation pattern 06 designation command corresponding to the variation pattern of.

The "second special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command" indicates the fluctuation time (variation mode) of the special symbol in the second special symbol first display 19b, and "MODE" is set to "E7H", and various types are used. DATA information is set according to the fluctuation pattern.

This second special symbol variation pattern designation command specifies the second special symbol variation pattern corresponding to the variation pattern of the special symbol determined when the variation display of the special symbol of the second special symbol first display 19b is started. The command is transmitted to the effect control board 130. Specifically, in step S208, the second special figure variation pattern designation command corresponding to the variation pattern of the second special symbol is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. Immediately after that, the second special figure fluctuation pattern designation command set in the effect transmission data storage area is transmitted to the effect control board 130. As the second special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command, the second special symbol fluctuation pattern 41 designation command corresponding to the fluctuation pattern of the loss with the fluctuation time of 10 seconds in the time-saving gaming state, and the jackpot fluctuation with the fluctuation time of 40 seconds in the time-saving gaming state. There is a second special symbol variation pattern 46 designation command corresponding to the pattern.
In this embodiment, the "first special figure fluctuation pattern designation command" and the "second special figure fluctuation pattern designation command" are collectively referred to as a "special figure fluctuation pattern designation command".

The "starting opening winning designation command (look-ahead designation command)" is information indicating the result of pre-determining the result of the jackpot determination, and when based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting opening 10, "MODE" is "E8H". When based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 11a, the "MODE" is set to "E9H", and the DATA information is set according to various winning information.

This start opening winning designation command is controlled by the starting opening winning designation command corresponding to the determined starting winning information (preliminary determination result) when the game ball wins in the first starting opening 10 or the second starting opening 11a. It is transmitted to the substrate 130. Specifically, in step S139 or step S159, the start opening winning designation command corresponding to the determined winning information is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. Immediately after that, the start opening winning designation command set in the effect transmission data storage area is transmitted to the effect control board 130.

The "open maximum count designation command" indicates the maximum number of winnings (10) to the large winning opening 13a in one round game, "MODE" is set to "EAH", and "DATA" is "0AH". Is set to.
In this open maximum count designation command, the open maximum count designation command is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c when one round game is started. Immediately after that, the maximum open count designation command set in the effect transmission data storage area is transmitted to the effect control board 130.

The "round designation command" indicates the number of jackpot rounds according to the types of jackpots, "MODE" is set to "EAH", and DATA information is set according to the number of jackpot rounds. ..

In this round designation command, when one round game is started, the round designation command corresponding to the number of started rounds is transmitted to the effect control board 130. Specifically, when the opening / closing member 13b of the large winning opening 13a is opened in step S285 or step S296, a round designation command corresponding to the number of rounds at the time of opening is sent to the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. It is set. Immediately after that, the round designation command set in the effect transmission data storage area is transmitted to the effect control board 130. As a round designation command, when the first round game is performed, the first round designation command is transmitted, and when the second round game is performed, there is an open second round designation command.

The "large winning opening closing designation command (interval designation command)" indicates that the closing period (interval) of the large winning opening 13a between rounds is set, "MODE" is set to "EAH", and "DATA". Is set to "7FH".
This big winning opening closing designation command is transmitted to the staging control board 130 when the closing period (interval) of the big winning opening 13a between rounds starts. Specifically, in step S288, the large winning opening closing designation command is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. Immediately after that, the large winning opening closing designation command set in the effect transmission data storage area is transmitted to the effect control board 130.

The "opening designation command" indicates that various jackpot games (special game states) are started, "MODE" is set in "EBH", and DATA information is set according to the type of jackpot. ..

In this opening designation command, when various jackpots start, the opening designation command corresponding to the type of jackpot is transmitted to the staging control board 130. Specifically, at the start of the jackpot game process in step S274, the opening designation command corresponding to the jackpot type is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. Immediately after that, the opening designation command set in the effect transmission data storage area is transmitted to the effect control board 130. As the opening designation command, for example, there is an opening designation command for a probability variation jackpot when a probability variation jackpot is performed, and an opening designation command for a normal jackpot when a normal jackpot is performed.

The "ending designation command" indicates that various jackpot games have been completed, "MODE" is set by "ECH", and DATA information is set according to the type of jackpot.

In this ending designation command, when various jackpots are completed, the ending designation command corresponding to the type of jackpot is transmitted to the staging control board 130. Specifically, at the start of the jackpot game end process in step S298, the ending designation command corresponding to the jackpot type is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. Immediately after that, the ending designation command set in the effect transmission data storage area is transmitted to the effect control board 130. As the ending specification command, there is an ending specification command for a probability change jackpot in the case of a probability variation jackpot, and an ending specification command for a normal jackpot in the case of a normal jackpot.

The "normal symbol designation command" indicates the type of the normal symbol that is stopped and displayed on the normal symbol first display 19c. "MODE" is set to "EDH", and the DATA is set according to the type of the ordinary symbol. Information is set.
In this normal map designation command, when various normal symbols are determined and the variable display of the normal symbols is started, the normal map designation command corresponding to the determined normal symbol is transmitted to the staging control board 130. Specifically, when the variation display of the normal symbol is started in step S347, the normal symbol designation command corresponding to the determined normal symbol is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. Immediately after that, the normal map designation command set in the effect transmission data storage area is transmitted to the effect control board 130.

The "normal symbol fluctuation pattern designation command" indicates the fluctuation time of the normal symbol on the normal symbol first display 19c, and "MODE" is set to "EEH" to match the fluctuation time of various ordinary symbols. DATA information is set.
This normal symbol variation pattern specification command is a command for directing the normal symbol variation pattern specification command corresponding to the determined normal symbol variation time when the normal symbol variation display of the normal symbol first display 19c is started. It is sent to 130. Specifically, when the variation display of the normal symbol is started in step S349, the normal symbol variation pattern designation command corresponding to the determined variation time of the normal symbol is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. Will be done. Immediately after that, the normal map fluctuation pattern designation command set in the effect transmission data storage area is transmitted to the effect control board 130.

The "normal symbol storage designation command" indicates the number of reserved storages stored in the normal symbol holding number (G) storage area, "MODE" is set to "EFH", and DATA is set according to the number of reserved storages. Information is set.
In this normal symbol storage designation command, when the reserved storage number stored in the normal symbol hold number (G) storage area is switched, the normal symbol storage designation command corresponding to the hold storage number is transmitted to the effect control board 130. .. Specifically, when the value stored in the normal symbol hold number (G) storage area increases or decreases in step S177 or step S345, the normal symbol storage designation command corresponding to the hold storage number after the increase or decrease is the main. It is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the RAM 110c. Immediately after that, the normal symbol storage designation command set in the effect transmission data storage area is transmitted to the effect control board 130.

The "game state designation command" indicates the game state of whether or not it is a high-probability game state and whether or not it is a time-saving game state. "MODE" is set to "FAH", and the low-probability game state is set. In addition, "DATA" is set to "10H" in the non-time-saving gaming state, and "DATA" is set to "11H" in the low-probability gaming state and the time-saving gaming state, and the high-probability gaming state and the non-time-saving gaming state. If so, "DATA" is set to "12H", and if it is a high-probability gaming state and a time-saving gaming state, "DATA" is set to "13H".

This game state specification command is produced by the game state specification command corresponding to the game state at the time of executing the initialization process, at the start of the change of the special symbol, at the end of the change of the special symbol, at the start of the jackpot game, and at the end of the jackpot. It is transmitted to the control board 130. Specifically, when the RAM clear process (initialization process) is performed, when the variation display of the special symbol is started in the step S210, the high probability game flag, the number of high probability games, and the time saving game are started in the step S263. When there is a possibility that the flag and the number of time-saving games (J) have changed, the high-probability game flag, the number of high-probability games, the time-saving game flag, and the number of time-saving games (J) are currently set in step S326. The game state designation command corresponding to the game state of is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. Immediately after that, the game state designation command set in the effect transmission data storage area is transmitted to the effect control board 130.

In the "power-on designation command" and "power recovery designation command", when the power is turned on to the gaming machine 1, the power-on designation command or the power recovery designation command is sent to the staging control board 130 according to the presence or absence of initialization of the main RAM 110c. Will be sent.
The "power-on designation command" indicates that the power-on to the gaming machine 1 involves the initialization of the main RAM 110c, and "MODE" is set to "FBH" and "DATA" is set to "00H". Has been done. Specifically, the power-on designation command is transmitted to the staging control board 130 when the RAM clear switch 58c is turned on and the information stored in the main RAM 110c is cleared.

The "power recovery designation command" indicates that turning on the power to the gaming machine 1 does not involve the initialization of the main RAM 110c, and the game when "MODE" is set to "FBH" and the power is cut off. If the state is a low-probability gaming state and a non-short-time gaming state, "DATA" is set to "01H", and if the state is a low-probability gaming state and a short-time gaming state, "DATA" is set to "02H", and the high probability is high. "DATA" is set to "03H" in the gaming state and the non-time saving gaming state, and "DATA" is set to "04H" in the high probability gaming state and the time saving gaming state. Specifically, the power recovery designation command is transmitted to the staging control board 130 when the RAM clear switch 58c is not turned on when the power is turned on.

The "customer waiting state specification command" indicates that the customer waiting state is set in which the special symbol is not displayed in a variable manner. "MODE" is set to "FBH" and "DATA" is set to "05H". It is set.
This customer waiting state specification command is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c when the customer wait state specification command is set in the customer waiting state in step S217, and then immediately set in the effect transmission data storage area. The customer waiting state designation command is transmitted to the staging control board 130.

The "setting value designation command" indicates the setting value set in the gaming machine 1, and specifically, after the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned on, a power-on designation command or a power recovery designation command is issued. After being transmitted, it is transmitted to the effect control board 130.

The "error designation command" indicates an error that has occurred in the gaming machine 1, "MODE" is set in "FDH", and "DATA" information is set according to the type of error.

This error designation command is used when a game ball is awarded to the second starting port 11a, when it is detected by the magnetic detection switch 58a or the radio wave detection switch 58b, when it is detected by the prize confirmation detection switch (not shown), or when the opening / closing door 3 is used. An error designation command corresponding to an error type is transmitted to the effect control board 130 when the saucer 5 is opened, when the saucer 5 is full, or when a payout abnormality occurs.

Specifically, when a magnetic / radio wave abnormality is determined in the abnormality determination process of step S109, when an abnormality prize is determined in the prize confirmation detection switch input process of step S126, an illegal entry is made in step S157. When the determination is made, when the payout control board 120 detects that the opening / closing door 3 is open, the saucer 5 is full, or the game ball is insufficient for payout, the error designation command corresponding to the error type is the effect of the main RAM 110c. Set in the transmission data storage area. Immediately after that, the error designation command set in the effect transmission data storage area is transmitted to the effect control board 130. As error specification commands, there are a magnetic anomaly error specification command corresponding to a magnetic anomaly and a full anomaly error specification command corresponding to the full tray 5.

The "error cancellation designation command" indicates that the error generated in the gaming machine 1 has been resolved, and "MODE" is set in "FEH", and the information of "DATA" is set according to the type of the resolved error. Is set.
In this error cancellation designation command, an error designation command corresponding to the type of error is transmitted to the staging control board 130 when the opening / closing door 3 is closed, the saucer 5 is full, and the payout abnormality is resolved.

Specifically, when the payout control board 120 detects that the opening / closing door 3 is closed, the saucer 5 is full, and the shortage of game balls to be paid out is solved, the error cancellation designation corresponding to the type of the canceled error is detected. The command is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. Immediately after that, the error designation command set in the effect transmission data storage area is transmitted to the effect control board 130.

Next, the processing executed by the sub CPU 130a of the staging control unit 130m will be described.

(Main processing of the staging control unit)
FIG. 32 is a flowchart illustrating the main process by the staging control unit 130 m.
When the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board 160, a system reset occurs in the sub CPU 130a, and the sub 130a performs the following main processing.

First, in step S510, the sub CPU 130a sets an interrupt prohibition that prohibits the timer interrupt process.
In step S520, the sub CPU 130a performs an initialization process. In this process, the sub CPU 130a reads the main processing program from the sub ROM 130b and initializes and sets the flags and the like stored in the sub RAM 130c in response to the power being turned on.

At this time, the sub CPU 130a includes image display devices 16 and 18, audio output device 9, effect button device 6A (button drive motor 6c, button vibration motor 6d, button light emitting LED 6e), effect lever device 6C (lever vibration motor 6j, lever). The light emitting LED 6k), the panel drive device 17 (movable effect members 17A to 17C, stepping motor), the panel lighting device 23, the frame lighting device 27, the winning opening lamp NR, and the like are controlled. Then, after receiving the initialization OK signal for the initialization instruction signal from both the image control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, the process is transferred to step S530.

In step S530, the sub CPU 130a sets an interrupt permission that permits timer interruption.
In step S540, the sub CPU 130a performs a random number update process for staging. In this process, the sub CPU 130a performs a process of updating various random value values stored in the sub RAM 130c. After that, the process of step S540 is repeated until the predetermined interrupt process is performed.

(Timer interrupt processing of the staging control unit)
FIG. 33 is a flowchart illustrating a timer interrupt process by the staging control unit 130 m.
A clock pulse generation circuit for reset provided in the effect control unit 130 m generates a clock pulse at a predetermined cycle (2 ms), reads a timer interrupt processing program, and executes the timer interrupt process of the effect control unit 130 m. To.

In step S601, the sub CPU 130a saves the information stored in the register of the sub CPU 130a to the stack area.
In step S602, the sub CPU 130a updates various timer counters used by the staging control unit 130m.
In step S603, the sub CPU 130a performs command analysis processing. In this process, the sub CPU 130a performs a process of analyzing the command stored in the receive buffer of the sub RAM 130a. When the staging control unit 130m receives the command transmitted from the main control board 110, the command reception interrupt process of the staging control unit 130m occurs, and the received command is stored in the reception buffer. After that, the analysis process of the command received in step S603 is performed.

In step S604, the sub CPU 130a has a special symbol second display 20a, 20b, a normal symbol second display 20c, a special symbol hold second display 20d, 20e, a normal symbol hold second display 20f, and a right-handed second display. Data creation processing of various display control data to be output to the display 20g is performed.

In step S605, the sub CPU 130a performs a command output process of transmitting various data set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c to the image control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150. Further, the display output process for outputting the signal of the display control data created in step S605 is performed.
In step S606, the sub CPU 130a restores the information saved in step S601 to the register of the sub CPU 130a.

(Command analysis processing)
34 and 35 are flowcharts for explaining the command analysis process of the command received from the main control board 110 by the staging control unit 130m.
First, in step S610, the sub CPU 130a confirms whether or not the received command is stored in the reception buffer. If there is no command in the receive buffer (step S610; No), the sub CPU 130a ends the command analysis process this time, and if there is a command in the receive buffer (step S610; Yes), the sub CPU 130a shifts the process to step S611.

In step S611, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the command stored in the receive buffer is an error designation command, and if it is determined to be an error designation command (step S611; Yes), processing is performed in step S612. If it is determined that the command is not an error specification command (step S611; No), the process is transferred to step S613.

In step S612, the sub CPU 130a performs an error notification process for notifying that an error related to the security of the gaming machine 1 has occurred. In this error notification processing, the type of the error specification command is determined, the error notification effect corresponding to the type of the error that has occurred is determined, the determined error notification effect is set in the error notification effect storage area, and the determined error notification effect is determined. The error notification designation command based on the determined error notification effect is set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c in order to transmit the information of the above to the image control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150.

In step S613, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the command stored in the receive buffer is an error cancellation designation command, and if it is determined that the command is an error cancellation designation command (step S613; Yes), the sub CPU 130a determines in step S614. When the process is transferred and it is determined that the command is not an error release designation command (step S613; No), the process is transferred to step S615.

In step S614, the sub CPU 130a performs an error notification release process for canceling the error notification during execution. In this error notification release processing, the type of the error cancellation specification command is determined, the error notification effect corresponding to the resolved error type is cleared from the error notification effect storage area, and the release information of the resolved error notification effect is displayed in the image control unit. 140, in order to transmit to the lamp control unit 150, the error notification release designation command based on the resolved error notification effect is set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c.

In step S615, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the command stored in the receive buffer is a power-on designation command, and if it is determined that the command is a power-on designation command (step S615; Yes), step S616 is performed. When the process is transferred and it is determined that the command is not a power-on designation command (step S616; No), the process is transferred to step S617.

In step S616, the sub CPU 130a performs a power-on process. In this process, the RAM clear switch 58c is turned on, the information stored in the main RAM 110c is initialized (RAM cleared), and the information of the power-on effect for notifying that the power is turned on is transmitted to the image control unit 140 and the lamp. In order to transmit to the control unit 150, the power-on notification designation command is set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c.

In step S617, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the command stored in the receive buffer is a power recovery designation command, and if it is determined that the command is a power recovery designation command (step S617; Yes), the sub CPU 130a goes to step S618. When the process is transferred and it is determined that the command is not a power recovery designation command (step S617; No), the process is transferred to S619.

In step S618, the sub CPU 130a performs a power restoration process. In this process, in order to transmit the information of the power recovery effect for notifying that the RAM clear switch 58c is not turned on and the power is turned on to the image control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, the power recovery notification designation command is subordinated. Set in the transmission buffer of RAM 130c.

In step S619, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the command stored in the receive buffer is a customer waiting state specification command, and if it is determined that the command is a customer waiting state specification command (step S619; Yes), step S619. When the process is transferred to S620 and it is determined that the command is not a customer waiting command (step S619; No), the process is transferred to step S621.

In step S620, the sub CPU 130a performs a customer waiting effect process. In this process, 30 seconds or 60 seconds after receiving the customer waiting state designation command, the customer waiting demo image is displayed on the image display devices 16 and 18, or the power saving image is displayed.

In step S621, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the command stored in the receive buffer is a special symbol storage designation command, and if it is determined that the command is a special symbol storage designation command (step S621; Yes), step S621. When the process is transferred to S622 and it is determined that the command is not a special symbol storage designation command (step S621; No), the process is transferred to step S623.

In step S622, the sub CPU 130a analyzes the special figure holding storage number from the special symbol storage designation command, and sets the analyzed special figure holding storage number in the special figure holding storage number counter of the sub RAM 130c. I do.

In step S623, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the command stored in the receive buffer is a start opening winning designation command (look-ahead designation command), and determines that the command is a starting opening winning designation command (step S623). ; Yes), the process is transferred to step S624, and when it is determined that the command is not the start opening winning designation command (step S623; No), the process is transferred to step S627.

In step S624, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the display mode of the icon (hold icon, the variable icon) displayed on the image display device 16 is a special mode based on the content of the start winning opening designation command. Performs icon change notice determination processing to determine the type of.

Specifically, the result of the variation display of the special symbol corresponding to the command and the variation pattern are specified from the start winning opening designation command, and the display mode of the icon is changed from the normal mode to the special mode or the special mode according to the jackpot expectation. Determine a change scenario to change from to another special aspect. For example, the hold icon is displayed in white in the normal (default) display mode, blue in the special display mode 1, green in the special display mode 2, red in the special display mode 3, and a special character in the special display mode 4. Is set to. The jackpot expectation is higher in the order of normal display mode (white) <special display mode 1 (blue) <special display mode 2 (green) <special display mode 3 (red) <special display mode 4 (special character icon). It is supposed to be. Then, an icon display designation command for displaying the icon corresponding to the determined change scenario on the first image display device 16 is set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c.

In step S625, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not to execute the continuous advance notice effect over the variation display (variation effect) of one or a plurality of special symbols based on the preliminary determination result, and the type of the continuous advance notice effect to be executed. Performs continuous notice production decision processing. again,

The "continuous notice effect" is a kind of pre-reading advance notice effect that makes the player expect the jackpot game to be executed by executing a predetermined effect over one or a plurality of variable effects.

In step S626, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not to execute the lamp change effect by the winning opening lamp NR over the variation display (variation effect) of one or a plurality of special symbols based on the preliminary determination result, and wins a prize when the lamp change effect is executed. A lamp change effect determination process for determining the type of change in the light emission mode of the mouth lamp (emission color, lighting / blinking) is performed.
The "ramp change effect" is a jackpot game executed for the player by changing the light emission mode of the winning opening lamp NR (white → blue, blue → red, etc.) over one or a plurality of variation effects. It is a kind of pre-reading notice production that makes you expect that.
According to the lamp change effect, the lamp change effect is executed by changing the light emission mode (emission color, lighting / blinking) of the winning port lamp NR in response to the change of the icon. Therefore, the effect of the effect can be enhanced by the synergistic effect with the effect of changing the icon, and the interest of the game can be improved.

In step S627, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the command stored in the receive buffer is a special figure variation pattern specification command, and determines that the command is a special figure variation pattern specification command (step S627; Yes). , The process is transferred to step S628, and when it is determined that the command is not a special figure fluctuation pattern designation command (step S627; No), the process is transferred to step S630.

In step S628, the sub CPU 130a performs a variation effect pattern determination process for determining one variation effect pattern from a plurality of types of variation effect patterns with reference to the variation effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 42 or FIG. 43.

In step S629, the sub CPU 130a performs a jackpot announcement effect determination process for determining a jackpot advancer effect based on the variation effect pattern to be executed.
The "big hit notice effect" is an effect that suggests that the big hit game may be executed during the variable effect.

In step S630, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the command stored in the receive buffer is a staging symbol designation command, and if it is determined that the command is a staging symbol designation command (step S630; Yes), step S631 is performed. When the process is transferred and it is determined that the command is not the effect symbol designation command (step S630; No), the process is transferred to step S632.

In step S631, the sub CPU 130a performs an effect symbol determination process for determining the effect symbol 16a to be stopped and displayed on the image display device 16 based on the content of the received effect symbol designation command. In the staging symbol determination process, the staging symbol designation command is analyzed to determine the staging symbol data constituting the combination of the staging symbols 16a according to the presence or absence of the jackpot and the type of the jackpot, and the determined staging symbol data is stored in the staging symbol storage area. Set to.

In step S632, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the command stored in the receive buffer is a special symbol confirmation command, and if it is determined that the command is a special symbol confirmation command (step S632; Yes), step S633 is performed. When the process is transferred and it is determined that the command is not a special symbol confirmation command (step S632; No), the process is transferred to step S634.

In step S633, the sub CPU 130a performs the effect symbol fluctuation stop process. In the effect symbol fluctuation stop process, in order to stop and display the variation of the effect symbol, the data based on the effect symbol data determined in step S631 and the stop instruction data for stopping and displaying the effect symbol 16a are transmitted to the sub RAM 130c. Set in the buffer.

In step 634, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the command stored in the receive buffer is a normal symbol storage designation command, and if it is determined that the command is a normal symbol storage designation command (step S634; Yes), step. When the process is transferred to S635 and it is determined that the command is not a normal symbol memory designation command (step S634; No), the process is transferred to step S636.

In step S635, the sub CPU 130a analyzes the normal symbol hold storage number from the normal symbol storage designation command, and displays the analyzed normal symbol hold storage number on the normal symbol hold second display 20c. Is set in a predetermined processing area.

As shown in FIG. 35, in step S636, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the command stored in the receive buffer is a normal map variation pattern specification command, and determines that the command is a normal map variation pattern specification command. If (step S636; Yes), the process is transferred to step S637, and if it is determined that the command is not a normal map fluctuation pattern specification command (step S636; No), the process is transferred to step S638.
In step S637, the sub CPU 130a performs a normal map variation effect pattern determination process for determining one normal map variation effect pattern from a plurality of types of normal map variation effect patterns based on the received normal map variation pattern designation command. ..

In step S638, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the command stored in the receive buffer is a normal symbol confirmation command, and if it is determined that the command is a normal symbol confirmation command (step S638; Yes), in step S638. When the process is transferred and it is determined that the command is not a normal symbol confirmation command (step S638; No), the process is transferred to step S640.
In step S639, the sub CPU 130a performs a normal symbol fluctuation stop process. In the normal symbol fluctuation stop process, in order to stop and display the normal symbol effect symbol, the effect symbol data corresponding to the received normal symbol confirmation command and the stop instruction data for stopping and displaying the normal symbol effect symbol are transmitted to the sub RAM 130c. Set in the buffer.

In step S640, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the command stored in the receive buffer is a game state specification command, and if it is determined that the command is a game state specification command (step S640; Yes), step S641 is performed. When the process is transferred and it is determined that the command is not a game state specification command (step S640; No), the process is transferred to step S643.
In step S641, the sub CPU 130a sets the game state based on the received game state designation command in the game state storage area in the sub RAM 130c.

In step S642, the sub CPU 130 performs an effect mode setting process for setting any of a plurality of effect modes A to G related to the execution of the variable effect.
The effect mode notifies the currently set game state. Specifically, in the low-probability non-time-saving gaming state, one of the normal modes A to C for notifying that the current gaming state is the low-probability non-time-saving gaming state is set, and the high-probability time-saving gaming state is set. Sets a probability variation mode D or E to notify that the current gaming state is a high-probability time-saving gaming state, and notifies that the current gaming state is a low-probability time-saving gaming state when the current gaming state is a low-probability time-saving gaming state. Set the time saving mode F or G.

In setting the effect mode corresponding to the current game state, for example, a hold icon image for displaying an effect image for notifying the current game information on the image display device 16 and / or displaying the effect image on the image display device 16. By making the display mode of the variable icon image, background image, character image, and effect design image different from the display mode in other effect modes, the current game state (low probability non-time saving game state, low probability time saving game state, high accuracy). Notify the time-saving game state).

For example, in the normal mode A, a background image in the image of a mountain, and a staging pattern image in a display mode composed of a number (identification section) and a character image (decorative section) are displayed, while in the probability variation mode D. Displays a background image in which the image of the sea is imaged, and an effect design image in a display mode composed of only numbers (identification portions). In addition, the right-handed promotion image (the image of "right-handed →") is displayed in the probability variation modes D and E and the time-saving modes F and G, while the right-handed promotion image is displayed in the normal modes A to C. Not done.

If the game ball wins in the first starting port 10a in the probabilistic mode D, E (time saving mode F, G), the effect pattern image and the background image are displayed, but the hold icon image and the variable icon are displayed. The image is not displayed (display is restricted).
That is, when the game ball wins the first starting port 10 during the normal modes A to C, or when the game ball wins the first starting port 10 during the probabilistic / time-saving modes D to G, or when the game ball wins the first starting port 10 during the normal modes A to C. When the game ball wins a prize in the second starting port 11a during D to G, the reserved image and the variable icon image are more likely to be displayed.
If the game is played with the aim of winning the first starting port 10 during the probability change / time saving modes D to G (left-handed game), the right-handed promotion image is continuously displayed, and "right-handed" is also displayed. The message "Please do" is displayed, and the voice "Please hit right" is output.

For example, as a predetermined switching condition for switching from the normal mode A to the normal mode B, for example, the predetermined number of guaranteed stays has elapsed, or the mode shifts after the predetermined number of guaranteed stays has elapsed. Winning a lottery can be mentioned. Specifically, when the normal mode A is set, the next game (21 from the start of the game in the normal mode A) is performed on condition that the number of times the game is played in the normal mode A is 20 times. Switch from the rotation) to the normal mode B. Alternatively, when the normal mode A is set, after the number of times the game is played in the normal mode A is 20 times, the predetermined game is started from the next game (21st rotation from the start of the game in the normal mode A). The mode transition lottery with the winning probability (for example, 1/5) is executed at each start of one game, and on the condition that the mode transition lottery is won, the game won in the mode transition lottery is changed from the normal mode A to the normal mode. It may be switched to B. The same applies to the probability variation mode and the time saving mode.

In step S643, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the command stored in the receive buffer is an opening designation command, and if it is determined to be an opening designation command (step S643; Yes), processing is performed in step S644. If it is determined that the command is not the opening designation command (step S643; No), the process is transferred to step S645.

In step S644, the sub CPU 130a performs a jackpot effect pattern determination process for determining a jackpot start effect pattern. In the jackpot effect pattern determination process, the jackpot start effect pattern is determined based on the opening designation command, the determined jackpot start effect pattern is set in the effect pattern storage area, and the information of the determined jackpot effect pattern is input to the image control unit 140. , The corresponding data is set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c for transmission to the lamp control unit 150.

In step S645, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the command stored in the receive buffer is a round designation command, and if it is determined to be a round designation command (step S645; Yes), processing is performed in step S646. If it is determined that the command is not a round designation command (step S645; No), the process is transferred to step S647.

In step S646, the sub CPU 130a performs the effect pattern determination process during the round to determine the jackpot effect pattern. In the process of determining the effect pattern during the round, the effect pattern during the round is determined for each round to be started, based on the round designation command having information on how many round games are started. Then, the determined effect pattern during the round is set in the effect pattern storage area, and the corresponding data is set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c in order to transmit the information of the effect pattern to the image control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150. ..

In step S647, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the command stored in the receive buffer is an ending designation command, and if it is determined to be an ending designation command (step S647; Yes), processing is performed in step S648. If it is determined that the command is not the ending designation command (step S647; No), the command analysis process this time is terminated.

In step S648, the sub CPU 130a performs a jackpot end effect pattern determination process for determining a jackpot end effect pattern. In the jackpot end effect pattern determination process, the jackpot end effect pattern is determined based on the ending specification command, the determined jackpot end effect pattern is set in the effect pattern storage area, and the information of the determined jackpot end effect pattern is input to the image control unit. The corresponding data is set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c for transmission to the 140 and the lamp control unit 150.

(Continuous notice production decision processing)
FIG. 36 is a flowchart illustrating a continuous advance notice effect determination process by the effect control unit 130 m.
When the start winning opening designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is stored in the reception buffer, the sub CPU 130a executes the continuous advance notice effect determination process.

In step S651, the sub CPU 130a refers to the received start winning opening designation command, and grasps whether or not it is a big hit, the type of the big hit game, and the effect content (special figure scheduled variation pattern).
In step S652, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the continuous advance notice effect is currently feasible period, and if it is determined that the continuous advance notice effect is feasible period (step S652; Yes), the process is performed in step S653. If it is determined that the continuous advance notice effect is not an executable period (step S652; No), the process is transferred to step S665.

Examples of the continuous advance notice effect include a character action advance notice effect, an effect advance notice effect, a button vibration advance notice effect, and a look-ahead zone effect.
The "feature motion notice effect" is a big hit by executing an operation effect in which any one of the movable effect members 17A to 17C is operated in a predetermined mode at the timing immediately after the start of each variation effect in one or a plurality of variation effects. It is a production that intermittently suggests the degree of expectation.

The "effect notice effect" executes an effect effect that displays an effect image of a predetermined color (blue, green, red, etc.) around the effect symbol 16a at the timing immediately after the start of each variation effect in one or more variation effects. This is a production that intermittently suggests the degree of expectation of a big hit.
"Button vibration notice effect (button vibration notice at the start of fluctuation)" is expected to be a big hit by executing the vibration effect by the effect button 6a in a predetermined effect mode at the timing immediately after the start of each variation effect in one or more variation effects. It is a production that intermittently suggests the degree.
Button vibration notice The production mode is button vibration time (long-term vibration, short-time vibration), button vibration intensity (strong vibration, weak vibration), button light emission (white, red, rainbow light emission), button vibration pattern. (Repeat vibration in small steps, only one vibration, etc.), vibration operation of movable effect members 17A to 17C (weak vibration operation with small vibration width, strong vibration operation with large vibration width), or a combination of one or more. It is configured.

The "look-ahead zone effect" is an effect that continuously suggests the jackpot expectation by executing the effect in the zone for displaying the zone image from a predetermined timing in one or a plurality of variable effects.
In the "executable period of the continuous notice effect", there is nothing to execute the continuous notice effect in the advance hold, the jackpot game is not being executed, and the start opening prize designation command based on the winning of the first start opening 10 is received. If this is the case, the player is in the low-probability non-time-saving game state, and if the start port prize designation command based on the prize in the second start port 11a is received, the player is in the high-probability short-time game state or the low-probability non-time-saving game state. Can be mentioned.
As a continuous advance notice effect other than the above continuous advance notice effect, even if a light guide plate is arranged on the front side of the image display device 16 and the light guide plate emits blue or red light at the start of fluctuation, the light guide plate effect is executed. good. The expectation of a big hit is higher when the light guide plate emits red light than when it emits blue light.

In step S653, the sub CPU 130a selects a continuous advance notice effect type determination table according to the current effect mode.
In step S654, the sub CPU 130a determines the type of the continuous advance notice effect (whether or not the continuous advance notice effect is executed, the type of the continuous advance notice effect to be executed) with reference to the continuous advance notice effect type determination table.

In step S655, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not it is a continuous advance notice type for executing the continuous advance notice effect, and if it is determined to execute the continuous advance notice effect (step S655; Yes), the process is transferred to step S656 and continuous. When it is determined that the advance notice effect is not executed (step S655; No), the process is transferred to step S665.
In step S656, the sub CPU 130a selects a continuous advance notice scenario determination table according to the current effect mode, and shifts the process to step S657.

In step S657, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the continuous advance notice effect for executing the character operation notice effect is determined, and if it is determined to execute the character operation notice effect (step S657; Yes), step S658. When it is determined that the accessory operation notice effect is not executed (step S657; No), the process is transferred to step S659.
In step S658, the sub CPU 130a determines the advance notice scenario of the accessory operation advance notice effect with reference to the continuous advance notice scenario determination table, and sets it in the look-ahead information storage area of the sub RAM 130c.

In step S659, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the continuous advance notice effect for executing the effect advance notice effect is determined, and if it is determined to execute the effect advance notice effect (step S659; Yes), the process is transferred to step S660. If it is determined that the effect advance notice effect is not executed (step S659; No), the process is transferred to step S661.
In step S660, the sub CPU 130a determines the advance notice scenario of the effect advance notice effect with reference to the continuous advance notice scenario determination table, and sets it in the look-ahead information storage area of the sub RAM 130c.

In step S661, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the continuous advance notice effect for executing the vibration advance notice effect is determined, and if it is determined to execute the vibration advance notice effect (step S661; Yes), the process is transferred to step S662. When it is determined that the vibration warning effect is not executed (step S661; No), the process is transferred to step S662.
In step S662, the sub CPU 130a determines the advance notice scenario of the vibration advance notice effect with reference to the continuous advance notice scenario determination table, and sets it in the look-ahead information storage area of the sub RAM 130c.

In step S663, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the continuous advance notice effect for executing the look-ahead zone effect is determined, and if it is determined to execute the look-ahead zone effect (step S663; Yes), the process is transferred to step S664. If it is determined that the look-ahead zone effect is not executed (step S663; No), the continuous advance notice effect determination process this time is terminated.

In step S665, the sub CPU 130a determines a non-notice scenario (notice scenario indicating that the continuous notice effect is not executed) of the continuous notice effect, sets it in the look-ahead information storage area of the sub RAM 130c, and sets the continuous notice effect this time. End the decision process.

Examples of the notice effect executed based on the non-notice scenario set in step S665 include a button vibration notice effect at the time of winning, a lever vibration notice effect at the time of winning, and a lever operation notice effect.
The "winning button / lever vibration notice effect" is a vibration effect (effect) in which the effect button 6a / effect lever 6h is vibrated in a predetermined effect mode at the timing when the game ball wins the first starting port 10 in the normal modes A to C. It is an effect that suggests the degree of expectation of a big hit by executing the button 6a / the effective period of the effect lever 6h and the vibration effect without displaying the operation promotion image). It should be noted that the big hit expectation is higher in the lever vibration notice effect at the time of winning than in the button vibration notice effect at the time of winning.

In the case of the button vibration notice effect at the time of winning, the button vibration motor 6d for vibrating the effect button 6a vibrates strongly for 3 seconds, the effect button 6a blinks red, and the winning sound effect is output. In the normal modes A to C, the button vibration warning effect at the time of winning is the case where the SP / SPSP reach is scheduled to be executed (look-ahead result) rather than the case where the normal reach effect is scheduled to be executed (look-ahead result). Is set so that it is easy to execute (execution rate is high). In other words, it is suggested that the jackpot expectation is high when the button vibration notice effect at the time of winning is executed.
In the case of the lever vibration warning effect at the time of winning, the lever vibration motor 6j for vibrating the effect lever 6h vibrates strongly for only 2 seconds, the effect lever 6h blinks in blue, and the winning effect sound is output. In the normal modes A to C, the winning effect lever vibration warning effect is when the SP / SPSP reach is scheduled to be executed (look-ahead result) rather than when the normal reach effect is scheduled to be executed (look-ahead result). It is set so that it is easier to execute (the execution rate is higher). In other words, it is suggested that the jackpot expectation is high when the lever vibration notice effect at the time of winning is executed.

In addition, based on the pre-judgment table of FIG. 13, the button vibration warning effect at the time of winning is the second starting opening 11a when the game ball wins the first starting opening 10 in the probability variation / time saving modes D to G. It is set so that it is harder to execute than when a game ball wins a prize.
Further, the case where the game ball wins the first starting port 10 during the probability change / time saving modes D to G is executed as compared with the case where the game ball wins the first starting port 10 during the normal modes A to C. It is set to be difficult.

(Continuous notice production type determination table)
FIG. 37 is a diagram showing a continuous advance notice effect type determination table referred to for determining the type of continuous advance notice effect in the normal modes A to C (low probability non-time saving gaming state (normal game state)).
FIG. 38 shows a continuous advance notice effect referred to for determining the type of the continuous advance notice effect in the probability variation modes D and E and the time reduction modes F and G (high probability time reduction game state, low probability time reduction game state (specific game state)). It is a figure which shows the type determination table.

As shown in FIGS. 37 and 38, the continuous advance notice effect type determination table includes a start winning opening designation command (special figure schedule fluctuation pattern), a selection rate (%) for each continuous advance notice effect type, and a continuous advance notice effect to be selected. The types are associated.

The types of continuous advance notice effects include "non-execution" that does not execute the continuous advance notice effect, "feature action advance notice effect" that executes one of multiple types of continuous advance notice effects, "effect notice effect", and "button vibration". "Advance notice effect", "Look-ahead zone effect", "Effect advance notice effect & button vibration advance notice effect", "Character action advance notice effect & Look-ahead zone effect" are provided. ing.

For example, in the normal mode, if the first start winning opening designation command (special figure scheduled fluctuation pattern) is lost and the SP reach effect is executed, "non-execution" is determined at 85% and 5 % Is the "effect notice effect", 4% is the "character movement notice effect", 3% is the "button vibration advance notice", and 2% is the "look-ahead zone effect". "Effect notice effect & button vibration notice effect" is decided at 1%. That is, in the normal mode, when the game ball wins the first starting port 10 and the SP reach effect is executed, the continuous advance notice by one type of advance notice effect is rather than the continuous advance notice effect by multiple types of advance notice effect. The production is easier to perform.

For example, in the probabilistic change / time saving mode, if the first start winning opening designation command (special figure scheduled fluctuation pattern) is missed and the normal fluctuation effect is executed, "non-execution" is determined in 99% and "non-execution" is determined in 1%. "Effect notice production" is decided. That is, in the probabilistic change / time saving mode, if the game ball is won in the first starting port 10 and the normal variation effect is executed, it is difficult to execute the continuous advance notice effect.

(Continuous notice production scenario decision table)
FIG. 39 is a diagram showing a continuous advance notice scenario determination table for normal modes A to C (low probability non-time saving gaming state (normal gaming state)).
FIG. 40 is a diagram showing a continuous advance notice scenario determination table for probability variation modes D and E and time saving modes F and G (high probability time saving gaming state, low probability time saving gaming state (specific gaming state)).

In the continuous notice scenario determination table, the number of reserved special symbols, the start winning opening designation command (special figure schedule fluctuation pattern), the selection rate (%) of each notice scenario, and the selected notice scenario are associated with each other for reference. In each scenario, the pre-variations (4 pre-variations, 3 pre-variations, 2 pre-variations, 1 pre-variations) and the production mode of the continuous advance notice effect in the fluctuations are described.

The "preliminary variation" indicates a variation display (variation effect) executed based on the special figure determination information stored before the special figure determination information corresponding to the newly received start winning opening designation command. ..
The “variation” indicates a variation display (variation effect) executed based on the special figure determination information corresponding to the newly received start winning opening designation command.

The mode of "weak notice" differs depending on the type of continuous notice effect.
In the case of the character movement advance notice effect, the first movable effect member 17A emits blue light and the blade portion housed in the sheath portion moves to the left. It is output. The effect lever 6h may be operated up and down as an effect of notifying the operation of the accessory. In this case, the effect lever 6h performs a weak operation with a small vertical movement width.
In the case of the effect preview effect, the blue effect image is displayed around the effect symbol 16a and the blue effect sound effect is output.
In the case of the button vibration warning effect, the button vibration motor 6d for vibrating the effect button 6a vibrates slightly for one second, and the effect button 6a blinks in white.
In the case of the look-ahead zone effect, the blue zone image is displayed and the zone sound effect is output.

The mode of "strong notice" differs depending on the type of continuous notice effect. In addition, "strong notice" has a higher expectation of big hit than "weak notice".
In the case of the character movement advance notice effect, the third movable effect member 17C emits red light, and the blade portion housed in the sheath portion moves up and down to perform a strong motion with a large movement width, and a strong motion sound effect is emitted. It is output. The effect lever 6h may be operated up and down as an effect of notifying the operation of the accessory. In this case, the effect lever 6h performs a strong operation with a large vertical movement width.
In the case of the effect preview effect, the red effect image is displayed around the effect symbol 16a, and the red effect sound effect different from the blue effect sound effect is output.
In the case of the button vibration warning effect, the button vibration motor 6d for vibrating the effect button 6a vibrates strongly for only 3 seconds, and the effect button 6a blinks in red.
In the case of the look-ahead zone effect, a red thermal zone image is displayed and a thermal zone sound effect different from the zone sound effect is output.

The continuous notice scenario includes a scenario in which a weak notice or a strong notice is not executed during the advance change and a weak notice or a strong notice is executed during the change (for example, scenario 11), or a scenario during the advance change and the change. A scenario (for example, scenario 22) in which a weak notice or a strong notice is executed is set in.

The first feature of the various tables related to the continuous advance notice effect shown in FIGS. 37 to 40 is that a plurality of types of continuous advance notice effect is executed rather than one type of continuous advance notice effect. However, the expectation of a big hit is high. Therefore, the expectation of the player can be effectively increased, and the interest of the game can be improved.

The second feature of the various tables related to the continuous advance notice effect shown in FIGS. 37 to 40 is that the probability variation modes D and E (time saving modes F and G) are more continuous advance notice effects than the normal modes A to C. Is easy to execute (execution rate is high). Therefore, the playability can be different depending on the type of the production mode, and the fun of the game can be improved.

It should be noted that, instead of making the execution ratio of the continuous advance notice effect different between the normal modes A to C and the probability variation / time saving modes D to G, for example, the normal mode B has a continuous advance notice effect rather than the normal mode A. The execution ratio of the continuous advance notice effect may be different between the normal modes A and C, for example, the continuous advance notice effect may be executed in the probability change mode E rather than the probability change mode D. For example, the execution ratio of the continuous advance notice effect may be different between the probabilistic change / time saving modes D to G. By doing so, the jackpot expectation of the continuous advance notice effect changes between the same effect modes, so that it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The third feature of the various tables related to the continuous advance notice effect shown in FIGS. 37 to 40 is the probability change / time reduction as compared with the case where the normal reach effect is scheduled to be executed (pre-reading result) in the normal modes A to C. In modes D to G, when the normal reach effect is scheduled to be executed (pre-reading result), the continuous advance notice effect (here, the effect advance notice effect and the character operation advance notice effect) is more likely to be executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the fluctuation effect from becoming monotonous in the probabilistic variation / time reduction modes D to G, which tend to have more (super) shortening fluctuations than in the normal modes A to C, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Become.

The fourth feature of the various tables related to the continuous advance notice effect shown in FIGS. 37 to 40 is that the SP reach effect is scheduled to be executed (pre-reading result) in the normal modes A to C. In the time saving modes D to G, when the SP reach effect is scheduled to be executed (pre-reading result), the continuous advance notice effect (here, the effect advance notice effect, the character operation advance notice effect, the look-ahead zone effect) is more likely to be executed. .. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the fluctuation effect from becoming monotonous in the probability variation / time reduction mode in which the (super) shortening variation tends to be larger than in the normal modes A to C, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The fifth feature of the various tables related to the continuous advance notice effect shown in FIGS. 37 to 40 is the probability change / time reduction as compared with the case where the SPSP reach effect is scheduled to be executed in the normal modes A to C (look-ahead result). When the SPSP reach effect is scheduled to be executed (pre-reading result) in the modes D to G, the continuous advance notice effect (here, the effect advance notice effect, the character operation advance notice effect, and the look-ahead zone effect) is more likely to be executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the variation effect from becoming monotonous in the probability variation / time reduction modes D to G, in which the ultra-shortening variation tends to be larger than in the normal modes A to C, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The sixth feature of the various tables related to the continuous notice effect shown in FIGS. 37 to 40 is that the full rotation reach effect is scheduled to be executed in the normal modes A to C (pre-reading result). When the full rotation reach effect is scheduled to be executed (pre-reading result) in the time saving modes D to G, the continuous advance notice effect (here, the character operation advance notice effect and the look-ahead zone effect) is more likely to be executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the variation effect from becoming monotonous in the probability variation / time reduction mode in which the ultra-shortening variation is more likely to occur than in the normal modes A to C, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The seventh feature of the various tables related to the continuous advance notice effect shown in FIGS. 37 to 40 is that the normal modes A to C have a button vibration advance notice effect (effect button 6a) rather than the probability variation / time saving modes D to G. It is easy to execute the vibration effect without the validity period (display of the operation promotion image) (high execution rate = different jackpot expectations). Therefore, in the normal modes A to C, where the stay period tends to be longer than the probability change / time saving modes D to G, it is possible to make it easier for the player to experience the button vibration warning effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Become. Further, in the probabilistic / time-saving modes D to G, in which the fluctuation time tends to be shorter than in the normal modes A to C, the button vibration warning effect can be given a rarity, and the interest of the game can be improved.

It should be noted that the button vibration warning effect may be more easily executed (execution ratio is higher) in the probabilistic change / time saving modes D to G than in the normal modes A to C. Further, in the low probability non-time saving gaming state, the normal mode A makes it easier to execute the look-ahead continuous effect than the normal mode B or C, so that the button vibration warning effect is produced between the normal modes A to C. The execution ratio may be different, and in the high-accuracy time-shortening gaming state or the low-accuracy time-saving gaming state, the button vibration warning effect is executed in the probability variation mode D rather than the probability variation / time reduction modes E to G. By making it easier, the execution ratio of the button vibration warning effect may be different between the probabilistic change / time saving modes D to G. By doing so, it is possible to make the jackpot expectation different when the button vibration warning effect is executed between the effect modes, so that it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As the eighth feature of the various tables related to the continuous notice effect shown in FIGS. 37 to 40, a specific reach effect (normal reach effect, SP reach effect, SPSP reach effect) is scheduled to be executed in the normal modes A to C. A specific reach effect (normal reach effect, SP reach effect, SPSP reach effect) is scheduled to be executed (pre-reading result) in the probability change / time saving modes D to G (specific game state) than in the case of (look-ahead result). In the case, it is more difficult to execute the button vibration warning effect (execution rate is low). Therefore, in the probabilistic / time-saving modes D to G, in which the fluctuation time tends to be shorter than in the normal modes A to C, the button vibration warning effect can be given a rarity, and the interest of the game can be improved.

As the ninth feature of the various tables related to the continuous advance notice effect shown in FIGS. 37 to 40, the accessory operation advance notice effect is executed in the probabilistic change / time saving modes D to G than in the normal modes A to C. Easy (high execution rate). Therefore, in the probabilistic / time-saving modes D to G, in which the fluctuation time tends to be shorter than in the normal modes A to C, it is possible to give the character action advance notice effect a rarity, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. ..

The tenth feature of the various tables related to the continuous notice effect shown in FIGS. 37 to 40 is that the probability change / When the continuous notice effect that ends with one variable effect is executed in the time saving modes D to G, the reach effect (normal reach effect, SP reach effect, SPSP reach effect) is performed in the variable effect that is the target of the continuous advance notice effect. ) Is difficult to execute (the rate of execution is low). Therefore, the playability can be different depending on the type of the production mode, and the fun of the game can be improved.

The eleventh feature of the various tables related to the continuous advance notice effect shown in FIGS. 37 to 40 is that the continuous advance notice effect that ends with two variable effect effects is executed in the probability variation / time saving modes D to G. When the continuous notice effect that ends with two variable effects is executed in the normal modes A to C, the reach effect (normal reach effect, SP reach effect, SPSP reach effect) is performed in the variable effect that is the target of the continuous advance notice effect. ) Is easy to execute. Therefore, the playability can be different depending on the type of the production mode, and the fun of the game can be improved.

The twelfth feature of the various tables related to the continuous advance notice effect shown in FIGS. 37 to 40 is that when the continuous advance notice effect can be executed over a plurality of variable effects (the number of reservations is 2 to 4), the probability changes. When the continuous advance notice effect of only one variable effect is executed in the normal modes A to C, rather than the case where the continuous advance notice effect of only one variable effect is executed in the modes D to G (specific game state). It is easier for the reach effect (normal reach effect, SP reach effect, SPSP reach effect) to be executed in the variable effect that is the target of the continuous advance notice effect. Therefore, the playability can be different depending on the type of the production mode, and the fun of the game can be improved.

The thirteenth feature of the various tables related to the continuous advance notice effect shown in FIGS. 37 to 40 is that when the continuous advance notice effect can be executed over a plurality of variable effects (the number of reservations is 2 to 4), it is normal. When the continuous advance notice effect of only one variation effect is executed in the probabilistic mode D to G (specific game state) than when the continuous advance notice effect of only one variation effect is executed in the modes A to C. It is easier to perform a normal variable effect without a reach effect. Therefore, the playability can be different depending on the type of the production mode, and the fun of the game can be improved.

The fourteenth feature of the various tables related to the continuous advance notice effect shown in FIGS. 37 to 40 is the normal mode rather than the case where the continuous advance notice effect over three variable effect effects is executed in the probability variation / time saving modes D to G. When the continuous notice effect over three times of variable effect is executed in A to C, the reach effect (normal reach effect, SP reach effect, SPSP reach effect) is executed in the variable effect that is the target of the advance notice of the continuous advance notice effect. easy. Therefore, the playability can be different depending on the type of the production mode, and the fun of the game can be improved.

The fifteenth feature of the various tables related to the continuous advance notice effect shown in FIGS. 37 to 40 is the probability variation / time saving mode as compared with the case where the continuous advance notice effect over three variable effects is executed in the normal modes A to C. In the case where the continuous advance notice effect over three times of the variable effect is executed in D to G, the normal variable effect without the reach effect is more likely to be executed in the variable effect to be the advance notice of the continuous advance notice effect. Therefore, the playability can be different depending on the type of the production mode, and the fun of the game can be improved.

The sixteenth feature of the various tables related to the continuous advance notice effect shown in FIGS. 37 to 40 is the probability variation / time saving mode as compared with the case where the continuous advance notice effect over three variable effects is executed in the normal modes A to C. When the continuous notice effect over three variable effects is executed in D to G, the reach effect with a high expectation of a big hit in the variable effect that is the target of the advance notice of the continuous advance effect (for example, SP reach effect, SPSP reach effect) ) Is easy to execute. Therefore, the playability can be different depending on the type of the production mode, and the fun of the game can be improved.

The seventeenth feature of the various tables related to the continuous advance notice effect shown in FIGS. 37 to 40 is that the same movable effect members 17A to 17C are used in the normal modes A to C and the probabilistic / time saving modes D to G. Although it is possible to execute the object movement notice effect, the jackpot expectation when the accessory action notice effect is executed differs between the normal modes A to C and the probabilistic / time saving modes D to G. Therefore, the playability can be different depending on the type of the production mode, and the fun of the game can be improved.

The eighteenth feature of the various tables related to the continuous advance notice effect shown in FIGS. 37 to 40 is the determination to be described later when the accessory operation advance notice effect is executed in the normal modes A to C and the probability variation / time saving modes D to G. The ratio of operating any one of the movable production members 17A to 17C (100%) is higher than the ratio of operating all of the movable production members 17A to 17C used in the production (0%). .. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience of misunderstanding that it is a big hit even if the character movement notice effect is executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The nineteenth feature of the various tables related to the continuous advance notice effect shown in FIGS. 37 to 40 is that when the button vibration advance notice effect is executed in the normal modes A to C and the probability variation / time saving modes D to G, the effect button 6a is used. The ratio of the effect button 6a in the normal state (0%) is higher than the ratio of the effect button 6a in the protruding state (0%). Therefore, it is possible to secure the rarity that the effect button 6a is in the projecting state (it is in the projecting state only in the determined effect described later), and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In the strong notice of the button vibration warning effect, the effect button 6a may be vibrated as a protruding state instead of being vibrated in the normal state. Even in this case, when the button vibration warning effect is executed in the normal modes A to C and the probability variation / time saving modes D to G, the effect button 6a is in the normal state rather than the ratio of the effect button 6a in the protruding state. It is better to make the ratio of.

The twentieth feature of the various tables related to the continuous advance notice effect shown in FIGS. 37 to 40 is a predetermined period after the start of the variable effect to be notified of the continuous advance notice effect (from the start of the change to the first of the effect symbol 16a). During the high-speed fluctuation period), a weak notice of the character movement notice effect (weak movement of the first movable effect member 17A + blue light emission) and a weak notice of the effect notice effect (display of a blue effect image around the effect symbol 16a). Is executed when the weak notice of the button vibration warning effect (weak vibration of the effect button 6a for 1 second), which is executed without the validity period (display of the operation promotion image), is executed, than when is executed. , The expectation of big hits will be high. Therefore, it is possible to effectively raise the expectation of the player by using the operation means that can be operated by the player, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The 21st feature of the various tables related to the continuous advance notice effect shown in FIGS. 37 to 40 is a predetermined period after the start of the variable effect to be notified of the continuous advance notice effect (from the start of the change to the first of the effect symbol 16a). During the high-speed fluctuation period), a strong notice of the character movement notice effect (strong operation of the second movable effect member 17B + red light emission) and a strong notice of the effect notice effect (display of a red effect image around the effect symbol 16a). The jackpot expectation is higher when the strong notice of the button vibration warning effect (strong vibration of the effect button 6a for 3 seconds) is executed than when is executed. Therefore, it is possible to effectively raise the expectation of the player by using the operation means that can be operated by the player, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The 22nd feature of the various tables related to the continuous advance notice effect shown in FIGS. 38 (1) and 38 (2) is that the game ball wins the first starting port 10 in the probability variation / time saving modes D to G. However, it is easier to execute the continuous advance notice effect when the game ball wins in the second starting port 11. Further, as shown in FIGS. 37 and 38 (2), the probabilistic change / time saving mode D to G is the first. The continuous advance notice effect is more likely to be executed when the game ball wins the first start opening 10 during the normal modes A to C than when the game ball wins the first start opening 10. Therefore, it is possible to execute an appropriate game effect according to the type of effect mode, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As shown in FIG. 38 (1), the button vibration warning effect can be executed when the game ball wins the second starting port 11a during the probability change / time saving modes D to G, but FIG. 38 (2) shows. As shown in the above, even if the game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 10 during the probability change / time saving modes D to G, the button vibration warning effect is not executed (execution is restricted (FIG. 38 (2))). That is, in the probability change / time saving modes D to G, the button vibration warning effect is executed when the game ball wins the second start opening 11a than when the game ball wins the first start opening 10a. easy.

As the continuous advance notice effect, in addition to the continuous advance notice effect described above, the lamp change effect by any or all of the winning opening lamp NR, the panel lighting device 23, and the frame lighting device 27 may be executed. good. Further, the jackpot expectation is higher when the lamp change effect is executed by the winning opening lamp and the lighting device 23 for the panel (or the lighting device 27 for the frame) than when the lamp change effect is executed by the winning opening lamp. To be high.

Specifically, the ramp change effect includes a first notification that notifies the start port 10 at the timing when the game ball wins a prize, and a second notification that notifies the start port 10 at a symbol change start timing different from the first notification.

The first notification can execute the first aspect (the winning opening lamp blinks or emits blue light) and the second aspect (the winning opening lamp emits red light), and the second notification is the first aspect and the second aspect. It is possible to carry out a third aspect different from that (the winning opening lamp and the lighting device for the panel emit light, or the winning opening lamp and the lighting device for the frame emit light).
Alternatively, the first notification is the first aspect (the winning opening lamp blinks or emits blue light), the second aspect (the winning opening lamp emits red light), and the third aspect (the winning opening lamp and the lighting device for the board or the winning opening). The lamp and the lighting device for the frame emit light), and the second notification can execute the same first mode and the second mode as the first notification, but in the same third mode as the first notification. Does not change.

In addition, when "first notification & button vibration notice effect of lamp light emission effect" and "second notification & button vibration notice effect of lamp light emission effect" are provided as continuous notice effects (multiple types of notice effects are provided). (When executed), when SP reach or SPSP reach is executed by the variable effect of the notice target, "the second notification of the lamp emission effect & the second notification of the lamp emission effect &" rather than "the first notification of the lamp emission effect & the button vibration advance notice effect". The "button vibration warning effect" may be easier to execute, and the "first notification of the lamp emission effect & button vibration advance notice effect" may be more than the "second notification of the lamp emission effect & button vibration advance notice effect". It may be easier to carry out.

As the continuous advance notice effect, in addition to the continuous advance notice effect described above, the loss effect pattern 16a (for example, "2 (dog) 4 (chicken) 6 displayed in red" having different colors in one or a plurality of variable effects is displayed. The combination display mode of the normal loss of "(tiger)") may be stopped and displayed to perform a chance eye notice effect that intermittently suggests the jackpot expectation. The expected jackpot for the chance is "yellow" <"green" <"red".

Further, the chance eye notice effect and the button vibration notice effect may be executed based on FIGS. 37 and 38. In this case, when the loss effect symbol 16a is stopped and displayed in the loss fluctuation effect, and the loss effect symbol 16a (normal loss, reach loss) that does not indicate the jackpot expectation is stopped and displayed, the button vibration warning effect is not executed. When the same-color loss effect symbol 16a suggesting the degree of expectation of a big hit is stopped and displayed, it can be said that the button vibration advance notice effect can be executed.

When the chance eye notice effect and the button vibration advance notice effect are executed, and when the yellow or green loss effect symbol 16a is stopped and displayed, the button vibration motor 6d for vibrating the effect button 6a is weak for only 1 second. As it vibrates, the effect button 6a blinks white. On the other hand, when the red loss effect symbol 16a is stopped and displayed, the button vibration motor 6d for vibrating the effect button 6a vibrates strongly for 3 seconds, and the effect button 6a blinks in red.

(Variable staging pattern determination process)
FIG. 41 is a flowchart illustrating a variation effect pattern determination process by the effect control unit 130 m.
The sub CPU 130a executes the variation effect pattern determination process when the special figure variation pattern designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is stored in the reception buffer. In this variation effect pattern determination process, various effect devices (effect button device 6A, selection button device 6B, effect lever device 6C, panel drive device) including image display devices 16 and 18 are displayed during the variation display of the special symbol. A variation effect pattern indicating how to control 17 (movable effect members 17A to 17C), a panel lighting device 23, and a frame lighting device 27) is determined.

In step S801, the sub CPU 130a acquires the effect random value updated in step S540.
Next, in step S802, the sub CPU 130a sets the variable effect pattern determination table of FIG. 42 or FIG. 43 with reference to the current gaming state and the effect mode.

In step S803, the sub CPU 130a is one of a plurality of variation effect patterns based on the variation effect pattern determination table set in step S802 and the effect random value acquired in step S801. To decide.
Next, in step S804, the sub CPU 130a sets a variation effect pattern designation command in the transmission data storage area in order to transmit the variation effect pattern determined in step S803 to the image control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150. When the variation effect pattern designation command is transmitted to the image control unit 140 or the lamp control unit 150, the effect button device 6A, the selection button device 6B, the effect lever device 6C, the voice output device 9, based on the variation effect pattern designation command, The image display devices 16 and 18, the panel drive device 17 (movable effect members 17A to 17C), the panel lighting device 23, and the frame lighting device 27 are controlled.

In step S805, the sub CPU 130a sets the effect execution time (variation effect time) of the variation effect pattern determined in step S803 in the variation effect timer counter of the sub RAM 130c. The fluctuation effect timer counter is subtracted by 1 every 4 ms in step S602. The sub CPU 130a can specify the remaining effect execution time (variation effect time) of the variation effect, in other words, the time elapsed since the start of the variation effect, by the variation effect timer counter.
In step S806, the sub CPU 130a sets the variation effect data corresponding to the variation effect pattern in the variation effect data storage area of the sub RAM 130c.

In step S807, the sub CPU 130a determines special symbol variation display data for causing the first special symbol second display 20a or the second special symbol second display 20b to display the variation of the special symbol (blinking of the LED). Set in the processing area of. As a result, when the special symbol variation display data is set in the predetermined processing area, the display control data is created in step S605, and the created data is output in step S606, so that the first special symbol first. 2 The variable display of the display 20a or the second special symbol 2nd display 20b is started.

In step S808, the sub CPU 130a sets a special symbol variation display designation command for variable display of the special symbol TZ in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c. The special symbol variation display designation command set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c is transmitted to the image control unit 140 in the data output process of step S606. Then, the image control unit 140 performs variation display of the special symbol TZ in the special symbol variation display area.

(Variable staging pattern determination table)
FIG. 42 is a diagram showing a variation effect pattern determination table for the normal mode, which is referred to for determining the variation effect pattern in the normal modes A to C.
FIG. 43 (1) shows a variation effect pattern corresponding to the variation display of the second special symbol in the probability variation / time reduction mode D to G, and FIG. 43 (2) shows the variation of the first special symbol in the probability variation / time reduction mode D to G. It is a figure which shows the variation effect pattern determination table for the probability variation / time saving mode which is referred for determining the variation effect pattern corresponding to the display.

As shown in FIGS. 42 and 43, the variation effect pattern determination table is associated with a special figure variation pattern designation command, a selection rate (%) of each variation effect pattern, and a selected variation effect pattern. As a reference, the effect configuration (effect mode) in each variable effect pattern is described.

The "variable effect pattern" is an image display device 16, 18, an audio output device 9, an effect button device 6A, a selection button device 6B, an effect lever device 6C, and a panel drive device 17 (movable) during a variable display of a special symbol. It is a staging mode of a variable staging performed by using various staging devices such as staging members 17A to 17C), a panel lighting device 23, a frame lighting device 27, and a winning opening lamp NR.

The "normal variation" in the column of the effect configuration indicates that the effect symbol 16a performs a normal variation display (effect time: 8 seconds) in which a reach state does not occur.
"Long variation" means that the effect time is longer than the normal variation effect (effect time: 8 seconds) (effect time: 10 seconds), and a long variation display without reach is performed without a reach state. ..

The "shortening variation" indicates that the effect time is shorter than the normal variation effect (effect time: 8 seconds) (effect time: 4 seconds), and the shortened variation display without reach is performed without the reach state. ..
"Ultra-shortened variation" means that the effect time is shorter than the shortened variation effect (effect time: 4 seconds) (effect time: 3 seconds), and the ultra-shortened variation display without reach that does not generate a reach state is performed. ing.

"Pseudo" is a pseudo continuous advance notice effect, and is an effect that suggests a jackpot expectation by performing temporary stop and re-variation (pseudo continuous effect) of the effect symbol 16a once or multiple times during one variation effect. be.
The "pseudo-fanning" is a pseudo-fanning variation effect that is a result (pseudo-failure) indicating that the pseudo-continuous notice is not executed as a result of executing the fanning effect of whether or not the pseudo-continuous notice is executed. It is shown that.
The "pseudo 1" indicates that the first temporary stop and re-variation (pseudo continuous effect) of the effect symbol 16a are performed as a pseudo continuous notice.
The “pseudo 2” indicates that the second temporary stop and re-variation (pseudo continuous effect) of the effect symbol 16a is performed as a pseudo continuous notice.
The “pseudo 3” indicates that the third temporary stop and re-variation (pseudo continuous effect) of the effect symbol 16a is performed as a pseudo continuous notice.

The "normal reach" indicates that the above-mentioned normal reach effect is performed.
The "normal" 7 "reach" indicates that the above-mentioned normal reach effect is performed in the reach state by the effect symbol 16a of "7".

The “SP reach” indicates that the above-mentioned SP reach effect is performed. As the SP reach effect, a special effect image, a movie, or the like is displayed. For example, a battle effect in which a ally character and an enemy character battle or a mission effect in which a commanded mission is performed is performed.
The "special SP reach" indicates that the above-mentioned special SP reach effect is performed.

The “SPSP reach” indicates that the above-mentioned SPSP reach effect is performed. Special production images and movies are displayed as SPSP reach production, for example, battle production and mission production different from SP reach production, or battle production and SP reach production mission developed from SP reach production battle. Mission production is performed.
The "full rotation reach" indicates that the above-mentioned full rotation reach effect is performed.
"Special reach A" indicates that a special reach effect is performed rather than a normal reach effect.
"Special reach B" indicates that a special SP reach effect is performed rather than the SP reach effect.
The "special reach C" indicates that a special SPSP reach effect is performed rather than the SPSP reach effect.

"SP development" indicates that a development effect suggesting that the SP reach effect is executed is performed.
"SPSP development" indicates that a development effect suggesting that the SPSP reach effect is executed is performed.
"Full rotation development" indicates that a development effect suggesting that full rotation reach is executed is performed.
The "decision" means that a decision effect suggesting whether or not the jackpot game is executed is executed according to the operation of the effect button 6a or the effect lever 6h during the valid period or the elapse of the valid period. Shows.

The "re-lottery" is whether or not the staging symbol 16a temporarily stopped in the jackpot display mode based on the jackpot determination result becomes a jackpot display mode that is advantageous to the player (an odd number that becomes a probability variation jackpot from an even numbered symbol alignment that is usually a jackpot). After instigating whether or not the symbols will be aligned, and whether or not the most advantageous jackpot game will be executed from the odd-numbered symbols other than 7), the promotion success production will be an advantageous jackpot display mode. It is shown that a re-lottery effect is performed in which any of the promotion failure effects that is not an advantageous jackpot display mode is executed.
"Resurrection" means that even if the reach effect is executed and it becomes a failure effect, either the revival failure effect or the revival success effect that suggests whether or not it will be a revival jackpot will be executed. Shows.

In the variation effect pattern determination table for normal modes A to C shown in FIG. 42, in the case of the special symbol 00 (loss), the variation effect pattern 03 (normal reach effect) and the variation effect pattern 05,06 (SP reach effect) are even numbers. 70% of the staging symbols 16a are reach-directed, 30% of the odd-numbered staging symbols 16a other than "7" are reach-directed, and 30% of the staging symbols 16a of "7" are reach-directed. Is 0%.

In the case of the special symbol 00 (loss) and the variable effect patterns 05 to 10 (SP reach effect or SPSP reach effect), the ratio of the reach effect being performed with the even-numbered effect symbol 16a is 55%, and an odd number other than "7". The ratio of the reach effect to be performed by the effect symbol 16a is 43%, and the ratio of the reach effect to be performed by the effect symbol 16a of "7" is 2%.

In the case of the special symbol 01 (probability variation jackpot) and the variable effect patterns 13 and 14 (SP reach effect), the ratio of the reach effect being performed with the even numbered effect symbols 16a is 60%, and the odd numbered effect symbols 16a other than "7". The ratio of reach production is 40%.

In the case of special symbol 01 (probability variation jackpot) and variable effect patterns 17 to 21 (SPSP reach effect), the ratio of reach effect performed by even numbered effect symbols 16a is 6%, and odd numbered effect symbols 16a other than "7". The rate at which the reach effect is performed is 90%, and the rate at which the reach effect is performed at the effect symbol 16a of "7" is 4%.

In the case of the special symbol 02 (probability change jackpot) and the variable effect patterns 17 to 21 (normal reach effect, SP reach effect, SPSP reach effect), the ratio of reach effect being performed with the even numbered effect symbol 16a is 60%, "7". The ratio of the reach effect being performed by the odd-numbered effect symbols 16a other than the above is 40%, and the ratio of the reach effect being performed by the effect symbol 16a of "7" is 0%.

In the case of the special symbol 03 (normal jackpot) and the variable patterns 17 to 21 (normal reach effect, SP reach effect, SPSP reach effect), the ratio of the reach effect being performed with the even numbered effect symbol 16a is 100%.

In the case of special symbol 04 (probability change jackpot), special symbol 05 (probability variation jackpot), special symbol 06 (normal jackpot) and variable effect pattern 30 (special SP reach effect), the reach effect is performed with an even number of effect symbols 16a. The ratio is 100%.

In the variation effect pattern determination table for the probability variation / time saving modes D to G shown in FIG. 43 (1), the special symbol 10 (loss) is the variation effect pattern 35 (normal reach effect) and the variation effect patterns 37 to 41 (SP reach effect). , SPSP reach effect), the ratio of the reach effect being performed by the even-numbered effect symbol 16a is 60%, and the ratio of the reach effect being performed by the odd-numbered effect symbol 16a other than "7" is 40%.

In the case of the special symbol 04 (probability variation jackpot) and the variable effect patterns 43 and 44 (SP reach effect), the ratio of the reach effect being performed with the even numbered effect symbols 16a is 60%, and the odd numbered effect symbols 16a other than "7". The ratio of reach production is 40%.

In the case of the special symbol 04 (probability variation jackpot) and the variable effect patterns 45,46 (SP reach effect), the ratio of the reach effect being performed with the even numbered effect symbol 16a is 20%, and the odd numbered effect symbol 16a other than "7". The ratio g of the reach effect is 30%, and the ratio of the reach effect of the effect symbol 16a of "7" is 50%.

In the case of the special symbol 04 (probability variation jackpot) and the variable effect patterns 47 to 51 (SPSP reach effect), the ratio of the reach effect being performed with the even numbered effect symbols 16a is 3%, and the odd numbered effect symbols 16a other than "7". The rate at which the reach effect is performed is 2%, and the rate at which the reach effect is performed at the effect symbol 16a of "7" is 95%.

In the case of the special symbol 04 (probability variation jackpot) and the variable effect pattern 52,53 (full rotation reach effect), the ratio of the reach effect being performed with the even numbered effect symbol 16a is 20%, and the odd numbered effect symbols other than "7". The ratio g30% at which the reach effect is performed at 16a, and the ratio at which the reach effect is performed at the effect symbol 16a of "7" is 50%.

In the case of the special symbol 05 (normal jackpot) and the variable effect patterns 54 to 59 (normal reach effect, SP reach effect, SPSP reach effect), the ratio of the reach effect being performed with the even numbered effect symbol 16a is 100%. ..

The first feature of the variable staging pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 42 and 43 (1) is a reach staging (normal reach staging, SP) with an odd staging symbol 16a (staging symbol 16a that becomes a probable change jackpot) other than "7". The rate at which the reach effect is performed with an even number of effect symbols 16a (the effect symbol 16a that is usually a big hit) is higher than the ratio at which the reach effect and the SPSP reach effect are performed. Therefore, it is possible to effectively arouse the delight of the player when an odd number of staging symbols 16a other than "7" is a big hit, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The second feature of the variable effect pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 42 and 43 (1) is "7" rather than the ratio at which the reach effect is performed by the even effect symbol 16a (the effect symbol 16a which is usually a big hit). The ratio of the reach effect (normal reach effect, SP reach effect, SPSP reach effect) is lower in the effect symbol 16a (the effect symbol 16a that is the most advantageous probability variation jackpot). Therefore, it is possible to effectively arouse the delight of the player when the effect symbol 16a of "7" is a big hit, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The third feature of the variable staging pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 42 and 43 (1) is a reach staging (normal reach staging, SP) with an odd staging symbol 16a (staging symbol 16a that becomes a probable change jackpot) other than "7". Reach production (normal reach production, SP reach production, SPSP reach production) is performed with the production symbol 16a of "7" (the production symbol 16a that is the most advantageous probabilistic jackpot) rather than the ratio of reach production and SPSP reach production. The rate of being struck is lower. Therefore, it is possible to effectively arouse the delight of the player when the effect symbol 16a of "7" is a big hit, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The fourth feature of the variable staging pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 42 and 43 (1) is that the reach staging is performed with an odd staging symbol 16a other than the even staging symbol 16a or "7", as compared with the case where the reach staging is executed. The jackpot expectation is higher when the reach effect is executed by the effect symbol 16a of "7". Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's expectation as to which type of effect symbol is used to execute the reach effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As a fifth feature of the variation effect pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 42 and 43 (1), the probabilistic variation / time saving modes D to G are more advantageous than those in the normal modes A to C. In the case of a big hit, the reach effect (SPSP reach effect) is easily executed by the effect symbol 16a of "7". Therefore, it is possible to improve the effect of the effect in the probability change / time saving modes D to G, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The sixth feature of the variation effect pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 42 and 43 (1) is that in the normal modes A to C, even if the reach effect is executed by the effect symbol 16a of "7", the jackpot is not confirmed. However, in the probability variation / time saving modes D to G, the jackpot is confirmed when the reach effect is executed by the effect symbol 16a of "7". Therefore, it is possible to improve the effect of the effect in the probability change / time saving modes D to G, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The seventh feature of the variation effect pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 42 and 43 (1) is that the SPSP reach effect is achieved in the probability variation / time reduction modes D to G than in the normal modes A to C. It is easy to execute the variable effect pattern of the jackpot where the success effect of revival is executed after the failure effect is performed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the jackpot fluctuation effect in the probability variation mode from becoming monotonous, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The eighth feature of the variation effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 43 (2) is the loss variation in the case where the game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 10 during the probability variation / time saving modes D to G and the determination result of the loss is lost. A variable effect is normally executed as an effect (that is, a reach effect is not executed). Therefore, the game ball is placed in the first starting port 10 during the normal modes A to C, as compared with the case where the game ball is won in the first starting port 10 during the probability change / time saving modes D to G and the loss fluctuation effect is executed. It is easier to execute the reach effect when the prize is won and the loss fluctuation effect is executed.
Further, the type of variation effect pattern in which the game ball wins a prize in the first start port 10 during the probability variation / time saving modes D to G and the loss variation effect is executed is the first start port 10 during the normal modes A to C. The number of game balls is less than the type of variation effect pattern executed in the loss variation effect by winning a prize in the second starting port 11a during the winning or probability variation / time saving mode D to G. Therefore, it is possible to make the player perform an appropriate game according to the current game state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The ninth feature of the variation effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 43 (2) is that when the game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 10 during the probability variation / time saving modes D to G and the jackpot variation effect is executed. , The special reach effect (special reach B) of the same effect mode is easily executed (the execution rate is high).
Further, the type of reach effect in which the game ball wins in the first start port 10 during the probability change / time saving modes D to G and is executed in the jackpot variation effect is the game in the first start port 10 during the normal modes A to C. The number of balls is less than the type of reach effect performed in the jackpot variation effect by winning the second starting port 11a during the winning or probability change / time saving mode D to G. Therefore, it is possible to make the player perform an appropriate game according to the current game state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Although the reach effect is always executed in the variable effect pattern in which the pseudo-continuous effect is executed, a variable effect pattern in which the reach effect is not executed even if the pseudo-continuous effect is executed may be provided.

(Big hit notice production decision processing)
FIG. 44 is a flowchart illustrating a jackpot advance notice effect determination process by the effect control unit 130 m.
The sub CPU 130a executes the jackpot advance notice effect determination process based on the variation effect pattern determined in the variation effect pattern determination process.

In step S810, the sub CPU 130a refers to the variation effect pattern executed in the variation effect this time.
In step S811, the sub CPU 130a determines the advance notice effect pattern of the pre-reach advance notice effect that causes the player to expect the jackpot game to be executed in the effect period (high-speed change period) before the reach in the current variation effect. Select the pre-reach advance notice determination table, and determine whether or not the advance notice effect is executed and the type of advance notice pattern to be executed.

In step S812, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the advance notice pattern of the pre-reach advance notice effect is to execute the dialogue advance notice effect, and if the advance notice effect is to be executed (step S812; Yes), the step. If the process is transferred to S813 and the dialogue advance notice effect is not executed (step S812; No), the process is transferred to step S815.

The "speech notice effect" is an operation promotion image that generates an effective period during the variable effect (high-speed variable period) and prompts the player to operate the effect button 6a, and operates the effect button 6a during the effective period. It is a kind of jackpot warning effect in which a dialogue image suggesting a jackpot expectation is displayed on the image display device 16 and an audio corresponding to the dialogue image is output from the audio output device 9 according to the lapse of the valid period.

In step S813, the sub CPU 130a selects the dialogue advance notice pattern determination table (see FIG. 46) for determining the dialogue advance notice pattern of the dialogue advance notice effect, and determines the dialogue advance notice pattern.
In step S814, the sub CPU 130a sets the serif advance notice effect command corresponding to the serif advance notice pattern in the transmission buffer. As a result, the dialogue advance notice effect command is transmitted to the image control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and the dialogue advance notice effect according to the dialogue advance notice pattern is executed during the fluctuation effect.

In step S815, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the notice pattern of the pre-reach notice effect is to execute the step-up notice effect, and executes the step-up notice effect (step S815; Yes). , Step S816, and if the step-up notice effect is not executed (step S815; No), the process is transferred to step S818.

The "step-up notice effect" is the first step (first stage) to the fifth step (final stage) without generating an effective period during the variation effect (high-speed fluctuation period) and without displaying the operation promotion image. ) Is a type of jackpot notice effect that executes step effects in a predetermined order until any step of a plurality of steps (stages) is reached.

In step S816, the sub CPU 130a selects a step-up notice pattern determination table (see FIG. 47) for determining a step-up notice pattern for the step-up notice effect, and determines the step-up notice pattern.
In step S817, the sub CPU 130a sets the step-up notice effect command corresponding to the step-up notice pattern in the transmission buffer. As a result, the step-up notice effect command is transmitted to the image control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and the step-up notice effect according to the step-up notice pattern is executed during the variation effect.

In step S818, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the current variation effect pattern is a variation effect pattern for executing the pseudo-continuous effect, and is a variation effect pattern for executing the pseudo-continuous effect (step S818; Yes). , The process is transferred to step S819, and if it is not a variable effect pattern for executing the pseudo-sequential effect (step S818; No), the process is transferred to step S821.

In step S819, the sub CPU 130a selects the pseudo-continuous effect pattern determination table (see FIG. 48) for determining the pseudo-continuous effect pattern for the pseudo-continuous effect, and determines the pseudo-continuous effect pattern.
In step S820, the sub CPU 130a sets the pseudo-sequential effect command corresponding to the pseudo-sequential effect pattern in the transmission buffer. As a result, the pseudo-sequential effect command is transmitted to the image control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and the pseudo-sequential effect according to the pseudo-sequential effect pattern is executed during the variable effect.

In step S821, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the current variation effect pattern is a variation effect pattern for executing the development effect (SP development effect, SPSP development effect, full rotation effect), and determines whether or not the variation effect pattern is the variation effect pattern for executing the development effect. If it is an effect pattern (step S821; Yes), the process is transferred to step S822, and if it is not a variable effect pattern for executing the development effect (step S821; No), the process is transferred to step S824.

In step S822, the sub CPU 130a selects a development effect pattern determination table (see FIG. 49) for determining the development effect pattern, and determines the development effect pattern.
In step S823, the sub CPU 130a sets the development effect command according to the development effect pattern in the transmission buffer. As a result, the development effect command is transmitted to the image control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and the development effect is executed during the variation effect.

In step S824, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the current variation effect pattern is a variation effect pattern for executing the reach effect (normal reach effect, SP reach effect, SPSP reach effect, full rotation reach effect), and the reach effect. If it is a variable effect pattern for executing (step S824; Yes), the process is transferred to step S825, and if it is not a variable effect pattern for executing reach effect (step S824; No), the current jackpot notice effect determination process is terminated. ..

In step S825, the sub CPU 130a selects a cut-in effect pattern determination table (see FIG. 50) for determining a cut-in effect pattern indicating whether or not the cut-in effect is executed and the effect mode.
The "cut-in effect" is to generate an effective period during the variable effect (during the pre-reach effect or the reach effect) and display the operation promotion image, and to operate the effect button 6a during the effective period or to elapse the effective period. Accordingly, the image display device 16 displays a cut-in image suggesting the degree of expectation of a big hit, and the audio output device 9 outputs a cut-in effect sound corresponding to the cut-in image, which is a kind of big hit notice effect.

In step S826, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the cut-in effect pattern is for executing the cut-in effect, and if the cut-in effect pattern is for executing the cut-in effect (step S826; Yes), the step S827 is performed. If the process is not a cut-in effect pattern for executing the cut-in effect (step S826; No), the process is transferred to step S828.

In step S827, the sub CPU 130a sets the cut-in effect command corresponding to the cut-in effect pattern in the transmission buffer. As a result, the cut-in effect command is transmitted to the image control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and the development effect is executed during the variation effect.

In step S828, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the current variable effect pattern is a variable effect pattern for executing the determined effect, and determines that the variable effect pattern is the variable effect pattern for executing the determined effect (step S828; Yes). ), When it is determined that the pattern is not a variable effect pattern for executing the determined effect (step S828; No), the process is transferred to step S831.

In step S829, the sub CPU 130a selects a determination effect pattern determination table (see FIG. 51) for determining an effect pattern for the determination effect, and determines the determination effect pattern.
In step S830, the sub CPU 130a sets the determination effect command according to the determination effect pattern in the transmission buffer. As a result, the determination effect command is transmitted to the image control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and the determination effect is executed during the variation effect.

In step S831, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the current variation effect pattern is a variation effect pattern for executing the re-lottery effect, and is a variation effect pattern for executing the re-lottery effect (step S831; Yes). If the pattern is not a variable effect pattern for executing the re-lottery effect (step S831; No), the process is transferred to step S834.

In step S832, the sub CPU 130a selects the re-lottery effect pattern determination table (see FIG. 55) for determining the re-lottery effect pattern for the re-lottery effect, and determines the re-lottery effect pattern.
In step S833, the sub CPU 130a sets the re-lottery effect command corresponding to the re-lottery effect pattern in the transmission buffer. As a result, the re-lottery effect command is transmitted to the image control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and the re-lottery effect is executed during the variable effect.

In step S834, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the current variation effect pattern is a jackpot variation effect pattern for executing the finalized effect, and is a jackpot variation effect pattern for executing the finalized effect (step S834; Yes), the process is transferred to step S835, and if it is not a jackpot variable effect pattern for executing the final effect (step S834; No), the current jackpot advance notice effect determination process is terminated.

The "fixed effect" means that before the three effect symbols 16a are fixedly stopped and displayed in the combination display mode showing the jackpot determination result (that is, before the special symbol determination symbol is confirmed and displayed as the jackpot symbol). It is a kind of jackpot notification effect that definitely notifies the player that it is a jackpot.

In step S835, the sub CPU 130a selects a definite effect pattern determination table (see FIG. 57) for determining an effect pattern of the definite effect, and determines the definite effect pattern.
In step S836, the sub CPU 130a sets the confirmation effect command corresponding to the confirmation effect pattern in the transmission buffer. As a result, the confirmation effect command is transmitted to the image control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and the confirmation effect is executed during the variation effect.
In step S837, the sub CPU 130a selects the revival effect pattern determination table (see FIG. 58) for determining the revival effect pattern, and determines the development effect pattern.
In step S838, when the effect pattern for executing the revival effect is determined, the sub CPU 130a sets the revival effect command corresponding to the determined revival effect pattern in the transmission buffer. As a result, the revival effect command is transmitted to the image control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and the revival effect is executed during the variation effect.

Various effects determined by the jackpot notice effect decision process (pre-reach effect (line advance notice effect, step-up notice effect, pseudo-continuous effect), development effect, cut-in effect, decision effect, re-lottery effect, final effect, revival effect) In some cases, a vibration effect is executed by the effect button 6a or the effect lever 6h.
The production modes of the vibration effect are button / lever vibration time (long-term vibration, short-time vibration), button / lever vibration intensity (strong vibration, weak vibration), button light emission / lever light emission (white, red, rainbow light emission). , Button / lever vibration pattern (repeating vibration in small steps, only one vibration, etc.), Vibration operation of movable effect members 17A to 17C (weak vibration operation with small vibration width, strong vibration operation with large vibration width) It is composed of one or a plurality of combinations.

(Pre-reach notice decision table)
FIG. 45 is a diagram showing a pre-reach notice determination table referred to when determining a notice pattern for the pre-reach notice effect.
As shown in FIG. 45, the pre-reach advance notice determination table is associated with an effect mode, a jackpot determination result, a type of variable effect pattern, a selection rate (%) of each advance notice pattern, and a selected advance notice pattern.

There are three types of notice patterns for the pre-reach notice effect: "no notice", "line notice effect", and "step-up notice effect", in which the pre-reach notice effect is not executed. The jackpot expectation is no notice <line notice effect <step-up notice effect.

The first feature of the pre-reach advance notice determination table shown in FIG. 45 is that the pre-reach advance notice effect is more likely to be executed in the case of a big hit than in the case of a loss in the jackpot determination result, and the variable effect with a low jackpot expectation. It is easier to execute the pre-reach advance notice effect when the variable effect pattern with a high jackpot expectation is determined than when the pattern is determined. It is possible to raise the player's expectation that the jackpot game will be executed, and it will be possible to improve the interest of the game.

The second feature of the pre-reach advance notice determination table shown in FIG. 45 is that when the jackpot determination result is lost, the pre-reach advance notice effect is executed in the probability variation / time saving modes D to G than in the normal modes A to C. It's hard to be done. In the probabilistic change / time saving mode in which the symbol fluctuation time tends to be short, it becomes difficult to execute a useless pre-reach advance notice effect, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

The third feature of the pre-reach advance notice determination table shown in FIG. 45 is that the jackpot determination result is a jackpot, and in the case of a variable effect pattern for executing normal reach and SP reach, the probability change / time is shorter than in the normal modes A to C. In modes D to G, it is more difficult to perform the pre-reach notice effect. In the probabilistic change / time saving mode in which the symbol fluctuation time tends to be short, it becomes difficult to execute a useless pre-reach advance notice effect, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

As a fourth feature of the pre-reach advance notice determination table shown in FIG. 45, the jackpot expectation is higher when the step-up advance notice effect is executed than when the dialogue advance notice effect is executed. It is possible to raise the player's expectation for the type of pre-reach notice production, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.
It should be noted that the jackpot expectation may be higher when the dialogue notice effect is executed than when the step-up advance notice effect is executed.

The fifth feature of the pre-reach advance notice determination table shown in FIG. 45 is that the first is during the normal modes A to C, as compared with the case where the game ball is won at the first starting port 10 during the probability change / time saving modes D to G. When the game ball wins the starting port 10, it is easier to execute the pre-reach advance notice effect.
Further, in the probability change / time saving mode, the pre-reach advance notice effect is more likely to be executed when the game ball wins the second start opening 11a than when the game ball wins the first start opening 10. Therefore, it is possible to make the player perform an appropriate game effect according to the current effect mode, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.
Further, when the game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 10 and the jackpot variation effect is executed during the probability change / time saving mode, the execution rate of the pre-reach advance notice effect differs depending on the type of the reach effect to be executed. It is easier to execute the pre-reach advance notice effect when the special reach B is executed than the special reach A, and it is easier to execute the pre-reach advance notice effect when the special reach C is executed than the special reach B.

(Serif notice pattern determination table)
FIG. 46 is a diagram showing a dialogue advance notice pattern determination table referred to when determining a dialogue advance notice pattern for the dialogue advance notice effect.

As shown in FIG. 46, the dialogue advance notice pattern determination table is associated with a jackpot determination result, a type of variation effect pattern, a selection rate (%) of each dialogue advance notice pattern, and a selected dialogue advance notice pattern. As a reference, the staging configuration of each notice pattern is described.

The "valid period: single stroke / 3 seconds" in the column of the effect configuration indicates that the valid period in the dialogue advance notice effect ends when one single stroke operation of the effect button 6a or 3 seconds elapses.

The "operation promotion effect" in the valid period column is an effect that encourages the operation of the effect button 6a during the valid period in the dialogue advance notice effect. Specifically, it is composed of an opaque effect button image imitating the effect button 6a and a gauge image showing the remaining period of the operation valid period (3 seconds) in which the single hit operation of the effect button 6a is effective by the length of the gauge. Operation promotion image is displayed.

The "normal button white" in the operation promotion effect column is, as the above-mentioned opaque effect button image, a button image that imitates the effect button 6a that is in a non-protruding normal state and emits white light is displayed. It shows that the effect button 6a emits white light.
The "button state" indicates the state of the effect button 6a during the valid period, and the "normal" button state indicates a normal state in which the effect button 6a does not protrude.

In the "normal lines (text color: black)" in the dialogue image / audio column and text color column, normal dialogue that does not suggest the possibility of a jackpot game being executed is displayed in black characters, and the normal dialogue is displayed. Indicates that the dialogue is output as audio.
"Chance dialogue (character color: black)" indicates that the chance dialogue in which the jackpot game may be executed is displayed in black characters and the chance dialogue is output by voice.

"Reach line (character color: black)" indicates that the reach line for which the execution of the reach effect is confirmed is displayed in black characters, and the reach line is output by voice.
"Reach lines (character color: red)" indicates that the reach lines for which the execution of the reach effect is confirmed are displayed in red characters, and the reach lines are output as audio.

"Heat dialogue (character color: red)" indicates that the heat dialogue that is likely to perform the jackpot game is displayed in red text and the reach dialogue is output by voice.
"Intense heat dialogue (character color: gold)" indicates that the intense heat dialogue that is very likely to perform a jackpot game is displayed in gold characters and that the intense heat dialogue is output by voice. ing.

"The correct line (character color: rainbow)" indicates that the correct line that confirms the execution of the jackpot game is displayed in rainbow-colored characters, and that the correct line is output by voice.
The jackpot expectation of each dialogue production mode is "normal dialogue (black)"<"chance dialogue (black) <"reach dialogue (black) "<" reach dialogue (red) "<" heat dialogue (red) "<" Intense heat dialogue (Friday) "<" Probability dialogue (rainbow) ".

"Weak vibration (1 second)" in the column of button vibration means 1 from the operation of the effect button 6a, which is the time when the button vibration motor 6d for vibrating the effect button 6a starts displaying the dialogue, or the end of the valid period. It shows that a weak vibration effect that vibrates weakly over a second is executed.
"Strong vibration (1 second)" means that a strong vibration effect is executed in which the button vibration motor 6d vibrates strongly for 1 second from the operation of the effect button 6a, which is the start of the dialogue display, or the end of the valid period. Which indicates that.
The jackpot expectation of each vibration effect is "weak vibration"<"strongvibration".

The first feature of the dialogue notice pattern determination table shown in FIG. 46 is that it is possible to execute a vibration effect that vibrates the effect button 6a when a line with a high expectation of a big hit (more than a heat line) is displayed. There is. Therefore, it is possible to effectively notify that the jackpot expectation is high, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The second feature of the dialogue notice pattern determination table shown in FIG. 46 is that the dialogue warning effect of the intense heat dialogue, which has a higher expectation of a big hit than the heat dialogue, is executed than when the dialogue advancement effect of the heat dialogue is executed. In this case, the vibration effect of the effect button 6a is more likely to be executed. Therefore, it is possible to effectively notify that the jackpot expectation is high, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

When the dialogue warning effect of the heat dialogue is executed, the jackpot expectation is higher when the vibration effect of the effect button 6a is executed than when the vibration effect of the effect button 6a is executed. .. Therefore, it is possible to raise the player's expectation as to whether or not the vibration effect of the effect button 6a is executed when the dialogue advance notice effect is executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The third feature of the dialogue notice pattern determination table shown in FIG. 46 is that the vibration effect of the effect button 6a executed when a line with a high expectation of a big hit (more than a heat line) is displayed has a relatively short time. ing. Therefore, it is possible to execute a production with a high effect while suppressing the inconvenience of misunderstanding that the execution of the jackpot game is confirmed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The fourth feature of the dialogue notice pattern determination table shown in FIG. 46 is that the vibration intensity of the vibration effect executed when the dialogue with high jackpot expectation (more than heat dialogue) is displayed is 2 according to the jackpot expectation. There are types. Therefore, it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation of a big hit by the vibration intensity of the vibration effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The fifth feature of the dialogue advance notice pattern determination table shown in FIG. 46 is that the start timing and end timing of the vibration effect differ depending on whether or not the effect button 6a is operated during the valid period. Since the vibration period of the vibration effect when operated and the vibration period of the vibration effect when the effect button 6a is not operated during the valid period are the same vibration period (1 second), a big hit is expected depending on the vibration intensity. It is possible to suggest the degree and improve the interest of the game.

There are a weak vibration effect and a strong vibration effect as the vibration effect executed in the dialogue advance notice effect, but only the weak vibration effect or the strong vibration effect may be used, and the strong vibration effect is longer than the vibration time of the weak vibration effect. The vibration time of the may be lengthened.

Further, the jackpot expectation when the vibration effect of the effect button 6a is executed at the time of the dialogue advance notice effect is the same in the normal modes A to C and the probabilistic / time saving modes D to G, but the normal modes A to C have the same degree of expectation. The jackpot expectation may be higher in the probabilistic / time-saving modes D to G, or the jackpot expectation may be higher in the probabilistic / time-saving modes D to G than in the normal modes A to C. May be good. By doing so, it is possible to make the game playability different depending on the type of production mode, and it becomes easier to raise the player's expectation of winning in the probabilistic change / time saving modes D to G, which is advantageous for the player, and the interest of the game is improved. It is possible to make it.

Further, the valid period ends and the dialogue notice effect is executed by the operation of the effect button 6a or the lapse of the valid period. However, when the valid period ends without the effect button 6a being operated, the dialogue is executed. You may not execute the advance notice effect. If the dialogue warning effect is not executed, the vibration effect is not executed either.

In addition, although the valid period is generated (with the operation promotion image displayed) and the dialogue advance notice effect is executed, the dialogue advance notice effect is executed without generating the valid period (the operation promotion image is not displayed). You may try to do it. When the dialogue warning effect is executed without generating the valid period (without displaying the operation promotion image), only the weak vibration effect for 1 second or the strong vibration effect for 1 second may be performed.

(Step-up notice pattern determination table)
FIG. 47 is a diagram showing a step-up notice pattern determination table referred to when determining the step-up notice pattern of the step-up notice effect.

As shown in FIG. 47, the step-up notice pattern determination table corresponds to the effect mode, the jackpot determination result, the type of the variable effect pattern, the selection rate (%) of each step-up notice pattern, and the selected step-up notice pattern. It is attached. As a reference, the staging configuration of each notice pattern is described.

“SU1 → SU2” in the column of the effect mode indicates that the first step effect and the second step effect are executed in order.
“SU1 → SU2 → SU3” indicates that the first step effect, the second step effect, and the third step effect are executed in order.
“SU1 → SU2 → SU3 → SU4” indicates that the first step effect, the second step effect, the third step effect, and the fourth step effect are executed in order.
“SU1 → SU2 → SU3 → SU4 → SU5” indicates that the first step effect, the second step effect, the third step effect, the fourth step effect, and the fifth step effect are executed in order.
“SU1 → SU2 → SU3 → SU5” indicates that the first step effect, the second step effect, and the third step effect are executed in this order, and then the fifth step effect is executed.
In each step effect mode, the effect time of the step effect before the last step effect is 1 second, and the effect time of the last step effect is 3 seconds.

"Yes" in the effect sound column indicates that a step-up sound effect is output.
The 1st step sound effect in the 1st step production, the 2nd step sound effect in the 2nd step production, the 3rd step sound effect in the 3rd step production, the 4th step sound effect in the 4th step production, and the 5th step sound effect in the 5th step production. A 5-step sound effect is output. These 1st to 5th step sound effects are different sound effects from each other.

"Weak vibration (1 second) at" SU5 "" in the button vibration column means that the effect button 6a is subjected to a weak vibration effect in which the button vibration motor 6d vibrates weakly for 1 second from the start of the 5th step effect. It shows that it will be done.

The jackpot expectation of each step-up effect mode is "SU1 → SU2" <"SU1 → SU2 → SU3" <"SU1 <SU2 <SU3 <SU4" <"SU1 <SU2 <SU3 <SU4 <SU5" <"SU1 < It is SU2 <SU3 <SU5 ".

The first feature of the step-up notice pattern determination table shown in FIG. 47 is that when a step effect (fifth step effect) with a high expectation of a big hit is performed, the effect period of the effect button 6a is not generated (operation). (No display of promotion image) It is possible to execute a vibration effect that vibrates the effect button 6a. Therefore, it is possible to effectively notify that the jackpot expectation is high, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The second feature of the step-up notice pattern determination table shown in FIG. 47 is that the vibration effect executed when the step effect (fifth step effect) having a high expectation of big hit is performed is a relatively short time. .. Therefore, it is possible to execute a production with a high effect while suppressing the inconvenience of misunderstanding that the execution of the jackpot game is confirmed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The third feature of the step-up notice pattern determination table shown in FIG. 47 is the effect mode (vibration intensity, vibration time) of the vibration effect executed when the step effect (fifth step effect) with high jackpot expectation is performed. ) Is only one predetermined type (weak vibration (1 second)). Therefore, in the step-up advance notice production in which it is difficult for the player to grasp the type of the vibration effect without operating the effect button 6a, it is possible to suppress the complication of the effect mode and improve the interest of the game. It will be possible.

The fourth feature of the step-up notice pattern determination table shown in FIG. 47 is that when the probability variation modes D to G are larger than the normal modes A to C, the big hit expectation is lower. Is difficult to execute. Therefore, the playability can be different depending on the type of the production mode, and the fun of the game can be improved.

The fifth feature of the step-up notice pattern determination table shown in FIG. 47 is that the probability variation / time saving modes D to G are more likely to perform a weak vibration effect than the normal modes A to C when a big hit occurs. .. Therefore, the playability can be different depending on the type of the production mode, and the fun of the game can be improved.

The sixth feature of the step-up notice pattern determination table shown in FIG. 47 is that the probability variation / time saving modes D to G do not generate an effective period in the step-up notice effect than the normal modes A to C ( (No operation promotion image is displayed) The expectation of a big hit is high when the vibration effect of the effect button 6a is executed. Therefore, the playability can be different depending on the type of the production mode, and the fun of the game can be improved.

The seventh feature of the step-up notice pattern determination table shown in FIG. 47 is that even if the vibration effect of the effect button 6a is executed without generating an effective period in the step-up advance notice effect (no operation promotion image is displayed). No sound (sound effect) is output. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the effect of the vibration effect due to the output of the effect sound, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In the normal modes A to C, the vibration effect of the effect button 6a is executed without generating an effective period in the step-up notice effect (no operation promotion image is displayed) than in the probability change / time reduction modes D to G. In that case, the expectation of a big hit may be high.

(Pseudo-continuous production pattern determination table)
FIG. 48 is a diagram showing a pseudo-continuous effect pattern determination table referred to when determining a pseudo-continuous effect pattern.

As shown in FIG. 48, the pseudo-ream effect pattern determination table corresponds to the effect mode, the jackpot determination result, the type of the variable effect pattern, the selection rate (%) of each pseudo-ream effect pattern, and the selected pseudo-ream effect pattern. It is attached. As a reference, the staging configuration of each pseudo-continuous staging pattern is described.

"Validity period: single stroke / 3 seconds" indicates that the valid period in the pseudo-continuous production ends when one single stroke operation of the effect button 6a or 3 seconds elapses.
The "operation promotion effect" in the valid period column is an effect that encourages the operation of the effect button 6a during the valid period. Specifically, an opaque effect button image imitating the effect button 6a and a gauge image showing the remaining period of the operation valid period (3 seconds) in which one single hit operation of the effect button 6a is effective by the length of the gauge. An operation promotion image composed of is displayed.

The "normal button white" in the operation promotion effect column is, as the above-mentioned opaque effect button image, a button image that imitates the effect button 6a that is in a non-protruding normal state and emits white light is displayed. It shows that the effect button 6a emits white light.
The "protruding button white" means that, as the above-mentioned opaque effect button image, a button image that imitates the effect button 6a that is in a protruding state and emits white light is displayed, and the effect button 6a emits white light. It shows that it is doing.
The jackpot expectation of each operation promotion image is "normal button white"<"protruding button white".

The "button state" in the valid period column indicates the state of the effect button 6a during the valid period, and the "normal" button state indicates that the effect button 6a is not protruding. , "Protrusion" indicates that the effect button 6a is in a protruding state.
The jackpot expectation of each button state is "normal"<"protruding".

The "pseudo-failure" in the column of the effect mode means that the normal effect symbol 16a is temporarily stopped and the pseudo-ream failure occurs without the pseudo-symbol suggesting the execution of the pseudo-ream effect as the central effect symbol 16a. Is shown.
The "pseudo-success" indicates that the pseudo-symbol that suggests the execution of the pseudo-ream effect as the central effect symbol 16a is temporarily stopped and the pseudo-ream is successful.

"Weak vibration (1 second)" in the column of button vibration means 1 second from the operation of the effect button 6a or the end of the valid period when the button vibration motor 6d for vibrating the effect button 6a is stopped. It is shown that a weak vibration effect that vibrates weakly is executed.
"Strong vibration (1 second)" means that a strong vibration effect is executed in which the button vibration motor 6d vibrates strongly for 1 second from the operation of the effect button 6a when the pseudo symbol is stopped or the end of the valid period. It is shown that.
The jackpot expectation of each vibration effect is "weak vibration"<"strongvibration".

"There is a bonus movement" in the column of the bonus movement in the pseudo-success indicates that any one of the movable effect members 17A to 17C performs the motion and the light-emitting bonus motion effect in a predetermined mode.
"Character movement effect" means that any of the movable effect members 17A to 17C that have moved to the effect position after any of the movable effect members 17A to 17C has started moving from the standby position to the effect position is in the standby position. It is a production until the return to is completed.
Specifically, the first movable staging member 17A emits blue or red light, and the blade portion housed in the sheath portion moves to the left from the standby position. ..

"With effect sound" in the column of effect sound in pseudo-failure indicates that a failure sound effect is output.
"With effect sound" in the column of effect sound in pseudo-success indicates that a pseudo-success sound effect is output.

The first feature of the pseudo-ream effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 48 is that the effect period of the effect button 6a is generated when the pseudo-ream success effect is performed in the variable effect pattern having a high jackpot expectation ( (Display of operation promotion image) A vibration effect that vibrates the effect button 6a is executed. Therefore, it is possible to effectively notify that the jackpot expectation is high, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The second feature of the pseudo-ream effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 48 is that it is a variable effect pattern with a high expectation of big hits, and the vibration effect executed when the pseudo-ream success effect is performed is a relatively short time. ing. Therefore, it is possible to effectively notify that the jackpot expectation is high, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The third feature of the pseudo-ream effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 48 is that the vibration intensity of the vibration effect that is executed when the pseudo-ream success effect is performed in the variable effect pattern with high jackpot expectation is the jackpot expectation. There are two types depending on the type. Therefore, it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation of a big hit by the vibration intensity of the vibration effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As the fourth feature of the pseudo-continuous effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 48, the same effect device (button vibration motor, movable effect member) is used in the normal modes A to C and the probability variation / time reduction modes D to G. Although it is possible to execute a pseudo-ream effect (pseudo-ream success effect), the jackpot expectation is high when the pseudo-ream effect (pseudo-ream success effect) using the same effect device is executed. Therefore, it is possible to make the game playability different depending on the type of the production mode, and it is easy to raise the expectation of the player in the probabilistic change / time saving mode D to G which is advantageous for the player, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Become.

The fifth feature of the pseudo-ream effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 48 is the case of executing the pseudo-ream effect (pseudo-ream success effect) using the movable effect member and the case of performing the pseudo-ream effect using the movable effect member and the button vibration motor. In some cases, continuous production (pseudo continuous successful production) is executed. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the effect of the pseudo-continuous production and improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the effect button 6a may be in a protruding state during the valid period when the pseudo-continuous success effect is performed in the variable effect pattern (variable effect pattern in which the full rotation reach effect is executed) with high expectation of big hit. However, it may not be in a protruding state.

Further, there are a weak vibration effect and a strong start effect as the vibration effect executed in the pseudo-continuous success effect, but only the weak vibration effect or only the strong vibration effect may be used.
In addition, although the valid period is generated (the operation promotion image is displayed) and the pseudo-ream success effect and the pseudo-ream failure effect are executed, the valid period is not generated (the operation promotion image is not displayed). A pseudo-ream success effect or a pseudo-ream failure effect may be executed. As for the vibration effect to be executed in the pseudo-ream success effect, only the weak vibration effect for 3 seconds or the strong vibration effect for 3 seconds may be used, or only the weak vibration effect for 1 second or the strong vibration effect for 1 second may be used. May be good.

Further, in the normal modes A to C, the pseudo-ream effect (pseudo-ream success effect) using the same effect device (button vibration motor, movable effect member) was executed rather than the probability change / time reduction modes D to G. The jackpot expectation of the case may be high.
Further, the jackpot expectation when the pseudo-ream effect (pseudo-ream success effect) using the same effect device is executed may be higher in the normal mode B or C than in the normal mode A. ..
Further, in the probabilistic mode D or E, the jackpot expectation when the pseudo-ream effect (pseudo-ream success effect) using the same effect device is executed is higher than in the time-saving mode F or G. May be good.

Further, in the pseudo-ream effect (pseudo-ream success effect), the character movement effect using the first movable effect member 17A is executed, but the character operation effect using the first movable effect member 17A is performed. , The execution rate of the accessory movement effect using the second movable effect member 17B may be increased, or the first movable effect member 17A may be used as compared with the accessory operation effect using the second movable effect member 17B. The execution rate of the used character movement effect may be increased.
In the accessory movement effect using the second movable effect member 17B, the second movable effect member 17B emits red light and moves downward from the standby position to the front side of the central region of the display screen of the first image display device 16. It is a production that returns to the standby position after performing a wide and strong operation.

Even if the game ball wins in the first starting port 10 during the probability change / time saving modes D to G, only the normal fluctuation effect is executed in the case of the judgment result of loss, so the pseudo continuous effect (pre-reach effect) is performed. Not executed (execution is restricted).
That is, the case where the game ball wins the first starting port 10 during the normal modes A to C is more pseudo than the case where the game ball wins the first starting port 10 during the probability change / time saving modes D to G. It is easy to perform continuous production.

(Development production pattern determination table)
FIG. 49 is a diagram showing a development effect pattern determination table referred to when determining the development effect pattern.

As shown in FIG. 49, in the development effect pattern determination table, the effect mode, the jackpot determination result, the type of the variable effect pattern, the type of the development effect for which the development effect pattern is determined, and the selection rate of each development effect pattern (%). ), The selected development effect pattern is associated. As a reference, the staging configuration of each development staging pattern is described.

The "effective suggestion effect" is an introductory effect that suggests that an effective period may occur. Specifically, a plurality of semi-transparent effect button images imitating the effect button 6a are moved and displayed on the first image display device 16, and a plurality of translucent effect button images are aggregated toward a specific position. be.
"None" in the column of the effective suggestion effect indicates that the effective suggestion effect is not executed, and "Yes" means that the effective suggestion effect is executed, but the valid period does not occur after that. It indicates that it is an effective suggestion effect, and "yes" indicates that the effective suggestion effect is executed and the effective period occurs after that.

"Validity period: long press / 4 seconds" indicates that the development effect gradually progresses by pressing and holding the effect button 6a, and that the development effect ends when the valid period of the development effect elapses for 4 seconds.
The "operation promotion effect" in the valid period column is an effect that encourages the operation of the effect button 6a during the valid period. Specifically, the opaque effect button image displayed at a specific position and the operation valid period in which one single hit operation of the effect button 6a is effective without executing the effective suggestion effect or as a result of executing the effective suggestion effect. An operation promotion image composed of a gauge image showing the remaining period of (4 seconds) by the length of the gauge and a character image of "long press" is displayed.

The "normal button white" in the operation promotion effect column means that, as the above-mentioned opaque effect button image, a button image imitating the effect button 6a that is not protruding and emits white light is displayed, and the effect is produced. It is shown that the button 6a emits white light.
The "normal button red" means that, as the above-mentioned opaque effect button image, a button image imitating the effect button 6a that is not protruding and emits red light is displayed, and the effect button 6a emits red light. It is shown that.

The "button state" in the valid period column indicates the state of the effect button 6a during the valid period, and the "normal" indicates that the effect button 6a is in a normal state in which the effect button 6a does not protrude, and "protrudes". "" Indicates that the effect button 6a is in a protruding state.

The "SP notification" in the column of the development effect mode indicates that the SP development effect suggesting the development to the SP reach effect is executed as a result of the development effect.
The "SPSP notification" indicates that the SPSP development effect suggesting the development to the SPSP reach effect is executed as a result of the development effect.
The "full rotation notification" indicates that the full rotation development effect suggesting the development to the full rotation reach effect is executed as a result of the development effect.

The "SP development symbol" in the column of the image of the development effect content indicates that the SP development symbol suggesting the development to the SP reach effect is derived and displayed.
The "SPSP development symbol" indicates that the SPSP development symbol suggesting the development to the SPSP reach effect is derived and displayed.
The "full rotation development symbol" indicates that the full rotation development symbol that suggests the development to the full rotation reach effect is derived and displayed.

The "development sound effect A" in the column of the effect sound of the development effect content indicates that the development sound effect A is output when the SP development symbol is derived and displayed.
The "development sound effect B" indicates that the development sound effect B is output when the SPSP development symbol is derived and displayed.
The "development sound effect C" indicates that the development sound effect C is output when the full rotation development symbol is derived and displayed.
The development sound effect A, the development sound effect B, and the development sound effect C have different sound effects.

"Weak movement" in the column of accessory movement means that the first movable staging member 17A emits blue light at the time of derivation display of various symbols (at the end of the valid period), and the blade part housed in the sheath from the standby position. It shows that it returns to the standby position after performing a weak operation with a small operation width that moves to the left.
"Strong operation" means that the second movable effect member 17B emits red light at the time of derivation display of various symbols (at the end of the valid period) from the standby position to the front side of the central region of the display screen of the first image display device 16. It is shown that a strong motion effect of performing a strong motion with a large motion width of moving downward is executed.
The jackpot expectation of each character movement effect is "weak movement"<"strongmovement".

"Weak vibration (1 second)" in the column of button vibration means that the button vibration motor 6d for vibrating the effect button 6a is weak for 1 second from the time when various developed symbols are derived and displayed (at the end of the valid period). It shows that a vibrating weak vibration effect is executed.
"Strong vibration (1 second)" indicates that a strong vibration effect is executed in which the button vibration motor 6d vibrates strongly for 1 second from the time when various developed symbols are derived and displayed (at the end of the valid period). There is.
The jackpot expectation of each vibration effect is "weak vibration"<"strongvibration".

The first feature of the development effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 49 is the effect when the development effect (SPSP notification, full rotation notification), which is a variable effect pattern with a high jackpot expectation and has a high jackpot expectation, is performed. A vibration effect is executed in which the effect period of the button 6a is generated and the effect button 6a is vibrated. Therefore, it is possible to effectively notify that the jackpot expectation is high, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The second feature of the development effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 49 is that the full rotation development effect, which has a higher expectation of a big hit than the SPSP development effect, is executed than the case where the SPSP development effect is executed. , The vibration effect of the effect button 6a is easily executed.
Further, when the SPSP development effect is executed, the jackpot expectation is higher when the vibration effect is executed than when the vibration effect of the effect button 6a is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to raise the player's expectation as to whether or not the vibration effect of the effect button 6a is executed when the SPSP development effect is executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The third feature of the development effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 49 is that it is executed when the development effect (SPSP notification, full rotation notification), which is a variation effect pattern with a high jackpot expectation and has a high jackpot expectation, is performed. The vibration effect is relatively short. Therefore, while suppressing the inconvenience of misleading the execution of the jackpot game to be confirmed, it is possible to execute a production with a high effect of the production, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The fourth feature of the development effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 49 is the vibration of the vibration effect that is executed when the development effect (SPSP notification, full rotation notification) is performed, which is a fluctuation effect pattern with a high jackpot expectation. There are two types of strength depending on the degree of expectation of a big hit. Therefore, it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation of a big hit by the vibration intensity of the vibration effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The fifth feature of the development effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 49 is that the same effect device (button vibration motor 6d, first movable effect member 17A, or 1st movable effect member 17A) is used in the normal modes A to C and the probability variation / normal modes D to G. It is possible to perform a development effect (SPSP development effect, etc.) using the second movable effect member 17B), but the probabilistic / time-saving modes D to G are more effective than the normal modes A to C (button vibration motor). 6d, the expectation of a big hit is high when the development effect using the movable effect members 17A to 17C) is executed. Therefore, it is possible to make the game playability different depending on the type of the production mode, and it is easy to raise the expectation of the player in the probabilistic change / time saving mode D to G which is advantageous for the player, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Become.
There are a weak vibration effect and a strong vibration effect as the vibration effect executed in the development effect, but only the weak vibration effect or only the strong vibration effect may be used.

Further, in the normal modes A to C, the development effect using the same effect device (button vibration motor 6d, first movable effect member 17A or second movable effect member 17B) is more than the probability change / time reduction modes D to G. The jackpot expectation when (SPSP development production, etc.) is executed may be increased.
Further, in the normal mode B or C, the development effect using the same effect device (button vibration motor 6d, first movable effect member 17A or second movable effect member 17B) was executed as compared with the normal mode A. The jackpot expectation of the case may be high.
Further, the probability variation mode D or E may have a higher expectation of big hit when the development effect using the same effect device is executed than the time reduction mode F or G.

If the game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 10 and a special reach is performed during the probability change / time saving modes D to G, the development effect can be executed. Therefore, when the game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 10 and the special reach is executed during the probability change / time saving modes D to G, the vibration effect can be executed along with the execution of the development effect.

(Cut-in staging pattern determination table)
FIG. 50 is a diagram showing a cut-in effect pattern determination table referred to when determining a cut-in effect pattern.

As shown in FIG. 50, the cut-in notice effect pattern determination table includes an effect mode, a jackpot determination result, a variable effect pattern type (reach type), a selection rate (%) of each cut-in effect pattern, and a selected cut. An in-effect pattern is associated with it. As a reference, the staging configuration of each cut-in staging pattern is described.

The "effective suggestion effect" is an introductory effect that suggests that an effective period may occur. Specifically, it is an effect of moving and displaying a plurality of semi-transparent effect button images imitating the effect button 6a on the first image display device 16 and collecting the semi-transparent effect button images toward a specific position.

"Validity period: single hit / 4 seconds" means that the valid period in the cut-in notification effect ends when one single stroke operation of the effect button 6a is performed, or 4 seconds elapse without the effect button 6a being operated. It shows that it ends by.
The "operation promotion effect" in the valid period column is an effect that encourages the operation of the operating means during the valid period. Specifically, the opaque effect button image displayed at a specific position and the operation valid period in which one single hit operation of the effect button 6a is effective without executing the effective suggestion effect or as a result of executing the effective suggestion effect. An operation promotion image composed of a gauge image showing the remaining period of (4 seconds) by the length of the gauge and a character image of "press" is displayed.

The "normal button white" in the operation promotion effect column means that, as the above-mentioned opaque effect button image, a button image imitating the effect button 6a that is not protruding and emits white light is displayed, and the effect is produced. It is shown that the button 6a emits white light.
The "protruding button red" means that a button image imitating the effect button 6a that is in a protruding state and emits red light is displayed as an opaque effect button image, and the effect button 6a emits red light. Shows.
The "protruding button rainbow" means that, as an opaque effect button image, a button image imitating an effect button 6a that is in a protruding state and emits rainbow light is displayed, and the effect button 6a emits rainbow light. Shows.

The "button state" indicates the state of the effect button 6a during the valid period.
The "normal" in the button state column indicates that the effect button 6a is in a normal state in which it does not protrude.
The “protruding” indicates that the effect button 6a is in a protruding state.

The "blue cut-in" in the image column of the cut-in effect mode indicates that the cut-in image of the blue frame is displayed on the first image display device 16.
The “green cut-in” indicates that the cut-in image of the green frame is displayed on the first image display device 16.
The “red cut-in” indicates that the cut-in image of the red frame is displayed on the first image display device 16.
The jackpot expectation of each cut-in image is "blue cut-in"<"greencut-in"<"redcut-in".

The "sound effect A" in the effect sound column indicates that the cut-in sound effect A is output when the blue cut-in is displayed.
The “sound effect B” indicates that the cut-in sound effect B is output when the green cut-in is displayed.
The "sound effect C" indicates that the cut-in sound effect C is output when the red cut-in is displayed.
The cut-in sound effect A, the cut-in sound effect B, and the cut-in sound effect C have different sound effects.

"Weak vibration (3 seconds)" in the button vibration column means when the button vibration motor 6d for vibrating the effect button 6a starts displaying the cut-in image (when the effect button 6a is operated or the valid period ends). It is shown that a weak vibration effect of weak vibration is executed for 3 seconds from the beginning.
"Strong vibration (3 seconds)" means that the button vibration motor 6d vibrates strongly for 3 seconds from the start of displaying the cut-in image (when the effect button 6a is operated or the valid period ends). Indicates that it will be executed.
The jackpot expectation of each vibration effect is "weak vibration effect"<"strong vibration effect".

The first feature of the cut-in effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 50 is that when a cut-in image having a high expectation of a big hit is displayed (cut-in effect is executed), the effect period of the effect button 6a is generated. (Display of operation promotion image) It is possible to execute a vibration effect that vibrates the effect button 6a. Therefore, it is possible to effectively notify that the jackpot expectation is high, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The second feature of the cut-in effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 50 is that the vibration effect executed when the cut-in image with high jackpot expectation is displayed (cut-in effect is executed) takes a relatively long time. It has become. Therefore, it is possible to effectively notify that the jackpot expectation is high, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As the third feature of the cut-in effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 50, the vibration intensity of the vibration effect executed when the cut-in image having a high expectation of big hit is displayed (the cut-in effect is executed) is expected to be a big hit. There are two types depending on the degree. Therefore, it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation of a big hit by the vibration intensity of the vibration effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The vibration effect executed in the cut-in effect includes a weak vibration effect and a strong vibration effect, but only the weak vibration effect or only the strong vibration effect may be used.
In addition, the cut-in effect is executed by generating a valid period (with the operation promotion image displayed), but the cut-in effect is executed without generating the valid period (without displaying the operation promotion image). You may do so. When the cut-in effect is executed without generating the valid period, only the weak vibration effect for 3 seconds or the strong vibration effect for 3 seconds may be used, or only the weak vibration effect for 1 second or the strong vibration effect for 1 second. It may be only.

(Determining production pattern determination table)
FIG. 51 is a diagram showing a determination effect pattern determination table referred to when determining a determination effect pattern.

As shown in FIG. 51, in the determination effect pattern determination table, the effect mode, the jackpot determination result, the type of variable effect pattern (reach type), the effect mode of each reach effect, and the selection rate (%) of the effect mode of each reach effect. ), A determined staging pattern corresponding to the selected staging mode is associated. As a reference, the staging configuration of each determined staging pattern is described.

"Battle A to C" in the column of the effect mode of the reach effect is an effect in which a friendly character and an enemy character battle each other (the enemy characters appearing in battles A to C are different). At the end of the battle, during the valid period, the final attack (kick attack / punch attack / lariat) for the ally character to defeat the enemy character accompanying one single hit operation of the effect button 6a or one tilt operation of the effect lever 6h. (Attack) is delivered, and if the enemy character collapses, the battle wins, and if the enemy character does not collapse, the battle is defeated.

"Mission A" is an effect in which a large rock is gradually destroyed as the effect button 6a is repeatedly hit. If the rock can be completely destroyed during the valid period, the mission will be successful, and if the rock cannot be completely destroyed during the valid period, the mission will be unsuccessful.

"Mission B" means that the level value of the level meter (speedometer) of the running motorcycle is gradually increased and changed (for example, 0 → 1 → 2 ... 10) in association with the long press operation of the effect button 6a. (MAX) 10 levels). If the level value of the level meter reaches MAX during the valid period, the mission is successful, and if the level value of the level meter does not reach MAX during the valid period, the mission fails.

The "effective suggestion effect" in the effect composition column is an introductory effect that suggests that an effective period may occur. Specifically, the semi-transparent effect button image imitating the effect button 6a and the semi-transparent effect lever image imitating the effect lever 6h are moved and displayed on the first image display device 16, and the semi-transparent effect button is directed to a specific position. It is a production that collects images and translucent production lever images.

In the case of the jackpot determination result, a vibration effect (for example, strong vibration for 2 seconds) may be performed to strongly vibrate the effect button 6a when the effective suggestion effect is performed. Also, even if the execution rate of the vibration effect in the effective suggestion effect is higher when the jackpot symbol with odd-numbered symbols is stopped and displayed than when the jackpot symbol with even-numbered symbols is stopped and displayed. good. When the vibration effect is executed during the effective suggestion effect, it is notified that the jackpot expectation is high.

The "valid period" in the column of the effect configuration means that the effective period in the determined effect ends with the operation of the effect button 6a (single stroke operation / continuous stroke operation / long press operation) or the operation of the effect lever 6h (tilt operation). ), Or the effect button 6a / effect lever 6h is not operated and 5 seconds elapse to indicate the end.

The "type of operation means" in the column of the validity period indicates the type of the operation means (effect button 6a, effect lever 6h) for which the operation is effective during the validity period, and if it is the "effect button", the effect button 6a It is shown that the operation is effective, and if it is the "effect lever", the operation of the effect lever 6h is effective.

The "operation promotion effect" is an effect that encourages the operation of the operation means (effect button 6a, effect lever 6h) during the valid period. Specifically, the operation of the opaque effect button image or the opaque effect lever image displayed at a specific position and the effect button 6a or the effect lever 6h is effective without executing the effective suggestion effect or as a result of executing the effective suggestion effect. An operation promotion image composed of a gauge image showing the remaining period of the operation valid period (5 seconds) by the length of the gauge and a character image of "press, repeated hit, long press or close" is displayed.
The operation promotion effect ends with the operation of the operating means (effect button 6a, effect lever 6h) during the valid period, or with the elapse of the valid period (5 seconds) without operating the operating means. ..

The "normal button white" in the operation promotion effect column means that a button image imitating the effect button 6a that is not protruding and emits white light is displayed as an opaque effect button image, and the effect button 6a is displayed. Indicates that white light is emitted.
The "protruding button red" means that a button image imitating the effect button 6a that is in a protruding state and emits red light is displayed as an opaque effect button image, and the effect button 6a emits red light. Shows.
The "protruding button rainbow" means that, as an opaque effect button image, a button image imitating an effect button 6a that is in a protruding state and emits rainbow light is displayed, and the effect button 6a emits rainbow light. Shows.

The "normal lever" indicates that a lever image imitating a predetermined size effect lever 6h is displayed as an opaque effect lever image.
The "large lever rainbow" indicates that a lever image imitating an effect lever 6h larger than a predetermined size is displayed as an opaque effect lever image.
The jackpot expectation of each operation promotion effect is "normal button white"<"protruding button red"<"normallever"<"protruding button rainbow" = "large lever rainbow".

The "state of the operating means" indicates the state of the operating means (effect button 6a, effect lever 6h) during the valid period, and the "normal" is a normal state in which the effect button 6a does not protrude. If the effect lever 6h is in a protruding state, the “protruding” means that the effect button 6a is in a protruding state, and if the effect lever 6h is in a protruding state. It shows that there is.
The jackpot expectation of the state of the operating means is "normal"<"protruding".

The "operation mode" indicates the type of operation mode of the operation means (effect button 6a, effect lever 6h) during the valid period.
"Single hit" in the operation mode column means that the effect button 6a is pressed once from the position in the normal state or the protruding state to the pressed position, and "continuous hit" means that the effect button 6a is pressed from the position in the normal state. "Long press" means that the effect button 6a is continuously pressed to the press position, and "tilt" means that the effect lever 6h is in the normal state. It shows that it is tilted from the position to the front and back.

The "decision failure effect" in the column of the determined effect mode indicates that an effect suggesting that the jackpot game is not executed is executed.
The "decision success effect" indicates that an effect suggesting that the jackpot game is executed is executed.
The "failure image" in the result image column indicates that a dark color image is displayed on the screen of the first image display device 16, and the "success image" means a success effect image on the screen of the first image display device 16. Is displayed.

"Strong vibration (4 seconds → 5 seconds)" in the button / lever vibration column is 1 after the button vibration motor 6d for vibrating the effect button 6a vibrates strongly for 4 seconds from the start of the successful effect. A strong vibration effect (determined successful vibration effect) that vibrates strongly for 5 seconds with an interval of seconds is executed, and a lever vibration motor 6j for vibrating the effect lever 6c is determined and 4 from the start of the successful effect. It shows that a strong vibration effect (decision success vibration effect) that vibrates strongly for 5 seconds with an interval of 1 second is executed after the strong vibration over a second.

"Rainbow emission (11 seconds)" in the button / lever emission column means that the button emission LED 6e for emitting the effect button 6a is determined and succeeds. It emits rainbow light over a long period of time), and the lever light emitting LED 6k for making the effect lever 6h emit light is determined. It shows that it emits rainbow light.

"None" in the column of accessory operation indicates that the movable staging members 17A to 17C do not operate.
“Yes” in the column of the accessory movement is a bonus movement effect (determined operation effect) in which the movable effect members 17A to 17C operate and emit light in a predetermined mode. The execution period of the character motion effect (decision motion effect) is 10 seconds from the start of the decision success effect.
The "feature motion effect (decision motion effect)" means that after the movable effect members 17A to 17C start moving from the standby position to the effect position all at once, the movable effect members 17A to 17C at the effect position move to the standby position. It is a production until the return of is completed.
It should be noted that the effect of the accessory movement is performed from the time when the movable effect members 17A to 17C start moving from the standby position to the effect position until the movable effect members 17A to 17C start to return from the effect position to the standby position. May be.

More specifically, an effect operation in which the blade portion of the first movable effect member 17A moves to the left and an effect operation in which the second movable effect member 17B moves downward from the standby position to the front side of the center of the screen of the image display device 16. And the effect operation in which the blade portion of the third movable effect member 17C moves up and down is performed all at once (decision operation), and after each movable effect member 17A to 17C emits rainbow light, each movable effect member 17A to 17C emits light. Return to the standby position. The bonus movement effect in which the first to third movable effect members 17A to 17C perform the effect operation all at once is executed when a determined effect among a plurality of types of jackpot notification effects is performed.

On the other hand, in the pseudo-continuous effect and the development effect, the effect operation (weak operation) by the first movable effect member 17A or the effect operation (strong operation) by the second movable effect member 17B is performed. That is, in the pseudo-continuous production and the development production, the character movement effect different from the character operation effect in which the first to third movable effect members 17A to 17C perform the effect operation all at once is executed.

“None” in the effect sound column indicates that the effect sound (sound effect) is not output from the audio output device 9.
The "success sound effect" indicates that the success sound effect is output from the voice output device 9 as an effect sound. As for the success sound effect, the success sound effect A is output in the case of the decision success effect in which the effect button 6a is the operation target, and the success sound effect different from the success sound effect A in the case of the decision success effect in which the effect lever 6h is the operation target. Sound effect B is output.
It should be noted that the success sound effect may be the same between the decision success effect in which the effect button 6a is the operation target and the decision success effect in which the effect lever 6h is the operation target, and the success when the effect button 6a is in the normal state. Even if the sound effect, the success sound effect when the effect button 6a is in the protruding state, the success sound effect when the effect lever 6h is in the normal state, and the success sound effect when the effect lever 6h is in the protruding state are different. good.

"Non-light emission" in the lamp emission column means that the panel lighting device 23 and the frame lighting device 27 do not emit light, and "rainbow emission" means that the panel lighting device 23 and the frame lighting device 27 are rainbows. It shows that it emits light.

In this way, the decision success effect is an image display effect by the success effect image, an accessory movement effect by the first to third movable effect members 17A to 17C, a button vibration effect by the effect button 6a, and a button in which the effect button 6a emits rainbow light. It is composed of a series of staging, a lamp staging in which the lamps of the panel lighting device 23 and the frame lighting device 27 emit rainbow light, and a sound staging in which a success sound effect is output from the voice output device 9. The effect is executed regardless of whether or not the operating means is operated during the determined valid period.
On the other hand, in the decision failure effect, the character movement effect, the vibration effect, the button light emission effect, the lamp light emission effect, and the sound effect are not executed.

Since the effect button device 6A and the effect lever device 6C are provided on the storage plate (receiver) 5, when the button vibration motor 6d that vibrates the effect button 6a is driven, the vibration plays the role of a transmission member. It is transmitted to the effect lever 6h via the plate 5. On the other hand, when the lever vibration motor 6j that vibrates the effect lever 6h is driven, the vibration is transmitted to the effect button 6a via the storage pan 5.

That is, if a vibration effect that vibrates the other operating means is executed while the player is operating one operating means by the operating hand, the vibration is transmitted to the operating hand of the player via the other means. It is designed to be transmitted.

Further, since the effect button device 6A, the effect lever device 6C, and the firing handle 7 are provided on the storage plate 5 attached to the opening / closing door 3 having the window 3a, the button vibration motor 6d that vibrates the effect button 6a is driven. Then, the vibration is transmitted to the firing handle 7 via the opening / closing door 3 and the storage tray 5 which play the role of a transmission member. Further, when the lever vibration motor 6j that vibrates the effect lever 6h is driven, the vibration is transmitted to the effect button 6a via the storage pan 5. A vibration motor may be provided on the launch handle 7 to vibrate the launch handle 7 itself.

It should be noted that the effect button device 6A may be provided with a decorative body unit that is connected to the inside of the button body of the effect button 6a so as to be relatively operable, and a drive mechanism that operates the button body and the decorative body unit individually or in conjunction with each other. good. In this case, the button body is assembled so as to move up and down relative to the decorative body unit. Further, the decorative body unit is provided with a plurality of LEDs (light emitting units). Further, a cover portion that is arranged so as to surround the outer surface of the button main body portion and the decorative body unit and moves up and down is provided.
For example, when a spherical decorative unit is provided, an opaque effect button image imitating the effect button 6a in which the decorative unit emits red light is displayed in the operation promotion effect, and a successful decision effect is achieved by a single hit operation of the effect button 6a. From the start of execution, the decorative unit that emits red light due to the drive of the drive mechanism rotates for 4 seconds, then rotates again for 5 seconds with an interval of 1 second, and the button body (directing). Button 6a) vibrates strongly (4 seconds → 5 seconds).
The decorative unit may be used instead of the effect lever 6h.

The first feature of the determination effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 51 is that when the determination success effect is executed, a vibration effect (decision success) in which the effect button 6a or the effect lever 6h is vibrated by generating a determination effective period. Vibration effect) is executed. Therefore, it is possible to effectively notify that the jackpot game is executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The second feature of the determined effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 51 is that the effective period is the longest effective period generated during the variable effect. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the inconvenience that the player misses the operation of the effect button 6a and the effect lever 6h, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The third feature of the determination effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 51 is that the effect button 6a or the effect lever 6h vibrates over the longest period of time as a strong vibration effect generated during the fluctuation effect. Therefore, it is possible to effectively arouse the uplifting feeling of the player at the time of the successful decision production, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The fourth feature of the determination effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 51 is that the rainbow emission of the effect button 6a is longer than the vibration period (10 seconds including the pause period) of the effect button 6a or the effect lever 6h ( 11 seconds). Therefore, even after the vibration of the effect button 6a or the effect lever 6h is completed, the player's uplifting feeling can be maintained, and the interest of the game can be improved.

The fifth feature of the determination effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 51 is that the effect button 6a (effect lever 6h) during the determination validity period is the same in the determination success effect regardless of whether it is in the normal state or the protruding state. The vibration effect of the vibration effect mode (strong vibration (4 seconds → 5 seconds)) is executed. Therefore, it is possible to effectively notify that the jackpot game is executed regardless of whether the state of the effect button 6a during the determined valid period is the normal state or the protruding state, and the interest of the game is improved. Is possible.

The sixth feature of the determination effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 51 is whether the determination success effect associated with the operation of the effect button 6a is executed or the determination success effect associated with the operation of the effect lever 6h is executed. , The vibration effect mode of the vibration effect in the determined success effect is the same (strong vibration (4 seconds → 5 seconds)). Therefore, it is possible to effectively notify that the jackpot game is executed regardless of the type of the operating means, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The seventh feature of the determination effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 51 is that the vibration effect mode of the vibration effect in the determination success effect is the same (strong vibration (4 seconds → 5 seconds)) regardless of the type of reach effect. .. That is, even if the jackpot effect symbol 16a with even-numbered symbols is stopped and displayed, or the jackpot effect symbol 16a with odd-numbered symbols is stopped and displayed, the vibration effect mode of the vibration effect in the determined success effect. Are the same (strong vibration (4 seconds → 5 seconds)). Therefore, it is possible to effectively notify that the jackpot game is executed regardless of the type of the jackpot effect symbol 16a, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The eighth feature of the determination effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 51 is that when the determination success effect accompanying the operation of the operation means is executed, the operation mode of the operation means (single hit operation / continuous hit operation / length of the effect button 6a). The vibration effect mode of the vibration effect in the determined success effect is the same (strong vibration (4 seconds → 5 seconds)) regardless of the push operation, the tilt operation of the effect lever 6h) and the type of the operation means. Therefore, it is possible to effectively notify that the jackpot game is executed regardless of the operation mode of the operation means and the type of the operation means in the determined valid period, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As the ninth feature of the determination effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 51, the jackpot symbol of "7" symbol alignment is stopped and displayed rather than the jackpot symbol of even-numbered symbol alignment or "7" symbol alignment is stopped and displayed. It is easier to perform a successful decision effect that involves the operation of the effect lever 6h. Therefore, it is possible to give a rarity to the successful decision production accompanied by the operation of the effect lever 6h, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In the determination effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 51, the ratio of successful determination of the effect lever 6h is executed in the normal modes A to C and the probability variation / time saving modes D to G is the same, but the normal mode In the probabilistic / time-saving modes D to G, the rate at which the decision success effect accompanied by the operation of the effect lever 6h is executed may be higher than in the probabilistic / time-saving modes D to C, or the probability change / time-saving modes D to G may be executed. However, in the normal modes A to C, the rate at which the decision success effect accompanied by the operation of the effect lever 6h may be executed may be higher.

It should be noted that at least two or more operating means may be used as the above-mentioned determined successful vibration effect. Specifically, the effect button 6a and the effect lever 6h, the effect button 6a and the firing handle 7, or the effect button 6a, the effect lever 6h and the firing handle 7 are used to perform a successful vibration effect (strong vibration for a long time). .. As a result, it is possible to execute a successful vibration effect that can give a strong impact.

For example, in the case of a 10R probability variation jackpot, a successful vibration effect determined by the effect button 6a, the effect lever 6h, and the firing handle 7 is executed.
In the case of a 4R probability variation jackpot, a successful vibration effect is executed by the effect button 6a and the effect lever 6h.
In the case of a 4R normal jackpot, a successful vibration effect determined by the effect button 6a and the firing handle 7 is executed.

Even if the game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 10a during the probability change / time saving modes D to G and the judgment result is a big hit, the determination effect (effect) with or without the operation of the operating means. It is possible to execute a successful image, a successful vibration effect, and a determined operation by the movable effect members 17A to 17C). Therefore, it is possible to reliably notify that the jackpot game is executed.

(Information table for successful decision production)
FIG. 52 is a diagram showing an information table for determining success effect, which is referred to when executing the determination success effect.
The decision success effect (image effect, character movement effect, vibration effect, button light emission effect, lamp light emission effect, and sound effect) is the effect content of the reach effect that involves the operation of the operation means during the determined valid period during the SPSP reach effect. Based on the battle / mission), when it is started when the operation means (effect button 6a, effect lever 6h) is started, and when it is started after the operation means (effect button 6a, effect lever 6h) is started. There is.

When Battle A or Battle B is executed as an SPSP reach effect, a fixed valid period (5 seconds) is started during the execution of Battle A or Battle B (at the end of the game), and one single operation of the effect button 6a is performed. An operation promotion image (opaque effect button image, gauge image, character image of "press") is displayed.
Then, when the single hit operation of the effect button 6a is started during the determined valid period, the determined success effect is started. On the other hand, if the single hit operation of the effect button 6a is not performed during the determined valid period, the determined successful effect is started at the end of the determined valid period.

When Battle C is executed as an SPSP reach effect, a fixed valid period (5 seconds) is started during the execution of Battle C, and an operation promotion image (opaque effect lever image) that encourages one tilting operation of the effect lever 6h. , Gauge image, "closed" text image) is displayed.
Then, when one tilting operation of the effect lever 6h is started during the determination valid period, the determination success effect is started. On the other hand, if the tilting operation of the effect lever 6h is not performed during the determined valid period, the determined successful effect is started at the end of the determined valid period.

When mission A (Mission of destroying Oiwa) is executed as an SPSP reach effect, a fixed valid period (5 seconds) is started during the execution of mission A, and an operation promotion image (opaque) that prompts the continuous operation of the effect button 6a. The effect button image, gauge image, and character image of "continuous hit") are displayed.
Then, when the Oiwa is completely destroyed after the continuous striking operation of the effect button 6a is started during the determined valid period, the determined success effect is started. On the other hand, if the continuous striking operation of the effect button 6a is not performed during the determined valid period, the determined successful effect is started at the end of the determined valid period.

When mission B (successful mission to reach level meter MAX) is executed as SPSP reach effect, a fixed valid period (5 seconds) is started during execution of mission B, and an operation for prompting a long press operation of the effect button 6a. The promotion image (opaque effect button image, gauge image, "long press" character image) is displayed.
Then, when the level value of the level meter reaches MAX after the long press operation of the effect button 6a is started during the determined valid period, the determined success effect is started. On the other hand, if the effect button 6a is not pressed and held during the determined valid period, the determined successful effect is started at the end of the determined valid period.

In this way, the decision success effect is executed regardless of whether or not the operation means is operated during the valid period.
In addition, the start timing of the decision success effect in the case of a battle effect based on one single hit operation of the effect button 6a or the effect lever 6h, and the decision success effect in the case of a battle effect based on the continuous hit operation or the long press operation of the effect button 6a. The start timing of is different.

Therefore, even for the strong vibration effect (decision success vibration effect), in the case of a battle effect based on a single stroke operation of the effect button 6a or the effect lever 6h, the single stroke operation of the effect button 6a or the effect lever 6h is performed. When it is started (due to the start of operation of the operating means), the strong vibration effect (decision success vibration effect) is started. On the other hand, if the single stroke operation of the effect button 6a or the effect lever 6h is not performed, the strong vibration effect (decision success vibration effect) is started at the end of the determined valid period.

Further, in the case of a mission effect based on a continuous press operation or a long press operation of the effect button 6a, when the mission is successful after the continuous press operation or the long press operation of the effect button 6a is started (not caused by the start of the operation of the operation means). A strong vibration effect (successful decision vibration effect) will be started. On the other hand, if the continuous striking operation or the long press operation of the effect button 6a is not performed, the strong vibration effect (determined successful vibration effect) is started at the end of the determined valid period.

Further, in the case of the mission A based on the continuous striking operation of the staging button 6a, a strong vibration effect for 1 second is performed immediately after the continuous striking operation of the staging button 6a is started and immediately before the Oiwa is completely destroyed.
Further, in the case of mission B based on the long press operation of the effect button 6a, when the level value of the level meter reaches the level value immediately before reaching MAX after the long press operation of the effect button 6a is started, a strong vibration effect for 1 second is produced. Is executed.

In the case of mission B based on the long press operation of the effect button 6a, the level value of the level meter reaches a predetermined specific value (2, 4, 6, 8) after the long press operation of the effect button 6a is started. The vibration effect (weak vibration) may be performed for each, or the effect mode (vibration period, vibration intensity, etc.) of the vibration effect may be different. For example, when the level value of the level meter is the first specific value (“2”), the vibration mode of the vibration effect (“bull” with a vibration time of 0.2 seconds) and the second specific value (“4”). In this case, the vibration mode of the vibration effect (“blur” with a vibration time of 0.3 seconds) may be different.

When a battle effect based on the continuous hit operation or long press operation of the effect button 6a is executed, after the continuous hit operation or long press operation of the effect button 6a is started, the decision success effect (decision success vibration effect) is made when the battle is won. Is started.
That is, even if the production content (battle effect) of the same reach effect is used, the start timing of the determined success effect (determined successful vibration effect) differs depending on the operation mode of the effect button 6a.

(Execution start timing and end timing of decision success production)
FIG. 53 is a diagram showing the execution start timing and the end timing of the determination success effect (success image, determination success vibration effect, determination accessory effect) depending on the presence or absence of the operation of the operating means.
FIG. 53 (1) is a diagram showing the execution start timing and end timing of the determination success effect (determination success vibration effect) when the button operation is not performed during the valid period. FIGS. 53 (2-1) and 53 (2-2) show the execution start timing and end of the decision success effect (success image, decision success vibration effect, decision character effect) when the button operation is performed during the valid period. It is a figure which shows the timing.

Comparing FIGS. 53 (1), (2-1) and (2-2), the decision success effect is executed regardless of whether the operating means is operated or not operated during the valid period.
Further, the execution start timing of the determined success effect differs depending on the operation timing (timing depending on the presence or absence of operation) of the effect button 6a during the valid period (timing of T1 or T2).
The end timing of the determined success effect is the same regardless of the operation timing of the effect button 6a during the valid period (timing of T7).
Therefore, the display start timing of the success effect image, the vibration start timing of the strong vibration effect, and the operation start timing of the character motion effect differ depending on whether or not the effect button 6a is operated during the valid period and the operation timing, and the success effect image is displayed. The period, the execution period of the strong vibration effect (decision success vibration effect), and the execution period of the character movement effect are different.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 53 (2-1), when the effect button 6a is operated during the valid period (timing of T2), it is higher than when the effect button 6a is not operated during the valid period (). (Timing of T3), since the display start timing of the success effect image is earlier, the display period of the success effect image becomes longer.
That is, when the effect button 6a is operated during the valid period, the display of the success effect image is started at the start of the operation, and continues to be displayed until the determined success effect is completed.

Further, when the effect button 6a is operated during the valid period (timing of T2), the vibration start timing of the strong vibration effect is earlier than when the effect button 6a is not operated during the valid period (timing of T3). Therefore, the execution period of the strong vibration effect becomes long (the execution period of the strong vibration effect is variable). Specifically, when the effect button 6a is operated during the valid period, strong vibration (4 seconds → 5 seconds) by the vibration motor 6d is started at the start of the operation, and strong vibration (4) until the successful determination effect is completed. Seconds → 5 seconds) is repeated.
That is, when the execution period of the vibration effect is variable, the vibration effect is executed up to the same timing (timing at which the determined success effect ends) regardless of whether or not the effect button 6a is operated during the valid period and the operation timing.

Further, when the effect button 6a is operated during the valid period (timing of T2), the operation start timing of the accessory motion effect is higher than when the effect button 6a is not operated during the valid period (timing of T3). Since the speed is increased, the execution period of the character movement effect becomes longer (the execution period of the character movement effect is variable). Specifically, when the effect button 6a is operated during the valid period, the determination operation of the movable effect members 17A to 17C is started at the start of the operation, and the timing before the end of the determination success effect (timing of T6). ), The movable staging members 17A to 17C remain in the staging position, and then the movable staging members 17A to 17C return to the standby position.
That is, when the execution period of the character motion effect is variable, the character motion effect is performed up to the same timing (timing at which the determined success effect ends) regardless of whether or not the effect button 6a is operated during the valid period and the operation timing. Will be executed.

As shown in FIG. 53 (2-2), the execution period of the strong vibration effect and the execution period of the accessory movement effect are unchanged regardless of whether or not the effect button 6a is operated during the valid period and the operation timing. May be good. Specifically, when the effect button 6a is operated during the valid period, the execution period of the strong vibration effect and the character motion effect ends at a timing (T5 timing) before the timing at which the determined success effect ends. , Only the success effect image will continue to be displayed.
That is, when the execution period of the strong vibration effect and the execution period of the character motion effect are unchanged, the strong vibration effect and the character motion effect end according to the presence or absence of the operation of the effect button 6a and the operation timing during the valid period. The timing is different.

In the case of the cut-in effect described above, the execution period does not change regardless of the operation timing of the effect button 6a during the valid period (similar to FIG. 53 (2-2)). Therefore, since the execution period of the vibration effect does not change, the start timing and the end timing of the vibration effect correspond to the operation timing of the effect button 6a. Therefore, it is possible to suppress excessively arousing the expectation of the player.

(Vibration production information table for pattern matching)
FIG. 54 is a diagram showing a vibration effect information table for symbol alignment, which is referred to when the jackpot effect symbol of symbol alignment is temporarily stopped and displayed in the jackpot variation effect.
The "big hit symbol alignment" is a jackpot display mode (even-numbered symbol of "222", "22" by the staging symbol 16a of a decorative display mode (display mode in which the numbers are surrounded by a decorative frame) mainly composed of characters such as numbers. 777 ”is shown to be stopped and displayed by forming an odd numbered symbol, etc.).
It should be noted that the jackpot display mode may be formed by the effect symbol 16a of the highly decorative display mode (7 and the pig character) composed of numbers and characters, and the display may be stopped.

In the jackpot variation effect, a decision effect that involves the operation of the effect button 6a / effect lever 6h is executed during the reach effect, and the jackpot variation effect pattern that aligns the jackpot symbols, and the operation of the effect button 6a / effect lever 6h during the reach effect. There is a jackpot variable staging pattern in which a determined staging is executed without the need for a jackpot pattern.

The jackpot variable effect pattern in which the determined effect without the operation of the effect button 6a / effect lever 6h is executed during the reach effect and the jackpot symbols are aligned is the SP reach jackpot variable effect pattern (variable effect pattern 14: Fig. 42).
Specifically, the effect image is used for the image display effect, the third movable effect member 17C is used for the character movement effect, and the effect button 6a is used, without the effect period being determined at the end of the SP reach effect (no operation promotion image is displayed). Vibration effect (strong vibration 4 seconds → 5 seconds), button light emission effect in which the effect button 6a emits rainbow light, lamp emission effect in which the lamps of the panel lighting device 23 and the frame lighting device 27 emit rainbow light, and the sound output device 9. A series of determination of the sound effect for outputting the success effect sound After the success effect is executed, the effect symbol 16a is temporarily stopped and displayed with the D symbols aligned.

In the accessory movement effect by the third movable effect member 17C, the blade portion of the third movable effect member 17C that emitted rainbow light was pulled out from the sheath portion and tilted to the front side of the display screen of the first image display device 16. A decision operation is performed to return to the standby position later. The operation mode of this determination operation is different from the determination operation executed in the determination success effect accompanied by the operation of the operating means. It should be noted that the same operation mode as the deciding operation executed in the deciding success effect accompanied by the operation of the operating means may be used.

As shown in FIG. 54 (1), the decision success effect is executed during the reach effect, and the effect symbol 16a is temporarily stopped in either the even-numbered symbol alignment (“222”) or the odd-numbered symbol alignment (“777”) display mode. Even when it is displayed (first timing), the button vibration motor 6d for vibrating the effect button 6a without generating an effective period (without displaying the operation promotion image) vibrates strongly for 4 seconds. A strong vibration effect is performed.

When the effect symbol 16a is temporarily stopped and displayed in either the even-numbered symbol alignment (“222”) or the odd-numbered symbol alignment (“777”) display mode without executing the determined success effect during the reach effect (first timing). Even so, a strong vibration effect is executed in which the button vibration motor 6d for vibrating the effect button 6a vibrates for 4 seconds without generating an effective period (without displaying the operation promotion image).

In this way, even if the determined effect is executed and the jackpot effect symbol 16a is temporarily stopped and displayed in either the even-numbered symbol alignment (“222”) or the odd-numbered symbol alignment (“777”) display mode, the valid period The vibration effect is executed in the same vibration mode (strong vibration, vibration period of 4 seconds) without generating the above (without displaying the operation promotion image).
Further, even if the jackpot effect symbol 16a is temporarily stopped and displayed in either the even-numbered symbol alignment (“222”) or the odd-numbered symbol alignment (“777”) display mode without executing the determined effect, the valid period is set. The vibration effect is executed in the same vibration mode (strong vibration, vibration period of 4 seconds) without generating it (without displaying the operation promotion image).
That is, the vibration effect executed when the jackpot symbols are aligned is the jackpot effect regardless of whether or not the determined effect is executed and in any of the display modes of even-numbered symbol alignment (“222”) and odd-numbered symbol alignment (“777”). Even when the symbol is temporarily stopped, the vibration mode is the same (strong vibration, vibration period of 4 seconds).

As shown in FIG. 54 (2), when the effect symbol 16a of the jackpot symbol alignment at the second timing after the first timing is temporarily stopped and displayed, the vibration period of the vibration effect differs depending on the type of the symbol. There is.
A valid period is generated regardless of whether the effect symbol 16a is temporarily stopped in any of the display modes of even-numbered symbol alignment (for example, "222") and odd-numbered symbol symbol alignment other than 7 (for example, "333"). A strong vibration effect is executed in which the button vibration motor 6d for vibrating the effect button 6a vibrates strongly for 1 second without displaying the operation promotion image.
On the other hand, when the effect symbol 16a is temporarily stopped and displayed in the display mode of "7" symbol alignment, the button vibration for vibrating the effect button 6a without generating the valid period (without displaying the operation promotion image). A strong vibration effect is executed in which the motor 6d vibrates strongly for 4 seconds.

(Re-lottery production pattern determination table)
FIG. 55 is a diagram showing a re-lottery effect pattern determination table referred to when determining an effect pattern for the re-lottery effect.

As shown in FIG. 55, in the re-lottery effect pattern determination table, the type of effect mode, the presence / absence of promotion (whether promotion is planned), the selection rate (%) of each re-lottery effect pattern, and the selected re-lottery effect Patterns are associated. As a reference, the staging configuration of each re-lottery staging pattern is described.

"Validity period: single hit / 3 seconds" indicates that the validity period in the re-lottery effect ends with one operation of the effect button 6a or when 3 seconds elapse without the effect button 6a being operated. ing.
Although the effective suggestion effect is not executed in the re-lottery effect, the effective suggestion effect may be executed. Further, when the promotion success effect is executed in the re-lottery effect, the vibration effect may be executed during the effective suggestion effect. It is possible to raise the expectation of the player even before the promotion success production is executed.

The "operation promotion effect" is an effect that encourages the operation of the effect button 6a during the valid period. Specifically, the gauge is the remaining period of the opaque effect button image displayed at a specific position without executing the effect suggestion effect and the operation valid period (3 seconds) in which one single hit operation of the effect button 6a is effective. An operation promotion image composed of a gauge image indicated by the length of and a character image of "press" is displayed.

The "normal button white" in the operation promotion effect column means that a button image imitating the effect button 6a that is not protruding and emits white light is displayed as an opaque effect button image, and the effect button 6a is displayed. Indicates that white light is emitted.
"Normal button red" means that a button image imitating the effect button 6a that is not protruding and emits red light is displayed as an opaque effect button image, and the effect button 6a emits red light. Shows.
The "normal button rainbow" means that a button image imitating the effect button 6a that is not protruding and emits rainbow light is displayed as an opaque effect button image, and the effect button 6a emits rainbow light. Shows.
The jackpot expectation of each promotion effect is "normal button white"<"normal button red"<"normal button rainbow".

The "button state" indicates the state of the effect button 6a during the valid period. The "normal" in the button state column indicates that the effect button 6a is in a normal state in which it does not protrude.

The "promotion failure effect" in the column of the re-lottery effect mode is a non-promotion symbol that does not become an effect symbol advantageous to the player as a result of the re-lottery effect (for example, even-numbered symbol → even-numbered symbol, odd-numbered symbol other than “7” → It indicates that the odd-numbered symbols other than "7") are derived and displayed (temporarily stopped display).
The "promotion success effect" is a derivation display of a promotion symbol (for example, an even number symbol → an odd number symbol, an odd number symbol other than “7” → a “7” symbol), which is an effect symbol advantageous to the player as a result of the re-lottery effect. (Temporary stop display) is displayed.

"Strong vibration (3 seconds)" in the button vibration column means that the button vibration motor 6d for vibrating the effect button 6a vibrates strongly for 3 seconds from the time when the promotion symbol is derived and displayed (at the end of the valid period). It shows that the strong vibration effect is executed.

"Rainbow emission (4 seconds)" in the button emission column means that the button emission LED 6e for emitting the effect button 6a is for 4 seconds (the effect button 6a is strong) from the time when the promotion symbol is derived and displayed (at the end of the valid period). It shows that it emits rainbow light over a period of time (longer than it is vibrating).

The "non-promotion sound effect" in the column of the effect sound indicates that the non-promotion sound effect is output when the non-promotion symbol is derived and displayed.
The "promotion sound effect" indicates that the promotion sound effect is emitted when the promotion symbol is derived and displayed.

The first feature of the re-lottery effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 55 is that when the promotion success effect is executed, the vibration effect of generating an effective period and vibrating the effect button 6a is executed. Therefore, it is possible to effectively notify that the player has been promoted to a jackpot symbol that is advantageous to the player, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The second feature of the re-lottery effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 55 is that the rainbow emission of the effect button 6a is performed over a longer period than the strong vibration effect. Therefore, it is possible to maintain the uplifting feeling of the player even after the strong vibration effect is completed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, although the re-lottery effect is executed by generating a valid period (with the operation promotion image displayed), the re-lottery effect is performed without generating the valid period (without displaying the operation promotion image). You may want to do it.

(Number of button vibrations executed since the start of the successful decision production)
FIG. 56 shows from the start of the decision success effect in the jackpot variation effect in which the re-lottery effect is executed until the jackpot effect symbol is confirmed and stopped displayed (decision success effect, symbol alignment effect, re-lottery effect, symbol alignment effect, It is a figure which shows the presence or absence of execution of the button vibration of (the symbol fixed stop).

As shown in FIG. 56, there are cases where the even-numbered jackpot effect symbol 16a is displayed as a fixed stop display and cases where the odd-numbered symbol-matched jackpot effect symbol 16a is displayed as a fixed stop after the decision success effect is started. , The number of times the button vibration is executed is different.

Specifically, if the even-numbered symbol (“2” symbol) is not promoted to an odd-numbered symbol in the re-lottery effect and the jackpot effect symbol 16a with even-numbered symbols is fixedly stopped, the decision success effect is started. The number of times the button vibration is executed until the symbol is fixed and stopped is three times.
If the odd-numbered symbols other than the "7" symbol ("3" symbol) are not promoted to the "7" symbol in the re-lottery effect, and the jackpot effect symbol 16a with odd-numbered symbols other than the "7" symbol is fixedly stopped. , The number of times the button vibration is executed from the start of the decision success effect to the stop of the symbol determination is 3 times.

On the other hand, if the even-numbered symbol (“2” symbol) is promoted to the odd-numbered symbol (“7” symbol) in the re-lottery effect and the jackpot effect symbol 16a with the odd-numbered symbols is fixedly stopped, the decision success effect starts. The number of times the button vibration is executed from the time when the symbol is fixed to the time when the symbol is fixed is four times.
If the odd-numbered symbol ("3" symbol) other than the "7" symbol is promoted to the "7" symbol in the re-lottery effect, and the jackpot effect symbol 16a with the "7" symbol match is confirmed and stopped, the decision is successful. The number of times the button vibration vibration is executed from the start of is to the stop of the symbol determination is 4 times.

In this way, when the promotion symbol that is the jackpot symbol that is advantageous to the player is derived and displayed in the re-lottery effect, rather than the case where the non-promoted symbol that is not the jackpot symbol that is advantageous to the player is derived and displayed in the re-lottery effect. The number of times the button vibration is executed and the number of times the character effect is executed is larger from the start of the successful decision effect to the stop of the symbol confirmation. Therefore, it is possible to effectively notify the player that the jackpot game that is advantageous to the player is executed, and to enhance the joy of the player's jackpot winning, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Even if a non-promoted symbol that does not become a jackpot symbol that is advantageous to the player is temporarily stopped and displayed after the successful decision production, or if a jackpot symbol that is advantageous to the player is temporarily stopped and displayed, the successful decision vibration effect of the successful decision production The vibration effect mode is the same (vibration period of 4 seconds → 5 seconds with strong vibration).

Even if the jackpot symbol that is not advantageous to the player is temporarily stopped when the effect symbol with the same pattern is temporarily stopped after the successful decision production, the jackpot symbol that is advantageous to the player is provisionally. Even when stopped, the vibration mode of the button vibration is the same (vibration period of 4 seconds with strong vibration).

(Final production pattern decision table)
FIG. 57 is a diagram showing a finalized effect pattern determination table referred to when determining an effect pattern for a finalized effect.

As shown in FIG. 57, the final effect pattern determination table is associated with a jackpot determination result, a type of variable effect pattern, a selection rate (%) of each confirmed effect pattern, and a selected final effect pattern. As a reference, the staging configuration of each definite staging pattern is described.

"-" In the execution timing column indicates the timing at which the finalized effect is not executed, and "○" indicates the timing at which the finalized effect is executed.
The "confirmed sound" in the column of the effect sound indicates that a definite sound for notifying that the jackpot game is executed is output.
"Handle rainbow light emission" in the light emission column means that the handle LED for making the firing handle 7 emit light is a rainbow from the time when the confirmation sound is output until the fluctuation stops (for 4 seconds or more until the effect symbol 16a stops and displays). It shows that it emits light.

"Strong vibration (3 seconds)" in the column of button vibration means that a strong vibration effect is executed in which the button vibration motor 6d for vibrating the effect button 6a vibrates strongly for 3 seconds from the time when the definite sound is output. It is shown that.

The first feature of the finalized effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 57 is that when the finalized effect is executed, the vibration effect of vibrating the effect button 6a without generating an effective period is executed. Therefore, it is possible to effectively notify that the jackpot game is executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The second feature of the definite effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 57 is that the rainbow emission of the firing handle 7 is performed over a longer period than the strong vibration effect. Therefore, it is possible to maintain the uplifting feeling of the player even after the strong vibration effect is completed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Resurrection production pattern determination table)
FIG. 58 is a diagram showing a revival effect pattern determination table referred to when determining an effect pattern of the revival effect.

As shown in FIG. 58, the effect mode, the jackpot determination result, the reach type, the selection rate (%) of each revival effect pattern, and the selected revival effect pattern are associated with the revival effect pattern determination table. As a reference, the staging configuration of each revival staging pattern is described.

In the "SP reach" column of the variable effect pattern column, if the jackpot judgment result is a jackpot and a resurrection effect pattern that does not execute the resurrection effect is selected, it is suggested that the battle win / mission will be successful in the SP reach effect. Victory / success suggestion effect is performed, and the effect symbol 16a with D symbols (only numbers) is temporarily stopped and displayed.
On the other hand, if the jackpot judgment result is a loss or a jackpot and a resurrection effect pattern that executes the resurrection effect is selected, a defeat / success suggestion effect that suggests that the battle is defeated / mission fails in the SP reach effect is performed. The effect symbol 16a indicating the reach loss is temporarily stopped and displayed.

The "valid period" in the column of the effect configuration means that the effective period in the revival effect ends with the operation of the effect button 6a (single stroke operation / continuous stroke operation) or with the operation of the effect lever 6h (tilt operation). It indicates that the process ends or the effect button 6a / effect lever 6h is not operated and 4 seconds elapse.

The "type of operation means" in the column of the validity period indicates the type of the operation means (effect button 6a, effect lever 6h) for which the operation is effective during the validity period, and if it is the "effect button", the effect button 6a It is shown that the operation is effective, and if it is the "effect lever", the operation of the effect lever 6h is effective.

The "operation promotion effect" is an effect that encourages the operation of the operation means (effect button 6a, effect lever 6h) during the valid period. Specifically, an opaque effect button image or an opaque effect lever image, and a gauge image showing the remaining period of the operation valid period (4 seconds) in which the operation of the effect button 6a or the effect lever 6h is effective by the length of the gauge. An operation promotion image composed of a character image of "press, repeated hits, or close" is displayed.
The operation promotion effect ends with the operation of the operating means (effect button 6a, effect lever 6h) during the valid period, or with the lapse of the valid period (4 seconds) without operating the operating means. ..

The "normal button white" in the operation promotion effect column means that a button image imitating the effect button 6a that is not protruding and emits white light is displayed as an opaque effect button image, and the effect button 6a is displayed. Indicates that white light is emitted.
The "normal lever" indicates that a lever image imitating a predetermined size effect lever 6h is displayed as an opaque effect lever image.

The "state of the operating means" indicates the state of the operating means (effect button 6a, effect lever 6h) during the valid period, and the "normal" is a normal state in which the effect button 6a does not protrude. ..

The "operation mode" indicates the type of operation mode of the operation means (effect button 6a, effect lever 6h) during the valid period.
"Single hit" in the operation mode column means that the effect button 6a is pressed once from the position in the normal state or the protruding state to the pressed position, and "continuous hit" means that the effect button 6a is pressed from the position in the normal state. It indicates that the pressing operation is continuously performed a plurality of times, and "tilting" indicates that the effect lever 6h is tilted in the front-rear direction from the position in the normal state.

The "revival failure effect" in the column of the revival effect mode indicates that an effect suggesting that the jackpot game is not executed is executed.
The "revival success effect" indicates that an effect suggesting that the jackpot game is executed is executed.
The "failure image" in the result image column indicates that a dark color image is displayed on the screen of the first image display device 16, and the "success image" means a success effect image on the screen of the first image display device 16. Is displayed.

"Strong vibration (4 seconds)" in the button / lever vibration column is a strong vibration effect (revival) in which the button vibration motor 6d for vibrating the effect button 6a vibrates strongly for 4 seconds from the start of the successful effect effect. The successful vibration effect) is executed, and the strong vibration effect (revival successful vibration effect) is executed in which the lever vibration motor 6j for vibrating the effect lever 6h vibrates strongly for 4 seconds from the start of the revival successful effect. Which indicates that.

"Rainbow emission" in the button / lever emission column means that the button emission LED 6e for emitting the effect button 6a is determined and succeeds for 6 seconds from the start of the effect (a longer period than when the effect button 6a vibrates strongly). The lever light emitting LED 6k for making the effect lever 6h emit light is determined and succeeds. The effect button 6a emits rainbow light for 6 seconds (longer than the strong vibration) from the start of the effect. It is shown that.

"None" in the column of accessory operation indicates that the movable staging members 17A to 17C do not operate.
“Yes” in the column of the accessory movement indicates that the third movable effect member 17C performs the accessory operation effect of operating and emitting light in a predetermined mode.
Specifically, the third movable effect member 17C in the standby position emits rainbow light, and the blade portion is pulled out from the sheath portion to perform an effect operation of tilting to the front side of the display screen of the first image display device 16 and then to the standby position. The character movement effect is performed by the strong movement with a large movement width to return.

“None” in the effect sound column indicates that the effect sound (sound effect) is not output from the audio output device 9.
The "success sound effect" indicates that the success sound effect is output from the voice output device 9 as an effect sound. As for the success sound effect, the success sound effect A is output in the case of the revival success effect in which the effect button 6a is the operation target, and the success sound effect A is in the case of the revival success effect in which the effect lever 6h is the operation target. A success sound effect B with different sounds is output.
It should be noted that the same success sound effect may be used for the revival success effect in which the effect button 6a is the operation target and the revival success effect in which the effect lever 6h is the operation target.

"Non-light emission" in the lamp emission column means that the panel lighting device 23 and the frame lighting device 27 do not emit light, and "rainbow emission" means that the panel lighting device 23 and the frame lighting device 27 are rainbows. It shows that it emits light.

The first feature of the revival effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 58 is that when the revival effect is executed, a vibration effect (revival success vibration effect) in which the effect button 6a or the effect lever 6h is vibrated by generating an effective period is generated. ) Is executed. Therefore, it is possible to effectively notify that the revival jackpot will be achieved, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The second feature of the revival effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 58 is that the rainbow emission of the effect button 6a or the effect lever 6h is performed for a longer period than the vibration period of the effect button 6a or the effect lever 6h. Therefore, even after the vibration of the effect button 6a or the effect lever 6h is completed, the player's uplifting feeling can be maintained, and the interest of the game can be improved.

The third feature of the revival effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 58 is whether the revival success effect associated with the operation of the effect button 6a is executed or the revival success effect associated with the operation of the effect lever 6h is executed. , The vibration mode of the vibration effect in the revival success effect is the same (strong vibration (4 seconds)). Therefore, regardless of the type of operation means, it is possible to effectively notify that the game will be a resurrection jackpot game, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The fourth feature of the revival effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 58 is that when the revival success effect accompanying the operation of the operation means is executed, the operation mode of the operation means (single stroke operation / continuous stroke operation of the effect button 6a, effect lever). Regardless of the tilting operation of 6h), the vibration mode of the vibration effect in the revival success effect is the same (strong vibration (4 seconds)). Therefore, it is possible to effectively notify that the revival jackpot will be achieved regardless of the operation mode of the operation means during the valid period, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As a fifth feature of the revival effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 58, the revival effect is more likely to be executed in the probability variation / time saving modes D to G than in the normal modes A to C. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the jackpot fluctuation effect in the probability variation mode from becoming monotonous, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The sixth feature of the resurrection effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 58 is that when the jackpot determination result is a jackpot, the probability variation / time saving modes D to G play a game in the resurrection success effect than the normal modes A to C. It is easy for the jackpot symbol of the "7" symbol matching, in which the jackpot game that is most advantageous to the person is executed, to be stopped and displayed. Therefore, it becomes easy to raise the expectation of the player in the probability change / time saving mode D to G which is advantageous for the player, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.
It should be noted that the resurrection effect can be executed even at the time of SPSP reach (for example, SPSP reach in which the determination effect is not executed), and the resurrection effect pattern is determined with reference to the resurrection effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 58.

(Example of production when continuous notice production and step-up notice production are executed)
An example of the effect when the button vibration advance notice effect (continuous advance notice effect) and the step-up advance notice effect are executed will be described with reference to FIGS. 59 and 60.

As shown in FIG. 59 (1), in the first image display device 16, the staging symbols 16a of “2 (dog) 1 (cat) 6 (tiger)” and the special symbol TZ of “216” indicating the loss are set for a predetermined time. It is in the state of confirming stop display. Further, a hold number of "3" is displayed in the first hold number display area 16e, and three hold icons "◎ (white)" are displayed in the first hold icon display area 16b. At this time, since it is not in the customer waiting state, the lamp light emitting effect is performed by the panel lighting device 23.

The symbol confirmation period in which the effect symbol 16a is fixedly stopped and displayed is set to the same time (for example, 0.5 seconds) regardless of the type of the variable effect pattern to be executed and the jackpot determination result.
The variable display of the special symbol TZ is continuously performed in a fixed display mode during the period from the start of the variable display of the special symbol to the stop display.
Further, the variable display of the special symbol TZ is a position considered so as to be easy to maintain a visible state even if the effecting operations of the movable effect members 17A to 17C are performed on the front side of the display screen of the first image display device 16. For example, it is displayed in the vicinity of the lower left end of the display screen of the first image display device 16). As a more preferable embodiment, it is preferable that the first movable staging members 17A to 17C are not shielded by the staging operation and are always displayed in a visually recognizable state.

Similar to the special symbol TZ, the display of the reserved numbers in the first reserved number display area 16e and the second reserved number display area 16f is maintained in a visible state even when the movable effect members 17A to 17C are subjected to the effect operation. It is displayed at a position considered for ease (for example, the edge of the display screen of the first image display device 16). As a more preferable aspect, it is preferable that the display is always visible without being shielded by the effect operation of the effect object.

As shown in FIG. 59 (2), when the symbol determination period (for example, 0.5 seconds) elapses, at least a part of the three effect symbols 16a performs a predetermined operation to display the special symbol (effect symbol 16a) in a variable manner. The fluctuation start suggestion effect HS suggesting that is started is performed.

As the fluctuation start suggestion effect HS, for example, the face of "dog, cat, tiger" in the decoration part of the three effect patterns 16a of "2 (dog) 1 (cat) 6 (tiger)" displayed as confirmed stop is enlarged. At the same time, a variation start operation is performed in which the eyes of the "dog, cat, tiger" are changed, and the variation display of the special symbol (effect symbol 16a) is started by a display mode different from the display mode of the effect symbol 16a that has been confirmed and stopped. It is suggested that it will be done.

Since it is possible to attract the player's attention to the effect symbol 16a by performing the variation start suggestion effect HS, it is possible to make the player surely recognize that the next symbol variation display will be started after the symbol determination is stopped. It will be possible.

With the start of the variation start suggestion effect HS, the first reserved number display area 16e changes from "3" to "2", and the three reserved icons shift toward the variable icon display area 16d. In addition, the variation display of the special symbol TZ is started with the start of the variation start suggestion effect HS.

Further, with the start of the variation start suggestion effect HS, the first effect of the button vibration warning effect over the three variation effects is started. Specifically, the effect button 6a vibrates slightly for 1 second, and the effect button 6a blinks white for a weak notice.

After that, when the hold icon (hold icon "◎" at the left end in the figure) that is the target of the button vibration notice effect changes to a blue icon immediately after the shift of the hold icon is completed, the fluctuation start suggestion effect HS ends, and the figure As shown in 59 (3), the scroll display (high-speed fluctuation) of the effect symbol 16a in the normal size is started. In addition, the winning opening lamp NR emits the same blue light as the blue icon, and the lamp change effect is started.

As shown in FIG. 59 (4), after the fluctuation time elapses, after the three effect symbols 16a are temporarily stopped and displayed in the combination display mode “2 (dog) 4 (chicken) 5 (koala)” indicating normal loss. Along with the fixed stop display, the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed in combination with "245".

As shown in FIG. 59 (5), when the symbol determination period (for example, 0.5 seconds) elapses, the next variation effect is started, and the variation start suggestion effect HS is performed.
With the start of the variation start suggestion effect HS, the first reserved number display area 16e changes from "2" to "1", and the two reserved icons are shifted toward the variable icon display area 16d. In addition, the variation display of the special symbol TZ is started with the start of the variation start suggestion effect HS.

Further, with the start of the fluctuation start suggestion effect HS, the second effect of the button vibration advance notice effect is started. Specifically, the effect button 6a is slightly vibrated for 1 second, and a weak notice is given that the effect button 6a blinks in white.

After that, when the hold icon (hold icon "◎" at the left end in the figure) that is the target of the button vibration notice effect changes to a red icon immediately after the shift of the hold icon is completed, the fluctuation start suggestion effect HS ends, and the figure As shown in 59 (6), the scroll display (high-speed fluctuation) of the effect symbol 16a in the normal size is started. In addition, the winning opening lamp NR emits the same red light as the red icon, and the lamp change effect is performed.

As shown in FIG. 59 (7), after the fluctuation time elapses, after the three effect symbols 16a are temporarily stopped and displayed in the combination display mode "3 (rabbit) 1 (cat) 2 (dog)" indicating normal loss. Along with the fixed stop display, the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed in combination with "312".

As shown in FIG. 59 (8), when the symbol determination period (for example, 0.5 seconds) elapses, the variation effect of the advance notice target is started, and the variation start suggestion effect HS is performed. With the start of the variation start suggestion effect HS, the first hold number display area 16e changes from “1” to “0”, and one hold icon shifts toward the variation icon display area 16d. In addition, the variation display of the special symbol TZ is started with the start of the variation start suggestion effect HS.

Further, with the start of the fluctuation start suggestion effect HS, the third effect of the button vibration advance notice effect is started. Specifically, the effect button 6a is vibrated strongly for 3 seconds, and a strong notice is given to make the effect button 6a blink red.

After that, when the shift of the hold icon is completed, as shown in FIG. 59 (9), the scroll display (high-speed fluctuation) of the effect symbol 16a in the normal size is started, but the strong notice of the button vibration effect continues. Will be. After that, the strong vibration and red blinking of the effect button 6a stop, and the third effect of the button vibration warning effect ends.

Then, when a predetermined time has elapsed from the end of the third effect of the button vibration advance notice effect, the first step effect (SU1) of the step-up advance notice effect is started, as shown in FIG. 60 (10). Specifically, the first image display device 16 displays a first step image showing how the bus arrives, and outputs a first step sound effect.

When the first step effect is completed, as shown in FIG. 60 (11), the process develops into the second step and the second step effect (SU2) is started. Specifically, the first image display device 16 displays a second-step image showing how a female character gets off the arriving bus and the bus runs away, and outputs a second-step sound effect.

When the second step effect is completed, as shown in FIG. 60 (12), the process develops into the third step and the third step effect (SU3) is started. Specifically, the first image display device 16 displays a third-step image showing how a male character appears and walks up to the male character in which the female character appears, and outputs a third-step sound effect. To.

When the third step effect is completed, as shown in FIG. 60 (13), it develops into the fourth step and the fourth step effect (SU4) is started. Specifically, the first image display device 16 displays a fourth-step image showing how the female character and the male character approach each other, and outputs a fourth-step sound effect.

When the fourth step effect is completed, as shown in FIG. 60 (14), the fifth step effect (SU5) is started by developing into the fifth step. Specifically, the first image display device 16 displays a fifth-step image showing how the two characters are talking with a smile, and outputs a fifth-step sound effect.
Further, the weak vibration effect of vibrating the effect button 6a for 1 second is started while the effect button 6a is turned off. However, since the execution of this weak vibration effect is not accompanied by the operation promotion effect, the sound effect when displaying the operation promotion image and the effect sound when the effect button 6a is operated during the valid period are not output. The lamp light emission effect by the panel lighting device 23 is continuously performed.

When 1 second has passed from the start of the weak vibration effect, as shown in FIG. 60 (15), the weak vibration of the effect button 6a stops, the weak vibration effect ends, and 2 seconds after the end of the weak vibration effect. The fifth step production is completed. After that, as shown in FIG. 60 (16), the SP reach effect is executed after the normal reach effect is executed according to the variable effect pattern, or the SPSP reach effect is executed after the normal reach effect is executed. become.

As described above, according to the effect example shown in FIGS. 59 and 60, after the number of holds displayed in the hold number display area 16e decreases with the start of the change effect (after the start of the change start suggestion effect). The button vibration warning effect is started before the scroll display (high-speed fluctuation) of the effect symbol 16a is started. Therefore, it is possible to make the player recognize that the variable effect has been started, and it is possible to make it easier for the player to notice that the button vibration notice effect is being executed, which can improve the interest of the game. It will be possible.

Further, according to the effect example shown in FIG. 59, when the button vibration advance notice effect is executed, the effect button 6a is made to blink white, although the operation promotion effect is not accompanied. Therefore, even when the effect button 6a is not operated, it is possible to make it easier for the player to notice that the button vibration warning effect is being executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the effect example shown in FIG. 60, the vibration effect is not executed at the time of the first to fourth step effects of the step-up notice effect, but the vibration effect is executed at the time of the fifth step effect with the highest expectation of big hit. It has become like. Therefore, the expectation of the player can be effectively improved, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, according to the effect example shown in FIG. 60, the execution period (1 second) of the vibration effect executed during the fifth step effect is larger than the execution period (3 seconds) of the fifth step effect of the step-up notice effect. Is shorter. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the effect of the step effect, prevent inconveniences such as misunderstanding that the jackpot has been confirmed due to the long vibration effect, and improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the effect example shown in FIG. 60, since the vibration effect executed at the time of the fifth step effect is not accompanied by the operation promotion effect, the sound effect when displaying the operation promotion image and the effect button during the valid period. The effect sound (operation sound effect, operation sound effect of the movable effect member, etc.) when the 6a is operated is not output. Therefore, it is possible to prevent inconveniences that may confuse the player during the vibration effect that does not accompany the operation promotion effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the effect examples shown in FIGS. 59 and 60, the lamp light emission effect by the panel lighting device 23 is continued even during the vibration effect of the effect button 6a. Therefore, it is possible to maintain the effect of the effect by not performing a process such as pausing the lamp light emission effect by the vibration effect accompanied by the operation promotion effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Although the effect button 6a is not emitted in the vibration effect executed during the fifth step effect in the step-up notice effect, the effect button 6a is set to a predetermined mode (for example, yellow) over the execution period of the vibration effect. It may be made to emit light by blinking or the like). By doing so, it becomes easier to grasp and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Example of effect when button vibration advance notice effect and dialogue advance notice effect are executed)
An example of the effect when the button vibration advance notice effect (continuous advance notice effect) and the dialogue advance notice effect are executed will be described with reference to FIGS. 59 and 61.

As shown in FIG. 59 (9) above, the scroll display (high-speed fluctuation) of the effect symbol 16a in the normal size is started, but the strong notice of the button vibration effect remains. After that, the strong vibration and red blinking of the effect button 6a stop, and the third effect of the button vibration warning effect ends.

Then, as shown in FIG. 61 (17), when a predetermined time has elapsed from the end of the third effect of the button vibration warning effect, as shown in FIG. 61 (18), the valid period of the effect button 6a (single stroke 3). Seconds) will occur and the dialogue notice production will start. Specifically, an operation promotion image SG composed of an opaque effect button image imitating a white light emitting effect button 6a and a gauge image showing the remaining period of the valid period is displayed, and the display sound effect of the operation promotion image SG is displayed. At the same time as being output, the effect button 6a emits white light.

After that, when the effect button 6a is operated by a single stroke or the valid period elapses without being operated, the heat dialogue "You can expect it" is displayed in the red character image SF as shown in FIG. 61 (19). At the same time, a voice (directing sound) corresponding to the heat dialogue is output. Further, the weak vibration effect of vibrating the effect button 6a for 1 second is started while the effect button 6a is turned off, but the lamp light emission effect by the panel lighting device 23 continues.

When 1 second has passed from the start of the weak vibration effect, the weak vibration effect ends, and 2 seconds after the end of the weak vibration effect, the dialogue advance notice effect ends. After that, as shown in FIG. 61 (20), after the variable display of the effect symbol 16a is continuously performed, a pseudo continuous effect is executed, a normal effect is executed, or a normal reach is executed according to the variable effect pattern. The SP reach effect is executed after the effect is executed, or the SPSP reach effect is executed after the normal reach effect is executed.

As described above, according to the effect example shown in FIG. 61, the execution period (1 second) of the vibration effect executed during the dialogue advance notice effect is shorter than the execution period (3 seconds) of the dialogue advance notice effect. There is. Therefore, it is possible to improve the effect of the dialogue notice effect. In addition, it is possible to prevent inconveniences such as misunderstanding that the jackpot has been confirmed due to the long vibration effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the effect example shown in FIG. 61, the vibration effect executed at the time of the dialogue advance notice effect is not accompanied by the valid period (display of the operation promotion image) of the effect button 6a, so that the operation promotion image is displayed. The display effect sound and the effect sound when the effect button 6a is operated during the valid period are not output. Therefore, it is possible to improve the effect of the dialogue notice effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the effect example shown in FIG. 61, the execution period of the vibration effect executed at the time of the dialogue advance notice effect is the same regardless of whether or not the effect button 6a is operated during the valid period and the operation timing. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience of not being able to fully experience the vibration effect depending on whether or not the effect button 6a is operated and the operation timing, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the effect example shown in FIG. 61, the lamp light emission effect by the panel lighting device 23 is continued even during the vibration effect of the effect button 6a accompanied by the operation promotion effect. Therefore, it is possible to maintain the effect of the effect by not performing a process such as pausing the lamp light emission effect by the vibration effect accompanied by the operation promotion effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Although the effect button 6a is not made to emit light in the vibration effect executed at the time of the dialogue advance notice effect, the effect button 6a is set in a predetermined mode (for example, blinking white, blinking yellow, etc.) over the execution period of the vibration effect. It may be made to emit light.

Further, regarding the vibration effect executed at the time of the dialogue advance notice effect, the same timing (for example, the timing when the effective period when the effect button 6a is not operated elapses) regardless of whether or not the effect button 6a is operated during the effective period and the operation timing. It may be executed until (0.5 seconds after) (the execution period of the vibration effect is variable).

If the effect button 6a is not operated during the valid period, the dialogue notice effect may not be executed. Further, when the dialogue advance notice effect is not executed, the vibration effect may not be executed or may be executed.

(Example of production when pseudo-continuous production is executed)
An example of the effect when the pseudo-continuous effect is executed will be described with reference to FIG. 62.

As shown in FIG. 62 (1), in the first image display device 16, the effect symbol 16a of "4 (chicken)" is temporarily stopped in the left side region, and the effect symbol 16a of "5 (koala)" is in the right side region. Temporarily stopped, and the variable display of the effect symbol 16a continues in the central region. As shown in FIG. 62 (2), the pseudo continuous effect is started without the valid period of the effect button 6a occurring (the operation promotion image is not displayed). Specifically, in the central region, a pseudo fanning effect is executed, which encourages whether or not the pseudo symbol (NEXT symbol) suggesting the execution of the pseudo continuous effect is temporarily stopped.

After that, when the fanning effect is completed, as shown in FIG. 62 (3), the pseudo symbol is temporarily stopped in the central region and the success sound effect is output as the pseudo-continuous success effect.
As shown in FIG. 62 (4), the effect symbol 16a revariates (pseudo 2). After that, when a predetermined period elapses, as shown in FIG. 62 (5), in the first image display device 16, the effect symbol 16a of "4 (chicken)" is temporarily stopped in the left side region, and "5 (5)" is temporarily stopped in the right side region. Koala) ”has been temporarily stopped, and the variable display of the effect symbol 16a continues in the central region.

As shown in FIG. 62 (6), a pseudo fanning effect is executed to encourage whether or not the pseudo symbol suggesting the execution of the pseudo continuous effect is temporarily stopped in the central region. At this time, the valid period of the effect button 6a is generated, the operation promotion image GS (the opaque effect button image imitating the white light emission effect button 6a and the gauge image) is displayed, and the display sound effect of the operation promotion image GS is displayed. Is output. In addition, the effect button 6a emits white light.

After that, when the effect button 6a is single-stroked or not operated and the valid period elapses, as shown in FIG. 62 (7), as a pseudo-continuous success effect, the pseudo symbol temporarily stops in the central region and succeeds. Sound effects are output. Further, the effect button 6a is turned off, and the effect button 6a is vibrated for 1 second to start a weak vibration effect.

When 1 second has elapsed from the start of the weak vibration effect, the weak vibration of the effect button 6a is stopped and the weak vibration effect ends, as shown in FIG. 62 (8). Then, the character advance notice effect is executed in which the blade portion housed in the sheath portion of the first movable effect member 17A that emits red light moves to the left, and the effect symbol 16a changes again (pseudo 3). ).

When the effect operation time (1 second) of the first movable effect member 17A elapses, the pseudo-ream success effect ends, and as shown in FIG. 62 (9), the effect of "4 (chicken)" is produced in the left side region and the right side region. The symbol 16a is temporarily stopped in the reach state, and the normal reach effect is started. After that, the SP reach effect is executed after the normal reach effect is executed according to the variable effect pattern, or the SPSP reach effect is executed after the normal reach effect is executed.

According to the effect example shown in FIG. 62, the vibration effect can be executed when the pseudo-continuous effect accompanied by the operation promotion effect is executed. Therefore, the expectation of the player can be effectively improved, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, according to the effect example shown in FIG. 62, the execution period (1 second) of the vibration effect executed during the pseudo-ream success effect is shorter than the execution period (2 seconds) of the pseudo-ream success effect. There is. Therefore, it is possible to improve the effect of the pseudo-ream success effect. In addition, it is possible to prevent inconveniences such as misunderstanding that the jackpot has been confirmed due to the long vibration effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the effect example shown in FIG. 62, since the vibration effect executed during the pseudo-continuous effect is accompanied by the valid period of the effect button 6a (display of the operation promotion image), the display when the operation promotion image is displayed. A sound effect and a sound effect (operation sound effect, success sound effect, etc.) when the effect button 6a is operated during the effective period are output. Therefore, it is possible to improve the effect of the pseudo-continuous production, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the effect example shown in FIG. 62, the execution period of the vibration effect executed by the pseudo-continuous effect is the same regardless of the presence or absence of the operation of the effect button 6a and the operation timing during the effective period. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience of not being able to fully experience the vibration effect depending on whether or not the effect button 6a is operated and the operation timing, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the effect example shown in FIG. 62, the lamp light emission effect by the panel lighting device 23 is continued even during the vibration effect accompanied by the effective period of the effect button 6a. Therefore, it is possible to maintain the effect of the effect by not performing processing such as pausing the effect light emission by the vibration effect accompanied by the effective period of the effect button 6a, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Although the effect button 6a is not made to emit light in the vibration effect executed during the pseudo-continuous effect, the effect button 6a is set in a predetermined mode (for example, blinking white or blinking yellow) over the execution period of the vibration effect. It may be made to emit light.

Further, regarding the vibration effect executed during the pseudo continuous effect, the same timing (for example, the timing at which the effective period when the effect button 6a is not operated elapses) regardless of whether or not the effect button 6a is operated during the effective period and the operation timing. It may be executed until (0.5 seconds after) (the execution period of the vibration effect is variable).

Further, the effect period of the effect button 6a is generated during the pseudo-continuous effect to execute the vibration effect of the effect button 6a, but the effect period of the effect button 6a is not generated during the pseudo-continuous effect. The effect may be executed, or the effect period 6a may be generated but the vibration effect may not be executed.

(Example of production when development production is executed and develops into SP reach production)
An example of the production when the development production is executed and the SP reach production is developed will be described with reference to FIG. 63.

As shown in FIG. 63 (1), the effect symbol 16a of "4 (chicken)" is temporarily stopped in the left side area and the right side area, and the normal reach effect is executed. After that, as shown in FIG. 63 (2), the SP development effect is started. In the SP development production, "SPSP development" suggesting the development to the SPSP reach production, "SP development" suggesting the development to the SP reach production, and "Kas" suggesting that the production does not develop (missing). After the roulette marked with "" is rotated in a predetermined direction and a fanning effect is performed to incite which of "SPSP development", "SP development", and "cass" is selected, "SPSP development", A roulette production will be performed in which either "SP development" or "cass" is determined.

When a predetermined time has elapsed after the start of the roulette effect, as shown in FIG. 63 (3), it is notified that "SP development" is determined and the SP reach develops. After that, as shown in FIG. 63 (4), a transition effect in which the screen is whitened out is performed. As shown in FIG. 63 (5), the left and right effect symbols 16a rotate and move to the display area near the left and right upper ends of the screen, and the effect symbol 16a of only "4" is reduced. As shown in 6), the SP reach effect is started.

(Example of production when development production is executed and develops into SPSP reach production)
As shown in FIG. 64 (1), the effect symbol 16a of "4 (chicken)" is temporarily stopped in the left side area and the right side area, and the normal reach effect is executed. After that, as shown in FIG. 64 (2), the SPSP development effect is started. In the SPSP development production, "SPSP development" suggesting the development to the SPSP reach production, "SP development" suggesting the development to the SP reach production, and "full rotation" suggesting the development to the full rotation reach production. After the roulette marked with is rotated in a predetermined direction to incite which of "SPSP development", "SP development", and "full rotation" is selected, "SPSP development" and "SPSP development" are performed. A roulette effect is performed in which either "SP development" or "full rotation" is determined.

When a predetermined time has elapsed after the start of the roulette effect, the effective suggestion effect YS suggesting that the operation of the effect button 6a may be effective is started, as shown in FIG. 64 (3). Specifically, a plurality of semi-transparent effect button images imitating the effect button 6a are moved and displayed, and the semi-transparent effect button images are aggregated toward a specific position in the center of the screen.

Then, when the semi-transparent effect button images are gathered at a specific position in the center of the screen, as shown in FIG. 64 (4), the operation promotion image SG (specification) occurs as the effect period (long press 4 seconds) of the effect button 6a occurs. An opaque effect button image imitating the effect button 6a that emits red light at the position, a gauge image, and a character image of "long press") are displayed, and a display effect sound of the operation promotion image SG is output. In addition, the effect button 6a emits red light.

After that, if the effect button 6a is continuously pressed, the speed of the roulette is gradually slowed down, and when the long press time reaches a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds) or the valid period elapses, FIG. 64 ( As shown in 5), it is notified that "SPSP development" is determined and develops into SPSP reach, and the blade part housed in the sheath part of the first movable staging member 17A that emits blue light is to the left. A moving production operation is performed. Further, with the effect button 6a turned off, a weak vibration effect is started in which the effect button 6a is weakly vibrated for 1 second. In addition, the lamp emission effect by the panel lighting device 23 continues.

As shown in FIG. 64 (6), the weak vibration of the effect button 6a is stopped, the weak vibration effect is ended, and the transition effect in which the screen is whitened out is performed. As shown in FIG. 64 (7), the left and right effect symbols 16a rotate and move to the display area near the left and right upper ends of the screen, and the effect symbol 16a of only "4" is reduced and displayed. As shown in (8), the SPSP reach effect is started. With the start of the SPSP reach effect, the hold icon and the icon are hidden.

As described above, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 63 and 64, it is suggested whether or not the production has a high expectation of big hit depending on the type of development determined in the roulette production as the development production (expectation of big hit). is doing. Therefore, it is possible to raise the player's expectation for the types developed by the roulette production, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 63 and 64, the effective suggestion effect may be executed in the development effect, so that the player expects the player to develop into a reach effect with a high expectation of a big hit. It can be enhanced and the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, according to the effect examples shown in FIGS. 63 and 64, the execution period (1 second) of the vibration effect executed during the development effect is shorter than the execution period (3 seconds) of the development effect. .. Therefore, it is possible to improve the effect of the development effect. In addition, it is possible to prevent inconveniences such as misunderstanding that the jackpot has been confirmed due to the long vibration effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the effect examples shown in FIGS. 63 and 64, the vibration effect executed at the time of the development effect is accompanied by the valid period (display of the operation promotion image) of the effect button 6a, so that when the operation promotion image is displayed. The display sound effect of the above and the effect sound (operation sound effect, etc.) when the effect button 6a is operated during the valid period are output. Therefore, the effect of the development effect can be improved, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, according to the effect examples shown in FIGS. 63 and 64, the execution period of the vibration effect executed at the time of the development effect is the same regardless of the presence or absence of the operation of the effect button 6a and the operation timing during the effective period. There is. Therefore, it is possible to fully experience the vibration effect depending on the operation timing of the effect button 6a, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the effect example shown in FIGS. 63 and 64, the lamp light emission effect by the panel lighting device 23 is continued even during the vibration effect accompanied by the effective period of the effect button 6a. Therefore, it is possible to maintain the effect of the effect by not performing processing such as pausing the light emission effect by the vibration effect accompanied by the effective period of the effect button 6a, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Although the effect button 6a is not emitted in the vibration effect executed during the development effect, the effect button 6a emits light in a predetermined mode (for example, blinking white or blinking yellow) over the execution period of the vibration effect. You may let it.

Further, regarding the vibration effect executed during the development effect, the same timing (for example, the timing when the effective period when the effect button 6a is not operated elapses) regardless of whether or not the effect button 6a is operated during the effective period and the operation timing It may be executed until (after 0.5 seconds) (the execution period of the vibration effect is variable).

Further, although the effect period of the effect button 6a is generated during the development effect to execute the vibration effect of the effect button 6a, the vibration effect is executed without generating the effect period of the effect button 6a during the development effect. Alternatively, the effect period may be generated but the vibration effect may not be executed.

(Example of a cut-in effect being executed during the SP reach effect)
With reference to FIG. 65, an example of an effect in which a cut-in effect is executed during the SP reach effect and a big hit is obtained will be described.

As shown in FIG. 65 (1), the effect symbol 16a of "4" in the left side area and the right side area is reduced and displayed in the left and right corners at the upper part of the screen, the battle effect is executed as the SP reach effect, and the ally character is the enemy character. I will use the attack technique to defeat.

At the end of the battle, as shown in FIG. 65 (2), the effective suggestion effect YS suggesting that the operation of the effect button 6a may be effective for the cut-in effect is started. Specifically, a plurality of semi-transparent effect button images imitating the effect button 6a are moved and displayed, and the semi-transparent effect button images are aggregated toward a specific position in the center of the screen. Further, when the timing before the predetermined time for which the valid period is set is reached, the button change effect is started. Specifically, when the button drive motor 6c is operated, the effect button 6a begins to change to the protruding state (specific state).

Then, when the semi-transparent effect button images are gathered at a specific position in the center of the screen, as shown in FIG. An operation promotion image SG composed of an opaque effect button image imitating the effect button 6a of the above, a gauge image showing the remaining time of the valid period, and a character image of "press" is displayed, and a display effect sound of the operation promotion image SG. Is output, and the effect button 6a in the protruding state emits red light.

After that, when the effect button 6a is single-struck or is not operated and the valid period elapses, the cut-in effect is executed as shown in FIG. 65 (4). Specifically, the cut-in image KF of the red frame (“It's a big chance !!”) is displayed on the first image display device 16, and the cut-in sound effect C corresponding to the red cut-in is output. Further, the effect button 6a is turned off, and a weak vibration effect is started in which the effect button 6a is weakly vibrated for 3 seconds. The lamp emission effect by the panel lighting device 23 continues.

After that, one second after the output of the cut-in sound effect C ends, the cut-in effect and the weak vibration effect end, and as shown in FIG. 65 (5), the ally character defeats the enemy character. Deliver the final attack technique and hunt down the enemy character.

As shown in FIG. 65 (6), when the effect button 6a is temporarily stopped in a state where three effect symbols 16a of "4" are aligned (symbol alignment), the effect button 6a is strongly vibrated for 4 seconds (strong vibration effect). The jackpot fixed vibration effect) is started, and the panel lighting device 23 and the effect button 6a emit rainbow light. However, since the execution of this strong vibration effect does not involve the valid period of the effect button 6a, the display sound effect when displaying the operation promotion image and the effect sound (sound effect) when the effect button 6a is operated are not output.

When 4 seconds have passed from the start of the strong vibration effect, as shown in FIG. 65 (7), the blade portion of the third movable effect member 17C that emits rainbow light is pulled out from the sheath portion and is moved to the front side of the screen of the first image display device 16. A series of successful staging (with operation of the operating means) in which the tilting staging operation, the success effect image is displayed on the first image display device 16, and the strong vibration staging (successful staging) by the staging button 6a is executed for 5 seconds. No decision success production) is executed.

When the return of the third movable effect member 17C to the standby position is completed, as shown in FIG. 65 (8), a victory confirmation effect (display of a victory image) indicating that the ally character has won the enemy character is performed. In addition, the strong vibration effect by the effect button 6a continues.

After that, when a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) elapses, as shown in FIG. 66 (9), the effect symbol 16a of "444" is temporarily stopped. In addition, a strong vibration effect (big hit confirmed vibration effect) that vibrates the effect button 6a for 1 second without the validity period of the effect button 6a (display of the operation promotion image) is started, and the lighting device 23 for the board and the effect Button 6a emits rainbow light.

After that, after a lapse of a predetermined period (for example, 1 second), as shown in FIG. 66 (10), a stop suggestion effect TS suggesting that the effect symbol 16a shifts from the temporary stop to the fixed stop is executed. Specifically, a scene change effect by an eye-catching display that catches the player's line of sight and draws attention in a form that temporarily changes the scene to a display state (for example, a character image) different from the stop display mode of the effect symbol 16a. Is executed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 66 (11), the effect symbol 16a of "444" is fixedly stopped and displayed, and the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed in the combination display mode of "444". After the symbol determination stop period (0.5 seconds) has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 66 (12), the opening effect of the jackpot game and the lamp emission effect by the board lighting device 23 are started. Further, a strong vibration effect (opening vibration effect) in which the effect button 6a is strongly vibrated for 1 second is started, and the effect button 6a emits rainbow light.

In the opening effect, the characters "BONUS" indicating that the 4R jackpot game is executed are displayed, and a halo flash is displayed from behind the characters, and the characters "BONUS" are highlighted. After that, when the opening effect is completed, the first round game is started.

As described above, according to the effect example shown in FIG. 65, the effective suggestion effect may be executed in the cut-in effect, which suggests to the player that the jackpot expectation is high before the effective period occurs. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the effect example shown in FIG. 65, the execution period (3 seconds) of the cut-in effect and the execution period (3 seconds) of the vibration effect executed at the time of the cut-in effect are the same. Therefore, it is possible to effectively improve the effect of the cut-in effect. In addition, it is possible to suggest to the player that the expectation of a big hit is high by the vibration effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the effect example shown in FIG. 65, the vibration effect executed at the time of the cut-in effect is accompanied by the valid period of the effect button 6a (display of the operation promotion image), and therefore is displayed when the operation promotion image is displayed. The sound effect and the effect sound (operation sound effect, cut-in sound effect, etc.) when the effect button 6a is operated during the effective period are output. Therefore, the effect of the cut-in effect can be improved, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, according to the effect example shown in FIG. 65, the lamp light emission effect by the panel lighting device 23 continues even during the vibration effect accompanied by the effective period of the effect button 6a (display of the operation promotion image SG). ing. Therefore, it is possible to maintain the effect of the effect by not performing processing such as pausing the lamp light emission effect by the vibration effect accompanied by the effective period of the effect button 6a (displaying the operation promotion image), and improving the interest of the game. It becomes possible.

Further, according to the effect example shown in FIG. 65, when three effect symbols 16a in a display mode of only numerical symbols are temporarily stopped (D symbol alignment), the vibration effect at the time of cut-in effect is obtained. It has come to execute a strong vibration effect (big hit fixed vibration effect) for a long period of time. Therefore, it is possible to effectively notify the player that the jackpot has been achieved, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the effect example shown in FIG. 66, the strong vibration effect (big hit confirmation vibration effect) is executed when the big hit effect symbol 16a with the same pattern is temporarily stopped. Therefore, it is possible to reconfirm that the game has become a big hit, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the effect examples shown in FIGS. 65 and 66, a strong vibration effect (big hit confirmed vibration effect, big hit confirmation) executed at the time of temporary stop with three effect symbols 16a aligned or at the opening of the big hit game. Since the vibration effect (opening vibration effect) does not involve the valid period (display of the operation promotion image) of the effect button 6a, the display sound effect when displaying the operation promotion image SG or the effect button 6a is operated during the effective period. The production sound (operation sound effect, other sound effects) of the time is not output. Therefore, it is possible to prevent inconveniences that may confuse the player during the vibration effect without the validity period of the effect button 6a (display of the operation promotion image), and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. ..

Further, according to the effect examples shown in FIGS. 65 and 66, when the SP reach effect is executed and a big hit is obtained, the vibration effect is executed while the effect symbol 16a which is the big hit is temporarily stopped. The vibration effect is not executed during the fixed stop. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game without misunderstanding that the fluctuation effect is still continuing due to the vibration effect.

Although the effect button 6a is not made to emit light in the vibration effect executed at the time of the cut-in effect, the effect button 6a is set in a predetermined mode (for example, blinking white or blinking yellow) over the execution period of the vibration effect. It may be made to emit light.

Further, although the lamp light emitting effect by the panel lighting device 23 is continued during the effective period related to the cut-in effect, the effect button 6a is operated or the effective period is set immediately before or from the start of the effective period. Until the lapse of time, the lamp light emitting effect of the panel lighting device 23 may be paused, and then the lamp light emitting effect of the panel lighting device 23 may be restarted. By doing so, it is possible to make the operation promotion image displayed on the first image display device 16 stand out, and to make the player recognize that the scene is tense, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. ..

Further, regarding the vibration effect executed at the time of the cut-in effect, the same timing (for example, the timing when the effective period when the effect button 6a is not operated elapses) regardless of whether or not the effect button 6a is operated during the effective period and the operation timing. It may be executed until (2 seconds later) (the execution period of the vibration effect is variable).

In the production example shown in FIG. 65, the cut-in effect is performed at the end of the SP reach effect, but it is set to be performed at the middle stage (first period) or the final stage (second period) of the SP reach effect, and the SP is performed. It seems that the effect button 6a is more likely to be in a protruding state (the rate of being in a protruding state is higher) when the cut-in effect is performed at the end of the SP reach effect than when the cut-in effect is performed in the middle of the reach effect. You may do it.

If the effect button 6a is not operated during the valid period, the cut-in effect may not be executed. If the cut-in effect is not executed, the vibration effect may not be executed or may be executed.

(Production example 1 when the determined production is executed during the SPSP reach production)
FIG. 67 will be described with reference to an example of an effect in which a decision effect is executed during a battle effect in SPSP reach and a big hit is obtained.

As shown in FIG. 67 (1), the effect symbol 16a of "4" in the left side area and the right side area is reduced and displayed in the left and right corners at the upper part of the screen, the battle effect is executed as the SPSP reach effect, and the ally character is the enemy character. I will use the attack technique to defeat.

In the middle of the battle, as shown in FIG. 67 (2), a chance-up effect suggesting that there is a high possibility of developing into an effect (winning effect) with a high expectation of a big hit is performed. Specifically, the first image display device 16 displays a character image of "CHANGE UP" in a red display color and a halo flash from behind the character image. Further, the strong vibration effect of vibrating the effect button 6a for 1 second is started, and the effect button 6a is blinked in white.

When the chance-up effect is completed, as shown in FIG. 67 (3), a character image of "joint battle" indicating that the number of ally characters has become two is displayed. At the end of the battle, as shown in Fig. 67 (4), the line image of "I'm going!" Is displayed in red, and the two ally characters perform the final attack technique to hunt down the enemy character. At this time, as shown in FIG. 67 (5), the effective suggestion effect YS suggesting that the operation of the effect button 6a may be effective for the determined effect is started.

Specifically, a plurality of semi-transparent effect button images imitating the effect button 6a are moved and displayed, and the semi-transparent effect button images are aggregated toward a specific position in the center of the screen. Further, when the timing before the predetermined time for which the valid period is set is reached, the button change effect is started. Specifically, when the button drive motor 6c is operated, the effect button 6a begins to change to the protruding state (specific state).

Then, when the semi-transparent effect button images are gathered at a specific position in the center of the screen, as shown in FIG. 67 (6), an effective period (single stroke 5 seconds) of the effect button 6a occurs, and a protruding state that emits red light at the specific position. An operation promotion image SG composed of an opaque effect button image imitating the effect button 6a of the above, a gauge image showing the remaining time of the valid period, and a character image of "press" is displayed, and a display effect sound of the operation promotion image SG. Is output, and the effect button 6a in the protruding state emits red light.

After that, when the effect button 6a is operated by a single stroke or when the valid period elapses without being operated, the determined success effect is executed as shown in FIG. 67 (7). Specifically, with the first to third movable effect members 17A to 17C emitting rainbow light, the effect operation in which the blade portion of the first movable effect member 17A moves to the left and the second movable effect member 17B stand by. An effect operation of moving downward from the position to the front side of the center of the screen of the first image display device 16 and an effect operation of moving the blade of the third movable effect member 17C upward are performed simultaneously (determined operation). Further, the success effect image is displayed on the first image display device 16, and the success sound effect is output.

Further, a strong vibration effect (determined successful vibration effect) is started in which the effect button 6a is vibrated strongly for 4 seconds and then vibrated strongly for 5 seconds with an interval of 1 second. Further, the lighting device 23 for the board and the effect button 6a emit rainbow light.

After that, when the first to third movable effect members 17A to 17C return to the standby positions and the successful effect and the strong vibration effect are completed, as shown in FIG. 67 (8), the victory confirmation effect (victory) indicating the battle victory is shown. Image display) is performed. In addition, a strong vibration effect is executed by the effect button 6a. Further, the lighting device 23 for the board and the effect button 6a emit rainbow light.

After that, as shown in FIG. 67 (9), the effect symbol 16a of "4" is temporarily stopped in a state of being aligned (symbol alignment), and the effect button 6a is vibrated strongly for 4 seconds (strong vibration effect). The jackpot fixed vibration effect) is started, and the panel lighting device 23 and the effect button 6a emit rainbow light. However, since the execution of this strong vibration effect does not involve the valid period of the effect button 6a, the display sound effect when displaying the operation promotion image and the effect sound (sound effect) when the effect button 6a is operated are not output.

After that, when a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) elapses, as shown in FIG. 70 (4), the image is switched to the normal size “444” effect symbol 16a and temporarily stopped. In addition, a strong vibration effect (big hit confirmed vibration effect) that vibrates the effect button 6a for 1 second without the validity period of the effect button 6a (display of the operation promotion image) is started, and the lighting device 23 for the board and the effect Button 6a emits rainbow light.

After that, when a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) elapses, as shown in FIG. 70 (5), a stop suggestion effect TS suggesting that the effect symbol 16a shifts from the temporary stop to the fixed stop is executed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 70 (6), the effect symbol 16a of "444" is fixedly stopped and displayed, and the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed in the combination display mode of "444". After the symbol determination stop period (0.5 seconds) has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 70 (7), the opening effect of the jackpot game and the lamp emission effect by the board lighting device 23 are started. Further, a strong vibration effect (opening vibration effect) in which the effect button 6a is strongly vibrated for 1 second is started, and the effect button 6a emits rainbow light.

In the opening effect, the characters "BONUS" indicating that the 4R jackpot game is executed are displayed, and a halo flash is displayed from behind the characters, and the characters "BONUS" are highlighted. After that, when the opening effect is completed, the first round game is started. When the characters "BONUS" are displayed, the effect button 6a may simply emit rainbow light without performing the vibration effect by the effect button 6a.

(Production example 2 when the decision production is executed during the SPSP reach production)
FIG. 68 will be described with reference to an example of an effect in which a decision effect is executed during the mission effect of SPSP reach and a big hit is obtained.

As shown in FIG. 68 (1), the effect symbol 16a of "4" in the left side area and the right side area is reduced and displayed in the left and right corners at the upper part of the screen, the mission effect is executed as the SPSP reach effect, and the "button is pressed and held". Then, get the level MAX !! ”is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 68 (2), an opaque effect button image imitating an effect button 6a that emits white light when an effect period (long press 5 seconds) occurs, and a gauge image showing the remaining time of the effect period. Then, the operation promotion image SG composed of the character image of "long press" is displayed, the display effect sound of the operation promotion image SG is output, and the effect button 6a emits white light.
Further, with level 0 as the initial value, a level meter for notifying the level value (Lv.1 to Lv.10) is displayed on a scale display of 10 levels from level 1 to level 10 (MAX).

The long press operation of the effect button 6a is started, and along with the long press operation, an ascending display is performed in which the level value of the level meter gradually increases toward the level 10 (MAX). Further, when the effect button 6a is pressed and held for a long time, a meter sound effect is output according to a change in the level value of the level meter. If the long press operation is not performed, the level value of the level meter is not displayed as rising.

As shown in FIG. 68 (3), the level value reaches level 5 after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the long press operation of the effect button 6a. The effect button 6a continuously emits white light. After that, the level value of the level meter gradually increases toward level 10 (MAX) with the long press operation. As shown in FIG. 68 (4), when the level value reaches level 9, a strong vibration effect of vibrating the effect button 6a for 1 second is executed with the effect button 6a being pressed and held for a long time.

After the end of the strong vibration effect, as shown in FIG. 68 (5), when the level value reaches the level 10 (MAX), the determined success effect is executed as shown in FIG. 68 (6). Specifically, with the first to third movable effect members 17A to 17C emitting rainbow light, the effect operation in which the blade portion of the first movable effect member 17A moves to the left and the second movable effect member 17B stand by. An effect operation of moving downward from the position to the front side of the center of the screen of the first image display device 16 and an effect operation of moving the blade of the third movable effect member 17C upward are performed simultaneously (determined operation). Further, the success effect image is displayed on the first image display device 16, and the success sound effect is output.

Further, a strong vibration effect (determined successful vibration effect) is started in which the effect button 6a is vibrated strongly for 4 seconds and then vibrated strongly for 5 seconds with an interval of 1 second. Further, the lighting device 23 for the board and the effect button 6a emit rainbow light.

After that, when the first to third movable effect members 17A to 17C return to the standby positions and the decision success effect and the strong vibration effect are completed, as shown in FIG. 68 (7), the success confirmation effect (success) indicating the success of the mission. Display of the character image of) is performed. In addition, a strong vibration effect is executed by the effect button 6a. Further, the lighting device 23 for the board and the effect button 6a emit rainbow light.

After that, as shown in FIG. 68 (8), the central "4" effect symbol 16a is temporarily stopped in a state of being highlighted in front of the left and right "4" effect symbols 16a (symbol alignment), and the effect is produced. A strong vibration effect (big hit fixed vibration effect) that causes the button 6a to vibrate strongly for 4 seconds is started, and the panel lighting device 23 and the effect button 6a emit rainbow light. However, since the execution of this strong vibration effect does not involve the validity period of the effect button 6a, the display sound effect when displaying the operation promotion image SG and the effect sound (sound effect) when the effect button 6a is operated are output. Not done.

After that, when a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) elapses, as shown in FIG. 70 (4), the image is switched to the normal size “444” effect symbol 16a and temporarily stopped. In addition, a strong vibration effect (big hit confirmed vibration effect) that vibrates the effect button 6a for 1 second without the validity period of the effect button 6a (display of the operation promotion image) is started, and the lighting device 23 for the board and the effect Button 6a emits rainbow light.

After that, when a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) elapses, as shown in FIG. 70 (5), a stop suggestion effect TS suggesting that the effect symbol 16a shifts from the temporary stop to the fixed stop is executed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 70 (6), the effect symbol 16a of "444" is fixedly stopped and displayed, and the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed in the combination display mode of "444". After the symbol determination stop period (0.5 seconds) has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 70 (7), the opening effect of the jackpot game and the lamp emission effect by the board lighting device 23 are started. Further, a strong vibration effect (opening vibration effect) in which the effect button 6a is strongly vibrated for 1 second is started, and the effect button 6a emits rainbow light.

In the opening effect, the characters "BONUS" indicating that the 4R jackpot game is executed are displayed, and a halo flash is displayed from behind the characters, and the characters "BONUS" are highlighted. After that, when the opening effect is completed, the first round game is started.

As described above, according to the effect examples shown in FIGS. 67 and 68, the effective suggestion effect may be executed in the determined effect, so that the effective period is generated and the big hit expectation is high. Can be suggested to the player, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the effect examples shown in FIGS. 67 and 68, the operation period (10 seconds) of the movable effect members 17A to 17C in the determined success effect and the execution period (10 seconds) of the vibration effect executed at the time of the determined success effect. Is the same as. Therefore, it is possible to effectively improve the effect of the successful decision production. In addition, it is possible to suggest to the player that it is a big hit by the vibration effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the effect examples shown in FIGS. 67 and 68, the vibration effect (determination success vibration effect) executed at the time of the determination effect is accompanied by the valid period of the effect button 6a (display of the operation promotion image), so that the operation is performed. Display sound effects when displaying the promotion image and sound effects when the effect button 6a is operated during the valid period (operation sound effects, success sound effects, operation sound effects of movable effect members, etc.) are now output. ing. Therefore, it is possible to improve the effect of the successful decision production, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the effect example shown in FIG. 68 was a decision success effect executed when the effect button 6a was single-stroked during the valid period, but it is executed when the effect lever 6h is tilted during the valid period. In the case of the successful decision production, the same as the production example shown in FIG. 68.

In addition, although the lamp light emitting effect by the panel lighting device 23 was continued during the effective period related to the determined effect, the effect button 6a is operated or the effective period has elapsed immediately before the occurrence of the effective period or from the start of the generation. In the meantime, the lamp light emitting effect of the panel lighting device 23 may be paused, and then the lamp light emitting effect of the panel lighting device 23 may be restarted. By doing so, it is possible to make the operation promotion image displayed on the first image display device 16 stand out, and to make the player recognize that the scene is tense, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. ..

Further, the movable effect members 17A to 17C, the lighting device 23 for the board, and the effect button 6a are set to emit rainbow light at the time of the successful determination effect, but the movable effect members 17A to 17C and the effect button 6a emit rainbow light while the board emits light. The lighting device 23 may be turned off, or the effect buttons 6a and the lighting device 23 for the panel may be turned off while the movable effect members 17A to 17C emit rainbow light.

Further, when the decision success effect is executed, the rainbow emission of the movable effect members 17A to 17C, the lighting device 23 for the board, and the effect button 6a is started at the same time, but the rainbow emission of the effect button 6a is started first. The rainbow emission of the movable effect members 17A to 17C and the panel lighting device 23 may be started after the start, or the effect buttons 6a and the panel may be started after the rainbow emission of the movable effect members 17A to 17C is started first. The rainbow emission of the lighting device 23 may be started.

Further, when the SPSP reach effect is executed, the stop suggestion effect and the effect symbol 16a are temporarily stopped in a display mode including the character, and then the effect symbol 16a is fixedly stopped. In the case of a loss, the stop suggestion effect or the effect symbol 16a is temporarily stopped in a display mode including the character, and then the effect symbol 16a is fixedly stopped. In the case of a big hit, the stop suggestion effect or the effect is produced. The effect symbol 16a may be fixedly stopped in the display mode of only the numerical symbol without temporarily stopping the symbol 16a in the display mode including the character.

(Example of production when promotion is successful in re-lottery production)
An example of the effect when the re-lottery effect is executed and the promotion is successful will be described with reference to FIG. 69.

When the strong vibration effect shown in FIG. 67 (9) or FIG. 68 (8) is completed, as shown in FIG. 68 (1), the effect symbols 16a of "4" are provisionally aligned (symbol alignment). The strong vibration effect is stopped, but the rainbow emission of the panel lighting device 23 and the effect button 6a continues. Further, after 1 second has passed from that point, the lamp light emitting effect by the panel lighting device 23 is restarted, and the effect button 6a is turned off.

After that, as shown in FIG. 69 (2), the re-lottery effect is started. Specifically, it is synchronously fluctuated in a state where three effect symbols 6a of "4" are aligned (for example, all kinds of numbers of the effect symbol 16a are lapped once ("1" → "2" ..... " 9 ”→“ 1 ”in the order of scroll display) can always be shown (varies synchronously for a predetermined time).

Further, it is composed of an opaque effect button image imitating the effect button 6a that emits red light at a specific position in the center of the screen when the effect period 6a is valid (single stroke 3 seconds), and a gauge image showing the remaining time of the effect period. The operation promotion image SG is displayed, the display sound effect of the operation promotion image SG is output, and the effect button 6a emits red light.

After that, when the effect button 6a is operated by a single hit or the valid period elapses, a promotion success effect suggesting that the effect button 6a has been promoted to a probabilistic jackpot is performed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 69 (3), the third movable effect member 17C emits rainbow light, the blade portion is pulled out from the sheath portion, and the effect operation of tilting to the front side of the screen of the first image display device 16 is performed. Will be done. The success effect image is displayed on the first image display device 16, and the promotion sound effect is output. Further, the strong vibration effect (promotion successful vibration effect) by the effect button 6a is executed for 3 seconds. Further, the lighting device 23 for the board and the effect button 6a emit rainbow light.

When the first to third movable effect members 17A to 17C return to the standby position, as shown in FIG. 69 (4), the effect symbol 16a of "777" switched from the effect symbol 16a of "444" protrudes from the screen. It is temporarily stopped in the display mode of the enlarged size of.

After that, as shown in FIG. 69 (5), the effect symbol 16a of "777" returns to the normal size display mode and is temporarily stopped. In addition, a strong vibration effect (big hit confirmed vibration effect) that vibrates the effect button 6a for 1 second without the validity period of the effect button 6a (display of the operation promotion image) is started, and the lighting device 23 for the board and the effect Button 6a emits rainbow light.

After that, when a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) elapses, as shown in FIG. 69 (6), a stop suggestion effect TS suggesting that the effect symbol 16a shifts from the temporary stop to the fixed stop is executed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 69 (7), the effect symbol 16a of "777" is fixedly stopped and displayed, and the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed in the combination display mode of "777". After the symbol determination stop period (0.5 seconds) has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 69 (8), the opening effect of the jackpot game and the lamp emission effect by the board lighting device 23 are started. Further, a strong vibration effect (opening vibration effect) in which the effect button 6a is strongly vibrated for 1 second is started, and the effect button 6a emits rainbow light.

In the opening effect, a character image of "SUPER BONUS" indicating that the 10R jackpot game is executed is displayed, and a halo flash is displayed from behind the character, and the character image of "SUPER BONUS" is highlighted. Will be done. After that, when the opening effect is completed, the first round game is started.

When the promotion success effect is executed, the rainbow emission of the third movable effect member 17C, the lighting device 23 for the board, and the effect button 6a is started at the same time, but the rainbow emission of the effect button 6a is started first. After that, the rainbow light emission of the third movable effect member 17C and the lighting device 23 for the board may be started, or the rainbow light emission of the third movable effect member 17C may be started first, and then the effect button 6a and the lighting for the board are started. The rainbow emission of the device 23 may be started.

Although the vibration effect is executed at the time of the successful decision effect or the successful promotion effect, the vibration effect may be executed at the time of the successful decision effect, while the vibration effect may not be executed at the time of the successful promotion effect.
Alternatively, the vibration effect may be executed at the time of the promotion success effect, while the vibration effect may not be executed at the time of the decision success effect.
Alternatively, the vibration effect may not be executed at the time of the successful decision effect and the successful promotion effect.

Since the operation mode of the character movement effect at the time of the successful decision production and the operation mode of the character motion effect at the time of the promotion success effect are different, the effect of each of the decision success effect and the promotion success effect is effectively improved. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Example of production when promotion fails due to re-lottery production)
An example of the effect when the re-lottery effect is executed and the promotion fails will be described with reference to FIG. 70.

When the strong vibration effect shown in FIG. 67 (9) or FIG. 68 (8) is completed, as shown in FIG. 70 (1), three effect symbols 16a of "4" are aligned (D symbol alignment). Temporarily stopped, and the strong vibration effect ends, but the rainbow emission of the panel lighting device 23 and the effect button 6a continues. After 1 second has passed from that point, the lamp light emitting effect by the board lighting device 23 is restarted, and the effect button 6a is turned off.

After that, as shown in FIG. 70 (2), the re-lottery effect is started. Specifically, it is synchronously fluctuated in a state where three effect symbols 6a of "4" are aligned (for example, all kinds of numbers of the effect symbol 16a are lapped once ("1" → "2" ..... " 9 ”→“ 1 ”in the order of scroll display) can always be shown (varies synchronously for a predetermined time).

Further, it is composed of an opaque effect button image imitating the effect button 6a that emits white light at a specific position in the center of the screen when the effect period 6a is valid (single stroke 3 seconds), and a gauge image showing the remaining time of the effect period. The operation promotion image SG is displayed, and the display sound effect of the operation promotion image SG is output. In addition, the effect button 6a emits white light.

After that, when the effect button 6a is single-struck or is not operated and the valid period elapses, a promotion failure effect suggesting that the effect button 6a is not promoted to the probabilistic jackpot is performed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 70 (3), the effect symbol 16a of "444" is temporarily stopped in a display mode of an enlarged size so as to protrude from the screen, and a non-promotion sound effect is output.

After that, as shown in FIG. 70 (4), the effect symbol 16a of "444" returns to the normal size display mode and is temporarily stopped. In addition, a strong vibration effect (big hit confirmed vibration effect) that vibrates the effect button 6a for 1 second without the validity period of the effect button 6a (display of the operation promotion image) is started, and the lighting device 23 for the board and the effect Button 6a emits rainbow light.

After that, when a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) elapses, as shown in FIG. 70 (5), a stop suggestion effect TS suggesting that the effect symbol 16a shifts from the temporary stop to the fixed stop is executed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 70 (6), the effect symbol 16a of "444" is fixedly stopped and displayed, and the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed in the combination display mode of "444". After the symbol determination stop period (0.5 seconds) has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 70 (7), the opening effect of the jackpot game and the lamp emission effect by the board lighting device 23 are started. Further, a strong vibration effect (opening vibration effect) in which the effect button 6a is strongly vibrated for 1 second is started, and the effect button 6a emits rainbow light.

In the opening effect, a character image of "BONUS" indicating that the 4R jackpot game is executed is displayed, and a halo flash is displayed from behind the character image, and the character image of "BONUS" is highlighted. To. After that, when the opening effect is completed, the first round game is started.

(Example of production when revival production is executed)
An example of the effect when the revival effect is executed will be described with reference to FIG. 71.

As shown in FIG. 71 (1), the effect symbol 16a of "4" in the left side area and the right side area is reduced and displayed in the left and right corners at the upper part of the screen, the battle effect is executed as the SPSP reach effect, and the ally character is the enemy character. I will use the attack technique to defeat.

At the end of the battle, as shown in FIG. 71 (2), the ally character is defeated by the enemy character, and the defeat confirmation effect indicating the battle defeat is performed. At this time, the effect symbol 16a of "454" indicating the reach loss is temporarily stopped in the reduced size display mode.

Then, as shown in FIG. 71 (3), the pattern is switched to the normal size effect symbol 16a of "7 (pig) 7 (pig) 7 (pig)" including the decorative portion (character) and temporarily stopped. After that, when a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) elapses, a revival effect is performed as shown in FIG. 71 (4). Specifically, a moving image showing how the ally character defeated by the enemy character is about to stand up and a message image of "Stand up !!" are displayed for the ally character, and the valid period of the effect button 6a ( (4 seconds of repeated hits) occurs, and an operation promotion image SG consisting of an opaque effect button image imitating the red light emission effect button 6a, a gauge image showing the remaining time of the valid period, and a character image of "continuous hits" is displayed. Then, the display effect sound of the operation promotion image SG is output, and the effect button 6a emits red light.

After that, when the effect button 6a is repeatedly hit or is not operated and the valid period elapses, a resurrection success effect suggesting that the jackpot game is executed (resurrection jackpot) is performed. Specifically, when the ally character stands up and revives, as shown in FIG. 71 (5), the blade portion of the third movable effect member 17C that emits rainbow light is pulled out from the sheath portion, and the screen of the first image display device 16 is displayed. A staging action that tilts to the front side of is performed. The success effect image is displayed on the first image display device 16, and the success sound effect A is output. Further, the strong vibration effect (recovery success vibration effect) by the effect button 6a is executed for 4 seconds. Further, the lighting device 23 for the board and the effect button 6a emit rainbow light.

Then, the strong vibration effect ends, but after the rainbow emission of the panel lighting device 23 and the effect button 6a continues, the revival success effect ends. After that, as shown in FIG. 71 (6), the display mode of the effect symbol 16a of "777" is temporarily stopped. In addition, a strong vibration effect (big hit confirmed vibration effect) that vibrates the effect button 6a for 1 second without the validity period of the effect button 6a (display of the operation promotion image) is started, and the lighting device 23 for the board and the effect Button 6a emits rainbow light.

After that, when a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) elapses, as shown in FIG. 71 (7), a stop suggestion effect TS suggesting that the effect symbol 16a shifts from the temporary stop to the fixed stop is executed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 71 (8), the effect symbol 16a of "777" is fixedly stopped and displayed, and the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed in the combination display mode of "777". After the symbol determination stop period (0.5 seconds) has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 71 (9), the opening effect of the jackpot game and the lamp emission effect by the board lighting device 23 are started. Further, a strong vibration effect (opening vibration effect) in which the effect button 6a is strongly vibrated for 1 second is started, and the effect button 6a emits rainbow light.

In the opening effect, a character image of "SUPER BONUS" indicating that the 10R jackpot game is executed is displayed, and a halo flash is displayed from behind the character, and the character image of "SUPER BONUS" is highlighted. Will be done. After that, when the opening effect is completed, the first round game is started.
When the character image of "SUPER BONUS" is displayed, the effect button 6a may simply emit rainbow light without performing the vibration effect by the effect button 6a.
Alternatively, the vibration effect by the effect button 6a may be performed only when the character image of "SUPER BONUS" is displayed, and the vibration effect by the effect button 6a may not be performed when the character image of "BONUS" is displayed. ..

(Probability change mission production)
During the jackpot game (round game), a probabilistic mission effect may be executed to determine whether or not the game will be in a high-probability time-shortening game state. For example, in the 10R jackpot game, the valid period (5 seconds continuous hitting) of the effect button 6a is generated in the 4th round game, and the probability change mission effect (for example, the mission effect to challenge the panel destruction by the button repeated hits) is started.

During the valid period, the operation promotion image (opaque effect button image, gauge image) is displayed, and the effect button 6a emits white light. When the effect button 6a is operated and the panel is destroyed, or when the effect button 6a is not operated and the valid period elapses, the mission success effect is executed. In the mission success effect, the third movable effect member 17C emits rainbow light, the blade portion is pulled out from the sheath portion, and the effect operation of tilting to the front side of the screen of the first image display device 16 is performed. Further, the success effect image is displayed on the first image display device 16, and the success sound effect is output. Further, the strong vibration effect (promotion successful vibration effect) by the effect button 6a is executed for 5 seconds. Further, the lighting device 23 for the board and the effect button 6a emit rainbow light.
In this way, it is possible to suggest to the player that a high-accuracy time-shortening game state will occur after the big hit game, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.
The effect button 6a is operated when the player can select either the probability change mode D or the probability change mode E corresponding to the high probability time-short game state by operating the effect button 6a and the cross key 6f. However, the vibration effect by the effect button 6a is not executed.

According to the effect example shown in FIG. 71, since the vibration effect (recovery success vibration effect) executed at the time of the revival success effect is accompanied by the valid period of the effect button 6a (display of the operation promotion image), the operation promotion image SG is displayed. The display sound effect at the time of display and the effect sound (operation sound effect, success sound effect, operation sound effect of the movable effect member, etc.) when the effect button 6a is operated during the effective period are output. Therefore, it is possible to perform a dramatic and impactful revival success production that turns the disappointment of the player's loss into joy and improves the interest of the game.

According to the effect example shown in FIG. 71, the execution period of the vibration effect executed at the time of the successful resurrection effect is the same regardless of whether or not the effect button 6a is operated during the valid period and the operation timing. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience of not being able to fully experience the vibration effect depending on the operation timing of the effect button 6a, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Regarding the vibration effect executed at the time of the successful resurrection effect, the same timing (for example, the timing when the effective period when the effect button 6a is not operated elapses) regardless of whether or not the effect button 6a is operated during the effective period and the operation timing. It may be executed (the execution period of the vibration effect is variable) until (4 seconds later).

(Production example 1 when the setting is changed from the normal mode to the time saving mode)
FIG. 72 will be described with reference to an example of an effect in which the setting is changed to the time saving mode when the specific loss symbol is stopped and displayed in the loss variation effect in the normal mode.

As shown in FIG. 72 (1), after the scroll display (high-speed fluctuation) of the staging symbol 16a is started, as shown in FIG. 72 (2), “1 (cat) 2 (dog) 3 ( When the effect symbol 16a (specific loss symbol) of "Rabbit)" is displayed as a fixed stop display, the vibration effect by the effect button 6a is executed. Specifically, the effect button 6a is vibrated strongly for 3 seconds, and the effect button 6a is blinked in red. In addition, the time saving mode input sound effect is output, and the panel lighting device 23 and the frame lighting device 27 emit red light.

Then, as shown in FIG. 72 (3), the character image of "Chance mode entry" indicating the confirmation of the time saving mode is displayed, and the effect button 6a emits white light. As a result, the player surely recognizes that the mode has been shifted to the time saving mode (low probability time saving gaming state). Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 72 (4), a right-handed image prompting the player to launch the game ball toward the right-hand area 4a2 of the game area 4a is displayed, and the effect button 6a emits white light.
In the chance mode (time saving mode), the same effect image (background image, effect symbol image, etc.) as in the normal time saving mode (low probability time saving game state after the big hit game) is displayed. A special effect image (special background image, special effect symbol image, etc.) corresponding to the chance mode may be displayed.

According to the effect example shown in FIG. 72, the vibration effect is executed when the specific loss symbol is stopped in the loss variation effect in the normal mode, thereby attracting the player's attention to the effect symbol 16a. can.
In addition, instead of the vibration effect by the effect button 6a, the accessory effect may be performed by the movable effect members 17A to 17C. In this case, the effect operation in which the blade portion of the first movable effect member 17A moves to the left while the first movable effect member 17A and the second movable effect member 17B emit red light, and the second movable effect member 17B is in the standby position. The staging operation of moving downward from the first image display device 16 to the front side of the center of the screen may be performed all at once.
In addition, as the specific loss symbol, instead of the predetermined loss effect symbol 16a of "1 (dog) 2 (cat) 3 (rabbit)", the time reduction symbol and the graphic symbol in which the characters "time reduction" are displayed ( For example, it may be a display mode (for example, “1 ★ 2”) in which the effect symbol 16a and the graphic symbol are combined (“★★★”).

(Production example 2 when the setting is changed from the normal mode to the time saving mode)
FIG. 73 will explain an example of an effect in which the setting is changed to the time saving mode when the loss variation effect reaches a predetermined number of times in the normal mode.

As shown in FIG. 73 (1), after the scroll display (high-speed fluctuation) of the staging symbol 16a is started, as shown in FIG. 73 (2), “2 (dog) 1 (cat) 6 ( The effect symbol 16a of "tiger)" is displayed as a fixed stop, and there are three remaining times until the time saving mode is entered.

As shown in FIG. 73 (3), when the scroll display of the effect symbol 16a is started, the time-saving mode rushing effect is executed, in which the remaining three times are required until the effect symbol 16a is entered. Specifically, a countdown image "3" is displayed to notify that there are three remaining times until the time saving mode is entered, a count effect sound is output, and the effect button 6a emits white light. Further, the panel lighting device 23 and the frame lighting device 27 emit white light.
After that, as shown in FIG. 73 (4), the staging symbol 16a of "2 (dog) 4 (chicken) 5 (koala)" indicating the loss is displayed as a definite stop, and the remaining two times until the time saving mode is entered. ..

As shown in FIG. 73 (5), when the scroll display of the effect symbol 16a is started, a countdown image "2" is displayed to notify that there are two remaining times until the time saving mode is entered, and a count effect is displayed. Sound is output, and the effect button 6a emits white light. Further, the panel lighting device 23 and the frame lighting device 27 emit white light.
After that, as shown in FIG. 73 (6), the staging symbol 16a of "3 (rabbit) 1 (cat) 2 (dog)" indicating a loss is displayed as a definite stop, and there is only one remaining time until the time saving mode is entered. ..

As shown in FIG. 73 (7), when the scroll display of the effect symbol 16a is started, a countdown image “1” is displayed to notify that there is only one remaining time until the time saving mode is entered, and a count effect is displayed. Sound is output, and the effect button 6a emits white light. Further, the panel lighting device 23 and the frame lighting device 27 emit white light.
After that, as shown in FIG. 73 (8), the staging symbol 16a of "5 (koala) 6 (tiger) 8 (fox)" indicating the loss is displayed as a definite stop, and the remaining 0 times until the time saving mode is entered, that is, , It becomes a time saving mode rush.

As shown in FIG. 73 (9), when the scroll display of the effect symbol 16a is disclosed, a countdown image “0” indicating that the number of fluctuations until the time saving mode is entered is reached, and a count effect is displayed. Sound is output, and the effect button 6a emits white light. Further, the panel lighting device 23 and the frame lighting device 27 emit white light.
Further, as shown in FIG. 73 (10), there is an effect operation in which the blade portion of the first movable effect member 17A moves to the left while the first movable effect member 17A and the second movable effect member 17B emit red light. The effect operation in which the second movable effect member 17B moves downward from the standby position to the front side of the center of the screen of the first image display device 16 is performed all at once. In addition, the effect image is displayed and the time saving mode entry effect is output.

Then, as shown in FIG. 73 (11), the character image of "Chance mode entry" indicating the confirmation of the time saving mode is displayed, and the effect button 6a emits white light. As a result, the player surely recognizes that the mode has been shifted to the time saving mode (low probability time saving gaming state). Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 73 (12), a right-handed image prompting the player to launch the game ball toward the right-hand area 4a2 of the game area 4a is displayed, and the effect button 6a emits white light.

According to the staging example shown in FIG. 73, it is possible to raise the expectation of the player to be in the time-saving mode by the time-saving input mode fanning effect, and to attract the player's attention to the staging symbol 16a.
In addition, since it is possible to enhance the joy of the player for entering the time saving mode by the character production, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Instead of the vibration effect by the movable effect members 17A to 17C, the vibration effect by the effect button 6a may be performed. The effect button 6a is vibrated strongly for 3 seconds, and the effect button 6a is blinked in red, or the effect button 6a is vibrated strongly for 5 seconds to light the effect button 6a in red.
It should be noted that a light guide plate may be arranged on the front side of the image display device 16 to cause the light guide plate to emit light instead of the panel lighting device 23 and the frame lighting device 27 in the time saving mode rushing effect. The light guide plate may be made to emit light together with the light emitted from the panel lighting device 23 and the frame lighting device 27.

(Example of production when operating the operating means while waiting for customers)
An example of an effect of the operation means (effect button 6a, cross key 6f) while waiting for a customer will be described with reference to FIG. 74.

As shown in FIG. 74 (1), when the transition to the customer waiting state in which the fluctuation effect and the jackpot effect are not executed, the effect suggestion effect suggesting that the valid period may occur is not executed, and the effect button 6a and The customer waiting valid period in which the operation of the cross key 6f is valid is started. Since the valid period while waiting for customers is maintained until the variable effect is started, it can occur for a longer period than the various effective periods that occur during the variable effect.

As shown in FIG. 74 (2), the first image display device 16 displays a top screen including a stopped display effect symbol 16a, an effect button icon, and a cross key icon. When the effect button 6a is operated, the menu top screen MT including the menu screen, the effect button icon, and the cross key (selection button) icon is displayed without vibrating the effect button 6a, as shown in FIG. 74 (3). Will be done.

On the menu screen, for example, "Pachilog", "First pachinko course", "Volume / light intensity adjustment", "Back", selection key (cross key) icon, and enter button (directing button) icon are set as menu items. ing.

The player can select any of the desired selection items by using the cross key 6f. For example, on the menu screen, one of a plurality of selection items is highlighted (blinking display, display for changing the color of the selection item, etc.). The highlighted selection item is the selection target. The player switches the highlighted selection item using the cross key 6f, and determines the highlighted selection item by operating the effect button 6a. As a result, the desired selection item has been determined. When the selection item is decided, the screen corresponding to the decided selection item is switched from the menu screen and newly displayed.

When the player operates the effect button 6a to determine the "pachinko log", the pachinko log top menu is displayed without the effect button 6a vibrating. To put it simply, a "pachilog" is a game in which a gaming machine stores information on a gaming history.
When the player operates the effect button 6a to determine the "first pachinko course", the instruction movie for beginners is played without the effect button 6a vibrating.
When the player operates the effect button 6a to determine "volume / light amount adjustment", the volume / light amount adjustment screen is displayed without the effect button 6a vibrating.

When the left and right buttons of the cross key 6f are operated, the volume adjustment screen is displayed. A cross key icon for making changes is displayed. When the left and right buttons of the cross key 6f are operated, the volume gauge is displayed in a state of indicating the volume one step above or below the current volume without vibrating the cross key 6f or the effect button 6a, and the sound is output. A volume change confirmation sound is output from the device 9 with a voice corresponding to the changed volume.

When the up / down button of the cross key 6f is operated, the light amount adjustment screen is displayed. A cross key icon for making changes is displayed. When the up and down buttons of the cross key 6f are operated, the cross key 6f and the effect button 6a do not vibrate, and the light intensity gauge is displayed in a state showing the light intensity one step above or below the current light intensity, and the sound is output. The device 9 outputs a light amount change confirmation sound corresponding to the changed light amount.

When the player operates the effect button 6a to determine "return", the menu screen is erased without the effect button 6a vibrating. On the other hand, when the effect button 6a is not operated while the menu screen is displayed, when a predetermined time (for example, 45 seconds) has elapsed from the display of the menu screen, a demo effect image including the effect button icon is included as shown in FIG. 74 (4). Is displayed.

As described above, according to the specific example shown in FIG. 74, the effect button 6a related to various advance notice effects (speech advance notice effect, pseudo-continuous effect, development effect, cut-in effect, decision effect, etc.) generated during the variable effect. Even if the effect button 6a or the cross key 6f is operated during the customer waiting valid period that can occur for a longer period than the effective period, the vibration effect that vibrates the effect button 6a (the effect button 6a vibrates). (Including the indirect vibration of the transmitted cross key 6f) is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being surprised when the effect button 6a or the cross key 6f is operated while waiting for a customer, and it is possible to avoid inconveniences that may cause discomfort to the player. Will be.

Regarding the validity period of the cross key 6f related to volume adjustment and light amount adjustment that occurs during the variable effect (variable display of special symbols) and the big hit effect (big hit game), various advance notice effects (line) that occur during the variable effect are also given. It can occur for a longer period than the valid period related to the advance notice effect, pseudo-continuous effect, development effect, cut-in effect, decision effect, etc., but in the effective period of the cross key 6f related to volume adjustment and light amount adjustment. Even if the cross key 6f is operated, the vibration effect that vibrates the effect button 6a (including the indirect vibration of the cross key 6f transmitted by the vibration of the effect button 6a) is not executed. .. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being surprised when the effect button 6a or the cross key 6f is operated while waiting for a customer, and it is possible to avoid inconveniences that may cause discomfort to the player. Will be.

Further, regarding the customer waiting valid period, the valid suggestion effect suggesting that the valid period may occur before the valid period occurs is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being prepared even though the information useful to the player (the effect of expecting the jackpot game to be executed) is not executed, which makes the player uncomfortable. It is possible to avoid the inconvenience of giving.

Also, regarding the valid period of the cross key 6f related to volume adjustment and light intensity adjustment that occurs during the variable effect (variable display of special symbols) and the big hit effect (big hit game), the effective suggestion effect is executed before the effective period occurs. It is designed not to be done. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being prepared even though the information useful to the player (the effect of expecting the jackpot game to be executed) is not executed, which makes the player uncomfortable. It is possible to avoid the inconvenience of giving.

Further, the effect button 6a is operated during the customer waiting valid period that can occur for a period longer than the valid period (display period of the operation promotion image) of the effect button 6a that occurs during the variable effect. During the valid period (display period of the operation promotion image) of the effect button 6a related to various advance notice effects (line notice effect, pseudo-continuous effect, development effect, cut-in effect, decision effect, etc.) that occur during the variable effect, the effect button 6a When is operated, it is easier to execute the vibration effect of vibrating the effect button 6a. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the effect of the variable effect and improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the valid period of the effect button 6a related to various advance notice effects generated during the variable effect is relative to the relatively short first effective period (effective period accompanied by the display of the operation promotion image related to the dialogue advance notice effect, etc.). Has a long second valid period (valid period accompanied by display of operation promotion image related to decision staging, etc.), but can occur for a longer period than the valid period of the staging button 6a generated during the variable staging. When the effect button 6a is operated during the second valid period, it is easier to execute the vibration effect that vibrates the effect button 6a than when the effect button 6a is operated during the waiting valid period. .. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the effect of the variable effect and improve the interest of the game.

When the effect button 6a is operated during the valid period while waiting for customers, a vibration effect that vibrates the effect button 6a at a predetermined ratio may be executed, but even in this case, a variable effect is performed. At a lower rate than when the effect button 6a is operated during the valid period of the effect button 6a related to various advance notice effects (line notice effect, pseudo-continuous effect, development effect, cut-in effect, decision effect, etc.) that occur during the process. It is good to perform a vibration effect.

(Summary of various vibration effects performed in a specific effect)
FIG. 75 is a diagram showing various vibration effects performed during the pre-reach effect and various vibration effects performed during the reach middle effect / post-reach effect in the specific effect.
The specific effect is a loss / jackpot variation effect pattern with reach in the variation effect pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 42 and 43.
In a specific effect, there is an operation that is performed during the post-reach effect (second effect). Since there are many types of (development production, cut-in notice production, decision success vibration production, re-lottery promotion vibration production, revival success vibration production, etc.) The execution rate is higher during the post-reach production.

Further, in the specific effect, the execution ratio of the vibration effect without operation of matching the jackpot symbols is higher in the post-reach effect than in the pre-reach effect.
Further, in the specific effect (specific effect to be notified), the execution ratio of the button vibration advance notice effect at the start of fluctuation is higher in the pre-reach effect than in the post-reach effect.

The first feature related to the vibration effect is that the vibration effect (weak vibration 1 second or strong vibration 1 second) is executed in the dialogue advance notice effect accompanied by the valid period of the effect button 6a (display of the operation promotion image). , The step-up notice effect that does not accompany the validity period of the effect button 6a (display of the operation promotion image) determines the degree of jackpot expectation (the rate at which the jackpot confirmed vibration effect (strong vibration 4 seconds) due to the matching of symbols is executed). The rate of successful vibration production (strong vibration 4 seconds → 5 seconds) is high. Therefore, it is possible to raise the player's expectation for the type of pre-reach advance notice effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

It should be noted that the valid period of the effect button 6a (operation promotion image) is larger than the case where the vibration effect (weak vibration 1 second) is executed in the step-up notice effect without the effect period of the effect button 6a (display of the operation promotion image). When the vibration effect (weak vibration 1 second or strong vibration 1 second) is executed in the dialogue notice effect accompanied by (display), the jackpot expectation degree (vibration effect (strong vibration 4 seconds) accompanying the pattern alignment) is executed. The ratio, the ratio at which the vibration effect (strong vibration 4 seconds → 5 seconds) is executed in the determined effect, etc.) may be increased.

The second feature related to the vibration effect is that the vibration effect executed as the jackpot notice effect includes the first vibration effect (during the dialogue notice effect, step-up notice effect, and pseudo-continuous effect) in which the vibration period is relatively short. , Vibration production (1 second) during development production, and 2nd vibration production (cut-in production, successful decision production, final production, etc.), which has a longer vibration period (production period) than the first vibration production. There is a vibration effect longer than a second (3 seconds, 4 seconds, 4 seconds → 5 seconds), and after the first effect period (pre-reach effect), the second effect period (normal reach effect) and the third effect period (SP). / In a variable effect with SPSP reach effect), the first vibration effect is more likely to be executed (the rate of execution is higher) in the first effect period than in the second effect period. Therefore, it is possible to raise the expectation without misunderstanding that the player will be a big hit, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The look-ahead vibration effect (button vibration advance notice effect) is also the first vibration effect in which the vibration time is relatively short, but even when the look-ahead vibration effect (button vibration advance notice effect) is included, the first vibration effect is used. In a variable production where there is a second production period (normal reach production) and a third production period (SP / SPSP reach production) after the production period (pre-reach production), the first production period is better than the second production period. The first vibration effect is easy to be executed (the ratio of being executed is high).

The third feature of the vibration effect is that in a variable effect where there is a third effect period (SP / SPSP reach effect) after the second effect period (normal reach effect) after the first effect period (pre-reach effect). The first vibration effect (vibration effect (1 second) at the time of dialogue notice effect, step-up notice effect, pseudo-continuous effect, development effect, etc.) is executed in the first effect period rather than the third effect period. Easy to do (high rate of execution). Therefore, it is possible to raise the expectation without misunderstanding that the player will be a big hit, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The fourth feature related to the vibration effect is that the vibration effect executed as the jackpot notice effect includes the first vibration effect with a short vibration period (during dialogue notice effect, step-up notice effect, pseudo-continuous effect, development effect). Vibration effect such as time (1 second) and second vibration effect (cut-in effect, successful decision effect, final effect, etc.) that has a longer vibration period than the first vibration effect (1 second) 3 seconds, 4 seconds, 4 seconds → 5 seconds)), and after the first production period (pre-reach production), there is a second production period (normal reach production) and a third production period (SP / SPSP reach production). In the variable effect, the second vibration effect is more likely to be executed (the rate of execution is higher) in the second effect period than in the first effect period. Therefore, the expectation of the player can be effectively increased, and the interest of the game can be improved.

The fifth feature of the vibration effect is that in a variable effect where there is a third effect period (SP / SPSP reach effect) after the second effect period (normal reach effect) after the first effect period (pre-reach effect). The third production period is longer than the first vibration production (3 seconds, 4 seconds, 4 seconds) for the second vibration production (cut-in production, successful decision production, final production, etc.). Seconds → 5 seconds)) is easy to execute (the rate of execution is high). Therefore, the expectation of the player can be effectively increased, and the interest of the game can be improved.

As a sixth feature related to the vibration effect, in the first effect period (pre-reach effect), the ratio of executing the first vibration effect (1 second) with the effect button 6a in the normal state protrudes from the effect button 6a. It is higher than the ratio of executing the first vibration effect (1 second) as a state. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game without excessively agitating the expectation of the player during the first production period.

As a seventh feature related to the vibration effect, in the third effect period (SP / SPSP reach effect), the ratio of executing the second vibration effect (3 seconds or more) with the effect button 6a in a protruding state is the effect button. It is higher than the ratio of executing the second vibration effect with 6a as the normal state. Therefore, during the first staging period (pre-reach staging), the player's expectation is not excessively agitated, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The eighth feature related to the vibration effect is that the vibration effect executed as the jackpot notice effect includes the first vibration effect with a short vibration period (during dialogue notice effect, step-up notice effect, pseudo-continuous effect, development effect). Vibration production at times (1 second)) and second vibration production (cut-in production, successful decision production, successful re-lottery promotion, successful revival), which has a longer vibration period (production period) than the first vibration production. There is a vibration effect (3 seconds, 4 seconds, 4 seconds → 5 seconds) that is longer than 1 second at the time of production, final production, etc., and there is a continuous production (pseudo-continuous production) a predetermined number of times (for example, once or twice). ) Is executed and the reach effect is executed. In the variable effect, when the first vibration effect (1 second) is executed, the second vibration effect (3 seconds) is executed than when the first vibration effect is not executed. The above) is easy to execute (the rate of execution is high). Therefore, it is possible to raise the player's expectation as to whether or not the first vibration effect is executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The ninth feature related to the vibration effect is that the vibration effect executed as the jackpot notice effect has a longer vibration period (effect period) than the first vibration effect (during the cut-in effect, a successful decision effect). There is a vibration effect (3 seconds, 4 seconds, 4 seconds → 5 seconds) that is longer than 1 second, such as when the re-lottery promotion is successful, when the revival is successful, and when the final is confirmed. In the variable effect, the reach effect by the second type of effect symbol (even symbol) is easier to be executed (the rate of execution is higher) than the reach effect by the first type effect symbol (odd symbol other than the "7" symbol). ), It is more difficult to execute the reach effect by the third type effect symbol ("7" symbol) than the reach effect by the second type effect symbol (even symbol), and the second type type The second vibration effect is more likely to be executed when the reach effect by the third type of effect symbol (“7” symbol) is executed than when the reach effect by the effect symbol (even symbol) is executed. High rate of execution). Therefore, it is possible to raise the player's expectation for the type of staging symbol that executes the reach staging, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The tenth feature related to the vibration effect is that in the jackpot fluctuation effect in which the reach effect is executed, the vibration effect (pre-reading vibration effect (button vibration notice effect)) is not accompanied by the valid period (display of the operation promotion image) during the pre-reach effect. )), The number of executions of the vibration effect (development effect, pattern alignment, final effect) without the valid period (display of the operation promotion image) during the post-reach effect, rather than the number of executions of the step-up notice effect, final effect). It is easy to increase. Therefore, it is possible to effectively raise the expectation during the production after the reach, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The eleventh feature related to the vibration effect is that a specific reach effect (SP reach effect, SPSP reach effect) is executed rather than a jackpot variable effect in which a predetermined reach effect (normal reach effect, full rotation reach effect) is executed. The jackpot variation effect tends to increase the number of executions of the vibration effect (development effect, pattern alignment, final effect) without the effective period (display of the operation promotion image) during the post-reach effect. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the jackpot fluctuation effect from becoming monotonous, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The twelfth feature of the vibration effect is that in the loss variation effect in which the reach effect is executed, the vibration effect (development effect, pattern alignment, final effect) without an effective period (display of the operation promotion image) during the post-reach effect is achieved. ) Is more than the number of executions of the vibration effect (look-ahead vibration effect (button vibration advance notice effect), step-up advance notice effect, final effect) without the valid period (display of the operation promotion image) during the pre-reach effect. Is likely to increase. Therefore, it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation of a big hit by a vibration effect without an effective period (display of an operation promotion image), and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The thirteenth feature related to the vibration effect is the post-reach advance notice, which has a higher expectation of a big hit than the pre-reach advance notice effect, compared to the case where the pre-reach advance notice effect (line advance notice effect, step-up advance notice effect) is executed in the variable effect. When the effect (cut-in effect, development effect) is executed, the vibration effect of the effect button 6a (operation of the button vibration motor 6d) is more likely to be executed (execution rate is high).
Further, when the pre-reach advance notice effect is executed, the jackpot expectation is higher when the vibration effect of the effect button 6a is executed than when the vibration effect of the effect button 6a is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to raise the player's expectation as to whether or not the vibration effect of the effect button 6a is executed when the pre-reach advance notice effect is executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As a fourteenth feature related to the vibration effect, the probability variation / time saving modes D to G are accompanied by the validity period (display of the operation promotion image) of the effect button 6a in the post-reach advance notice effect than the normal modes A to C. The expectation of a big hit when the vibration effect is executed is high. Therefore, the playability can be different depending on the type of the production mode, and the fun of the game can be improved.

It should be noted that, in the normal modes A to C, the big hit when the vibration effect accompanied by the valid period (display of the operation promotion image) of the effect button 6a is executed in the post-reach advance notice effect than in the probability change / time saving modes D to G. Expectations may be high. Even in this case, the playability can be different depending on the type of the production mode, and it becomes easy to raise the expectation of the player in the probabilistic change / time saving mode D to G which is advantageous for the player, and the interest of the game is improved. It is possible to make it.

The fifteenth feature related to the vibration effect is that in the first effect period (before reach) in the variable effect, the vibration effect of the effect button 6a is executed rather than the vibration effect of the effect button 6a is not executed. However, the expectation of a big hit is high, and in the big hit fluctuation effect, the effect button 6a is used in the post-reach effect (the period after the successful decision effect) regardless of whether or not the vibration effect of the effect button 6a is executed during the pre-reach effect. Vibration effect (vibration effect when the symbols are aligned) is executed. Therefore, it is possible to notify the player of the big hit by the vibration effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The sixteenth feature related to the vibration effect is the vibration effect (during dialogue notice effect, pseudo-continuous effect, development effect, etc.) accompanied by the valid period (display of the operation promotion image) of the effect button 6a executed during the fluctuation effect. One of the vibration effects during the cut-in effect) is executed in any of multiple types of vibration modes (weak vibration, strong vibration) with different jackpot expectations, but the effect is executed during the variable effect. The vibration effect (one of the vibration effects such as the step-up notice effect and the pattern alignment) without the valid period of the button 6a (display of the operation promotion image) is executed in one predetermined vibration mode. To. Therefore, when it is difficult to grasp the type of the vibration mode without the validity period (display of the operation promotion image), it is possible to suppress the complicated production mode of the vibration effect and improve the interest of the game. It becomes possible.

As the 17th feature related to the vibration effect, the vibration effect (vibration effect at the time of the dialogue notice effect) accompanied by the valid period (display of the operation promotion image) of the effect button 6a is executed in the pre-reach effect period in the jackpot fluctuation effect. In some cases, the vibration effect (vibration effect at the time of step-up notice effect) is executed without the validity period of the effect button 6a (display of the operation promotion image), and after that (post-reach effect period), the vibration effect is performed. (Vibration effect of 3 seconds or more at the time of decision success effect, re-lottery promotion success effect, revival success effect, and symbol alignment) is executed at different rates, and the validity period of the effect button 6a (display of operation promotion image) The vibration effect without the above (vibration effect at the time of step-up notice effect) is more likely to be executed in the normal modes A to C than in the probabilistic change / time saving modes D to G (the rate of execution is higher). Therefore, it is possible to enhance the effect of the vibration effect without the valid period of the effect button 6a (display of the operation promotion image), and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The eighteenth feature related to the vibration effect is that when the jackpot fluctuation effect is executed, the jackpot notice is given by the type of the jackpot effect symbol 16a (even symbol, odd symbol other than "7", "7" symbol). It is possible to make different execution modes (whether or not to execute, execution timing, etc.) of the vibration effect in the effect, but when the vibration effect is executed along with the execution of the successful decision effect or the final effect, the symbols are aligned (identification unit). The vibration mode is the same regardless of the type of the jackpot effect symbol 16a. Therefore, while raising the expectation for the big hit by the vibration effect, it is possible to uniformly congratulate the big hit and improve the interest of the game.

The 19th feature related to the vibration effect is that after the vibration effect (decision success vibration effect, etc.) accompanied by the effective period (display of the operation promotion image) is executed in the jackpot fluctuation effect, the effective period (display of the operation promotion image) is set. It is possible to execute a vibration effect (design alignment, etc.) that does not accompany it, and for a vibration effect (decision success vibration effect, etc.) that accompanies an effective period (display of an operation promotion image), the timing to start vibration is variable depending on the operation timing of the effect button 6a. On the other hand, in the vibration effect (design alignment, etc.) without an effective period (display of the operation promotion image), the timing at which the vibration is started is predetermined. Therefore, it is possible to execute the vibration effect at an appropriate timing depending on whether or not it is accompanied by a valid period (display of the operation promotion image), and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The twentieth feature related to the vibration effect is a specific effect (pseudo-continuous effect, pseudo-continuous effect) using the same movable effect member (first movable effect member 17A) in the normal modes A to C and the probabilistic / time saving modes D to G. (Development effect, etc.) can be executed, but the jackpot expectation when the specific effect is executed differs between the normal modes A to C and the probabilistic / time saving modes D to G. Therefore, the playability can be different depending on the type of the production mode, and the fun of the game can be improved.

The 21st feature related to the vibration effect is the stage effect (step-up notice effect, pseudo) that progresses to any of multiple stages with different jackpot expectations in the normal modes A to C and the probability variation / time saving modes D to G. Although it is possible to execute continuous effects (such as continuous effects), the stage effects (step-up notice effects, pseudo-continuous effects, etc.) are the same in normal modes A to C and probabilistic / time-saving modes D to G (step-up advance notice effects, etc.). For example, if any of the 3rd step effect, the 4th step effect, and the 5th step effect, and if it is a pseudo-continuous effect, the degree of expectation of a big hit is different when it progresses to once or twice). Therefore, the playability can be different depending on the type of the production mode, and the fun of the game can be improved.

The 22nd feature related to the vibration effect is that it is possible to execute any of a plurality of operation promotion effects having different jackpot expectations in the normal modes A to C and the probability variation / time saving modes D to G, and the effect button 6a. It is possible to execute an operation effect (any of development effect, cut-in effect, and decision effect) according to the operation of, and in the normal mode A to C and the probability change / time saving mode D to G, when the operation effect is executed. The jackpot expectation is higher when the effective suggestion effect is executed and the operation promotion effect is executed than when the operation promotion effect is executed without the effective suggestion effect being executed. Therefore, it is possible to raise the player's expectation as to whether or not the effective suggestion effect is executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.
When the vibration effect is executed during the effective suggestion effect, the expectation of a big hit is higher than when the vibration effect is not executed during the effective suggestion effect.

The 23rd feature of the vibration effect is that the vibration effect for a relatively short period of time (for example, 1 second) executed in association with the jackpot notice effect is the valid period of the effect button 6a (display of the operation promotion image). ), Or without a valid period (display of operation promotion image), but the vibration period executed with the jackpot notice effect is a relatively long time ( The vibration effect (3 seconds or more) is executed with an effective period (display of the operation promotion image). Therefore, it is possible to improve the effect of the effect on the operation of the effect button 6a, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The 24th feature relating to the vibration effect is that a battle effect involving a single hit operation of the effect button 6a or a tilting operation of the effect lever 6h is executed in the determined effect, and a continuous hit operation of the effect button 6a or the effect button 6a. When a mission effect accompanied by a long press operation is executed, the start timing of execution of the decision success effect after operating the effect button 6a or the effect lever 6h (the display start timing of the success effect image, the decision success vibration effect) The vibration start timing, the movable start timing of the determination operation, and the light emission start timing of the lamp emission (rainbow) are different. Therefore, it is possible to execute the determined success effect (determined successful vibration effect) at an appropriate timing according to the effect mode of the determined effect accompanied by the operation of the operating means, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As the 25th feature related to the vibration effect, the same vibration effect mode is determined and the successful vibration effect is executed by the decision success effect accompanied by the single hit operation of the effect button 6a and the decision success effect accompanied by the tilting operation of the effect lever 6h. However, the success sound effect (success sound effect A) output by the decision success effect accompanied by the single hit operation of the effect button 6a and the success sound effect (success sound effect sound) output by the decision success effect accompanied by the tilting operation of the effect lever 6h. B) is different. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the success sound effect in the decision success production from becoming monotonous, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.
Further, after the decision success effect accompanied by the single hit operation of the effect button 6a and the decision success effect accompanied by the tilt operation of the effect lever 6h are executed, the vibration effect of the same vibration effect mode (vibration effect when the symbols are aligned) is executed. To. Therefore, it is possible to uniformly congratulate the big hit regardless of the production content of the determined production, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The 26th feature related to the vibration effect is that the successful vibration effect that involves the tilting operation of the effect lever 6h is "7" symbol alignment rather than the even-numbered symbol alignment or the jackpot symbol of "7" symbol alignment being stopped and displayed. It is easier to execute when the jackpot symbol of is stopped and displayed. Therefore, it is possible to give a rarity to the determined successful vibration effect accompanied by the operation of the effect lever 6h, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.
If the hold icon or the variable icon changes to a display mode (red, rainbow) with a high expectation of a big hit during the variable effect, the effect button 6a or the effect lever 6h is set to 1. It may be vibrated weakly or strongly for a second.

The 27th feature related to the vibration effect is that when the jackpot variation effect is executed, even if the jackpot effect symbol 16a of the even-numbered symbol alignment (“222”) is stopped and displayed, the odd-numbered symbol alignment (“777”) is displayed. Even if the jackpot effect symbol 16a is stopped and displayed, the vibration effect mode (long-time strong vibration) of the decision success vibration effect that is executed when the success effect image is displayed along with the execution of the decision success effect is the same. It has become. Therefore, while raising expectations for the jackpot by vibrating the effect, it is possible to uniformly congratulate the jackpot regardless of the type of the jackpot effect symbol that is displayed as a stop, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Become.

Further, in the probability variation / time saving modes D to G, the game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 10 and the jackpot variation effect is executed, and the game ball wins a prize in the second starting port 11a and the jackpot variation effect is executed. Even if the jackpot effect symbol 16a with even-numbered symbols (“222”) is stopped and displayed, or even if the jackpot effect symbol 16a with odd-numbered symbols (“777”) is stopped and displayed, the decision is successful. The vibration effect mode (strong vibration for a long time) of the vibration effect is the same.

Further, in the normal modes A to C, the game ball wins in the first starting port 10 and the jackpot fluctuation effect is executed, and in the probability variation / time saving modes D to G, the game ball wins in the first starting port 10. Even if the jackpot effect symbol 16a with even-numbered symbols (“222”) is stopped and displayed when the jackpot variation effect is executed, the jackpot effect symbol 16a with odd-numbered symbols (“777”) is stopped and displayed. Even in this case, the vibration effect mode (long-time strong vibration) of the determined success vibration effect is the same.

The 28th feature related to the vibration effect is that in the normal mode A to C and the probability change / time saving mode D to G, when the cut-in effect or the development effect is executed during the reach effect, the operation promotion effect emits red light. The operation promotion image including the opaque effect button image imitating the effect button 6a is displayed, and the jackpot expectation when the vibration effect is executed is different. Therefore, even if the operation promotion effect and the vibration effect of the same effect mode are executed, the playability can be different depending on the type of the effect mode, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, there are cases where the game ball wins in the first starting port 10 in the normal modes A to C, and cases where the game ball wins in the second starting port 11a in the probable change / time saving modes D to G. When the game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 10 in the time saving modes D to G, and when the cut-in effect or the development effect is executed during the reach effect, the effect of emitting red light in the operation promotion effect. When the operation promotion image of the button image imitating the button 6a is displayed and the vibration effect is executed, the jackpot expectation is different.

The 29th feature related to the vibration effect is the vibration effect (short-time weak vibration or short time) when the light emission effect of causing the effect button 6a to emit white or red light is executed in the operation promotion effect (pseudo continuous effect, development effect). The vibration effect mode (vibration intensity or Vibration period) is different. Therefore, it is possible to raise the player's expectation for the operation promotion effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As a thirty-thirth feature relating to the vibration effect, the ratio of the button vibration warning effect being executed is higher in the normal modes A to C than in the probability variation / time saving modes D to G. Therefore, it is possible to effectively raise the expectation of the player in the normal mode, which is more disadvantageous to the player than in the probability change / time saving mode, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The 31st feature related to the vibration effect is the first operation promotion effect in which an opaque effect button image imitating a white light emitting effect button 6a is displayed in the operation promotion effect that urges the player to operate the operation means. There is a second operation promotion effect in which an opaque effect button image imitating the effect button 6a that emits red light is displayed, and a third operation promotion effect for adjusting the volume and brightness, which is useful information for the player (the variable effect). It is possible to execute the vibration effect when the first operation promotion effect and the second operation promotion effect are executed, but the third operation promotion effect does not suggest useful information to the player. When executed, the vibration effect is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the vibration effect from being executed until the player does not suggest useful information, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The 32nd feature related to the vibration effect is that when the determined effect is executed, the valid period elapses after a predetermined period has elapsed since the effective suggestion effect (without vibration effect) is executed (when the operating means is operated or is not operated). The first vibration effect (effective suggestion effect) is executed after the vibration effect (successful decision vibration effect), and the vibration effect (effective suggestion effect) is executed after a predetermined period has passed since the effective suggestion effect was executed while the vibration effect was executed at the time of the effective suggestion effect. There is a second vibration effect that executes the time vibration effect and the successful decision vibration effect), and the jackpot expectation is higher when the second vibration effect is executed than when the first vibration effect is executed. .. Therefore, it is possible to effectively raise the expectation of the player from the time of the effective suggestion production, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The 33rd feature related to the vibration effect is that the lamp change effect by the winning port lamp NR and the panel lighting device 23 (frame lighting device 27) is executed rather than the lamp change effect by the winning port lamp NR. If this is done, the expectation of a big hit will be higher, and it will be easier to execute the vibration effect (successful decision vibration effect, vibration effect when the symbols are aligned, etc.). Therefore, the expectation of the player can be effectively increased, and the interest of the game can be improved.

In the case of a gaming machine having a V winning opening for continuing a high-accuracy time-saving gaming state during a big hit game, the effect button 6a vibrates and the effect button 6a vibrates when the game ball wins the V winning opening during the big hit game. , May emit light in rainbow colors.

(Initial operation of various drive sources)
Next, the initial operation of various drive sources will be described.
When the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned on, various drive sources such as the opening / closing member 11b of the second starting port 11a and the opening / closing member 13b of the winning opening 13a are operated before the gaming machine 1 can play a game. The initial operation to make it is performed. The following describes the configuration required for the initial operation of various drive sources and the operation content of the initial operation.

(Main processing of main control board)
The main process (game program) of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 76. FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing the main processing in the main control board 110. This main process is performed by inputting a system reset generated by supplying a power supply voltage from the power supply board 160 to the main CPU 110a.

First, the main CPU 110a performs the initial setting process in step S10. Specifically, the predetermined RWM area of the main RAM 110c is initialized based on the preparation process for starting the control of the game, the setting change process for changing the set value based on the setting change operation, and the RWM (RAM) clear operation. RAM clear processing to clear the RAM, setting confirmation processing to confirm the set value based on the setting confirmation operation, and initial operation of various drive sources (second start opening opening / closing solenoid 11d, large winning opening opening / closing solenoid 13d) provided in the board unit. Performs initial operation processing of the drive source for making the drive source. The details of the initial setting process will be described later.

In step S50, the main CPU 110a updates the special symbol determination random value and the reach determination random value, and in step S51, the jackpot determination initial random value, the special symbol determination initial random value, the hit determination initial random value, The initial random value for normal symbol determination is updated.

In step S52, the main CPU 110a detects a voltage drop indicating the occurrence of a voltage drop of the power supply from the power failure detection circuit 162 of the power supply board 160 (for example, the power supply supplied at 24 volts drops to less than 18 volts). Determine if a signal is being input. If the power drop detection signal is not input, the process is transferred to step S50, and if the voltage drop detection signal is input, the process is transferred to step S53.

In step S53, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the voltage drop detection signal is continuously input for a predetermined period (for example, 10 milliseconds). If the input is continued for a predetermined period, the process is transferred to step S54 assuming that a complete power failure has occurred, and if the input is not continued for a predetermined period, the power supply can be momentarily dropped in voltage. The process is transferred to step S52 as having the property.

In step S54, the main CPU 110a sets interrupt prohibition that prohibits timer interrupts, and in step S55, transmits a power cutoff designation command for notifying the payout control board 120 that the power cutoff process has started. do. As a result, the payout control board 120 that has received the power cutoff designation command transmits the remaining payout number designation command indicating the remaining payout number of the game balls stored in the payout RAM 121c.

In step S56, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the remaining payout number designation command has been received. If the remaining payout number designation command has not been received, the process is transferred to step S57, and if the remaining payout number designation command is received, the process is transferred to step S58.

In step S57, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the waiting time for waiting for the reception of the remaining payout number designation command has elapsed. If the standby time has not elapsed, the process is transferred to step S56, and if the standby time has elapsed, the process is transferred to step S58 assuming that normal communication with the payout control board 120 cannot be performed.

In step S58, the main CPU 110a saves the number of payouts in the payout counter set in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c. Specifically, if the remaining payout number specification command is received, the remaining payout number specified by the remaining payout number specification command is saved, and if the remaining payout number specification command is not received, the remaining payout number is specified. Save "0" as the number of payouts. The remaining number of payouts saved here is referred to in the prize ball processing of the timer interrupt, and after the power is restored, a command for specifying the number of payouts according to the number of remaining payouts is transmitted to the payout control board 120. ..

The main CPU 110a clears the output port in step S59. As a result, the output state of the output port is initialized, and the operations of various indicators and various drive sources (motors, solenoids) are stopped.

In step S60, the main CPU 110a calculates a checksum (abnormality determination data) of the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c and saves it in a predetermined area of the game RWM area. By doing so, it is possible to determine the data abnormality in the game RWM area by the checksum at the next power-on.

The main CPU 110a saves a backup flag indicating that the data of the main RAM 110c is backed up (power recovery) in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c in step S61, and prohibits RWM access in step S62. After that, it waits until the power supply is completely cut off.

In this way, when the supply of the operating power supply (18 volts or more) required for the operation of the gaming machine 1 is started, the initial setting process is performed, but with the occurrence of a momentary power failure (voltage drop to less than 18 volts). When the supply of operating power is restarted, the initial setting process is not performed. That is, even if the setting change operation, the setting confirmation operation, and the RWM clear operation are performed for some reason when the momentary power failure occurs, the setting change process, the setting confirmation process, and the RWM clear process are not executed. The machine will not perform unintended operations, and it will be possible to ensure the reliability of the game machine.

(Initial setting process of main control board)
The initial setting process (game program) of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 77. FIG. 77 is a flowchart showing the initial setting process of the main control board 110.

First, the main CPU 110a prohibits all interruptions in step S11, performs initial CPU settings such as internal register settings in step S12, and performs start-up waiting processing for other control boards in step S13. Specifically, the payout control board 120 and the staging control board 130 wait for one second so that the command is not missed from the main control board 110.

The main CPU 110a permits access to the RWM area of the main RAM 110c in step S14, and transmits a launch permission designation command to the payout control board 120 in step S15. As a result, the payout control unit 121 performs a process for permitting the launching of the game ball by the launching device 26.

In step S16, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a backup flag indicating that the power is restored is saved in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c. If the backup flag is saved, the process is moved to step S17 assuming that the power is restored, and if the backup flag is not saved, the power is turned on for the first time or irregular power restoration (steps S18 to step). The process is transferred to step S18 assuming that the power is restored from the power failure during execution of S35).

In step S17, the main CPU 110a calculates a checksum (abnormality determination data) of the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c, and clears the backup flag saved in the game RWM area.

The main CPU 110a determines in step S18 whether or not there has been a setting change operation. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the setting key switch 58d and the RWM (RAM) clear switch 58c are in the ON state. If there is a setting change operation, the process is transferred to step S19 as a transition to the setting change mode, and if there is no setting change operation, the process is transferred to step S20.

The main CPU 110a performs a setting change process (game program) in step S19. Specifically, based on the operation of the RWM (RAM) clear switch 58c, a process for changing (updating) the set value (probability of being determined as a jackpot in the jackpot determination) at the stage of the advantage of the game is performed. conduct. The details of the setting change process will be described later. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to step S24.

In step S20, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the checksum is normal. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the checksum saved in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c and the checksum calculated in step S17 match. If the checksum is normal (the data in the RWM area is normal), the process is transferred to step S21, and if the checksum is not normal (the data in the RWM area is abnormal), the process is performed in step S22. To move.

If the backup flag is not saved, it is determined that the checksum is abnormal, assuming that the power is turned on for the first time or the above-mentioned irregular power recovery, and the process is performed in step S22. Will be transferred.

In step S21, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the set value in the set value (during game) area is within an appropriate range (here, 1 to 4). When it is determined that the set value in the set value (during game) area is within the appropriate range, the process is transferred to step S23, and when it is determined that the set value in the set value (during game) area is not in the appropriate range. , The process is transferred to step S22.

The "set value (during game) area" is an area in which the set value is saved when the setting change mode is not set, and is an area in which the fixed set value is saved. The set value range in the set value (during game) area is "1 to 4", and is a value "+1" to the set value in the set value (changing) area.
The "setting value (changing) area" is an area in which the setting value being set is temporarily saved in the setting change mode. The set value range in the set value (changing) area is 0 to 3, which is -1 from the set value in the set value (during game) area. The term "set value area" means "set value (during game) area" and "set value (changing) area".

In step S22, the main CPU 110a performs non-recoverable error processing (game program). Specifically, after displaying error information "E" indicating an unrecoverable error on the information display 113 and transmitting an unrecoverable error designation command indicating that an unrecoverable error has occurred on the effect control board 130. , Prohibits timer interruption After setting interrupt prohibition and clearing the output port, an unrecoverable error signal (security signal) indicating the occurrence of an unrecoverable error is output from the security signal terminal of the game information output terminal board 90. Then, the process of waiting until the power supply is completely cut off is performed. As a result, the staging control board 130 is to perform processing for executing the non-recoverable error notification indicating that the non-recoverable error has occurred.

The "unrecoverable error" is an error state in which the game is not controlled (it does not shift to the game control), and is not cleared unless the setting change process is executed. Therefore, when an unrecoverable error occurs, even if the power switch provided on the power supply board 160 is turned off and then turned on without the setting change operation, the power switch is not canceled and the setting is made. The power switch must be turned on with the change operation. It should be noted that during an unrecoverable error, the presence or absence of signal input from various input devices (various switches, various sensors) is not monitored at all.

"Unrecoverable error notification" is an unrecoverable error screen ("Unrecoverable error. Please change the settings") to make the image display device 16 recognize that an unrecoverable error has occurred. It is not possible to return the image, indicate that the frame lighting device 27 or the panel lighting device 23 is fully lit with a predetermined emission color (for example, red) until the power is turned off, or that an unrecoverable error has occurred from the audio output device 9. Possible error sound ("Unrecoverable error" + buzzer sound) is output until the power is turned off.

The main CPU 110a determines in step S23 whether or not the RWM clear operation has been performed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the RWM (RAM) clear switch 58c is in the ON state. If there is an RWM clear operation, the process is transferred to step S24 as if the RWM clear operation is performed, and if there is no RWM clear operation, the process is transferred to step S27.

The main CPU 110a performs an RWM clearing process (game program) in step S24. Specifically, based on the operation of the RWM (RAM) clear switch 58c, a process for initializing the control state of the game (initializing the area other than the set value area of the RWM area for the game) is performed. The details of the RWM clear process will be described later.

In step S25, the main CPU 110a performs a drive source initial operation process (game program). Specifically, various drive sources (second start opening opening / closing solenoid 11d, large winning opening opening / closing solenoid 13d) provided on the board unit and operated by the main control board 110 according to the progress of the game are set for a predetermined period. The process for initial operation is performed over the entire period. The details of the initial operation of various drive sources will be described later.

In step S26, the main CPU 110a issues a power-on designation command indicating that the control state of the game has been initialized and the current game state (here, a non-time-saving game state as a normal game state). It is transmitted to the substrate 130 and the process is transferred to step S33. As a result, the effect control board 130 performs a process for executing the power-on notification indicating that the control state of the game has been initialized.

The "power-on notification" is to display an initial screen (background image and initial effect symbol "135") at the time of power-on for the image display device 16 to recognize that the control state of the game has been initialized. The frame lighting device 27 and the panel lighting device 23 are all lit with a predetermined emission color (for example, white) for a predetermined period (for example, 60 seconds), and the RWM area is initialized from the audio output device 9. The indicated power-on notification sound (“RWM has been cleared” + buzzer sound) is output for a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds). In the power-on notification, instead of displaying the initial screen on the image display devices 16 and 18, the image display devices 16 and 18 may be displayed to notify that the RWM area has been cleared.

The main CPU 110a determines in step S27 whether or not the setting confirmation operation has been performed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the setting key switch 58d is in the ON state. If there is a setting confirmation operation, the process is transferred to step S28 as a transition to the setting confirmation mode, and if there is no setting confirmation operation, the control state of the game is returned to the state before the power was turned off. The process is transferred to step S30.

The main CPU 110a performs a setting confirmation process (game program) in step S28. Specifically, a process is performed to display the set value saved in the set value (during game) area of the game RWM area on the information display 113. The details of the setting confirmation process will be described later.

In step S29, the main CPU 110a performs a drive source initial operation process (game program). Specifically, processing is performed to initially operate the various drive sources (second start opening opening / closing solenoid 11d, large winning opening opening / closing solenoid 13d) described above for a predetermined period. The details of the initial operation of various drive sources will be described later.

In step S30, the main CPU 110a sets the RWM area at the time of power restoration, such as clearing (clearing 0) the checksum saved in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the progress state (control state) of the game is restored (recovered) to the state before the power was turned off, so that the game can be restarted from the state before the power was turned off.

In step S31, the main CPU 110a transmits a power restoration designation command indicating that the control state of the game has been restored and the game state before the occurrence of a power failure to the effect control board 130. As a result, the effect control board 130 is to perform a process for executing the power recovery notification indicating that the control state of the game has returned to the state before the power was cut off by ending the setting confirmation notification and the like.

"Power recovery notification" is to display the power recovery screen for a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds) in order to make the image display device recognize that the control state of the game has returned to the state before the power was cut off, or for a frame. It indicates that the lighting device 27 and the panel lighting device 23 are all lit with a predetermined emission color (for example, white) for a predetermined period (for example, 60 seconds), or the power supply is restored from the audio output device 9 (from a power failure). The power restoration notification sound (buzzer sound) is output for a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds).

In step S32, the main CPU 110a transmits other commands (special symbol storage designation command, ordinary symbol storage designation command, etc., which will be described later) to the effect control board 130. As a result, the effect control board 130 can grasp the number of reserved special figures, and the image display device 16 is subjected to a process for displaying a variable image or a reserved image, which will be described later.

In step S33, the main CPU 110a transmits a set value designation command to the effect control board 130. This makes it possible for the staging control board 130 to grasp the current set value. The setting value designation command may be transmitted to the staging control board 130 before the power-on designation command or the power recovery designation command is transmitted. Further, the setting value designation command may be transmitted at each start of the variable display of the special symbol, or may be transmitted at each start of the jackpot game.

The main CPU 110a activates a CTC (counter timer circuit) for generating a timer interrupt (4 milliseconds) in step S34, and permits all interrupts in step S35 to control the progress of the game (main control). The timer interrupt of the board 110) is started, and the initial setting process of this time is completed.

That is, from the time the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned on until the initial setting process is completed, the state is before the start before the game progress control is started, and after the initial setting process is completed, the game progress control is performed. It will be ready for the game to be played.

As described above, since a plurality of conditions (operations) are set for the setting change operation, the RWM clear operation, and the setting confirmation operation, it is not possible to easily change the setting, clear the RWM, or confirm the setting. , It is possible to suppress fraudulent activities and improve the security of gaming machines.

In addition, the number of conditions (operations) set for the setting change operation is larger than the conditions (operations) set for the RWM clear operation and setting confirmation operation, which is the most illegal setting change. It is possible to increase the security of events in which acts are likely to occur, and it is possible to effectively prevent fraudulent acts.

In addition, if the checksum is abnormal (including the case where the backup flag is not saved), the non-recoverable error processing is executed to stop the progress of the game, so that the gaming machine operates unexpectedly. It is possible to improve the reliability of the gaming machine without causing trouble to the gaming store and the player.

Also, if the value in the set value (during game) area is not in the proper range, that is, if the previous power failure may have occurred during the setting change, an unrecoverable error occurs even if the checksum is normal. By executing the process and stopping the progress of the game, the game does not proceed in the state where the setting value not intended by the game store is set, and the reliability of the game machine is improved. It becomes possible.

Further, while the setting is being changed (during the setting change mode) or the setting is being confirmed (during the setting confirmation mode), the state confirmation display 19k, the image display devices 16 and 18, and the frame lighting device are displayed on the front surface (front surface) of the gaming machine 1. It is possible to recognize that the setting is being changed by checking 27 and the panel lighting device 23, and it is possible to recognize that the setting is being changed by checking the information display 113 on the back surface (back surface). ing. That is, it is possible to grasp whether or not the setting is being changed from either the front surface (front surface) or the back surface (back surface) of the gaming machine 1.

The setting change operation, the RWM clear operation, and the setting confirmation operation may include, as a condition, that the opening detection switch 31a for detecting the opening (opening / closing) of the opening / closing door 3 is in the ON state. The opening detection switch 31a is provided on the opening / closing frame 2B, for example. By doing so, since the conditions are increased, fraudulent activities can be suppressed, and the security of the gaming machine can be further improved.

If the checksum is determined to be abnormal in step S20, the unrecoverable error processing is executed. However, when the checksum is determined to be abnormal, the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c is set. The initial value "1" may be saved in the value area, and the process may be transferred to step S24.

In addition, the power-on designation command and power recovery designation command are sent including information indicating the current game status, but after the power-on designation command and power recovery designation command are sent, the current game status is sent. You may send a game state specification command indicating.

Further, by not determining the presence / absence of the setting changing flag, the unrecoverable error processing may not be performed even if the previous power failure occurs during the setting change.

Further, when the power is turned off or when the power is turned on, the checksum of the game RWM area (excluding the set value area) is calculated, but the checksum of the entire RWM area is calculated. Alternatively, the checksum of the game RWM area and the checksum of the information RWM area may be calculated separately, and if one of the checksums is abnormal, the checksum may be shifted to the unrecoverable error processing. ..

(Main control board setting change processing)
A setting change process (game program) of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 78. FIG. 78 is a flowchart showing a setting change process of the main control board 110.

First, the main CPU 110a performs output processing of the setting changing signal (security signal) in step S19-1. Specifically, the security signal terminal of the game information output terminal board 90 starts to output a setting changing signal (security signal) indicating that the setting is being changed. The setting changing signal (security signal) continues to be output while the setting is being changed, and even after the setting change is completed, the output is continued for 200 ms and then the output is terminated.

In step S19-2, a status confirmation display indicating that the setting is being changed is displayed on the status confirmation display 19k. Specifically, one LED of the status confirmation display 19k is turned on. This makes it possible for the game clerk to know that the setting is being changed by checking the status confirmation display 19k.

In step S19-3, the main CPU 110a transmits a setting change designation command to the effect control board 130. As a result, the staging control board 130 is to perform a process for executing the setting change notification for notifying that the setting value is being changed.

"Setting change notification" means that the image display devices 16 and 18 are displayed on the setting changing screen indicating that the setting value is being changed, or the frame lighting device 27 or the panel lighting device 23 is being changed. All of them are turned on with a predetermined emission color (for example, white emission). The voice output device 9 may output a setting change notification sound (“setting is being changed”) indicating that the setting is being changed. This makes it possible for the game clerk to know that the settings are being changed by checking the image display devices 16 and 18, the frame lighting device 27, the board lighting device 23, and the audio output device 9.

In step S19-4, the main CPU 110a decrements the set value in the set value (during game) area by -1 and saves it in the set value (changing) area, and in step S19-5, the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c. Initialize (clear 0) the set value (during game) area.

In step S19-6, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the set value in the set value (changing) area is within an appropriate range (here, 0 to 3). If it is determined that the set value in the set value (changing) area is within the appropriate range, the process is transferred to step S19-8, and it is determined that the set value in the set value (changing) area is not in the appropriate range. If so, the process is transferred to step S19-7.

When it is determined in step S19-6 that the set value in the set value (changing) area is not within the appropriate range, the main CPU 110a sets the initial value "to the set value in the set value (changing) area" in step S19-7. Set "0".

In step S19-8, the main CPU 110a displays the current set value on the information display 113. Specifically, the value obtained by adding +1 (here, 1 to 4) is displayed on one 7-segment LED of the information display 113 with reference to the set value in the set value (changing) area. As a result, the game clerk can grasp the set value before the change by checking the information display 113.

The main CPU 110a determines in step S19-9 whether or not the set value update operation has been performed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the RWM (RAM) clear switch 58c has changed from the OFF state to the ON state. If there is a set value update operation, the process is transferred to step S19-10, and if there is no set value update operation, the process is transferred to step S19-13.

The main CPU 110a updates the set value in the set value (changing) area by +1 in step S19-10, and performs the set value correction process in step S19-11. Specifically, when the updated set value is "4" that exceeds the appropriate range (here, 0 to 3), the process of correcting the set value to "0" is performed.

In step S19-12, the main CPU 110a displays the current set value on the information display 113. Specifically, the value obtained by adding +1 (here, 1 to 4) is displayed on one 7-segment LED of the information display 113 with reference to the set value in the set value (changing) area. As a result, the game clerk can grasp the set value before confirmation by checking the information display 113.

The main CPU 110a determines in step S19-13 whether or not the set value determination operation has been performed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the setting key switch 58d has changed from the ON state to the OFF state. If there is a setting value confirmation operation, the process is transferred to step S19-14 assuming that the setting value has been confirmed (the setting change mode is terminated), and if there is no setting value confirmation operation, the setting value is updated. The process is transferred to step S19-9 as it may be performed.

In step S19-14, the main CPU 110a sets the set value in the set value (changing) area to "+1" and saves it in the set value (during game) area, and in step S19-15, the set value (changing) area. Initialize (clear 0) the set value of.

In step S19-16, the main CPU 110a ends the display of the set value on the information display 113, ends the display of the status confirmation display 19k in step S19-17, and ends the current setting change process.

In this way, even if the set value is not within the appropriate range, the initial value is set as the set value, so that an indefinite value is set as the set value and the gaming machine is unexpected. It is possible to improve the reliability of the gaming machine by eliminating the inconvenience to the gaming store and the player by performing the operation.

In addition, while the setting is being changed (during the setting change mode), the game clerk is on the front surface (front surface) of the game machine 1 with a status confirmation display 19k, image display devices 16 and 18, frame lighting device 27, and board lighting device. By checking 23, it is possible to recognize that the setting is being changed, and on the back surface (back surface), it is possible to recognize that the setting is being changed by checking the information display 113. That is, it is possible to grasp whether or not the setting is being changed from either the front surface (front surface) or the back surface (back surface) of the gaming machine 1.

In addition, although the setting value confirmation operation was set to change the setting key switch 58d from the ON state to the OFF state, the RWM (RAM) clear switch 58c may be changed from the OFF state to the ON state, or it may be dedicated. The switch may be changed from the OFF state to the ON state, or the signal from the touch sensor 7a may be input to the main control board 110 so that the touch sensor 7a is changed from the OFF state to the ON state. Alternatively, the detection switch (for example, the general winning opening detection switch 14a, etc.) provided in the specific winning opening (including the starting opening) may be changed from the OFF state to the ON state, or the open detection switch 31a may be used. It may be changed from the OFF state to the ON state.

In addition, the setting change specification command is sent at the start of the setting change processing, and the power-on specification command is sent after the setting change processing is completed. However, the setting change start specification command is sent instead of the setting change specification command. Then, instead of the power-on specification command, the setting change end specification command may be sent. In this case, the setting change end specification command may be sent at the end of the setting change process, or may be sent after the setting change process is completed.

(RWM clear processing of main control board)
The RWM clearing process (game program) of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 79. FIG. 79 is a flowchart showing the RWM clearing process of the main control board 110.

First, in step S24-1, the main CPU 110a initializes (clears 0) other than the set value area of the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the progress state of the game is initialized to the initial state (the state at the time of shipment of the game machine 1), and the data (other than the set value) of the game RWM area before clearing the RWM is not inherited. Become.

In step S24-2, the main CPU 110a performs output processing of the RWM clear signal (security signal). Specifically, a process for outputting an RWM clear signal (security signal) indicating that the RWM clear has been performed is performed from the security signal terminal of the game information output terminal board 90. If another security signal is output from the security signal terminal, the output of the RWM clear signal (security signal) is started after the output period of the output security signal ends.

In step S24-3, the main CPU 110a transmits the RWM clear designation command to the staging control board 130, and ends the current RWM clear process.

The RWM clear designation command is sent at the start of the RWM clear processing, and the power-on designation command is sent after the RWM clear processing is completed. However, the RWM clear start designation command is sent instead of the RWM clear designation command. Then, instead of the power-on designation command, the RWM clear end designation command may be transmitted. In this case, the RWM clear end designation command may be transmitted at the end of the RWM clear process, or may be transmitted after the end of the RWM clear process.

(Main control board setting confirmation process)
The setting confirmation process (game program) of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 80. FIG. 80 is a flowchart showing a setting confirmation process of the main control board 110.

First, the main CPU 110a performs output processing of the setting confirmation signal (security signal) in step S28-1. Specifically, the output of the setting confirmation signal (security signal) indicating that the setting is being confirmed is started from the security signal terminal of the game information output terminal board 90. The setting confirmation signal (security signal) continues to be output during the setting confirmation, and even after the setting confirmation is completed, the output is continued for 200 ms and then the output is terminated.

In step S28-2, the main CPU 110a displays a status confirmation display indicating that the setting is being changed on the status confirmation display 19k. Specifically, one LED of the status confirmation display 19k is turned on. This makes it possible for the game clerk to know that the setting is being confirmed by checking the status confirmation display 19k.

In step S28-3, the main CPU 110a transmits a setting confirmation designation command to the staging control board 130. As a result, the process for executing the setting confirmation notification for notifying that the setting confirmation is being performed by the effect control board 130 is performed.

The "setting confirmation notification" means that the image display devices 16 and 18 are displayed on the setting confirmation screen indicating that the setting is being confirmed, and the frame lighting device 27 and the panel lighting device 23 are being confirmed. It is to turn on all lights with a predetermined emission color (for example, white). The voice output device 9 may output a setting confirmation notification sound (“setting value is being confirmed”) indicating that the setting is being confirmed. This makes it possible for the game clerk to confirm that the settings are being confirmed by checking the image display devices 16 and 18, the frame lighting device 27, the board lighting device 23, and the audio output device 9.

In step S28-4, the main CPU 110a displays the current set value on the information display 113. Specifically, with reference to the set value in the set value (during game) area, a number (here, 1 to 4) indicating the set value is displayed on one 7-segment LED of the information display 113. As a result, the game clerk can grasp the current set value by checking the information display 113.

The main CPU 110a determines in step S28-5 whether or not the confirmation end operation has been performed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the setting key switch 58d has changed from the ON state to the OFF state. If there is a confirmation end operation, the process is transferred to step S28-6, and if there is no confirmation end operation, the process of step S28-5 is repeated.

In step S28-6, the main CPU 110a ends the display of the set value on the information display 113, ends the display of the status confirmation display 19k in step S28-7, and ends the current setting change process.

The setting confirmation specification command is sent at the start of the setting confirmation process, and the power recovery specification command is sent after the setting confirmation process is completed. However, the setting confirmation start specification command is sent instead of the setting confirmation specification command. Then, instead of the power-on specification command, the setting confirmation end specification command may be sent. In this case, the setting confirmation end specification command may be sent at the end of the setting confirmation process, or may be sent after the setting confirmation process is completed.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the setting changing signal, the RWM clear signal, the setting confirmation signal, and the unrecoverable error signal are output from the same security signal terminal. By doing so, it is possible to output many types of signals even with a limited number of signal terminals, and it is possible to improve the convenience of the gaming machine.

Further, from the start of power supply to the game ready state in which the game progress control (timer interruption of the main control board 110) is performed (in the state before the start), the RWM (RAM) clear switch 58c and the setting key switch 58d Signal input from input devices other than (out ball detection switch 58e, general winning opening detection switch 14a, gate detection switch 12a, first starting opening detection switch 10a, second starting opening detection switch 11c, large winning opening detection switch 13c) It is designed not to monitor the presence or absence of.

That is, in the pre-start state before the progress control of the game is started, even if the game ball wins in various winning openings (including the starting opening), the winning is invalid and the gaming ball is not paid out. It has become like. Further, even if a game ball wins a prize in the first starting opening 10 or the second starting opening 11a, the winning becomes invalid and the first special symbol holding first display 19d or the second special symbol holding first display 19e The change display of the special symbol is not performed in, and the big hit game and the small hit game are not executed. Further, even if the game ball passes through the normal symbol gate 12, the passage is invalid and the normal symbol variation display is not performed on the normal symbol first display 19f, so that the auxiliary game is not executed. .. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load by avoiding unnecessary processing in a situation where it is difficult to assume that the game will be performed by the player before the progress control of the game is started.

Further, in the pre-start state before the progress control of the game is started, even if various errors occur, the error notification is not performed. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load by avoiding unnecessary processing in a situation where it is difficult to assume that fraudulent acts will be performed before the progress control of the game is started.

The setting changing signal, the RWM clear signal, the setting confirmation signal, and the unrecoverable error signal may be output from different output terminals instead of being output from the common security signal terminal.

(Performance display data setting processing of the main control board)
The performance display data setting process (game program) of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 81. FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing the performance display data setting process on the main control board 110.

First, in step S850-1, the main CPU 110a displays a display switching time counter saved in the information RWM area of the main RAM 110c in order to determine whether or not to switch the performance information displayed on the information display 113. It is determined whether or not the switching value is "0". If the display switching value is "0", the process is transferred to step 850-2 assuming that the performance information (normal base value) displayed on the information display 113 is switched, and if the display switching value is not "0", the process is performed. , The process is transferred to step S850-6 assuming that the performance information displayed on the information display 113 is not switched. When this process is first executed after the power is turned on to the gaming machine 1, the value of the display switching time counter is "0", which is the display switching value.

In step S850-2, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the lighting confirmation flag for determining whether or not the lighting confirmation of the information display 113 has been completed is saved in the information RWM area. If the lighting confirmed flag is saved, the process is transferred to step S850-4 assuming that the normal base value is displayed on the information display 113, and if the lighting confirmed flag is not saved, the information is displayed. The process is transferred to step S850-3 to confirm the lighting of the device 113. When this process is executed for the first time after the power is turned on to the gaming machine 1, the lighting confirmed flag is not saved.

In step 850-3, the main CPU 110a displays for lighting confirmation for lighting all segments (including decimal points) of the four 7-segment displays (113a to 113d) constituting the information display 113. Determine the data.

In step S850-4, the main CPU 110a acquires a normal base value (for display on the information display 113) according to the data selection counter value from the base storage area provided in the information RWM area of the main RAM 110c. Specifically, if the data selection counter value is "0", the normal base value saved in the first area of the base storage area is acquired, and if the data selection counter value is "1", the base storage is performed. The normal base value saved in the second area of the area is acquired, and if the data selection counter value is "2", the normal base value saved in the third area of the base storage area is acquired and the data is selected. If the counter value is "3", the normal base value saved in the fourth area of the base storage area is acquired.

In step S850-5, the main CPU 110a displays information based on the interval counter value, the number of normal medium outs indicated by the normal medium out number counter, and the acquired normal base value with reference to a display data determination table (not shown). The display data of the normal base value to be displayed on the device 113 is determined.

The main CPU 110a sets the determined display data in step S850-6 in the output data area of the information RWM area as the display information of the information display 113. As a result, the display data set in the output data area of the information RWM area is referred to in the output control process of step S880 described above, and the normal base value (performance information) corresponding to the display data is displayed on the information display 113. Will be done. The display information of the information display 113 in each game section will be described later.

In step S850-7, the main CPU 110a adds "1" to the display switching time counter described above, and in step S850-8, determines whether or not the display switching time counter is larger than the upper limit value (for example, 5 seconds). do. If it is not larger than the upper limit value, it is assumed that the time for switching the display of the information display 113 has not elapsed, and the process is transferred to step S850-15. If it is larger than the upper limit value, the information display 113 is displayed. Assuming that the time for switching the displayed performance information has elapsed, the display switching time counter is cleared (initialized) to 0 in step S850-9.

In step S850-10, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the above-mentioned lighting confirmed flag is present in the information RWM area of the main RAM 110c. If there is a lighting confirmed flag, the process is transferred to step S850-12, and if there is no lighting confirmed flag, the lighting confirmed flag is saved in the information RWM area of the main RAM 110c in step S850-11. ..

In step S850-12, the main CPU 110a adds 1 to the above-mentioned data selection counter, and in step S85-13, determines whether or not the data selection counter is larger than the upper limit value (for example, 3). If it is not larger than the upper limit value, the process is transferred to step S850-15, and if it is larger than the upper limit value, the data selection counter is cleared (initialized) to 0 in step S850-14.

In step S850-15, the main CPU 110a restores the register saved in the information RWM area of the main RAM 110c by the above-mentioned game ball counting process, and in step S850-16, the main RAM 110c is used for the information of the main RAM 110c by the above-mentioned game ball counting process. The game stack pointer saved in the RWM area is returned, and the performance display data setting process this time is terminated.

In this way, after the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and before the performance information (normal base value) is displayed, all the segments of the four 7-segment displays of the information display 113 are lit (lighting confirmation is performed). Therefore, it is possible to confirm whether the information display 113 is out of order, which segment is out of order, and the like.

In addition, every time the display switching time (5 seconds) elapses, the performance information (normal base value) of the four game sections consisting of the current game section and the past three game sections is displayed in order, so that the latest 4 is displayed. Performance information (usually base value) in one game section can be compared, and it is possible to confirm the actual performance of the game machine and grasp the possibility of fraudulent activity.

(Display information of information display in each game section)
Next, the display information of the information display 113 in each game section will be described with reference to FIG. 82. In the table of display information of FIG. 82, the section counter value (type of the game section), the number of normal outs, the data selection counter value, and the display content of the information display 113 are associated with each other.

The identification information displayed on the identification segment of the information display 113 is "bL.", Which indicates that it is the normal base value of the current game section, and "bL.", Which indicates that it is the normal base value of the previous game section. There are "b1.", "B2.", Which indicates that it is the normal base value of the game section two times before, and "b3.", Which indicates that it is the normal base value of the game section three times before.

The numerical information displayed in the numerical value segment of the information display 113 is "---" indicating that there is no calculated normal base value, the normal base value is "0", or the number of normal outs is "0". "00" indicating that, "01" to "99" indicating that the number of normal outs is "1" or more and the normal base value is "1" to "99", and the normal base value are There is "99." indicating that it is "100" or more. Normally, when the base value is less than "10", the tens digit of the numerical information is always "0" and displayed in two digits.

The display mode of the numerical information displayed in the numerical seg does not change (lights up) regardless of the game section or the number of outs during normal times, but the identification information displayed in the identification seg is the game section or The display mode changes (blinks or lights up) depending on the number of outs during normal times (whether or not there is a calculated normal base value or whether or not the calculated normal base value is credible).

Specifically, in the first to fourth game sections, when the identification information of the game section without the calculated normal base value is displayed, the identification information is displayed blinking. Further, in the game section after the second game section, when the identification information (“bL.”) Of the current game section is displayed, the calculated normal base value has a low credibility period (the number of outs during normal times is high). If it is 0 to 5999), the identification information will be displayed blinking. In other cases, the identification information is lit and displayed.

Here, to show an example of the display of the information display 113, the interval counter value is "1", the number of normal outs is in the range of 0 to 5999, and the data selection counter value is "0". When the normal base value stored in the first area of the base storage area is "35", "bL." Is blinking and displayed in the identification segment of the information display 113, and "35" is displayed in the numerical segment. Will be lit and displayed.

In this way, when the normal base value is "99" or less, the performance information "00" to "99" that does not use the decimal point DP of the 7-segment display is displayed in the numerical segment, while the normal base value is displayed. When the value is "100" or more, the performance information using the decimal point DP of the 7-segment display "99." is displayed in the numerical segment, so it is easy to grasp that it is an abnormal normal base value. ..

In addition, when the base value is usually less than "10", "0" is always displayed in the tens digit of the numerical segment and displayed in two digits (for example, "01"), so 2 as a numerical segment. It is possible to make an easy-to-understand display by effectively using the three 7-segment displays.

Further, when the normal base value of the current game section is displayed, and the number of normal outs in the current game section is 0 to 5999, which does not reach a sufficient quantity for calculating the normal base value. Since the identification information "bL." Displayed on the identification segment is blinking and displayed, it is easy to understand that the normally displayed base value is low credibility information.

In addition, if there is no calculated normal base value, a non-numerical "---" is displayed in the numerical segment, so the normal base value is calculated in the game section corresponding to the identification information displayed in the identification segment. It becomes easier to understand that it is not.

The game ball counting process, the normal base value calculation process, and the performance display data setting process are not executed as an information program, but one or two of them are executed as a game program (for example, a game ball). The counting process is executed in the input control process that monitors the presence or absence of signal input from various switches), while the rest may be executed as an information program.

Further, the process of outputting the display data for displaying the performance information on the information display 113 may be executed by the performance program instead of being executed by the output control process which is the game program.

Further, an out ball composed of a game ball that has won a prize in the general winning opening 14, the first starting opening 10, the second starting opening 11a, and the large winning opening 13a by the out ball detection switch 58e, and a game ball that has flowed into the out opening 28. However, only the game ball that has flowed into the out port 28 may be detected by the out ball detection switch 58e. In that case, the number of outs is each time the game ball is detected by the out ball detection switch 58e, the general winning opening detection switch 14a, the first starting opening detection switch 10a, the second starting opening detection switch 11c, and the large winning opening detection switch 13c. (Total number of outs, normal number of outs) should be added by 1.

(Specific example when various drive sources are initially operated after changing the settings)
A specific example of the case where various drive sources are initially operated after the setting is changed will be described with reference to FIG. 83. FIG. 83 is a diagram showing a timing chart and an example of the effect when various drive sources are initially operated after the setting is changed.
For convenience of explanation, the description given with reference to FIG. 83 will be described with a new reference numeral to each component. That is, in the constituent member described above and the constituent member described with reference to FIG. 83, different reference numerals may be attached to the same member, and the same reference numeral may be attached to different members. There is.

First, at the timing of T0, the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned off. At this time, a movable body (second) that affects the result of the game, such as changing whether or not the game ball enters the predetermined area (second starting port 11a, large winning opening 13a) (difficulty of entering the ball). Various drive sources (second starting port opening / closing solenoid 11d, large winning opening opening / closing solenoid 13d) for operating the opening / closing member 11b of the starting port 11a and the opening / closing member 13b of the large winning opening 13a are in a stopped state.

In addition, the large winning opening LED that causes the large winning opening (large winning opening 13a) to emit light in a predetermined manner during the round game is turned off, and the first game information display device 19 (first special symbol first display device) is turned off. 19a, 2nd special symbol 1st display 19b, normal symbol 1st display 19c, 1st special symbol hold 1st display 19d, 2nd special symbol hold 1st display 19e, normal symbol hold 1st display 19f , High probability game status display 19g, time saving game status display 19h, round number display 19i, right-handed first display 19j, status confirmation display 19k), image display device 16 and information display 113 are hidden ( It is in a state of non-operation, extinguishing, erasing).

At the timing of T1, when the setting change operation (setting key switch 58d is ON, RWM (RAM) clear switch 58c is ON) is performed when the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned on, the setting change mode is set on the main control board 110. It is in the pre-start state before it is started and the progress control of the game is started. At this time, a status confirmation display indicating that the setting is being changed is displayed on the status confirmation display 19k, and the above-mentioned setting change notification is started. Further, the current set value (here, "6") is displayed on the 7-segment display 113d at the right end of the information display 113.

When the set value confirmation operation (setting key switch 58d is OFF) is performed at the timing of T2, the setting change mode and the setting change notification are terminated, the initial operation of various drive sources is started, and the right end of the information display 113 is displayed. The set value displayed on the 7-segment display 113d is erased and hidden. At this time, the status confirmation display on the status confirmation display 19k ends, and the initial operation notification (display of the screen during initial operation, initial operation confirmation voice "Check the operation of the solenoid" to prompt the operation confirmation of various drive sources is completed. Please output) is started.

At the timing of T3, when the operation standby time (7 seconds in this case) elapses after the initial operation notification is started, the first operation of various drive sources (drive source = ON) is started, and at the timing of T4, various types are started. When the operation time of the drive source (here, 0.512 seconds) elapses, the operation of various drive sources is stopped (drive source = OFF).

At the timing of T5, when the stop time (0.512 seconds in this case) elapses after the operation of the various drive sources is stopped, the second operation of the various drive sources is started, and at the timing of T6, the various drive sources When the operating time (here, 0.512 seconds) elapses, the operation of various drive sources is stopped (drive source = OFF).

At the timing of T7, when the stop time (0.512 seconds in this case) elapses after the operation of the various drive sources is stopped, the third operation of the various drive sources is started, and at the timing of T8, the various drive sources When the operating time (here, 0.512 seconds) elapses, the operation of various drive sources is stopped (drive source = OFF).

At the timing of T9, when the stop time (0.512 seconds in this case) elapses after the operation of the various drive sources is stopped, the initial operation and the initial operation notification of the various drive sources are terminated, and the main control board 110 is before the start. The state shifts to a game-enabled state in which the progress of the game is controlled.

At this time, various displays (display of special symbol, display of normal symbol, display of number of special symbol hold, display of number of normal figure hold, etc.) on the first game information display device 19 are started, and the above-mentioned power is turned on. Notification is started. Further, the initial operation of the movable staging members 73a and 73b controlled by the staging control board 130 is started, and all the 7-segment displays 113a to 113d of the information display 113 are all lit to start the lighting confirmation. .. When the predetermined period elapses, the initial operation of the movable staging members 73a and 73b ends.

At the timing of T10, when the confirmation time (here, 5 seconds) elapses after the lighting confirmation of the information display 113 is started, all the lighting of the 7-segment displays 113a to 113d is completed and the performance information (here, the current one) is completed. The display of the normal base value of the game section) is started. After that, every time the display switching time (5 seconds) elapses, the performance information (normal base value) of the four game sections consisting of the current game section and the past three game sections is displayed in order.

(Specific example when various drive sources are initially operated after checking the settings)
A specific example of the case where various drive sources are initially operated after the setting is confirmed will be described with reference to FIG. 84. FIG. 84 is a diagram showing a timing chart and an example of the effect when various drive sources are initially operated after the setting is confirmed.
For convenience of explanation, the description given with reference to FIG. 84 will be described with a new reference numeral to each component. That is, in the constituent member described above and the constituent member described with reference to FIG. 84, different reference numerals may be attached to the same member, and the same reference numeral may be attached to different members. There is.

First, at the timing of T0, the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned off. At this time, a movable body (second) that affects the result of the game, such as changing whether or not the game ball enters the predetermined area (second starting port 11a, large winning opening 13a) (difficulty of entering the ball). Various drive sources (second starting port opening / closing solenoid 11d, large winning opening opening / closing solenoid 13d) for operating the opening / closing member 11b of the starting port 11a and the opening / closing member 13b of the large winning opening 13a are in a stopped state.

In addition, the large winning opening LED that causes the large winning opening (large winning opening 13a) to emit light in a predetermined manner during the round game is turned off, and the first game information display device 19 (first special symbol first display device) is turned off. 19a, 2nd special symbol 1st display 19b, normal symbol 1st display 19c, 1st special symbol hold 1st display 19d, 2nd special symbol hold 1st display 19e, normal symbol hold 1st display 19f , High probability game status display 19g, time saving game status display 19h, round number display 19i, right-handed first display 19j, status confirmation display 19k), image display device 16, and information display 113 are not. It is in the display (non-operation, off, erase) state.

At the timing of T1, when the setting confirmation operation (setting key switch 58d is ON) is performed when the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned on, the setting confirmation mode is started on the main control board 110 and the progress control of the game is started. It becomes the state before the start before the start. At this time, a status confirmation display indicating that the setting is being confirmed is displayed on the status confirmation display 19k, and the setting confirmation notification described above is started. Further, the current set value (here, "6") is displayed on the 7-segment display 113d at the right end of the information display 113.

When the confirmation end operation (setting key switch 58d is OFF) is performed at the timing of T2, the setting confirmation mode and the setting confirmation notification are terminated, the initial operation of various drive sources is started, and the 7 at the right end of the information display 113 is started. The set value displayed on the segment display 113d is erased and hidden. At this time, the status confirmation display on the status confirmation display 68 ends, and the initial operation notification (display of the screen during initial operation, initial operation confirmation voice "Check the operation of the solenoid" to prompt the operation confirmation of various drive sources is completed. Please output) is started.

The specific examples from the timing of T3 to the timing of T10 are the same as the specific examples from the timing of T3 to the timing of T10 in the specific example when various drive sources are initially operated after the setting change shown in FIG. Therefore, the description here is omitted.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, the movable body (opening / closing member 11b of the second starting port 11a, the large winning opening 13a) that affects the result of the game in the pre-start state before the progress control of the game is started. Since various drive sources (second start opening opening / closing solenoid 11d, large winning opening opening / closing solenoid 13d) for operating the opening / closing member 13b) are initially operated, the gaming machine 1 (game board 4 only, board surface) is initially operated. The drive source controlled by the main control means that controls the progress of the game at the time of shipment from the factory (including the case of only the unit) or at the time of replacement at the game store (including replacement of only the game board 4 and only the board unit). It is possible to easily check the operation.

Further, according to the present embodiment, when various drive sources for operating a movable body that affects the result of the game are initially operated (during the state before the start), the state confirmation display 19k is excluded. 1 Game information display device 19 (1st special symbol 1st display 19a, 2nd special symbol 1st display 19b, normal symbol 1st display 19c, 1st special symbol hold 1st display 19d, 2nd special symbol The hold 1st display 19e, the normal symbol hold 1st display 19f, the high-probability game state display 19g, the time-saving game state display 19h, the round number display 19i, and the right-handed 1st display 19j) are hidden (non-display). Since it is in the operating state, it is possible not to give an extra processing load to the main control board 110, and it is possible to concentrate on checking the operation of various drive sources.

Further, according to the present embodiment, when various drive sources for operating various drive sources that affect the result of the game are initially operated, the initial operation notification for prompting the operation confirmation of the various drive sources is performed. Therefore, it is possible to inform the operator (worker, game shop clerk) who checks the operation of the gaming machine 1 that it is time to check the operation of various drive sources, and to appropriately check the operation. It becomes possible.

Further, according to the present embodiment, even in the state before the start before the progress control of the game is started, the movable body that affects the result of the game is operated after the setting change mode (setting confirmation mode) is finished. Since the initial operation of various drive sources for operation is performed, it is not necessary to check the operation of various drive sources while changing the settings (setting confirmation), and the operation check should be performed appropriately. Is possible.

Further, according to the present embodiment, after the operation standby time has passed after the setting change mode (setting confirmation mode) is completed, the operation of various drive sources for operating the movable body that affects the result of the game is started. Therefore, it is possible to allow time from the completion of the setting change (setting confirmation) to the operation confirmation of various drive sources, and it is possible to appropriately perform the operation confirmation.

Further, according to the present embodiment, it does not matter whether the initial operation of various drive sources for operating the movable body that affects the result of the game is after the end of the setting change mode or after the end of the setting confirmation mode. However, since the same initial operation notification is performed, the control of the initial operation notification can be simplified, and the development cost of the gaming machine 1 can be reduced (development period shortened, etc.). It will be possible.

Further, according to the present embodiment, when various drive sources for operating the opening / closing member 13b of the large winning opening 13a are initially operated, the large winning opening LED is left off, so that the large winning opening LED is kept off. It is possible to avoid the inconvenience that it becomes difficult to confirm the operation of the opening / closing member 13b of the large winning opening 13a due to the light from the light, and it is possible to appropriately confirm the operation.

Further, according to the present embodiment, the progress control of the game is performed by performing the initial operation of various drive sources for operating the movable body that affects the result of the game in the state before the start before the progress control of the game is performed. Since the initial movements of the movable staging members 17A and 17B that do not affect the result of the game are performed in the playable state to be performed, two types of initial movements can be confirmed in order, and the operation confirmation is appropriate. It will be possible to do it.

Further, according to the present embodiment, when various drive sources for operating the opening / closing member 13b of the large winning opening 13a are initially operated, the opening signal is being opened even though the large winning opening 13a is open. Is not output, so that an extra processing load can be prevented from being given to the main control board 110, and an information collecting device such as a hall computer that collects information output from the gaming machine 1 is used for gaming. It is possible to avoid inconveniences such as collecting information that does not correspond to the progress of.

Further, according to the present embodiment, the performance information (normal base value) of the gaming machine is not displayed on the information display 113 until the progress control of the gaming machine is started from the power-on of the gaming machine (the display of the performance information is displayed). Since it is regulated), it is possible not to give an extra processing load to the main control board 110.

Further, according to the present embodiment, the performance information (normal base value) of the gaming machine 1 is displayed (display of the performance information is permitted) after the progress control of the game is started. It is possible to confirm whether or not the progress control of the game has been started, and it is possible to inform that the performance information is related to the game.

Further, according to the present embodiment, the performance information is not displayed on the 7-segment displays 113a to 113c other than the 7-segment display 113d on which the current setting value is displayed in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. As a result, the current set value can be appropriately notified, and the convenience of the game store can be ensured.

Further, according to the present embodiment, since the set value and the performance information of the gaming machine are not displayed on the information display 113 during the initial operation of the various drive sources, the initial operation of the various drive sources can be confirmed. On the other hand, it is possible to concentrate the consciousness of the employees of the amusement shop, and it is possible to accurately judge the failure of various drive sources.

In this embodiment, after the progress control of the game is started, all the 7-segment displays 113a to 113d of the information display 113 are turned on to confirm the lighting. After the setting confirmation mode, the lighting confirmation may not be performed.

(Operation comparison table)
Using FIG. 85, various operation timings (initial operation, jackpot game operation, auxiliary game operation in normal game state, time-saving game) of various drive sources (start opening opening / closing solenoid 11d, large winning opening opening / closing solenoid 13d) provided on the board unit are used. The movements in the auxiliary game movement) in the state are compared.

The number of times the second start port opening / closing solenoid 11d is driven is the same during the auxiliary game operation during the time-saving game state and during the initial operation. Therefore, it is possible to confirm at the time of the initial operation whether or not the second start port opening / closing solenoid 11d can perform the auxiliary game operation during the time-saving game state, and it is possible to improve the accuracy of the operation confirmation.

The one-time drive time of the second start port opening / closing solenoid 11d is longer in the initial operation than in the auxiliary game operation in the normal game state. Therefore, it is possible to confirm at the time of the initial operation whether or not the auxiliary game operation in the normal game state can be performed, and it is possible to improve the accuracy of the operation confirmation.

Further, the total drive time of the second start port opening / closing solenoid 11d is shorter in the initial operation than in the auxiliary game operation in the time-saving game state. Therefore, it is possible to shorten the confirmation time at the time of initial operation of the second starting port opening / closing solenoid 11d.

The total drive time of the second big winning opening opening / closing solenoid 13d (the big winning opening solenoid 13d) is shorter in the initial operation than in the big hit game operation. Therefore, it is possible to shorten the confirmation time at the time of initial operation of the second prize opening opening / closing solenoid 13d.

It should be noted that at least one of the number of drives of the second start port opening / closing solenoid 11d during the initial operation, one drive time, and the total drive time is the number of drives during the auxiliary game operation during the normal gaming state, and one drive time. , The value may be the same as or almost the same (similar) as the total drive time. By doing so, it is possible to confirm at the time of the initial operation whether or not the second start opening opening / closing solenoid 11d can perform the auxiliary game operation during the normal gaming state, and it is possible to improve the accuracy of the operation confirmation. Become.

Further, at least one of the number of times the second start port opening / closing solenoid 11d is driven during the initial operation, one drive time, and the total drive time is the number of drives during the auxiliary game operation during the normal gaming state, and one drive time. , The value may be smaller than the total drive time. By doing so, it is possible to shorten the confirmation time at the time of initial operation of the large winning opening opening / closing solenoid 13d.

Further, at least one of the number of drives of the second start port opening / closing solenoid 11d during the initial operation, one drive time, and the total drive time is set to the number of drives during the auxiliary game operation during the time-saving game state, and one drive time. , The value may be the same as or almost the same (similar) as the total drive time. By doing so, it is possible to confirm at the initial operation whether or not the second start port opening / closing solenoid 11d can perform the auxiliary game operation during the time-saving gaming state, and it is possible to improve the accuracy of the operation confirmation. Become.

Further, at least one of the number of drives of the second start port opening / closing solenoid 11d during the initial operation, one drive time, and the total drive time is set to the number of drives during the auxiliary game operation during the time-saving game state, and one drive time. , The value may be larger than the total drive time. By doing so, it is possible to confirm at the initial operation whether or not the second start port opening / closing solenoid 11d can perform the auxiliary game operation during the time-saving gaming state, and it is possible to improve the accuracy of the operation confirmation. Become.

Further, at least one of the number of drives of the second start port opening / closing solenoid 11d during the initial operation, one drive time, and the total drive time is set to the number of drives during the auxiliary game operation during the time-saving game state, and one drive time. , It may be a value smaller than the total drive time. By doing so, it is possible to shorten the confirmation time at the time of initial operation of the second starting port opening / closing solenoid 11d.

Further, at least one of the number of times the large winning opening opening / closing solenoid 13d is driven during the initial operation, one drive time, and the total drive time is set to one drive time and the total drive time during the jackpot game operation (4R or 10R). It may be the same value as or almost the same (similar) value as. By doing so, it is possible to confirm at the time of the initial operation whether or not the big winning opening opening / closing solenoid 13d can perform the big hit game operation, and it is possible to improve the accuracy of the operation confirmation.

Further, at least one of the number of times the large winning opening opening / closing solenoid 13d is driven during the initial operation, one drive time, and the total drive time is set as a value larger than the one drive time and the total drive time during the jackpot game operation. May be good. By doing so, it is possible to confirm at the time of the initial operation whether or not the big winning opening opening / closing solenoid 13d can perform the big hit game operation, and it is possible to improve the accuracy of the operation confirmation.

(First modification)
Hereinafter, a first modification of the initial operation of various drive sources will be specifically described with reference to FIGS. 86 to 93. In the first modification, the RWM clear process continues until the RWM (RAM) clear switch 58c is operated again, and the drive source initial operation process is performed during the setting change process, the setting confirmation process, and the RWM clear process. Since it differs from the first embodiment in that it is different from the first embodiment, only the difference from the first embodiment will be described here.

(Initial setting process of main control board)
The initial setting process (game program) of the main control board 110 in the first modification will be described with reference to FIG. 86. FIG. 86 is a flowchart showing an initial setting process of the main control board 110.
Here, the parts that match the initial setting process of the main control board of the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted, and only the periphery of the different parts will be described.

The main CPU 110a performs a setting change process (game program) in step S19. Specifically, based on the operation of the RWM (RAM) clear switch 58c, a process for changing (updating) a set value (probability of being determined as a jackpot in a jackpot determination) at the stage of the advantage of the game. Then, the drive source initial operation process (game program) described above is performed. The details of the setting change process will be described later. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to step S24.

The main CPU 110a performs an RWM clearing process (game program) in step S24. Specifically, a process for initializing the control state of the game (initializing a region other than the set value region of the RWM region for the game) based on the operation of the RWM (RAM) clear switch 58c, and the drive source described above. Initial operation processing (game program) is performed, and the processing is transferred to step S26. The details of the RWM clear process will be described later.

The main CPU 110a performs a setting confirmation process (game program) in step S28. Specifically, a process for displaying the set value saved in the set value (during game) area of the game RWM area on the information display 113, and the above-mentioned drive source initial operation process are performed. The details of the setting confirmation process will be described later. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to step S30.

(Main control board setting change processing)
A setting change process (game program) of the main control board 110 in the first modification will be described with reference to FIG. 87. FIG. 87 is a flowchart showing a setting change process of the main control board 110.
Here, the parts that match the setting change processing of the main control board 110 shown in FIG. 78 are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted, and only the periphery of the different parts will be described.

The main CPU 110a executes the drive source initial operation process (game program) in steps S19-12a. Specifically, various drive sources (second start opening opening / closing solenoid 11d, large winning opening opening / closing solenoid 13d) provided on the board unit and operated by the main control board 110 according to the progress of the game are set in the setting change mode. Performs processing for initial operation until is completed. The details of the initial operation of various drive sources in the setting change mode will be described later. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to step S19-13.

In steps S19-17a, the main CPU 110a performs a process for stopping the initial operation of various drive sources as the setting change mode ends due to the setting value confirmation operation, and ends the current setting change process.

(RWM clear processing of main control board)
The RWM clearing process (game program) of the main control board 110 in the first modification will be described with reference to FIG. 88. FIG. 88 is a flowchart showing the RWM clearing process of the main control board 110.

First, in step S24-1, the main CPU 110a transmits the RWM clear preparation designation command to the staging control board 130, and shifts to the RWM clear preparation mode. As a result, the staging control board is subjected to the process for performing the RWM clear preparation notification.

"RWM clear preparation notification" means to display a clear preparation screen for the image display device 16 to recognize that RWM clear preparation is in progress, or to "press the RWM clear switch again" from the voice output device 9. It is to output the notification voice over a predetermined period.

The main CPU 110a executes the drive source initial operation process (game program) in step S24-2. Specifically, various drive sources (second start opening opening / closing solenoid 11d, large winning opening opening / closing solenoid 13d) that are provided on the board unit and that the main control board 110 operates according to the progress of the game are prepared for RWM clearing. Performs processing for initial operation until the mode ends. The details of the initial operation of various drive sources in the RWM clear preparation mode will be described later.

The main CPU 110a determines in step S24-3 whether or not the RWM clear approval operation has been performed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the RWM (RAM) clear switch 58c is in the ON state. If there is an RWM clear approval operation, the process is moved to step S24-4 assuming that the RWM clear preparation mode is terminated and RWM clear is performed, and if there is no RWM clear approval operation, step S24-2 is performed. Move the process.

In step S24-4, the main CPU 110a initializes (clears 0) other than the set value area of the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the progress state of the game is initialized to the initial state (the state at the time of shipment of the game machine 1), and the data in the game RWM area before the RWM is cleared is not inherited.

The main CPU 110a performs output processing of the RWM clear signal (security signal) in step S24-5. Specifically, a process for outputting an RWM clear signal (security signal) indicating that the RWM clear has been performed is performed from the security signal terminal of the game information output terminal board 90.

In step S24-6, the main CPU 110a transmits a RWM clear designation command indicating that the control state of the game has been initialized to the payout control board 120 and the effect control board 130. As a result, the staging control board 130 is subjected to the process for terminating the above-mentioned RWM clear preparation notification.

In step S24-7, the main CPU 110a performs a process for stopping the initial operation of various drive sources as the RWM clear preparation mode ends due to the RWM clear approval operation, and ends the current RWM clear process.

(Main control board setting confirmation process)
The setting confirmation process (game program) of the main control board 110 in the first modification will be described with reference to FIG. 89. FIG. 89 is a flowchart showing a setting confirmation process of the main control board 110.
Here, the parts that match the setting confirmation process of the main control board shown in FIG. 87 are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted, and only the periphery of the different parts will be described.

In step S28-4a, the main CPU 110a executes the drive source initial operation process (game program). Specifically, various drive sources (second start opening opening / closing solenoid 11d, large winning opening opening / closing solenoid 13d) provided on the board unit and operated by the main control board 110 according to the progress of the game are set in the setting confirmation mode. Performs processing for initial operation until is completed. The details of the initial operation of various drive sources in the setting confirmation mode will be described later. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to step S28-5.

The main CPU 110a determines in step S28-5 whether or not the confirmation end operation has been performed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the setting key switch 58d has changed from the ON state to the OFF state. If there is a confirmation end operation, the process is transferred to step S28-6, and if there is no confirmation end operation, the process is transferred to step S28-4a.

In step S28-7a, the main CPU 110a performs a process for stopping the initial operation of various drive sources as the setting confirmation mode ends by the confirmation end operation, and ends the current setting confirmation process.

(Specific example when various drive sources are initially operated while changing settings)
A specific example of the initial operation of various drive sources during the setting change will be described with reference to FIG. 90. FIG. 90 is a diagram showing a timing chart and an example of effect when various drive sources are initially operated while the setting is changed.
For convenience of explanation, the description given with reference to FIG. 90 will be described with a new reference numeral to each component. That is, in the constituent member described above and the constituent member described with reference to FIG. 90, different reference numerals may be attached to the same member, and the same reference numeral may be attached to different members. There is.

First, at the timing of T0, the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned off. At this time, a movable body (second) that affects the result of the game, such as changing whether or not the game ball enters the predetermined area (second starting port 11a, large winning opening 13a) (difficulty of entering the ball). Various drive sources (second starting port opening / closing solenoid 11d, large winning opening opening / closing solenoid 13d) for operating the opening / closing member 11b of the starting port 11a and the opening / closing member 13b of the large winning opening 13a are in a stopped state.

In addition, the large winning opening LED that causes the large winning opening 13a to emit light in a predetermined manner during the round game is turned off, and the first game information display device 19 (first special symbol first display 19a, second special) is turned off. Symbol 1st display 19b, normal symbol 1st display 19c, 1st special symbol hold 1st display 19d, 2nd special symbol hold 1st display 19e, normal symbol hold 1st display 19f, high probability gaming state Display 19g, time saving game status display 19h, round number display 19i, right-handed first display 19j, status confirmation display 19k), image display device 16, and information display 113 are not displayed (non-operation, It is in the state of turning off and erasing).

At the timing of T1, when the setting change operation (setting key switch 58d is ON, RWM (RAM) clear switch 58c is ON) is performed when the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned on, the setting change mode is set on the main control board 110. It is in the pre-start state before it is started and the progress control of the game is started.

At this time, a status confirmation display indicating that the setting is being changed is displayed on the status confirmation display 19k, and operation (drive source = ON) is started as an initial operation of various drive sources. In addition, the setting change notification (display of the setting changing screen, setting changing voice "setting is being changed" and initial operation confirmation voice "solenoid operation" to prompt the operation confirmation of various drive sources and that the setting is being changed "Please check" (alternate output) is started. Further, the current set value (here, "6") is displayed on the 7-segment display 113d at the right end of the information display 113.

At the timing of T2, when the operation time of various drive sources (0.512 seconds in this case) elapses, the operation of various drive sources is stopped (drive source = OFF), and thereafter, various drives are performed from the timing of T3 to the timing of T10. The source is repeatedly activated and stopped.

At the timing of T10, if the set value confirmation operation (setting key switch 58d is OFF) is performed while the operating time of various drive sources started from the timing of T9 has not elapsed, the setting change mode and the setting change notification are sent. Upon termination, the operation of various drive sources is immediately stopped (drive source = OFF), the initial operation of various drive sources is terminated, and the set value is displayed on the 7-segment display 113d at the right end of the information display 113. finish. Then, the main control board 110 shifts from the pre-start state to the game-enabled state in which the progress control of the game is performed.

At this time, various displays (display of special symbol, display of normal symbol, display of number of special symbol hold, display of number of normal figure hold, etc.) on the first game information display device 19 are started, and the above-mentioned power is turned on. Notification is started. Further, the initial operation of the movable staging members 73a and 73b controlled by the staging control board 130 is started, and all the 7-segment displays 113a to 113d of the information display 113 are all lit to start the lighting confirmation. .. The initial operation of the movable staging members 73a and 73bC ends after a predetermined period of time has elapsed.

At the timing of T11, when the confirmation time (here, 5 seconds) elapses from the start of the lighting confirmation of the information display 113, all the lighting of the 7-segment displays 113a to 113d is completed and the performance information (here, the current one) is completed. The display of the normal base value of the game section) is started. After that, every time the display switching time (5 seconds) elapses, the performance information (normal base value) of the four game sections consisting of the current game section and the past three game sections is displayed in order.

(Specific example when various drive sources are initially operated during preparation for clearing RWM)
A specific example of the initial operation of various drive sources during the preparation for clearing RWM will be described with reference to FIG. 91. FIG. 91 is a diagram showing a timing chart and an example of staging when various drive sources are initially operated during preparation for clearing RWM.
For convenience of explanation, the description given with reference to FIG. 91 will be described with a new reference numeral to each component. That is, in the constituent member described above and the constituent member described with reference to FIG. 91, different reference numerals may be attached to the same member, and the same reference numeral may be attached to different members. There is.

First, at the timing of T0, the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned off. At this time, a movable body (second) that affects the result of the game, such as changing whether or not the game ball enters the predetermined area (second starting port 11a, large winning opening 13a) (difficulty of entering the ball). Various drive sources (second starting port opening / closing solenoid 11d, large winning opening opening / closing solenoid 13d) for operating the opening / closing member 11b of the starting port 11a and the opening / closing member 13b of the large winning opening 13a are in a stopped state.

Further, the large winning opening LED that causes the large winning opening 13a to emit light in a predetermined manner during the round game is turned off, and the first game information display device 19 (first special symbol first display 19a, second special) is turned off. Symbol 1st display 19b, normal symbol 1st display 19c, 1st special symbol hold 1st display 19d, 2nd special symbol hold 1st display 19e, normal symbol hold 1st display 19f, high probability gaming state Display 19g, time saving game status display 19h, round number display 19i, right-handed first display 19j, status confirmation display 19k), image display device 16, and information display 113 are not displayed (non-operation, It is in the state of turning off and erasing).

When the RWM clear operation (RWM (RAM) clear switch 58c is turned on) is performed when the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned on at the timing of T1, the RWM clear preparation mode is started on the main control board 110 and the game progresses. It becomes the state before the start before the control is started.

At this time, a status confirmation display indicating that the RWM clear is being prepared is displayed on the status confirmation display 19k, and operation (drive source = ON) is started as an initial operation of various drive sources. In addition, the RWM clear preparation is being prepared and the RWM clear preparation notification (display of the clear preparation screen, "Please press the RWM clear switch again" and "solenoid operation are confirmed" to prompt the operation confirmation of various drive sources. "Please do" (alternate output of initial operation confirmation voice) is started.

At the timing of T2, when the operation time (here, 0.512 seconds) elapses from the start of operation of various drive sources, the operation of various drive sources is stopped (drive source = OFF), and thereafter, the timing of T3 to the timing of T10. The operation and stop of various drive sources are repeated until.

At the timing of T10, when the RWM clear approval operation (RWM (RAM) clear switch 58c is ON) is performed while the operating time of various drive sources started from the timing of T9 has not elapsed, the RWM clear preparation mode and the RWM clear preparation mode and As soon as the RWM clear preparation notification ends, the operation of various drive sources stops (drive source = OFF), the initial operation of various drive sources ends, and the main control board 110 controls the progress of the game from the state before the start. It shifts to the playable state to be performed.

At this time, various displays (display of special symbol, display of normal symbol, display of number of special figure hold, display of number of hold of normal figure, etc.) on the first game information display device 19 are started, and the above-mentioned power supply is supplied. The input notification is started. Further, the initial operation of the movable staging members 17A and 17B controlled by the staging control board 130 is started, and all the 7-segment displays 113a to 113d are all lit on the information display 113 to start the lighting confirmation. .. The initial operation of the movable staging members 73a and 73b ends after a predetermined period of time has elapsed.

At the timing of T11, when the confirmation time (here, 5 seconds) elapses from the start of the lighting confirmation of the information display 113, all the lighting of the 7-segment displays 113a to 113d is completed and the performance information (here, the current one) is completed. The display of the normal base value of the game section) is started. After that, every time the display switching time (5 seconds) elapses, the performance information (normal base value) of the four game sections consisting of the current game section and the past three game sections is displayed in order.

(Specific example when various drive sources are initially operated during setting confirmation)
A specific example of the initial operation of various drive sources during the setting confirmation will be described with reference to FIG. 92. FIG. 92 is a diagram showing a timing chart and an example of the effect when various drive sources are initially operated during setting confirmation.
For convenience of explanation, the description given with reference to FIG. 92 will be described with a new reference numeral to each component. That is, in the constituent member described above and the constituent member described with reference to FIG. 92, different reference numerals may be attached to the same member, and the same reference numeral may be attached to different members. There is.

First, at the timing of T0, the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned off. At this time, a movable body (second) that affects the result of the game, such as changing whether or not the game ball enters the predetermined area (second starting port 11a, large winning opening 13a) (difficulty of entering the ball). Various drive sources (second starting port opening / closing solenoid 11d, large winning opening opening / closing solenoid 13d) for operating the opening / closing member 11b of the starting port 11a and the opening / closing member 13b of the large winning opening 13a are in a stopped state.

Further, the large winning opening LED that causes the large winning opening 13a to emit light in a predetermined manner during the round game is turned off, and the first game information display device 19 (first special symbol first display 19a, second special) is turned off. Symbol 1st display 19b, normal symbol 1st display 19c, 1st special symbol hold 1st display 19d, 2nd special symbol hold 1st display 19e, normal symbol hold 1st display 19f, high probability gaming state Display 19g, time saving game status display 19h, round number display 19i, right-handed first display 19j, status confirmation display 19k), image display device 16, and information display 113 are not displayed (non-operation, It is in the state of turning off and erasing).

At the timing of T1, when the setting confirmation operation (setting key switch 58d is ON) is performed when the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned on, the setting confirmation mode is started on the main control board 110 and the progress control of the game is started. It becomes the state before the start before the start.

At this time, a status confirmation display indicating that the setting is being confirmed is displayed on the status confirmation display 19k, and operation (drive source = ON) is started as an initial operation of various drive sources. In addition, the setting confirmation notification (display of the setting confirmation screen, setting confirmation voice "setting is being confirmed" and initial operation confirmation voice "solenoid operation" to prompt the operation confirmation of various drive sources and that the setting is being confirmed "Please check" (alternate output) is started. Further, the current set value (here, "6") is displayed on the 7-segment display 113d at the right end of the information display 113.

At the timing of T2, when the operation time (here, 0.512 seconds) elapses from the start of operation of various drive sources, the operation of various drive sources is stopped (drive source = OFF), and thereafter, the timing of T3 to the timing of T10. The operation and stop of various drive sources are repeated until.

At the timing of T10, if the confirmation end operation (setting key switch 58d is OFF) is performed while the operating time of various drive sources started from the timing of T9 has not elapsed, the setting confirmation mode and the setting confirmation notification are completed. At the same time, the operation of various drive sources is immediately stopped (drive source = OFF), the initial operation of various drive sources is completed, and the display of the set value on the 7-segment display 113d at the right end of the information display 113 is also completed. do. Then, the main control board 110 shifts from the pre-start state to the game-enabled state in which the progress control of the game is performed.

At this time, various displays (display of special symbol, display of normal symbol, display of number of special symbol hold, display of normal figure hold, etc.) on the first game information display device 19 are started, and the above-mentioned power recovery is performed. Notification is started. Further, the initial operation of the movable staging members 17A to 17C controlled by the staging control board 130 is started, and all the 7-segment displays 113a to 113d are all lit on the information display 113 to start the lighting confirmation. .. The initial operation of the movable staging members 73a and 73b ends after a predetermined period of time has elapsed.

At the timing of T11, when the confirmation time (here, 5 seconds) elapses from the start of the lighting confirmation of the information display 113, all the lighting of the 7-segment displays 113a to 113d is completed and the performance information (here, the current one) is completed. The display of the normal base value of the game section) is started. After that, every time the display switching time (5 seconds) elapses, the performance information (normal base value) of the four game sections consisting of the current game section and the past three game sections is displayed in order.

As described above, according to the present modification, the movable body (opening / closing member 11b of the second starting port 11a, the large winning opening 13a) that affects the result of the game in the pre-start state before the progress control of the game is started. Since various drive sources (second start opening opening / closing solenoid 11d, large winning opening opening / closing solenoid 13d) for operating the opening / closing member 13b) are initially operated, the gaming machine 1 (game board 4 only, board surface) is initially operated. The drive source controlled by the main control means that controls the progress of the game at the time of shipment from the factory (including the case of only the unit) or at the time of replacement at the game store (including replacement of only the game board 4 and only the board unit). It is possible to easily check the operation.

Further, according to this modification, when various drive sources for operating a movable body that affects the result of the game are initially operated (during the state before the start), the state confirmation display 19k is excluded. 1 Game information display device 19 (1st special symbol 1st display 19a, 2nd special symbol 1st display 19b, normal symbol 1st display 19c, 1st special symbol hold 1st display 19d, 2nd special symbol The hold 1st display 19e, the normal symbol hold 1st display 19f, the high-probability game state display 19g, the time-saving game state display 19h, the round number display 19i, and the right-handed 1st display 19j) are hidden (non-display). Since it is in the operating state, it is possible not to give an extra processing load to the main control board 110, and it is possible to concentrate on checking the operation of various drive sources.

Further, according to this modification, when the various drive sources for operating the movable body that affect the result of the game are initially operated, the setting is being changed and the operation confirmation of the various drive sources is urged. Because the setting change notification for this purpose (setting confirmation is being performed and setting confirmation notification for prompting the operation confirmation of various drive sources) is performed, it is a game that it is the timing to confirm the operation of various drive sources. It is possible to notify the worker (worker, game shop clerk) who confirms the operation of the machine 1 so that the operation can be confirmed appropriately.

Further, according to this modification, since various drive sources for operating a movable body that affects the result of the game are initially operated in the setting change mode (setting confirmation mode), the progress control of the game is controlled. It is not necessary to create a plurality of states in the pre-start state before the start of the game, and it is possible to reduce the development cost of the gaming machine 1 (shorten the development period, etc.).

Further, according to this modification, when the set value confirmation operation (confirmation end operation) is performed and the pre-start state ends, the various drive sources are immediately activated even before the operation time of the various drive sources has elapsed. Is designed to be terminated, so that the initial operation of various drive sources is no longer performed in a game-enabled state, and the inconvenience of being confused with the operation of various drive sources according to the progress of the game is avoided. Is possible.

Further, according to this modification, the progress control of the game is performed by performing the initial operation of various drive sources for operating the movable body that affects the result of the game in the state before the start before the progress control of the game is performed. Since the initial movements of the movable staging members 73a and 73b that do not affect the result of the game are performed in the playable state to be performed, two types of initial movements can be confirmed in order, and the operation confirmation is appropriate. It becomes possible to do it.

Further, according to this modification, when various drive sources for operating the opening / closing member 13b of the large winning opening 13a are initially operated, the large winning opening LED is left off, so that the large winning opening LED is kept off. It is possible to avoid the inconvenience that it becomes difficult to confirm the operation of the opening / closing member 13b of the large winning opening 13a due to the light from the light, and it is possible to appropriately confirm the operation.

Further, according to this modification, when various drive sources for operating the opening / closing member 13b of the large winning opening 13a are initially operated, the opening signal is being opened even though the large winning opening 13a is open. Is not output, so that an extra processing load can be prevented from being given to the main control board 110, and an information collecting device such as a hall computer that collects information output from the gaming machine 1 is used for gaming. It is possible to avoid inconveniences such as collecting information that does not correspond to the progress of.

Further, according to this modification, the performance information (normal base value) of the gaming machine is not displayed on the information display 113 until the progress control of the gaming machine is started from the power-on of the gaming machine (the display of the performance information is displayed). Since it is regulated), it is possible not to give an extra processing load to the main control board 110.

Further, according to this modification, the performance information (normal base value) of the gaming machine is displayed (the display of the performance information is permitted) after the progress control of the game is started. It is possible to confirm whether or not the progress control of is started, and it is possible to inform that the performance information is related to the game.

Further, according to this modification, the performance information is not displayed on the 7-segment displays 113a to 113c other than the 7-segment display 113d on which the current setting value is displayed in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. As a result, the current set value can be appropriately notified, and the convenience of the game store can be ensured.

In this modification, in the setting change notification in the setting change mode, the setting changing screen in which the character "setting changing" is displayed is displayed, but in addition to the character "setting changing". Alternatively, a setting changing screen may be displayed in which the characters "During initial operation of drive source" or "Please confirm operation of solenoid" are displayed to prompt visual confirmation of the initial operation of various drive sources.

(Operation comparison table)
Using FIG. 93, various operation timings (initial operation, jackpot game operation, auxiliary game operation in the normal game state) of various drive sources (second start port opening / closing solenoid 11d, large winning opening opening / closing solenoid 13d) provided on the board unit, The movements in the auxiliary game movement) in the time-saving gaming state) are compared.

The one-time drive time of the second start port opening / closing solenoid 11d is longer in the initial operation than in the auxiliary game operation in the normal game state. Therefore, it is possible to confirm at the time of the initial operation whether or not the auxiliary game operation in the normal game state can be performed, and it is possible to improve the accuracy of the operation confirmation.

It should be noted that the one drive time of the second start port opening / closing solenoid 11d during the initial operation may be set to the same value or almost the same (similar) value as the one drive time during the auxiliary game operation during the normal gaming state. .. By doing so, it is possible to confirm at the time of the initial operation whether or not the second start opening opening / closing solenoid 11d can perform the auxiliary game operation during the normal gaming state, and it is possible to improve the accuracy of the operation confirmation. Become.

Further, the one drive time of the second start port opening / closing solenoid 11d during the initial operation may be set to a value smaller than the one drive time during the auxiliary game operation during the normal gaming state. By doing so, it is possible to shorten the confirmation time at the time of initial operation of the second starting port opening / closing solenoid 11d.

Further, the one drive time of the second start port opening / closing solenoid 11d in the initial operation may be the same value as or almost the same (similar) value as the one drive time in the auxiliary game operation during the time-saving game state. .. By doing so, it is possible to confirm at the initial operation whether or not the second start port opening / closing solenoid 11d can perform the auxiliary game operation during the time-saving gaming state, and it is possible to improve the accuracy of the operation confirmation. Become.

Further, the one drive time of the second start port opening / closing solenoid 11d during the initial operation may be set to a value larger than the one drive time during the auxiliary game operation during the time-saving gaming state. By doing so, it is possible to confirm at the initial operation whether or not the second start port opening / closing solenoid 11d can perform the auxiliary game operation during the time-saving gaming state, and it is possible to improve the accuracy of the operation confirmation. Become.

Further, the one drive time of the big winning opening opening / closing solenoid 13d at the time of the initial operation may be the same value or almost the same (similar) value as the one drive time at the time of the big hit game operation (4R or 10R). By doing so, it is possible to confirm at the time of the initial operation whether or not the big winning opening opening / closing solenoid 13d can perform the big hit game operation, and it is possible to improve the accuracy of the operation confirmation.

Further, the one drive time of the big winning opening opening / closing solenoid 13d at the time of the initial operation may be set to a value larger than the one drive time at the time of the big hit game operation. By doing so, it is possible to confirm at the time of the initial operation whether or not the big winning opening opening / closing solenoid 13d can perform the big hit game operation, and it is possible to improve the accuracy of the operation confirmation.

(Second modification)
Hereinafter, a second modification of the initial operation of various drive sources will be specifically described with reference to FIGS. 94 and 95. In the second modification, the setting change function and the setting confirmation function are not installed, the status confirmation display 19k is not provided, and the RWM clear switch 58c is operated again until the RWM (RAM) clear switch 58c is operated. Since it differs from the first embodiment in that the processing continues, only the differences from the first embodiment will be described here.

(Initial setting process of main control board)
The initial setting process (game program) of the main control board 110 in the second modification will be described with reference to FIG. 94. FIG. 94 is a flowchart showing the initial setting process of the main control board 110.

The main CPU 110a prohibits all interruptions in step S11, performs initial CPU settings such as internal register settings in step S12, and performs start-up waiting processing for other control boards in step S13. Specifically, the payout control board 120 and the staging control board 130 wait for one second so that the command is not missed from the main control board 110.

The main CPU 110a permits access to the RWM area of the main RAM 110c in step S14, and transmits a launch permission designation command to the payout control board 120 in step S15. As a result, the payout control unit 121 performs a process for permitting the launching of the game ball by the launching device 26.

The main CPU 110a determines in step S16 whether or not the RWM clear operation has been performed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the RWM (RAM) clear switch 58c is in the ON state. If there is an RWM clear operation, the process is transferred to step S23 as a transition to the RWM clear preparation mode, and if there is no RWM clear operation, the process is transferred to step S17.

In step S17, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a backup flag indicating that the power is restored is saved in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c. If the backup flag is saved, the process is transferred to step S18 as if the power was restored, and if the backup flag is not saved, the process is transferred to step S23 as if the power was turned on for the first time.

The main CPU 110a calculates the checksum (abnormality determination data) of the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c in step S18, and determines whether or not the checksum is normal in step S19. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the checksum saved in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c and the checksum calculated in step S18 match. If the checksum is normal (there is no abnormality in the data in the RWM area), the process is moved to step S20, and if the checksum is not normal (there is an abnormality in the data in the RWM area), the RWM clear preparation mode The process is transferred to step S23 as a transition to step S23.

In step S20, the main CPU 110a clears (0 clears) the backup flag and the checksum saved in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c, and sets the RWM area at the time of power restoration. As a result, the progress state (control state) of the game is restored (recovered) to the state before the power was turned off, so that the game can be restarted from the state before the power was turned off.

In step S21, the main CPU 110a transmits a power restoration designation command indicating that the control state of the game has been restored and the game state before the occurrence of a power failure to the effect control board 130. As a result, the effect control board 130 is subjected to a process for executing a power recovery notification indicating that the control state of the game has returned to the state before the power was cut off.

In step S22, the main CPU 110a transmits other commands (special symbol storage designation command, ordinary symbol storage designation command, etc., which will be described later) to the effect control board 130. As a result, the effect control board 130 can grasp the number of reserved special figures, and at the same time, a process for displaying a variable image (described later) or a reserved image (described later) on the image display device is performed. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to step S30.

In step S23, the main CPU 110a transmits a RWM clear preparation designation command to the effect control board 130, and shifts to the RWM clear preparation mode. As a result, the staging control board 130 is subjected to the process for performing the RWM clear preparation notification.

"RWM clear preparation notification" means to display the clear preparation screen for the image display device 16 to recognize that the RWM clear preparation is in progress, or to press the "RWM (RAM) clear switch again" from the audio output device 9. It is to output the notification voice of "" over a predetermined period.

The main CPU 110a determines in step S24 whether or not the RWM clear approval operation has been performed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the RWM (RAM) clear switch 58c is in the ON state. If there is an RWM clear approval operation, the RWM clear preparation mode is terminated and the process is transferred to step S25 as if the RWM clear is performed. If there is no RWM clear approval operation, the process of step S24 is repeated. ..

In step S25, the main CPU 110a initializes (clears 0) the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the progress state of the game is initialized to the initial state (the state at the time of shipment of the game machine 1), and the data in the game RWM area before the RWM is cleared is not inherited.

In step S26, the main CPU 110a performs output processing of the RWM clear signal (security signal). Specifically, a process for outputting an RWM clear signal (security signal) indicating that the RWM clear has been performed is performed from the security signal terminal of the game information output terminal board 90.

In step S27, the main CPU 110a performs a drive source initial operation process (game program). Specifically, processing for initial operation of various drive sources (second start opening opening / closing solenoid 11d, large winning opening opening / closing solenoid 13d) provided on the board unit is performed. The details of the initial operation of various drive sources will be described later.

In step S28, the main CPU 110a issues a power-on designation command indicating that the control state of the game has been initialized and the current game state (here, a non-time-saving game state as a normal game state). It is transmitted to the substrate 130 and the process is transferred to step S30. As a result, the effect control board 130 performs a process for executing the power-on notification indicating that the control state of the game has been initialized.

In step S30, the main CPU 110a activates a CTC (counter timer circuit) for generating a timer interrupt (4 milliseconds), and in step S31, the game progress control is started by permitting all interrupts. , End the initial setting process this time.

(Specific example when various drive sources are initially operated after clearing RWM)
A specific example of the case where various drive sources are initially operated after the RWM is cleared will be described with reference to FIG. 95. FIG. 95 is a diagram showing a timing chart and an example of the effect when various drive sources are initially operated after the RWM is cleared.
For convenience of explanation, the description given with reference to FIG. 95 will be described with a new reference numeral to each component. That is, in the constituent member described above and the constituent member described with reference to FIG. 95, different reference numerals may be attached to the same member, and the same reference numeral may be attached to different members. There is.

First, at the timing of T0, the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned off. At this time, a movable body (second) that affects the result of the game, such as changing whether or not the game ball enters the predetermined area (second starting port 11a, large winning opening 13a) (difficulty of entering the ball). Various drive sources (second starting port opening / closing solenoid 11d, large winning opening opening / closing solenoid 13d) for operating the opening / closing member 11b of the starting port 11a and the opening / closing member 13b of the large winning opening 13a are in a stopped state.

Further, the large winning opening LED that causes the large winning opening 13a to emit light in a predetermined manner during the round game is turned off, and the first game information display device 19 (first special symbol first display 19a, second special) is turned off. Symbol 1st display 19b, normal symbol 1st display 19c, 1st special symbol hold 1st display 19d, 2nd special symbol hold 1st display 19e, normal symbol hold 1st display 19f, high probability gaming state Display 19g, time saving game status display 19h, round number display 19i, right-handed first display 19j), image display device 16, and information display 113 are in a non-display (non-operation, off, erase) state. It has become.

When the RWM clear operation (RWM (RAM) clear switch 58c is turned on) is performed when the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned on at the timing of T1, the RWM clear preparation mode is started on the main control board 110 and the game progresses. It becomes the state before the start before the control is started. At this time, the above-mentioned RWM clear preparation notification is started.

When the RWM clear approval operation (RWM clear switch 111a is ON) is performed at the timing of T2, the RWM clear preparation mode ends and the initial operation of various drive sources is started. At this time, the initial operation notification (display of the screen during initial operation, output of the initial operation confirmation voice of "Please confirm the operation of the solenoid") for prompting the operation confirmation of various drive sources is started.

At the timing of T3, when the operation standby time (7 seconds in this case) elapses after the initial operation notification is started, the first operation of various drive sources (drive source = ON) is started, and at the timing of T4, various types are started. When the operation time of the drive source (here, 0.512 seconds) elapses, the operation of various drive sources is stopped (drive source = OFF).

At the timing of T5, when the stop time (0.512 seconds in this case) elapses after the operation of the various drive sources is stopped, the second operation of the various drive sources is started, and at the timing of T6, the various drive sources When the operating time (here, 0.512 seconds) elapses, the operation of various drive sources is stopped (drive source = OFF).

At the timing of T7, when the stop time (0.512 seconds in this case) elapses after the operation of the various drive sources is stopped, the third operation of the various drive sources is started, and at the timing of T8, the various drive sources When the operating time (here, 0.512 seconds) elapses, the operation of various drive sources is stopped (drive source = OFF).

At the timing of T9, when the stop time (0.512 seconds in this case) elapses after the operation of the various drive sources is stopped, the initial operation and the initial operation notification of the various drive sources are terminated, and the main control board 110 is before the start. The state shifts to a game-enabled state in which the progress of the game is controlled.

At this time, various displays (display of special symbol, display of normal symbol, display of number of special symbol hold, display of number of normal figure hold, etc.) on the first game information display device 19 are started, and the above-mentioned power is turned on. Notification is started. Further, the initial operation of the movable staging members 73a and 73b controlled by the staging control board 130 is started, and all the 7-segment displays 113a to 113d of the information display 113 are all lit to start the lighting confirmation. .. The initial operation of the movable staging members 73a and 73b ends after a predetermined period of time has elapsed.

At the timing of T10, when the confirmation time (here, 5 seconds) elapses from the start of the lighting confirmation of the information display 113, all the lighting of the 7-segment displays 113a to 113d is completed and the performance information (here, the current one) is completed. The display of the normal base value of the game section) is started. After that, every time the display switching time (5 seconds) elapses, the performance information (normal base value) of the four game sections consisting of the current game section and the past three game sections is displayed in order.

As described above, according to the present modification, the movable body (opening / closing member 11b of the second starting port 11a, the large winning opening 13a) that affects the result of the game in the pre-start state before the progress control of the game is started. Since various drive sources (second start opening opening / closing solenoid 11d, large winning opening opening / closing solenoid 13d) for operating the opening / closing member 13b) are initially operated, the gaming machine 1 (game board 4 only, board surface) is initially operated. The drive source controlled by the main control means that controls the progress of the game at the time of shipment from the factory (including the case of only the unit) or at the time of replacement at the game store (including replacement of only the game board 4 and only the board unit). It is possible to easily check the operation.

Further, according to this modification, when various drive sources for operating a movable body that affects the result of the game are initially operated (during the state before the start), the first game information display device 19 (during the state before the start) 1st special symbol 1st display 19a, 2nd special symbol 1st display 19b, normal symbol 1st display 19c, 1st special symbol hold 1st display 19d, 2nd special symbol hold 1st display 19e, Because the normal symbol hold 1st display 19f, high-probability game state display 19g, time-saving game state display 19h, round number display 19i, right-handed 1st display 19j) are in a non-display (non-operating) state. It is possible not to give an extra processing load to the main control board 110, and it is possible to concentrate on checking the operation of various drive sources.

Further, according to this modification, when various drive sources for operating various drive sources that affect the result of the game are initially operated, the initial operation notification for prompting the operation confirmation of the various drive sources is performed. Therefore, it is possible to inform the workers (workers, game clerk) who check the operation of the gaming machine 1 that it is time to check the operation of various drive sources, and have them check the operation appropriately. It becomes possible.

Further, according to this modification, various types for operating a movable body that affects the result of the game after the end of the RWM clear preparation mode even in the state before the start before the progress control of the game is started. Since the drive source is initially operated, it is not necessary to check the operation of various drive sources while performing the RWM clear approval operation, and it is possible to appropriately check the operation.

Further, according to this modification, the operation of various drive sources for operating the movable body that affects the result of the game is started after the operation standby time has passed after the RWM clear preparation mode is completed. Therefore, it is possible to have a time margin from the completion of the RWM clear approval operation to the operation check of various drive sources, and the operation check can be performed appropriately.

Further, according to this modification, when various drive sources for operating the opening / closing member 13b of the large winning opening 13a are initially operated, the large winning opening LED is left off, so that the large winning opening LED is kept off. It is possible to avoid the inconvenience that it becomes difficult to confirm the operation of the opening / closing member 13b of the large winning opening 13a due to the light from the light, and it is possible to appropriately confirm the operation.

Further, according to this modification, the progress control of the game is performed by performing the initial operation of various drive sources for operating the movable body that affects the result of the game in the state before the start before the progress control of the game is performed. Since the initial movements of the movable staging members 73a and 73b that do not affect the result of the game are performed in the playable state to be performed, two types of initial movements can be confirmed in order, and the operation confirmation is appropriate. It becomes possible to do it.

Further, according to this modification, when various drive sources for operating the opening / closing member 13b of the large winning opening 13a are initially operated, the opening signal is being opened even though the large winning opening 13a is open. Is not output, so that an extra processing load can be prevented from being given to the main control board 110, and an information collecting device such as a hall computer that collects information output from the gaming machine 1 is used for gaming. It is possible to avoid inconveniences such as collecting information that does not correspond to the progress of.

Further, according to this modification, the performance information (normal base value) of the gaming machine is not displayed on the information display 113 until the progress control of the gaming machine is started from the power-on of the gaming machine (the display of the performance information is displayed). Since it is regulated), it is possible not to give an extra processing load to the main control board 110.

Further, according to this modification, the performance information (normal base value) of the gaming machine is displayed (the display of the performance information is permitted) after the progress control of the game is started. It is possible to confirm whether or not the progress control of is started, and it is possible to inform that the performance information is related to the game.

It should be noted that various operation timings (initial operation, jackpot game operation, auxiliary game operation in the normal game state) of various drive sources (second start port opening / closing solenoid 11d, large winning opening opening / closing solenoid 13d) provided on the board unit in the second modification are performed. , The operation comparison in the auxiliary game operation in the time-saving gaming state) is the same as the operation comparison table shown in FIG. 85, and thus the description thereof is omitted here.

(Third modification example)
Hereinafter, a third modification example of the initial operation of various drive sources will be specifically described with reference to FIGS. 96 and 97. The third modification is different from the first embodiment in that the setting change function and the setting confirmation function are not installed, and the RWM clear process continues until the RWM (RAM) clear switch 58c is operated again. This is a second modification in that the drive source initial operation process is performed during the RWM clear preparation mode.

(Initial setting process of main control board)
The initial setting process (game program) of the main control board 110 in the third modification will be described with reference to FIG. 96. FIG. 96 is a flowchart showing an initial setting process of the main control board 110.
Here, the parts that match the initial setting process of the main control board in the second modification shown in FIG. 94 are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted, and only the periphery of the different parts will be described.

In step S24, the main CPU 110a executes a drive source initial operation process (game program). Specifically, various drive sources (second start opening opening / closing solenoid 11d, large winning opening opening / closing solenoid 13d) that are provided on the board unit and that the main control board 110 operates according to the progress of the game are prepared for RWM clearing. Performs processing for initial operation until the mode ends. The details of the initial operation of various drive sources in the RWM clear preparation mode will be described later. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to step S25.

The main CPU 110a determines in step S25 whether or not the RWM clear approval operation has been performed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the RWM (RAM) clear switch 58c is in the ON state. If there is an RWM clear approval operation, the process is transferred to step S26 as if the RWM clear preparation mode is terminated and the RWM clear is performed, and if there is no RWM clear approval operation, the process is transferred to step S24.

In step S26, the main CPU 110a performs a process for stopping the initial operation of various drive sources, and in step S27, the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c is initialized (cleared to 0). As a result, the progress state of the game is initialized to the initial state (the state at the time of shipment of the game machine 1), and the data in the game RWM area before the RWM is cleared is not inherited.

In step S28, the main CPU 110a performs output processing of the RWM clear signal (security signal). Specifically, a process for outputting an RWM clear signal (security signal) indicating that the RWM clear has been performed is performed from the security signal terminal of the game information output terminal board 90.

In step S29, the main CPU 110a issues a power-on designation command indicating that the control state of the game has been initialized and the current game state (here, a non-time-saving game state as a normal game state). It is transmitted to the substrate 130 and the process is transferred to step S30. As a result, the effect control board 130 performs a process for executing the power-on notification indicating that the control state of the game has been initialized.

(Specific example when various drive sources are initially operated during preparation for clearing RWM)
A specific example of the initial operation of various drive sources during the preparation for clearing RWM will be described with reference to FIG. 97. FIG. 97 is a diagram showing a timing chart and an example of production when various drive sources are initially operated during preparation for clearing RWM.
For convenience of explanation, the description given with reference to FIG. 97 will be described with a new reference numeral to each component. That is, in the constituent member described above and the constituent member described with reference to FIG. 97, different reference numerals may be attached to the same member, and the same reference numeral may be attached to different members. There is.

First, at the timing of T0, the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned off. At this time, a movable body (second) that affects the result of the game, such as changing whether or not the game ball enters the predetermined area (second starting port 11a, large winning opening 13a) (difficulty of entering the ball). Various drive sources (second starting port opening / closing solenoid 11d, large winning opening opening / closing solenoid 13d) for operating the opening / closing member 11b of the starting port 11a and the opening / closing member 13b of the large winning opening 13a are in a stopped state.

Further, the large winning opening LED that causes the large winning opening 13a to emit light in a predetermined manner during the round game is turned off, and the first game information display device 19 (first special symbol first display 19a, second special) is turned off. Symbol 1st display 19b, normal symbol 1st display 19c, 1st special symbol hold 1st display 19d, 2nd special symbol hold 1st display 19e, normal symbol hold 1st display 19f, high probability gaming state Display 19g, time saving game status display 19h, round number display 19i, right-handed first display 19j), image display device 16, and information display 113 are in a non-display (non-operation, off, erase) state. It has become.

When the RWM clear operation (RWM (RAM) clear switch 58c is turned on) is performed when the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned on at the timing of T1, the RWM clear preparation mode is started on the main control board 110 and the game progresses. It becomes the state before the start before the control is started.

At this time, operation (drive source = ON) is started as an initial operation of various drive sources. In addition, the RWM clear preparation notification (display of the clear preparation screen, "Please press the RWM (RAM) clear switch again" and the "solenoid" notification voice to prompt you to confirm the operation of various drive sources and that the RWM is being cleared are being prepared. "Please check the operation" (alternate output of the initial operation check voice) is started.

At the timing of T2, when the operation time (here, 0.512 seconds) elapses from the start of operation of various drive sources, the operation of various drive sources is stopped (drive source = OFF), and thereafter, the timing of T3 to the timing of T10. The operation and stop of various drive sources are repeated until.

At the timing of T10, if the RWM clear approval operation (RWM clear switch 111a is ON) is performed while the operating time of various drive sources started from the timing of T9 has not elapsed, the RWM clear preparation mode and the RWM clear preparation mode are performed. As soon as the notification ends, the operation of the various drive sources stops (drive source = OFF), the initial operation of the various drive sources ends, and the main control board 110 controls the progress of the game from the state before the start. Move to the possible state.

At this time, various displays (display of special symbol, display of normal symbol, display of number of special symbol hold, display of number of normal figure hold, etc.) on the first game information display device 19 are started, and the above-mentioned power is turned on. Notification is started. Further, the initial operation of the movable staging members 73a and 73b controlled by the staging control board 130 is started, and all the 7-segment displays 113a to 113d of the information display 113 are all lit to start the lighting confirmation. .. The initial operation of the movable staging members 17A to 17C ends after a predetermined period of time has elapsed.

At the timing of T11, when the confirmation time (here, 5 seconds) elapses after the lighting confirmation of the information display 113 is started, all the lighting of the 7-segment displays 113a to 113d is completed and the performance information (here, the current one) is completed. The display of the normal base value of the game section) is started. After that, every time the display switching time (5 seconds) elapses, the performance information (normal base value) of the four game sections consisting of the current game section and the past three game sections is displayed in order.

As described above, according to the present modification, the movable body (opening / closing member 11b of the second starting port 11a, the large winning opening 13a) that affects the result of the game in the pre-start state before the progress control of the game is started. Since various drive sources (second start opening opening / closing solenoid 11d, large winning opening opening / closing solenoid 13d) for operating the opening / closing member 13b) are initially operated, the gaming machine 1 (game board 4 only, board surface) is initially operated. The drive source controlled by the main control means that controls the progress of the game at the time of shipment from the factory (including the case of only the unit) or at the time of replacement at the game store (including replacement of only the game board 4 and only the board unit). It is possible to easily check the operation.

Further, according to this modification, when various drive sources for operating a movable body that affects the result of the game are initially operated (during the state before the start), the first game information display device 19 (during the state before the start) 1st special symbol 1st display 19a, 2nd special symbol 1st display 19b, normal symbol 1st display 19c, 1st special symbol hold 1st display 19d, 2nd special symbol hold 1st display 19e, Because the normal symbol hold 1st display 19f, high-probability game state display 19g, time-saving game state display 19h, round number display 19i, right-handed 1st display 19j) are in a non-display (non-operating) state. It is possible not to give an extra processing load to the main control board 110, and it is possible to concentrate on checking the operation of various drive sources.

Further, according to this modification, when the various drive sources for operating the movable body that affect the result of the game are initially operated, it is confirmed that the RWM clear is being prepared and the operation of the various drive sources is confirmed. Since the RWM clear preparation notification for prompting is performed, it is possible to inform the workers (workers, game clerk) who check the operation of the gaming machine 1 that it is the timing to check the operation of various drive sources. It is possible to check the operation properly.

Further, according to this modification, since various drive sources for operating various drive sources that affect the result of the game are initially operated in the RWM clear preparation mode, the progress control of the game is started. It is not necessary to create a plurality of states in the state before the start, and it is possible to reduce the development cost of the gaming machine 1 (shorten the development period, etc.).

Further, according to this modification, when the pre-start state ends due to the RWM clear approval operation, the operation of the various drive sources is immediately terminated even before the operation time of the various drive sources has elapsed. Therefore, the initial operation of the various drive sources is no longer performed in the game-enabled state, and it is possible to avoid the inconvenience of being confused with the operation of the various drive sources according to the progress of the game.

Further, according to this modification, the progress control of the game is performed by performing the initial operation of various drive sources for operating the movable body that affects the result of the game in the state before the start before the progress control of the game is performed. Since the initial movements of the movable staging members 73a and 73b that do not affect the result of the game are performed in the playable state to be performed, two types of initial movements can be confirmed in order, and the operation confirmation is appropriate. It becomes possible to do it.

Further, according to this modification, when various drive sources for operating the opening / closing member 13b of the large winning opening 13a are initially operated, the large winning opening LED is left off, so that the large winning opening LED is kept off. It is possible to avoid the inconvenience that it becomes difficult to confirm the operation of the opening / closing member 13b of the large winning opening 13a due to the light from the light, and it is possible to appropriately confirm the operation.

Further, according to this modification, when various drive sources for operating the opening / closing member 13b of the large winning opening 13a are initially operated, the opening signal is being opened even though the large winning opening 13a is open. Is not output, so that an extra processing load can be prevented from being given to the main control board 110, and an information collecting device such as a hall computer that collects information output from the gaming machine 1 is used for gaming. It is possible to avoid inconveniences such as collecting information that does not correspond to the progress of.

Further, according to this modification, the performance information (normal base value) of the gaming machine is not displayed on the information display 113 until the progress control of the gaming machine is started from the power-on of the gaming machine (the display of the performance information is displayed). Since it is regulated), it is possible not to give an extra processing load to the main control board 110.

Further, according to this modification, the performance information (normal base value) of the gaming machine is displayed (the display of the performance information is permitted) after the progress control of the game is started. It is possible to confirm whether or not the progress control of is started, and it is possible to inform that the performance information is related to the game.

In this modification, the clear preparation screen in which the characters "Preparing to clear RWM" is displayed is displayed in the RWM clear preparation notification in the RWM clear preparation mode, but "Preparing to clear RWM" is displayed. Even if you display the clear preparation screen that displays the characters "During initial operation of drive source" or "Please check the operation of solenoid" that prompts you to visually check the initial operation of various drive sources in addition to the characters. good.

It should be noted that various operation timings (initial operation, jackpot game operation, auxiliary game operation in the normal game state) of various drive sources (second start port opening / closing solenoid 11d, large winning opening opening / closing solenoid 13d) provided on the board unit in the third modification are performed. , The operation comparison in the auxiliary game operation in the time-saving gaming state) is the same as the operation comparison table shown in FIG. 93, and therefore the description thereof is omitted here.

(Fourth modification)
Hereinafter, the fourth modification will be specifically described with reference to FIGS. 98 and 99. The fourth modification is different from the first embodiment in that the setting change function and the setting confirmation function are not installed, and the RWM clear is performed without going through the RWM clear preparation mode, which is different from the second modification. Since there are differences, only the differences from the first embodiment and the second modification will be described here.

(Initial setting process of main control board)
The initial setting process (game program) of the main control board 110 in the fourth modification will be described with reference to FIG. 98. FIG. 98 is a flowchart showing an initial setting process of the main control board 110.
Here, the parts that match the initial setting process of the main control board shown in FIG. 94 are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted, and only the periphery of the different parts will be described.

In step S23, the main CPU 110a initializes (clears 0) the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the progress state of the game is initialized to the initial state (the state at the time of shipment of the game machine 1), and the data in the game RWM area before the RWM is cleared is not inherited.

In step S24, the main CPU 110a performs output processing of the RWM clear signal (security signal). Specifically, a process for outputting an RWM clear signal (security signal) indicating that the RWM clear has been performed is performed from the security signal terminal of the game information output terminal board 90.

In step S25, the main CPU 110a executes the drive source initial operation process (game program). Specifically, various drive sources (second start opening opening / closing solenoid 11d, large winning opening opening / closing solenoid 13d) provided on the board unit and operated by the main control board 110 according to the progress of the game are set for a predetermined period. The process for initial operation is performed over the entire period. The details of the initial operation of various drive sources will be described later.

In step S26, the main CPU 110a issues a power-on designation command indicating that the control state of the game has been initialized and the current game state (here, a non-time-saving game state as a normal game state). It is transmitted to the substrate 130 and the process is transferred to step S30. As a result, the effect control board 130 performs a process for executing the power-on notification indicating that the control state of the game has been initialized.

(Specific example when various drive sources are initially operated after clearing RWM)
A specific example of the case where various drive sources are initially operated after the RWM is cleared will be described with reference to FIG. 99. FIG. 99 is a diagram showing a timing chart and an example of the effect when various drive sources are initially operated after the RWM is cleared.
For convenience of explanation, the description given with reference to FIG. 99 will be described with a new reference numeral to each component. That is, in the constituent member described above and the constituent member described with reference to FIG. 99, different reference numerals may be attached to the same member, and the same reference numeral may be attached to different members. There is.

First, at the timing of T0, the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned off. At this time, a movable body (second) that affects the result of the game, such as changing whether or not the game ball enters the predetermined area (second starting port 11a, large winning opening 13a) (difficulty of entering the ball). Various drive sources (second starting port opening / closing solenoid 11d, large winning opening opening / closing solenoid 13d) for operating the opening / closing member 11b of the starting port 11a and the opening / closing member 13b of the large winning opening 13a are in a stopped state.

Further, the large winning opening LED that causes the large winning opening 13a to emit light in a predetermined manner during the round game is turned off, and the first game information display device 19 (first special symbol first display 19a, second special) is turned off. Symbol 1st display 19b, normal symbol 1st display 19c, 1st special symbol hold 1st display 19d, 2nd special symbol hold 1st display 19e, normal symbol hold 1st display 19f, high probability gaming state Display 19g, time saving game status display 19h, round number display 19i, right-handed first display 19j), image display device 16, and information display 113 are in a non-display (non-operation, off, erase) state. It has become.

When the RWM clear operation (RWM (RAM) clear switch 58c is turned on) is performed when the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned on at the timing of T1, the RWM clear is performed on the main control board 110 to control the progress of the game. It becomes the state before the start before the start. At this time, the initial operation notification (display of the screen during initial operation, output of the initial operation confirmation voice of "Please confirm the operation of the solenoid") for prompting the operation confirmation of various drive sources is started.

At the timing of T2, when the operation standby time (7 seconds in this case) elapses after the initial operation notification is started, the first operation of various drive sources (drive source = ON) is started, and at the timing of T3, various types are started. When the operation time of the drive source (here, 0.512 seconds) elapses, the operation of various drive sources is stopped (drive source = OFF).

At the timing of T4, when the stop time (0.512 seconds in this case) elapses after the operation of the various drive sources is stopped, the second operation of the various drive sources is started, and at the timing of T5, the various drive sources When the operating time (here, 0.512 seconds) elapses, the operation of various drive sources is stopped (drive source = OFF).

At the timing of T6, when the stop time (0.512 seconds in this case) elapses after the operation of the various drive sources is stopped, the third operation of the various drive sources is started, and at the timing of T7, the various drive sources When the operating time (here, 0.512 seconds) elapses, the operation of various drive sources is stopped (drive source = OFF).

At the timing of T8, when the stop time (0.512 seconds in this case) elapses after the operation of the various drive sources is stopped, the initial operation and the initial operation notification of the various drive sources are terminated, and the main control board 110 is before the start. The state shifts to a game-enabled state in which the progress of the game is controlled.

At this time, various displays (display of special symbol, display of normal symbol, display of number of special symbol hold, display of number of normal figure hold, etc.) on the first game information display device 19 are started, and the above-mentioned power is turned on. Notification is started. Further, the initial operation of the movable staging members 17A and 17B controlled by the staging control board 130 is started, and all the 7-segment displays 113a to 113d of the information display 113 are all lit to start the lighting confirmation. .. The initial operation of the movable staging members 73a and 73b ends after a predetermined period of time has elapsed.

At the timing of T9, when the confirmation time (here, 5 seconds) elapses from the start of the lighting confirmation of the information display 113, all the lighting of the 7-segment displays 113a to 113d is completed and the performance information (here, the current one) is completed. The display of the normal base value of the game section) is started. After that, every time the display switching time (5 seconds) elapses, the performance information (normal base value) of the four game sections consisting of the current game section and the past three game sections is displayed in order.

As described above, according to the present modification, the movable body (opening / closing member 11b of the second starting port 11a, the large winning opening 13a) that affects the result of the game in the pre-start state before the progress control of the game is started. Since various drive sources (second start opening opening / closing solenoid 11d, large winning opening opening / closing solenoid 13d) for operating the opening / closing member 13b) are initially operated, the gaming machine 1 (game board 4 only, board surface) is initially operated. The drive source controlled by the main control means that controls the progress of the game at the time of shipment from the factory (including the case of only the unit) or at the time of replacement at the game store (including replacement of only the game board 4 and only the board unit). It is possible to easily check the operation.

Further, according to this modification, when various drive sources for operating a movable body that affects the result of the game are initially operated (during the state before the start), the first game information display device 19 (during the state before the start). 1st special symbol 1st display 19a, 2nd special symbol 1st display 19b, normal symbol 1st display 19c, 1st special symbol hold 1st display 19d, 2nd special symbol hold 1st display 19e, Because the normal symbol hold 1st display 19f, high-probability game state display 19g, time-saving game state display 19h, round number display 19i, right-handed 1st display 19j) are in a non-display (non-operating) state. It is possible not to give an extra processing load to the main control board 110, and it is possible to concentrate on checking the operation of various drive sources.

Further, according to this modification, when various drive sources for operating various drive sources that affect the result of the game are initially operated, the initial operation notification for prompting the operation confirmation of the various drive sources is performed. Therefore, it is possible to inform the workers (workers, game clerk) who check the operation of the gaming machine 1 that it is time to check the operation of various drive sources, and have them check the operation appropriately. It becomes possible.

Further, according to this modification, the operation of various drive sources for operating the movable body that affects the result of the game is started after the operation standby time has passed after the RWM clear operation is performed. Therefore, it is possible to have a time margin from the completion of the RWM clearing operation to the operation confirmation of various drive sources, and it is possible to appropriately perform the operation confirmation.

Further, according to this modification, when various drive sources for operating the opening / closing member 13b of the large winning opening 13a are initially operated, the large winning opening LED is left off, so that the large winning opening LED is kept off. It is possible to avoid the inconvenience that it becomes difficult to confirm the operation of the opening / closing member 13b of the large winning opening 13a due to the light from the light, and it is possible to appropriately confirm the operation.

Further, according to this modification, the progress control of the game is performed by performing the initial operation of various drive sources for operating the movable body that affects the result of the game in the state before the start before the progress control of the game is performed. Since the initial movements of the movable staging members 73a and 73b that do not affect the result of the game are performed in the playable state to be performed, two types of initial movements can be confirmed in order, and the operation confirmation is appropriate. It becomes possible to do it.

Further, according to this modification, when various drive sources for operating the opening / closing member 13b of the large winning opening 13a are initially operated, the above-mentioned opening is performed even though the large winning opening 13a is open. Since the medium signal is not output, it is possible to prevent an extra processing load from being applied to the main control board 110, and an information collection device such as a hall computer that collects information output from the gaming machine 1. However, it is possible to avoid inconveniences such as collecting information that does not correspond to the progress of the game.

Further, according to this modification, the performance information (normal base value) of the gaming machine is not displayed on the information display 113 until the progress control of the gaming machine is started from the power-on of the gaming machine (the display of the performance information is displayed). Since it is regulated), it is possible not to give an extra processing load to the main control board 110.

Further, according to this modification, the performance information (normal base value) of the gaming machine 1 is displayed (the display of the performance information is permitted) after the progress control of the game is started. It is possible to confirm whether or not the progress control of the game has been started, and it is possible to inform that the performance information is related to the game.

It should be noted that various operation timings (initial operation, jackpot game operation, assistance in the normal game state) of various drive sources (second start opening opening / closing solenoid 11d, second prize opening opening / closing solenoid 13d) provided on the board unit in the fourth modification are provided. Since the motion comparison in the game motion and the auxiliary game motion in the time-saving gaming state is the same as the motion comparison table shown in FIG. 85, the description thereof is omitted here.

In the first embodiment (including the modified example), the launch permission designation command is transmitted to the payout control board 120 in the state before the start before the progress control of the game is started, and the game ball can be launched. However, by transmitting a launch permission designation command to the payout control board 120 when the progress control of the game is started, the game ball may be launched after the game is ready for play.

Further, in the first embodiment (including the modified example), the payout control board 120 can perform payout control even in the state before the start of the game progress control, so that the game machine 1 can be used. Although it is possible to pay out game balls (ball lending) based on a payout request from the ball lending machines installed side by side, the ball lending machine will start the game progress control and become playable. It may be possible to pay out (ball lending) a game ball based on a payout request.

Further, in the first embodiment (including a modification), since the backup power supply is not supplied to the payout control board 120 (payout RAM 121c), the payout control board 120 (payout control board 120) is turned on when the power to the gaming machine 1 is turned on. Although there is no unpaid payout ball number data remaining in the RAM 121c), a backup power supply may be supplied to the payout control board 120 (payout RAM 121c), and in this case, the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is supplied. If the unpaid payout ball number data remains on the payout control board 120 (payout RAM 121c) when it is turned on, this unpaid payout is made even in the pre-start state before the game progress control is started. It may be possible to pay out the game balls based on the payout number of balls data.

Further, although the first game information display device 9 is provided outside the game area 4a in the first embodiment (variation example), the first game information display device 9 may be provided inside the game area 4a. ..

Further, in the first embodiment (variation example), a prize ball (prize value) is given based on the establishment of the granting condition (winning of a game ball to a winning opening, a starting opening, and a large winning opening). However, the player's ball possession may be managed as data, and the prize ball data may be added (addition to the possession ball data).

〔image〕
Next, an image to be displayed on the image display unit 114 by the effect control unit 130m will be described.
For convenience of explanation, the description given with reference to FIGS. 100 to 131 will be described with new reference numerals to the respective constituent members. That is, in the constituent members described above and the constituent members described with reference to FIGS. 100 to 131, different reference numerals may be attached to the same member, and the same reference numerals may be attached to different members. May be done.
As shown in FIG. 100, the image is displayed on the image display unit 114 (first image display device 16) by being controlled by the effect control unit 130m. In the present embodiment, the image displayed on the image display unit 114 includes the decorative symbol 41 (effect symbol 16a). Further, the image display unit 114 includes a variable image 51, a hold image 52, a hold number display 55, a small symbol 56, a stage image 61, a returning image 62, a menu display explanation image 63, a volume image 64, and a customer waiting image 65. Initializing image 66, initialization completed image 67, SP reach image 68, SPSP reach image 69, opening image 70, right-handed image 71, round medium image 72, music selection image 73, round number image 74, point number image 75 , High-accuracy fanning image 76, high-accuracy notification image 77, character selection image 79, high-accuracy start image 80, game continuation instruction image 81, preview image 82, returning right-handed image 83, jackpot notification image 84, game start notification image. 85, a game execution instruction image 86, a right-handed instruction image 87, a hit image 88, and a button operation image 89 may be displayed.
Hereinafter, each of the above images will be described.

(Decorative pattern 41)
As shown in FIG. 100 (1), the decorative symbol 41 is displayed on the image display unit 114. In the present embodiment, the decorative symbol 41 is composed of three symbols.
The three symbols constituting the decorative symbol 41 are arranged so as to be arranged in the left-right direction. When the three symbols constituting the decorative symbol 41 are individually described, the symbol arranged on the left side is the "left decorative symbol 41", the symbol arranged in the center is the "middle decorative symbol 41", and the symbol is arranged in the center. The symbol arranged on the right side is referred to as "right decorative symbol 41". Further, when the left decorative symbol 41 and the right decorative symbol 41 are collectively described, they are referred to as "left and right decorative symbols 41". Further, when the left decorative symbol 41, the middle decorative symbol 41, and the right decorative symbol 41 are collectively described, they are referred to as "three decorative symbols 41".

The effect control unit 130m first temporarily stops the left decorative symbol 41 (for example, the number "2") after displaying the three decorative symbols 41 in a variable manner by, for example, vertical scrolling, in the variable effect of the decorative symbol 41. Next, the right decorative symbol 41 (for example, the number "3") is temporarily stopped, then the middle decorative symbol 41 (for example, the number "1") is temporarily stopped, and finally all the decorative symbols 41 are fixedly stopped. In addition, the combination "213" of the decorative symbol 41 which is stopped and displayed, which is shown in FIG. 100 (1), is an example of the combination when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is out of order.

Further, in the present embodiment, as the display mode of the decorative pattern 41, a highly decorative display mode (see FIG. 100 (1)) in which a character image or the like is displayed in addition to characters such as numbers, and a number or the like are displayed. There is a display mode with low decorativeness (see FIG. 108 (10)) in which characters are mainly displayed. Here, the display mode of the decorative symbol 41 is switched according to a change in the gaming state or the progress of the effect. The details will be described later, but for example, the decorative symbol 41 with low decorativeness is displayed in the SP reach effect, the SPSP reach effect, and the high-probability time-saving gaming state, and the decorative symbol 41 with low decorativeness is displayed in other cases. Is displayed.

(Variable image 51)
As shown in FIG. 106 (1), the image display unit 114 displays a variable image 51 indicating that the special symbol is changing (during the variable display of the decorative symbol 41). Then, the variable image 51 starts to be displayed in the area where the variable image 51 is displayed (in the illustrated example, the lower central portion in the display area of the image display unit 114) when the special symbol changes, and the special symbol is displayed. The display disappears when the fluctuation stops. Further, a variable pedestal is displayed in the area where the variable image 51 is displayed.

Here, the display mode of the variable image 51 is determined based on the pre-determination result by the pre-determination process. Further, the variable image 51 notifies or informs the jackpot expectation degree based on the pre-determination result by the pre-determination process, for example, by changing the display mode of the color, pattern, shape, etc. (hereinafter, referred to as “color, etc.”). May suggest.

(Reserved image 52)
As shown in FIG. 106 (1), the reserved image 52 is displayed on the image display unit 114 based on the information of the storage area corresponding to the reserved ball this time. That is, the reserved image 52 is an image showing that the right to determine the jackpot is reserved. Further, in the present embodiment, the display mode of the reserved image 52 on the display screen is determined based on the pre-determination result by the pre-determination process.
Further, a holding pedestal is displayed in the area where the holding image 52 is displayed. The variable pedestal of the variable image 51 and the reserved pedestal of the reserved image 52 are displayed in different modes.

Further, the reserved image 52 notifies or suggests the degree of expectation of winning the jackpot by changing the display mode such as color based on, for example, the preliminary determination result by the preliminary determination process. Here, the display mode such as the color of the reserved image 52 is set so that when the pre-judgment result by the pre-judgment process is a big hit, the display mode has a higher degree of expectation than when it is out of order. There is. For example, when white, blue, yellow, green, red, and gold are set as the colors of the reserved image 52, the expected degree may be set to be higher in this order.

Further, in the present embodiment, the reserved image 52 and the variable image 51 are basically composed of the same or similar forms, respectively. However, the form may be different between the reserved image 52 and the variable image 51, or between the plurality of reserved images 52, depending on the content of the effect and the progress of the effect.

In the following description, with respect to the four reserved images 52 displayed at the maximum, the "first reserved image 52", the "second reserved image 52", and the "third" are arranged in the order of proximity to the variable image 51, respectively. It may be referred to as "holding image 52" or "fourth holding image 52".

(Holding number display 55)
As shown in FIG. 106 (1), the image display unit 114 displays the hold number display 55 based on the information of the storage area corresponding to the hold ball. The hold number display 55 is an image showing the hold number. Here, the number of the reserved images 52 displayed on the image display unit 114 changes according to the number of reserved images for winning each of the first starting port 10 and the second starting port 11a.

(Small design 56)
Here, the decorative symbol 41 may change in display position, display size, design, and the like, for example, with the progress of variable staging. Further, the decorative design 41 may be completely or partially hidden by the movable staging member 115 (movable staging member 17B) that can be moved with respect to the display screen of the image display unit 114. In such a case, it may be difficult for the player to visually recognize the decorative symbol for notifying the player that the special symbol is originally displayed in a variable manner.
Therefore, in the present embodiment, the small symbol 56 is displayed on the display screen of the image display unit 114 to notify the player that the special symbol is variablely displayed. Further, in the present embodiment, by displaying the small symbol 56, the notification of the jackpot determination result by the decorative symbol 41 and the notification of the type of the jackpot symbol indicated by the decorative symbol 41 are assisted. ..
In the embodiment, the small symbol 56 is displayed on the display screen of the image display unit 114 in such a manner that the player can always see it. That is, the small symbol 56 is not completely or partially hidden by another image, the movable staging member 115, or the like.

As shown in FIG. 106 (1), the small symbol 56 is composed of three symbols corresponding to the decorative symbol 41. The three symbols constituting the small symbol 56 are arranged so as to be arranged in the vertical direction. The small symbol 56 is displayed as an image having a smaller display size than the decorative symbol 41. Further, as described above, the decorative symbol 41 may be displayed in a display mode with high decorativeness or a display mode with low decorativeness, but the small symbol 56 may be displayed in a display mode with low decorativeness. Only displayed in. However, even in the small symbol 56, it may be displayed in a highly decorative display mode.

In the example shown in FIG. 106 (1), the three symbols constituting the small symbol 56 are arranged side by side in the vertical direction, but the present invention is not limited to this mode. For example, the three symbols constituting the small symbol 56 may be arranged side by side in the left-right direction.

Further, the number of symbols constituting the small symbol 56 does not have to match the number of symbols constituting the decorative symbol 41. For example, when the number of symbols constituting the decorative symbol 41 is three (three digits), the number of symbols constituting the small symbol 56 may be one (one digit).
Further, the small symbol 56 is not limited to the case where one pair is provided in the image display unit 114 with the three symbols as one pair. For example, in the small symbol 56, two or more pairs may be displayed at the same time on the image display unit 114.

(Stage image 61)
As shown in FIG. 100 (1), the stage image 61 is displayed on the image display unit 114 as a background of the decorative symbol 41 and the like. The stage image 61 is, for example, an image (stage or the like) related to the content (idol, animation character, or the like) that is the subject of the gaming machine 1. In the illustrated example, a space-themed image is displayed as the stage image 61. The stage image 61 is switched, for example, when the variation effect in one stage is performed a predetermined number of times. Further, the stage image 61 may be switched, for example, when a specific variation effect (for example, a variation effect in which the SPSP reach effect is performed) is performed.

(Image 62 during return)
As shown in FIG. 100 (4), the returning image 62 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The returning image 62 is an image notifying that the gaming machine 1 is recovering from the power off state. In the illustrated example, the text "returning" is displayed as the returning image 62. When the recovery from the power off state of the gaming machine 1 is completed, the returning image 62 is hidden.

(Menu display explanation image 63)
As shown in FIG. 101 (7), the menu display explanatory image 63 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The menu display explanation image 63 is an image for explaining a method for displaying the menu screen. The menu screen is a screen on which the items of the effect that can be set by the player are displayed. In the illustrated example, the menu display explanatory image 63 displays an image imitating the effect button 161 and the text “display the menu screen with the button”.

(Volume image 64)
As shown in FIG. 101 (7), the volume image 64 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The volume image 64 is an image showing the volume of the sound output from the speaker 156. In the illustrated example, the volume image 64 shows the currently set volume level among the plurality of levels that can be output as the volume level by the gauge. Further, the volume image 64 shows an image imitating the speaker 156. When the player operates the effect key 162, the volume output from the speaker 156 is adjusted, and the volume image 64 shows a gauge at a stage corresponding to the adjusted volume.

(Customer waiting image 65)
As shown in FIG. 101 (8), the customer waiting image 65 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The customer waiting image 65 is, for example, an image related to the content (idol, animation character, etc.) that is the subject of the gaming machine 1. The customer waiting image 65 is displayed when the gaming machine 1 is in the customer waiting state.

(Image 66 being initialized)
As shown in FIG. 102 (4), the image 66 being initialized is displayed on the image display unit 114. The initializing image 66 is an image notifying that the initialization restoration is being executed. In the illustrated example, the text "Initializing" is displayed as the initializing image 66. When the initialization restoration is completed, the initialization image 66 is hidden.

(Initialization completed image 67)
As shown in FIG. 101 (5), the initialization completed image 67 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The initialization completion image 67 is an image for notifying that the initialization restoration is completed. In the illustrated example, the text "initialized" is displayed as the initialization completed image 67.

(SP reach image 68)
As shown in FIG. 108 (10), the SP reach image 68 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The SP reach image 68 is, for example, a moving image in which a character appearing in the content that is the subject of the gaming machine 1 plays a mini game.

(SPSP reach image 69)
As shown in FIG. 108 (11), the SPSP reach image 69 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The SPSP reach image 69 is, for example, a moving image in which characters appearing in the content that is the subject of the gaming machine 1 fight.

(Opening image 70)
As shown in FIG. 108 (10), the opening image 70 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The opening image 70 is an image for notifying the player of the start of the jackpot game. In the illustrated example, the text "BIG Bonus! Congratulations" is displayed as the opening image 70. The opening image 70 has contents suggesting the type of jackpot (for example, the total number of rounds) and the gaming state after the jackpot game is completed.

(Right-handed image 71)
As shown in FIG. 108 (10), the right-handed image 71 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The right-handed image 71 is an image for instructing the player to shoot the game ball toward the right side in the game area 111. In the illustrated example, the right-handed image 71 is displayed with an arrow mark pointing to the right and the text "right-handed". The right-handed image 71 is displayed, for example, during a jackpot game or in a time-saving game state.

(Image 72 during the round)
As shown in FIG. 110 (11), the image 72 during the round is displayed on the image display unit 114. The image 72 during this round is a moving image of a character appearing in the content that is the subject of the gaming machine 1. The in-round image 72 is displayed during the round in the jackpot game.

(Music selection image 73)
As shown in FIG. 110 (11), the music selection image 73 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The music selection image 73 is an image for selecting a music output from the speaker 156 during the jackpot game being executed. In the illustrated example, "music A" is selected in the music selection image 73. When the player operates the effect key 162 to select a music, the selected music is output from the speaker 156, and the name of the selected music is displayed on the music selection image 73.

(Round number image 74)
As shown in FIG. 110 (11), the round number image 74 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The round number image 74 is an image for notifying the player of the number of rounds of the round currently being executed in the jackpot game. In the illustrated example, the text "Round 1" is displayed as the round number image 74.

(Point number image 75)
As shown in FIG. 110 (11), the point number image 75 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The point number image 75 is an image for notifying the player of the number of prize balls due to the winning of the game ball in the big winning opening 125 in the big hit game. In the illustrated example, the text "50pt" is displayed as the point number image 75.

(Highly accurate fan image 76)
As shown in FIG. 110 (12), the highly accurate fanned image 76 is displayed on the image display unit 114. This high-probability fanning image 76 is an image that fanning whether or not the gaming state of the gaming machine 1 after the end of the jackpot game becomes a high-probability time-saving gaming state. The high-accuracy fanned image 76 is, for example, a moving image in which a character appearing in the content that is the subject of the gaming machine 1 plays a mini-game.

(Highly accurate notification image 77)
As shown in FIG. 110 (13), the high-accuracy notification image 77 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The high-probability notification image 77 is an image suggesting or notifying that the gaming state of the gaming machine 1 after the end of the jackpot game becomes a high-probability time-saving gaming state.

(Character selection image 79)
As shown in FIG. 110 (16), the character selection image 79 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The character selection image 79 is an image for the player to select a character that appears in the effect after the end of the jackpot game. In the character selection image 79, the character corresponding to the operation of the effect key 162 by the player is displayed.

(High accuracy start image 80)
As shown in FIG. 111 (17), the high-accuracy start image 80 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The high-probability start image 80 is an image that notifies the start of a high-probability time-saving gaming state. In the illustrated example, the text "Excite mode entered !!" is displayed as the high-accuracy start image 80.

(Game continuation instruction image 81)
As shown in FIG. 111 (5), the game continuation instruction image 81 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The game continuation instruction image 81 is an image for instructing the player to continuously execute the game. More specifically, the game continuation instruction image 81 is an image for instructing the continuation of the game played by the player before the game machine 1 is turned off. In the illustrated example, the text "Please continue the game" is displayed as the game continuation instruction image 81. The game continuation instruction image 81 may be an image for notifying that the game is being executed, for example, a text such as "a game is being played".

(Preliminary image 82)
As shown in FIG. 115 (9), the preview image 82 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The preview image 82 is an image that announces that there is a possibility of winning a big hit in the variation production after the variation being executed. In the illustrated example, the text "Chance at the next fluctuation !?" is displayed as the preview image 82. The preview image 82 is displayed based on the pre-determination result by the pre-determination process.

(Right-handed image 83 during return)
As shown in FIG. 118 (11), the right-handed image 83 during return is displayed on the image display unit 114. The right-handed image 83 during the return is an image for instructing the player to shoot the game ball toward the right side in the game area 111 when the game machine 1 is recovering from the power off state. The returning right-handed image 83 of the present embodiment has a different display mode from the right-handed image 71 (see FIG. 121 (10)). More specifically, the right-handed image 83 during the return is displayed with an arrow mark thicker than the right-handed image 71. Further, the text "right-handed" is displayed on the right-handed image 83 during the return.

(Big hit notification image 84)
As shown in FIG. 119 (3), the jackpot notification image 84 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The jackpot notification image 84 is an image suggesting or notifying that the jackpot game is being executed. In the illustrated example, the text "Big hit in progress" is displayed as the big hit notification image 84.

(Game start notification image 85)
As shown in FIG. 119 (3), the game start notification image 85 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The game start notification image 85 is an image suggesting or notifying that the game is being executed. In the illustrated example, the text "The game has started" is displayed as the game start notification image 85.

(Game execution instruction image 86)
As shown in FIG. 119 (3), the game execution instruction image 86 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The game execution instruction image 86 is an image for instructing the player to perform the game. In the illustrated example, the text "Please play the game" is displayed on the game execution instruction image 86.

(Right-handed instruction image 87)
As shown in FIG. 119 (3), the right-handed instruction image 87 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The right-handed instruction image 87 is an image for instructing the player to launch the game ball toward the right side in the game area 4a. In the illustrated example, the text "Please hit right" is displayed as the right-handed instruction image 87.

(Hit image 88)
As shown in FIG. 110 (11), the hit image 88 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The hit image 88 is an image showing the numbers of the decorative symbols 41 combined in the variable effect when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a big hit. In the illustrated example, the number "6" is displayed.

(Button operation image 89)
As shown in FIG. 124 (6), the button operation image 89 is displayed on the image display unit 114. By displaying this button operation image 89, it is possible to recognize that it is the timing for the player to operate the effect button 6a. In the illustrated example, an image imitating the effect button 6a is displayed as the button operation image 89.

[Production example]
In this embodiment, various effects are performed. For example, the production example includes a change effect, a chance eye display effect, a high-accuracy fanning effect, a high-accuracy notification effect, a high-accuracy start notification effect, a next fluctuation expectation effect, an operation effect, and a character movement effect. Hereinafter, each effect will be described.

(Change production)
As shown in FIG. 114 (2), the change effect is an effect of changing the display mode of the variable image 51 or the reserved image 52. More specifically, the change effect is an effect of changing the display color, pattern, shape, or the like (hereinafter, referred to as “display color or the like”) of the variable image 51 or the reserved image 52. In the present embodiment, the display color of the variable image 51 or the reserved image 52 is changed to notify or suggest the expected degree of winning the jackpot to the player. The change effect can be executed based on the pre-determination result by the pre-determination process. In the illustrated example, any of "blue", "yellow", "green", "red", and "gold" is selected as the display color. For example, the final display color of the variable image may be set in the order of blue, yellow, green, red, and gold so that the later the order, the higher the expectation. In the illustrated example, the third reserved image 52 is displayed in blue by executing the change effect.

(Chance eye display production)
As shown in FIG. 114 (3), the chance eye display effect is an effect of displaying the chance eye. Here, the chance eyes are three decorative symbols 41 that are combined by different symbols of the same color. The chance eye display effect, for example, informs or suggests that there is a high possibility of a big hit in the variable display of the next and subsequent special symbols. The chance eye display effect is one aspect of the advance notice effect. In the illustrated example, the entire three decorative symbols 41 are displayed in blue due to the chance eye display effect.

(Highly accurate fanning production)
As shown in FIG. 110 (12), the high-probability fanning effect is an effect of fanning whether or not the gaming state of the gaming machine 1 after the end of the jackpot game becomes a high-probability time-saving gaming state. In the high-accuracy fanning effect, the high-accuracy fanning image 76 is displayed.

(Highly accurate notification production)
As shown in FIG. 110 (13), the high-probability notification effect is an effect that suggests or notifies that the gaming state of the gaming machine 1 after the end of the jackpot game becomes a high-probability time-saving gaming state. In the high-accuracy notification effect, the high-accuracy notification image 77 is displayed.

(Highly accurate start notification production)
As shown in FIG. 111 (17), the high-probability start notification effect is an effect of notifying the start of a high-probability time-saving gaming state. In the high-accuracy start notification effect, the high-accuracy start image 80 is displayed.

(Next fluctuation expectation production)
As shown in FIG. 115 (9), the next fluctuation expectation effect is an effect that expects a jackpot to be won in the subsequent fluctuations after the fluctuation being executed. This next fluctuation expectation effect is an example of a notice effect. In the next fluctuation expectation effect, the preview image 82 is displayed.

(Operation production)
As shown in FIG. 124 (6), the operation effect is an effect that encourages the player to operate the effect button 6a. In the operation effect, the button operation image 89 is displayed.

(Character movement production)
As shown in FIG. 124 (7), the accessory motion effect is an effect in which the movable effect member 115 moves to the front side of the image display unit 114 and covers the whole or a part of the image display area in the image display unit 114. Further, the movable effect member 115 may emit light as the accessory operation effect. Further, as the accessory movement effect, the movable effect member 115 may be moved to a position different from the front side of the image display unit 114. Further, as the accessory movement effect, the movable effect member 115 may emit light without moving.

By the way, in the present embodiment, for example, even if a problem occurs in the display of the decorative symbol 41 or the small symbol 56 on the image display unit 114, the first special symbol shown in FIGS. 1 and 3 (b) is displayed. It is guaranteed that the player is notified that the special symbol is fluctuating by the second display 20a and the second special symbol 2nd display 20b. However, if it is attempted to strictly display even the type of decorative symbol by the first special symbol 2nd display 20a or the 2nd special symbol 2nd display 20b, for example, the 1st special symbol 1st according to the number of types of decorative symbols. 2 Display variations 20a and 2nd special symbol 2 display 20b are prepared with variations of lighting patterns, and 1st special symbol 2nd display 20a and 2nd special symbol 2nd display 20b are prepared according to the plurality of variations. It needs to be lit. Then, the load of the lamp control unit 320 that controls the first special symbol 2nd display 20a and the 2nd special symbol 2nd display 20b becomes large, and by extension, the load applied to the staging control unit 300 that controls the lamp control unit 320. May increase.
Therefore, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the first special symbol 2nd display 20a and the 2nd special symbol 2nd display 20b are not notified of the type of the decorative symbol, and the decorative symbol changes as a minimum function. I am trying to notify you of what you are doing.

However, apart from the above-mentioned viewpoint of suppressing the load of image control, for example, the functions of the first special symbol second display 20a and the second special symbol second display 20b are performed on the display screen of the image display unit 114. You may. That is, the functions of the first special symbol second display 20a and the second special symbol second display 20b may be realized by the displayed image.

100 and 101 are diagrams showing an example of processing performed by the main control board 110 and the staging control unit 130m when the gaming machine 1 returns from the power off state.
Next, with reference to FIGS. 100 and 101, the processing performed by the main control board 110 and the staging control unit 130m when the gaming machine 1 returns from the power off state will be specifically described. The process of the staging control unit 130m shown in FIGS. 100 and 101 is performed by transmitting a command for controlling power-on at the time of restoration from the main control board 110 to the staging control unit 130m.

(Processing example 1)
First, as shown in FIG. 100 (1), the staging control unit 300 ends the variation of the previous special symbol, and the decorative symbol 41 with high decorativeness is displayed on the screen of the image display unit 114. It is assumed that "213" has been fixedly suspended. At this time, the image display unit 114 displays the hold number display 55, the small symbol 56, and the stage image 61. Further, at this time, the hold number display 55 of the first start port 10 and the hold number display 55 of the second start port 11a both indicate "0", and the small symbol 56 "213" is fixedly stopped.

Further, at this time, the special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol first display 19a. Further, at this time, the first special symbol second display 133 is stopped and displayed. Further, at this time, a predetermined BGM is output from the speaker 9. This BGM is a BGM defined according to the type of the stage image 61.
At this time, the left movable effect member 115A, the middle movable effect member 115B, the right movable effect member 115C, the frame lamp 157, the board lamp 116, and the effect button 161 emit white light. The movable effect member 115, the frame lamp 157, the board lamp 116, and the effect button 161 are all regarded as light emitting means capable of emitting light.

Then, when the gaming machine 1 is turned off, the image is not displayed on the image display unit 114 as shown in FIG. 100 (2). More specifically, the image display unit 114 is turned off. At this time, the special symbol is turned off in the first special symbol first display 221. At this time, the first special symbol second display 133 is turned off. Further, at this time, no sound is output from the speaker 156. At this time, each of the left movable effect member 115A, the middle movable effect member 115B, the right movable effect member 115C, the frame lamp 157, the board lamp 116, and the effect button 161 is turned off.

Then, in the state where the RAM clear switch 58c is OFF, the gaming machine 1 recovers from the power off state. That is, in the processing example 1, the non-initialization restoration is performed. In this case, as shown in FIG. 100 (3), the special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 221. On the other hand, in the first special symbol second display 133, the state of turning off the light is maintained. Further, the image display unit 114 also maintains the off state. Further, the speaker 156 maintains a state in which no sound is output. Further, each of the left movable effect member 115A, the middle movable effect member 115B, the right movable effect member 115C, the frame lamp 157, the board lamp 116, and the effect button 161 is maintained in the off state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 100 (4), the returning image 62 is displayed on the image display unit 114. At this time, the first special symbol second display 133 is stopped and displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 101 (5), the decorative symbol 41 "315" is displayed on the image display unit 114. Further, "315", which is a small symbol 56, is displayed on the image display unit 114. Further, the image display unit 114 displays the hold number display 55. Further, the image display unit 114 displays a space-themed image as the stage image 61. That is, the same stage image 61 as immediately before the gaming machine 1 is turned off is displayed. At this time, the non-initialization restoration process is performed. In the non-initialization return processing, each of the left movable effect member 115A, the middle movable effect member 115B, the right movable effect member 115C, the frame lamp 157, the board lamp 116, and the effect button 161 emits blue light. At this time, the effect of the effect button 161 being operated by the player is not performed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 101 (6), a non-initialization test operation process is performed. In the non-initialization test operation process, the left movable effect member 115A, the middle movable effect member 115B, and the right movable effect member 115C are lowered so as to cover a part of the image display unit 114, respectively. Further, in the non-initialization test operation process, the effect button 161 is moved from the non-protruding state to the protruding state. The operation of the movable effect member 115 in the non-initialization test operation process is described with reference to FIGS. 76 to 99, and the movable effect device 17 (first movable effect member 17A, No. 1) when the RWM clear process is performed. 2 This is an example of the initial operation of the movable staging member 17B). Further, at this time, the initialization / recovery process is continuously performed. At this time, the effect caused by the player operating the effect button 161 is not executed. Further, at this time, the non-initialization restoration process is continuously performed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 101 (7), the left movable effect member 115A, the middle movable effect member 115B, and the right movable effect member 115C are raised, and the effect button 161 returns from the protruding state to the non-projected state, so that the effect button 161 is not projected. The initialization test operation process is completed. Further, the menu display explanation image 63 and the volume image 64 are displayed on the image display unit 114. At this time, the left movable effect member 115A, the middle movable effect member 115B, the right movable effect member 115C, the frame lamp 157, the board lamp 116, and the effect button 161 all emit white light. That is, in each of the light emitting modes of the left movable effect member 115A, the middle movable effect member 115B, the right movable effect member 115C, the frame lamp 157, the board lamp 116, and the effect button 161, the gaming machine 1 is in the power off state. Return to the previous light emission mode. The light emitting mode before the gaming machine 1 is turned off is referred to as a normal light emitting mode below. This normal light emitting mode includes a light emitting mode when the gaming machine 1 is not in the power off state. In other words, the normal light emitting mode is the light emitting mode of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the initialization return and the non-initialization return are not performed.
Further, the operation mode before the gaming machine 1 is turned off is referred to as a normal operation mode below. This normal operating mode includes an operating mode when the gaming machine 1 is not in the power off state. In other words, the normal operating mode is the operating mode of the gaming machine 1 when the initialization return and the non-initialization return are not performed. Here, the normal light emitting mode is an example of a normal operating mode.

Then, as shown in FIG. 101 (8), the customer waiting image 65 is displayed on the image display unit 114. Further, at this time, the speaker 156 maintains a state in which no sound is output. That is, the speaker 156 maintains a state in which no sound is output after the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned off.

In the processing example 1, it has been described that the first special symbol second display 133a is stopped and displayed when the returning image 62 is displayed, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the first special symbol second display 133 may be stopped and displayed after the returning image 62 is displayed. Further, for example, when the returning image 62 is displayed, the special symbol may be stopped and displayed on the first special symbol first display 221. Further, after the returning image 62 is displayed, the special symbol may be stopped and displayed on the first special symbol first display 221 and then the first special symbol second display 133 may be stopped and displayed. That is, the first special symbol second display 133 may be stopped and displayed after the special symbol is displayed on the first special symbol first display 221.

Further, in the process example 1, the effect button 161 operates in the non-initialization test operation process regardless of whether or not the player operates the effect button 161, but the present invention is not limited to this.
For example, in the non-initialization test operation process, the effect button 161 may be operated by the player operating the effect button 161.

(Processing example 2)
102 and 103 are diagrams showing an example of processing performed by the main control board 110 and the staging control unit 130m when the gaming machine 1 returns from the power off state.
Next, another specific example (processing example 2) of the processing performed by the main control board 110 and the staging control unit 130m when the gaming machine 1 returns from the power off state will be described with reference to FIGS. 102 and 103. ..
In the following description, the points different from the processing example 1 will be mainly described, and the points that match the processing example 1 may be omitted. Further, the processing of the staging control unit 130m shown in FIGS. 102 and 103 is performed by transmitting a command for controlling the power-on at the time of clearing the RAM from the main control board 110 to the staging control unit 130m.

First, as shown in FIG. 102 (1), the decorative symbol 41 "213" is confirmed on the screen of the image display unit 114 as the variation of the previous special symbol is completed by the staging control unit 130m. It has been stopped. Further, at this time, the special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol 1st display 221. Further, at this time, the first special symbol second display 133 is stopped and displayed. At this time, the BGM is output from the speaker 156. At this time, the left movable effect member 115A, the middle movable effect member 115B, the right movable effect member 115C, the frame lamp 157, the board lamp 116, and the effect button 161 all emit white light.

Then, when the gaming machine 1 is turned off, the image display unit 114 is turned off as shown in FIG. 102 (2). At this time, the special symbol is turned off on the first special symbol display 221. At this time, the first special symbol second display 133 is turned off. Further, at this time, no sound is output from the speaker 156. At this time, each of the left movable effect member 115A, the middle movable effect member 115B, the right movable effect member 115C, the frame lamp 157, the board lamp 116, and the effect button 161 is turned off.

Then, in the state where the RAM clear switch 58c is ON, the gaming machine 1 recovers from the power off state. That is, in the process example 2, the initialization return is performed. In this case, as shown in FIG. 102 (3), the special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol first display 221.
Next, as shown in FIG. 102 (4), the image 66 being initialized is displayed on the image display unit 114. At this time, the first special symbol first display 133 is stopped and displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 101 (5), the decorative symbol 41 "753" is displayed on the image display unit 114. Further, "753", which is a small symbol 56, is displayed on the image display unit 114. Further, the image display unit 114 displays a space-themed image as the stage image 61. That is, the same stage image 61 as immediately before the gaming machine 1 is turned off is displayed. At this time, the initialization completed image 67 is displayed on the image display unit 114. At this time, the initialization notification process is performed. In the initialization notification process, the fact that the initialization process has been performed is notified by voice. More specifically, in the initialization notification process, a voice "initialized" is output from the speaker 156, and a warning sound is output following this voice. At this time, the initialization / recovery process is performed. In the initialization restoration process, each of the left movable effect member 115A, the middle movable effect member 115B, the right movable effect member 115C, the frame lamp 157, the board lamp 116, and the effect button 161 emit red light. At this time, the effect caused by the player operating the effect button 161 is not executed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 101 (6), the initialization test operation process is performed. In the initialization test operation process, the left movable effect member 115A, the middle movable effect member 115B, and the right movable effect member 115C each descend so as to cover a part of the image display unit 114. Further, in the initialization test operation process, the effect button 161 moves from the non-protruding state to the protruding state and vibrates. The operation of the movable effect member 115 in the initialization test operation process is described with reference to FIGS. 76 to 99, and the movable effect device 17 (first movable member 17A, second movable member 17A, second movable) when the RWM clear process is performed. This is an example of the initial operation of the member 17B). At this time, the initialization notification process is performed again. Further, at this time, the initialization / recovery process is continuously performed. At this time, the effect caused by the player operating the effect button 161 is not executed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 101 (7), the left movable effect member 115A, the middle movable effect member 115B, and the right movable effect member 115C are raised, and the effect button 161 returns from the protruding state to the non-projected state. The initialization test operation process is completed. At this time, the initialization notification process is performed again. Further, at this time, the initialization / recovery process is continuously performed. At this time, the effect caused by the player operating the effect button 161 is not executed.

Then, when the third initialization notification process is completed, as shown in FIG. 101 (8), the menu display explanation image 63 and the volume image 64 are displayed on the image display unit 114. That is, when no sound is output from the speaker 156, the menu display explanation image 63 and the volume image 64 are displayed. At this time, the left movable effect member 115A, the middle movable effect member 115B, the right movable effect member 115C, the frame lamp 157, the board lamp 116, and the effect button 161 all emit white light. That is, each of the left movable effect member 115A, the middle movable effect member 115B, the right movable effect member 115C, the frame lamp 157, the board lamp 116, and the effect button 161 returns to the normal light emission mode.

Then, as shown in FIG. 104 (9), the customer waiting image 65 is displayed on the image display unit 114. Further, at this time, the speaker 156 maintains a state in which no sound is output. That is, the speaker 156 maintains a state in which no sound is output from the time when the menu display explanation image 63 and the volume image 64 are displayed. In other words, in the speaker 156, when each of the left movable effect member 115A, the middle movable effect member 115B, the right movable effect member 115C, the frame lamp 157, the board lamp 116, and the effect button 161 changes to the normal light emission mode. Therefore, the state where no sound is output is maintained.

In the process example 2, the effect button 161 is moving in the initialization test operation process regardless of whether or not the player operates the effect button 161, but the present invention is not limited to this.
For example, in the initialization test operation process, the effect button 161 may be moved by the player operating the effect button 161.

Further, in the processing example 2, it has been described that the initialization notification processing is started when the decorative symbol 41 is displayed, but the present invention is not limited to this.
For example, the initialization notification process may be started when the initializing image 66 is displayed. That is, the initialization notification process may be performed before the decorative symbol 41 or the stage image 61 is displayed. Then, when the decorative symbol 41 or the stage image 61 is displayed, the initialization notification process is completed, and the sound may not be output from the speaker 156.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the staging control unit 130m operates the frame lamp 157 and the like in an operation mode different from the case where the non-initialization return is performed when the initialization return is performed. The initialization return is regarded as the first return accompanied by the initialization of the information stored in the main RAM 110c. Further, the non-initialization return is regarded as a second return without initialization of the information stored in the main RAM 110c. Further, the frame lamp 157 is an example of an effect means for executing the effect. Further, each of the board lamp 116, the movable effect member 115, and the effect button 161 is also captured as the effect means.

In this case, for example, the clerk in the hall where the gaming machine 1 is installed can either return to initialization or return to non-initialization by checking the operation mode when the gaming machine 1 is restored from the power-off state. Can be recognized if Therefore, for example, the clerk in the hall confirms the operation mode of the gaming machine 1 when the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned on with the RAM clear switch 58c turned off even though the purpose is to restore the initialization. Therefore, it is possible to recognize that the initialization restoration has not been performed and to perform the initialization restoration. That is, it is possible to prevent the clerk of the hall from continuing to perform the non-initialization restoration of the gaming machine 1 even though the purpose is to restore the initialization.

Further, in the present embodiment, the staging control unit 130m operates the staging button 161 and the movable staging member 115 in a special operation mode different from the case where the non-initialization return is performed when the initialization return is performed. Then, when the operation mode of the effect button 161 is changed from the special operation mode to the normal operation mode, the effect control unit 130 m also changes the operation mode of the movable effect member 115 from the special operation mode to the normal operation mode. The special operation mode is an operation mode of the effect button 161 and the movable effect member 115 when the initialization return is performed. Further, the effect button is regarded as an operation means that can be operated by the player.

In this case, the operation mode of the effect button 161 and the movable effect member 115 is compared with the case where the operation mode of any one of the effect button 161 and the movable effect member 115 is changed to the normal operation mode and the other operation mode is not changed. As the change is conspicuous, it becomes easier to recognize the change in the operation mode of the effect button 161 and the movable effect member 115. Therefore, it becomes easy to confirm the operation of the effect button 161 and the movable effect member 115 when the gaming machine 1 returns from the power off state.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the initialization restoration is performed, at least a part of the frame lamp 157 and at least a part of the panel lamp 116 emit light by a special light emitting mode different from the case where the non-initialization restoration is performed. When at least a part of the light emitting mode of the frame lamp 157 changes from the special light emitting mode to the normal light emitting mode, the light emitting mode of at least a part of the panel lamp 116 also changes from the special light emitting mode to the normal light emitting mode.

In this case, when one of the light emitting modes of the frame lamp 157 and the board lamp 116 changes to the normal light emitting mode, the light emitting mode of the frame lamp 157 and the board lamp 116 changes as compared with the case where the other light emitting mode does not change. As much as it stands out, changes in the light emitting mode of the frame lamp 157 and the panel lamp 116 can be easily recognized. Therefore, it becomes easy to confirm the light emission of the frame lamp 157 and the board lamp 116 when the gaming machine 1 recovers from the power off state.

Further, in the present embodiment, the effect control unit 130 m moves the movable effect member 115 of at least one of the plurality of movable effect members 115 in the same manner when the initialization return is performed and when the deinitialization return is performed. It is moved according to the mode, and at least one of the plurality of movable staging members 115 is operated according to different modes depending on whether the initialization return is performed or the non-initialization return is performed. Each of the left movable effect member 115A, the middle movable effect member 115B, and the right movable effect member 115C is regarded as a movable portion. Further, in a broad sense, the effect button 161 is also regarded as a movable portion.

In this case, regardless of whether the initialization return or the non-initialization return is performed, the movable staging member 115 can be made to perform the test operation necessary for returning the gaming machine 1 from the power off state. On the other hand, for example, the clerk in the hall where the gaming machine 1 is installed can recognize whether the initialization return or the non-initialization return has been performed by confirming the operation mode of the movable staging member 115.

Further, in the present embodiment, the frame lamp 157, the panel lamp 116, the movable staging member 115, and the staging button 161 are synchronized with each other at the timing at which the light emitting mode changes to the normal light emitting mode when the initialization return processing is performed. ing.
In this case, it becomes easier to recognize that the light emitting mode of each of the frame lamp 157, the panel lamp 116, the movable staging member 115, and the staging button 161 has changed to the normal light emitting mode.

Further, in the present embodiment, the stage image 61 (see FIG. 101 (5)) displayed when the non-initialization restoration is performed and the stage image 61 (FIG. 101) displayed when the initialization restoration is performed. (See (5)) is the same. On the other hand, when the initialization restoration is performed, the initialization image 66 is displayed, but the initialization image 66 is not displayed when the non-initialization restoration is performed. That is, when the initialization return is performed, an image that is not displayed when the non-initialization return is performed is displayed from the time when the gaming machine 1 is turned off until the stage image 61 is displayed.
In this case, the clerk in the hall can recognize whether the initialization restoration or the non-initialization restoration has been performed by checking the display contents of the image display unit 114.

Even when the initialization return is performed, the restoring image 62 may be displayed instead of the initialization image 66 by the time the stage image 61 is displayed. In this case, in addition to the returning image 62, an image suggesting or notifying that the initialization process is being performed may be displayed. Further, the display content on the image display unit 114 until the stage image 61 is displayed may be the same depending on whether the initialization restoration is performed or the non-initialization restoration is performed.

Further, in the present embodiment, each of the light emitting modes of the frame lamp 157, the board lamp 116, the movable staging member 115, and the staging button 161 is changed to the normal light emitting mode at the timing when a specific image is displayed. Here, examples of the specific image include a menu display explanatory image 63, a volume image 64, and the like.
In this case, even if a specific image is displayed, it is possible to prevent the gaming machine 1 from being misidentified as having an abnormality because the light emitting mode of each light emitting means does not change to the normal light emitting mode.

Further, in the present embodiment, a sound that is not output when the initialization return is performed and the non-initialization return is performed is output.
In this case, the clerk in the hall can recognize whether the initialization recovery or the non-initialization recovery has been performed by listening to the sound output from the speaker 156.

Further, in the present embodiment, as the sound output when the initialization is restored, that is, the sound output in the initialization notification process, a specific image such as the menu display explanation image 63 or the volume image 64 is displayed. It will not be output at the timing.
In this case, it is possible to prevent the gaming machine 1 from being mistakenly recognized as having an abnormality because the sound generated in the initialization notification process continues to be output even after the display of a specific image.

Further, in the present embodiment, each of the light emitting modes of the frame lamp 157, the board lamp 116, the movable effect member 115, and the effect button 161 is set to the normal light emitting mode at the timing when the sound generated in the initialization notification process is not output. I'm changing.
In this case, even if the sound generated in the initialization notification process is no longer output, the light emitting mode of each light emitting means does not return to the normal light emitting mode, so that it is possible to prevent the gaming machine 1 from being mistakenly recognized as having an abnormality.

In the present embodiment, each of the frame lamp 157, the panel lamp 116, the movable staging member 115, and the staging button 161 has a light emitting mode different from the normal light emitting mode during the non-initialization return processing. , Not limited to this. The light emitting mode at the time of the non-initialization restoration process of each light emitting means may be a normal light emitting mode.

Further, in the present embodiment, the emission color of each of the frame lamp 157, the panel lamp 116, the movable effect member 115, and the effect button 161 during the initialization restoration process is different from the emission color during the non-initialization restoration process. However, it is not limited to this.
For example, the mode of blinking the light during the initialization / recovery process in each light emitting means may be different from the mode of blinking the light during the non-initialization / recovery process. That is, the light emitting mode at the time of the initialization / returning process in each light emitting means may be different from the light emitting mode at the time of the non-initialization / returning process.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the initialization return processing, the light emitting modes of the frame lamp 157, the panel lamp 116, the movable staging member 115, and the staging button 161 are the same, but the present invention is not limited to this. In the initialization restoration process, at least two or more of the frame lamp 157, the panel lamp 116, the movable staging member 115, and the staging button 161 may have the same light emitting mode, or any of the light emitting modes may be different. You may.

Further, in the present embodiment, the light emitting mode of each of the frame lamp 157, the panel lamp 116, the movable effect member 115, and the effect button 161 at the time of the initialization return processing is different from the light emission mode at the time of the non-initialization return processing. However, it is not limited to this.
For example, for at least one of the frame lamp 157, the panel lamp 116, the movable staging member 115, and the staging button 161, the light emitting mode at the time of the initialization return processing is different from the light emitting mode at the time of the non-initialization return processing. You may. In this case, the light emitting mode at the time of the initialization return processing in any of the frame lamp 157, the panel lamp 116, the movable effect member 115, and the effect button 161 is the same as the light emitting mode at the time of the non-initialization return processing. You may do it.

Further, in the present embodiment, the frame lamp 157, the panel lamp 116, the movable staging member 115, and the staging button 161 are synchronized with each other at the timing of changing from the light emitting mode at the time of the initialization return processing to the normal light emitting mode. Not limited to.
For example, the timing at which any two of the frame lamp 157, the panel lamp 116, the movable effect member 115, and the effect button 161 change from the light emission mode during the initialization recovery process to the normal light emission mode, and the other two return to initialization. The timing may be different from the timing at which the light emitting mode at the time of processing changes to the normal light emitting mode. Further, for example, the timing at which any three of the panel lamp 116, the movable effect member 115, and the effect button 161 change from the light emission mode during the initialization return process to the normal light emission mode is set, and the other one is during the initialization return process. The timing may be different from the timing at which the light emitting mode is changed to the normal light emitting mode. Further, among the frame lamp 157, the panel lamp 116, the movable staging member 115, and the staging button 161, any combination of the targets for synchronizing the timing of changing from the light emitting mode at the time of initialization notification processing to the normal light emitting mode may be used. good.

Further, for example, when the frame lamp 157 and the board lamp 116 emit light in a light emitting mode different from that in the non-initialization returning process during the initialization return processing, the portion that emits light in the different light emitting mode is the frame lamp 157 and the board lamp. It does not have to be the whole of 116. That is, at the time of the initialization restoration processing, a part of the frame lamp 157 and a part of the panel lamp 116 emit light in a light emitting mode different from that at the time of the non-initialization restoration processing, and the other part of the frame lamp 157 and the panel lamp 116 The other part may emit light in the same light emitting mode as in the non-initialization restoration process. In this case, the portion of the frame lamp 157 that emits light in a light emitting mode different from that in the non-initialization recovery process during the initialization / recovery process is regarded as the first light emitting unit. Further, the portion of the panel lamp 116 that emits light in a light emitting mode different from that in the non-initialization recovery process during the initialization / recovery process is regarded as a second light emitting unit. Further, the timing at which the light emitting mode of the first light emitting unit changes from the light emitting mode at the time of the initialization return processing to the normal light emitting mode is changed, and the light emitting mode of the second light emitting unit changes from the light emitting mode at the time of the initialization return processing to the normal light emitting mode. It may be synchronized with the timing.
Further, for example, when the timing at which the frame lamp 157 and the panel lamp 116 change from the light emitting mode during the initialization restoration process to the normal light emitting mode are synchronized with each other, the portion where the timing at which the light emitting mode changes is synchronized is the frame lamp 157 and the panel. It does not have to be the entire lamp 116, but may be at least a part of the frame lamp 157 and at least a part of the board lamp 116. That is, when any two or more of the frame lamp 157, the panel lamp 116, the movable staging member 115, and the staging button 161 change from the light emitting mode during the initialization recovery process to the normal light emitting mode, the timing is synchronized with each other. The portion where the timing at which the light emitting mode changes is synchronized may be at least a part of each light emitting means.

Further, in the present embodiment, the three movable staging members 115 operate in the same manner in the initialization test operation process and the non-initialization test operation process, but the present invention is not limited to this.
For example, one or two of the three movable effect members 115 may be made to move differently in the initialization test operation process and the non-initialization test operation process.

Further, in the present embodiment, each of the three movable staging members 115 has a different light emitting mode between the initialization restoration process and the non-initialization restoration process, but the present invention is not limited to this.
For example, one or two of the three movable effect members 115 may have the same light emitting mode in the initialization return process and the non-initialization return process. That is, it suffices that at least one of the three movable staging members 115 has a different light emitting mode between the initialization restoration process and the non-initialization restoration process.

(Period until the customer waiting image 65 is displayed)
Next, the period from when the power off state of the gaming machine 1 is resolved until the customer waiting image 65 is displayed will be described.
FIG. 105 shows a period from when the power-off state of the gaming machine 1 is resolved in the processing example 1 until the customer waiting image 65 is displayed, and after the power-off state of the gaming machine 1 is resolved in the processing example 2. It is explanatory drawing of the period until the customer waiting image 65 is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 105 (A), in the process example 1, when the gaming machine 1 is supplied with power and the power off state is resolved in the power off state, the returning image 62 (see FIG. 100 (4)) is displayed. Will be done. After that, the decorative symbol 41 is displayed, and the non-initialization restoration process is started. Further, when the time T1 elapses after the decorative symbol 41 is displayed, the non-initialization test operation process is started. Further, when the time T2 has elapsed from the start of the non-initialization test operation process, the non-initialization test operation process is completed. Further, when the time T3 elapses after the non-initialization test operation process is completed, the menu display explanation image 63 and the volume image 64 are displayed. At this time, the light emitting mode of the frame lamp 157, the board lamp 116, the movable staging member 115, and the staging button 161 is changed to the normal light emitting mode. Further, when the time T4 has elapsed since the menu display explanation image 63 is displayed, the customer waiting image 65 is displayed.

That is, when the deinitialization restoration is performed, the menu display explanation image 63 and the volume image 64 are displayed when "time T1 + time T2 + time T3" has elapsed after the decorative symbol 41 is displayed. Further, when "time T1 + time T2 + time T3 + time T4" has elapsed after the decorative symbol 41 is displayed, the customer waiting image 65 is displayed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 105 (B), in the process example 2, when the gaming machine 1 receives the power supply and the power off state is resolved in the power off state, the initialization image 66 (see FIG. 102 (4)). ) Is displayed. After that, the decorative symbol 41 is displayed, and the initialization restoration process is started. At this time, the first initialization notification process is performed. Further, when the time T5 has elapsed since the decorative symbol 41 is displayed, the initialization test operation process is started. This time T5 is equal to the time T1 (see FIG. 105 (A)). Further, when the time T6 has elapsed since the first initialization notification process was performed, the second initialization notification process is performed. Further, when the time T7 has elapsed from the start of the initialization test operation process, the initialization test operation process is completed. This time T7 is equal to the time T2. Further, when the time T8 has elapsed since the second initialization notification process was performed, the third initialization notification process is performed. This time T8 is equal to the time T6. Further, when the time T9 has elapsed since the third initialization notification process is performed, the menu display explanation image 63 and the volume image 64 are displayed. At this time, the light emitting mode of the frame lamp 157, the board lamp 116, the movable staging member 115, and the staging button 161 is changed to the normal light emitting mode. Further, when the time T10 has elapsed since the menu display explanation image 63 is displayed, the customer waiting image 65 is displayed. Here, the time T9 is equal to the time T3. Also, time T10 is equal to time T4.

That is, when the initialization restoration is performed, the menu display explanation image 63 and the volume image 64 are displayed when "time T6 + time T8 + time T9" has elapsed after the decorative symbol 41 is displayed. Further, when "time T6 + time T8 + time T9 + time T10" has elapsed after the decorative symbol 41 is displayed, the customer waiting image 65 is displayed. Here, in the process example 2, the time from the display of the decorative symbol 41 to the display of the menu display explanatory image 63 is longer than that in the process example 1 because the initialization notification process is performed. Further, in the processing example 2, the time from the display of the decorative symbol 41 to the display of the customer waiting image 65 is longer than that in the processing example 1 because the initialization notification processing is performed.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the image display unit 114 displays the first image when the gaming machine 1 returns from the power off state, and then displays the second image different from the first image. The time from the display of the first image to the display of the second image differs between the case where the initialization restoration is performed and the case where the non-initialization restoration is performed. Examples of the first image include a decorative symbol 41, a hold number display 55, a small symbol 56, a stage image 61, and the like. Further, examples of the second image include a menu display explanatory image 63, a volume image 64, a customer waiting image 65, and the like.
In this case, for example, the clerk in the hall recognizes whether the initialization recovery or the non-initialization recovery has been performed by checking the time from the display of the first image to the display of the second image. can do.

In particular, in the present embodiment, when the initialization restoration is performed, the second image is displayed after the first image is displayed, as compared with the case where the non-initialization restoration is performed by the amount of the initialization notification processing. Is displayed for a long time.
In this case, for example, by displaying the second image during the initialization notification process, it is possible to prevent the hall clerk from paying attention to the second image and forgetting to confirm the initialization notification process.

In the present embodiment, it has been described that when the non-initialization return is performed, the state in which no sound is output is maintained after the power off state of the gaming machine 1 is resolved, but the present invention is not limited to this.
For example, when the non-initialization recovery is performed, a sound suggesting or notifying that the gaming machine 1 has recovered from the power off state may be output. Then, the sound output in this case may be different from the sound output in the initialization notification process. Further, in this case, the notification period indicating that the initialization processing has been performed in the initialization notification processing suggests or notifies that the gaming machine 1 has recovered from the power off state when the non-initialization restoration is performed. It may be longer than the period. Here, the notification period that the initialization processing has been performed in the initialization notification processing is longer than the period that suggests or notifies that the gaming machine 1 has recovered from the power off state when the non-initialization recovery is performed. The lengthening includes neither suggesting nor notifying that the gaming machine 1 has returned from the power off state when the non-initialization return is performed. In addition, the number of notifications that the initialization processing has been performed in the initialization notification processing is larger than the number of times that the gaming machine 1 is suggested or notified that the gaming machine 1 has returned from the power off state when the non-initialization restoration is performed. May be.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the non-initialization return is performed, the non-initialization return process is performed when the stage image 61 or the decorative symbol 41 is displayed, but the present invention is not limited to this.
For example, when the deinitialization return is performed, the deinitialization return process may be performed before the stage image 61 or the decorative symbol 41 is displayed. Further, in this case, when the stage image 61 or the decorative symbol 41 is displayed, the light emitting mode of the frame lamp 157, the board lamp 116, the movable staging member 115, and the staging button 161 may be changed to the normal light emitting mode.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the initialization return is performed, the initialization return process is performed when the stage image 61 or the decorative symbol 41 is displayed, but the present invention is not limited to this.
For example, when the initialization return is performed, the initialization return process may be performed before the stage image 61 or the decorative symbol 41 is displayed. Further, in this case, when the stage image 61 or the decorative symbol 41 is displayed, the light emitting mode of the frame lamp 157, the board lamp 116, the movable staging member 115, and the staging button 161 may be changed to the normal light emitting mode.
Further, for example, before the stage image 61 or the decorative symbol 41 is displayed, the initialization return processing is performed at the start or after the initialization notification processing, and after the initialization notification processing is completed, the frame lamp 157, The light emitting mode of the panel lamp 116, the movable effect member 115, and the effect button 161 may be changed to the normal light emitting mode. Further, the stage image 61 or the decorative symbol 41 may be displayed when the light emitting mode of each light emitting means changes to the normal light emitting mode. That is, the timing at which the light emitting mode of each light emitting means changes to the normal light emitting mode or the timing at which the decorative symbol 41 is displayed may be delayed by the amount of the initialization notification process.

Further, in the present embodiment, it has been described that the customer waiting image 65 is displayed when a predetermined time has elapsed after the menu display explanation image 63 and the volume image 64 are displayed, but the present invention is not limited to this.
For example, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the menu display explanation image 63 and the volume image 64 are displayed, a power saving image suggesting or notifying that the power saving mode is used to reduce the power consumption of the gaming machine 1 is displayed. May be good. In this case, the power saving image is captured as the second image.

Next, with reference to FIG. 106, the variation effect of the decorative symbol 41 performed by the effect control unit 130m using the image display unit 114 or the like will be specifically described.
Further, in the following description, the points different from each of the above processing examples will be mainly described, and the description of the points matching with each processing example may be omitted.

(Variable staging example 1)
First, as shown in FIG. 106 (1), the decorative symbol 41 is fixedly stopped on the screen of the image display unit 114 as the variation of the previous special symbol is completed by the staging control unit 130m. At this time, the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52 are displayed in white on the image display unit 114. Further, at this time, the hold number display 55 and the small symbol 56 are displayed. Further, the hold number display 55 of the first start port 10 indicates "4", and the hold number display 55 of the second start port 11a indicates "0". At this time, the BGM is output from the speaker 156.

Then, as shown in FIG. 106 (2), the variation of the decorative symbol 41 is started with the start of the variation display of the next special symbol. In the present embodiment, the left decorative symbol 41, the middle decorative symbol 41, and the right decorative symbol 41 are displayed in a variable manner by displaying the numbers "1" to "9" in order, respectively. That is, in the present embodiment, the numbers of the left decorative symbol 41, the middle decorative symbol 41, and the right decorative symbol 41 can be changed individually. The left decorative symbol 41, the middle decorative symbol 41, and the right decorative symbol 41 may display characters different from the numbers, such as English characters. In this way, when the variable display of the next special symbol is started, the reserved image 52 moves the second, third, and fourth reserved images 52 toward the display position of the variable image 51. Further, at this time, the first reserved image 52 moves to the display position of the variable image 51. When it is shown in the drawing that the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 are variablely displayed (scrolled) at a particularly high speed, the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 are displayed by arrows (↓) for easy understanding. .. Further, the hold number display 55 of the first starting port 10 indicates "3". At this time, the BGM is output from the speaker 156.
In the example shown in FIG. 106, in the decorative symbol 41, the left decorative symbol 41, the middle decorative symbol 41, and the right decorative symbol 41 are arranged side by side in the left-right direction, and move (scroll) in the vertical direction when they are displayed in a variable manner. However, the present invention is not limited to this aspect. For example, in the decorative symbol 41, the left decorative symbol 41, the middle decorative symbol 41, and the right decorative symbol 41 may be arranged side by side in the vertical direction, and each of them may be moved (scrolled) in the horizontal direction.

Then, as shown in FIG. 106 (3), the left decorative symbol 41 scrolls at a low speed and then temporarily stops at a position where the fixed stop is performed until the start of the fluctuation. More specifically, the number "4", which is the left decorative symbol 41, temporarily stops. When the decorative symbol 41 is temporarily stopped in the drawing, it is expressed by using the same display as the double quotation mark around the decorative symbol 41 for easy understanding. At this time, the BGM is output from the speaker 156.

Next, as shown in FIG. 106 (4), the right decorative symbol 41 scrolls at a low speed and then temporarily stops at a position where it has been fixedly stopped until the start of fluctuation. More specifically, the number "1", which is the right decorative symbol 41, is temporarily stopped. At this time, the BGM is output from the speaker 156.
Next, as shown in FIG. 106 (5), the intermediate decorative symbol 41 scrolls at a low speed and then temporarily stops at a position where it has been fixedly stopped until the start of fluctuation. More specifically, the number "2", which is the intermediate decorative symbol 41, is temporarily stopped. At this time, the BGM is output from the speaker 156.

Then, as the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped, as shown in FIG. 106 (6), the three decorative symbols 41 are fixedly stopped. The combination "421" of the decorative symbols 41 is an example of a combination when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is out of order. In addition, the small symbol 56 also stops as the fluctuation of the special symbol stops. At this time, the combination "421" of the small symbols 56 matches the combination of the decorative symbols 41. At this time, the BGM is output from the speaker 156.

Then, as shown in FIG. 106 (7), the variation of the decorative symbol 41 is started with the start of the variation display of the next special symbol. At this time, the BGM is output from the speaker 156.

In addition, in the variation effect example 1, it has been described that the BGM is continuously output from the speaker 156 over the variation of a plurality of special symbols, but the present invention is not limited to this.
For example, the output of the BGM from the speaker 156 may be interrupted at the timing when the decorative symbol 41 is fixedly stopped (see FIGS. 106 (1) and 106 (6)).

(Variable staging example 2)
FIGS. 107 and 108 are diagrams showing one aspect of the effect performed by the effect control unit 130 m using the image display unit 114 or the like.
Next, another specific example (variation effect example 2) of the variation effect of the decorative symbol 41 will be described with reference to FIGS. 107 and 108.
Further, in the following description, the points different from each of the above processing examples and the variation staging example 1 will be mainly described, and the points that match each processing example and the variation staging example 1 may be omitted.

First, as shown in FIG. 107 (1), the decorative symbol 41 is fixedly stopped in the image display unit 114 as the variation of the previous special symbol is completed by the staging control unit 130m.

Then, as shown in FIG. 107 (2), the variation of the decorative symbol 41 is started with the start of the variation display of the next special symbol. At this time, the change effect is executed. In the illustrated example, the third reserved image 52 is displayed in blue by executing the change effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 107 (3), when the number "351", which is the three decorative symbols 41, is fixedly stopped, the chance eye display effect is executed. In the illustrated example, the entire three decorative symbols 41 are displayed in blue due to the chance eye display effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 107 (4), the change of the decorative symbol 41 is started with the start of the change of the next special symbol.
Next, as shown in FIG. 107 (5), when the number "572", which is the three decorative symbols 41, is fixedly stopped, the chance eye display effect is executed. In the illustrated example, the entire three decorative symbols 41 are displayed in green due to the chance eye display effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 107 (6), the change of the decorative symbol 41 is started with the start of the change of the next special symbol.
Next, as shown in FIG. 107 (7), when the number "713", which is the three decorative symbols 41, is fixedly stopped, the chance eye display effect is executed. In the illustrated example, the entire three decorative symbols 41 are displayed in red due to the chance eye display effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 107 (8), the change of the decorative symbol 41 is started with the start of the change of the next special symbol. At this time, the change effect is executed. In the illustrated example, the variable image 51 is displayed in red due to the change effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 108 (9), the reach effect is executed. More specifically, after the number "4" which is the left decorative symbol 41 is temporarily stopped, the number "4" which is the right decorative symbol 41 is temporarily stopped to be in the reach state.
Next, as shown in FIG. 108 (10), the SP reach effect is executed. While the SP reach effect is being executed, the SP reach image 68 is displayed. Further, when the SP reach effect is being executed, the left and right decorative symbols 41 are displayed in a small display mode and a display mode with low decorativeness. In the illustrated example, the left decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the upper left corner of the image display unit 114, and the right decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the upper right corner of the image display unit 114.

Next, as shown in FIG. 108 (11), the SPSP reach effect is executed. While the SPSP reach effect is being executed, the SPSP reach image 69 is displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 108 (12), the intermediate decorative symbol 41 temporarily stops at the number "5". At this time, the intermediate decorative symbol 41 is temporarily stopped in a display mode having low decorativeness and in a display mode larger than that of the left and right decorative symbols 41.

Next, as shown in FIG. 108 (13), three highly decorative decorative symbols 41 are temporarily stopped.
Then, as the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped, as shown in FIG. 108 (14), the three decorative symbols 41 are fixedly stopped. The combination "454" of the decorative symbols 41 is an example of a combination when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is out of order. In addition, the small symbol 56 also stops as the fluctuation of the special symbol stops. At this time, the combination "454" of the small symbols 56 matches the combination of the decorative symbols 41.

(Variable staging example 3)
FIGS. 109 to 111 are diagrams showing one aspect of the effect performed by the effect control unit 130 m using the image display unit 114 or the like.
Next, another specific example (variation effect example 3) of the variation effect of the decorative symbol 41 will be described with reference to FIGS. 109 to 111.
Further, in the following description, the points different from each of the above-mentioned processing examples and each effect will be mainly described, and the points that match each of the above-mentioned processing examples and each effect may be omitted.

First, as shown in FIG. 109 (1), the decorative symbol 41 is fixedly stopped in the image display unit 114 as the variation of the previous special symbol is completed by the staging control unit 130m.
Then, as shown in FIG. 109 (2), the variation of the decorative symbol 41 is started with the start of the variation display of the next special symbol.

Next, as shown in FIG. 109 (3), the reach effect is executed. More specifically, after the number "6" which is the left decorative symbol 41 is temporarily stopped, the number "6" which is the right decorative symbol 41 is temporarily stopped to be in the reach state.
Next, as shown in FIG. 109 (4), the SP reach effect is executed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 109 (5), the SPSP reach effect is executed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 109 (6), the three decorative symbols 41 are temporarily stopped. In the illustrated example, by displaying the decorative symbol 41 in the combination of "666", the player is notified that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a big hit. Further, at this time, the display size of the decorative symbol 41 is larger than that in the display mode during the execution of the SPSP reach effect. Further, at this time, the display size of the middle decorative symbol 41 is larger than the display size of the left and right decorative symbols 41. Further, the small symbol 56 maintains a state in which the three symbols are variablely displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 109 (7), the display sizes of the three decorative symbols 41 are reduced and temporarily stopped. Further, at this time, all three decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the same display size.
Next, as shown in FIG. 109 (8), the three decorative symbols 41 are temporarily stopped in a highly decorative display mode.

Then, as the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped, the fluctuation of the decorative symbol 41 is stopped as shown in FIG. 110 (9). The combination of numbers "666" of the decorative symbol 41 is an example of a combination when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a big hit. Further, "666" is displayed as the small symbol 56. That is, the display of the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 is in a state of matching with the combination of "666". Further, at this time, no sound is output from the speaker 156.

Next, as shown in FIG. 110 (10), the opening image 70 is displayed on the image display unit 114. Further, a right-handed image 71 is displayed on the image display unit 114. Further, at this time, the BGM corresponding to the opening image 70 is output from the speaker 156.
Next, as shown in FIG. 110 (11), when the jackpot game is started, the image display unit 114 displays a round image 72, a music selection image 73, a round number image 74, and a point number image 75. And the hit image 88 are displayed. In the image 72 during the round, the character that is the subject of the gaming machine 1 is lowering his right hand. Further, in the round number image 74, the text "Round 1" is displayed. Further, in the point number image 75, the text "50 pt" is displayed. Further, in the hit image 88, the number "6" is displayed. Further, at this time, the BGM corresponding to the jackpot game is output from the speaker 156.

Next, as shown in FIG. 110 (12), a highly accurate fanning effect is started. In the high-accuracy fanning effect, the high-accuracy fanning image 76 is displayed. Further, at this time, the text "Round 2" is displayed in the round number image 74. Further, at this time, the text "150 pt" is displayed in the point number image 75. Further, at this time, the BGM corresponding to the jackpot game is output from the speaker 156.

Next, as shown in FIG. 110 (13), a highly accurate notification effect is performed. In the high-accuracy notification effect, the high-accuracy notification image 77 is displayed. Further, at this time, the text "Round 2" is displayed in the round number image 74. Further, at this time, the text "200 pt" is displayed in the point number image 75. Further, at this time, the BGM corresponding to the jackpot game is output from the speaker 156.

Next, as shown in FIG. 110 (14), the image 72 during the round is displayed again on the image display unit 114. In the image 72 during this round, the character raises his right hand. That is, with the progress of the jackpot game, the display content of the moving image in the image 72 during the round has changed from the display content before the execution of the high-accuracy fanning effect (see FIG. 110 (11)). Further, at this time, the text "Round 3" is displayed in the round number image 74. Further, at this time, the text "300 pt" is displayed in the point number image 75. Further, at this time, the BGM corresponding to the jackpot game is output from the speaker 156.

Next, as shown in FIG. 110 (15), in the image 72 during the round, a character different from the character in the image 72 during the round (see FIG. 110 (14)) displayed at the time of “Round 3” is the right hand. Is lowered. That is, as the jackpot game progresses, the display content in the image 72 during the round is further changed. Further, at this time, the text "Round 7" is displayed in the round number image 74. Further, at this time, the text "610 pt" is displayed in the point number image 75. Further, at this time, the BGM corresponding to the jackpot game is output from the speaker 156.

Next, as shown in FIG. 110 (16), the character selection image 79 is displayed. Further, at this time, the text "Round 8" is displayed in the round number image 74. Further, at this time, the text "720pt" is displayed in the point number image 75. Further, at this time, the BGM corresponding to the jackpot game is output from the speaker 156.
Then, when the jackpot game is completed, the high accuracy start image 80 is displayed as shown in FIG. 111 (17). Further, at this time, the BGM corresponding to the high accuracy start image 80 is output from the speaker 156.

Next, in the high-probability time-saving gaming state, as shown in FIG. 111 (18), the decorative symbol 41 (“666”) having low decorativeness is fixedly stopped in the image display unit 114. The decorative symbol 41 displayed at this time corresponds to a sequence of numbers that are finally stopped before the jackpot game is executed, that is, when the jackpot is won. Then, the small symbol 56 is also fixedly stopped by the arrangement of the numbers of "666" like the decorative symbol 41. Further, at this time, the BGM corresponding to the stage in the high-probability time-saving gaming state is output from the speaker 156.

Then, for example, when the game ball wins a prize in the second starting opening 11a, as shown in FIG. 111 (19), the decorative symbol 41 starts to change with the start of the variation display of the special symbol. Further, at this time, the variable pedestal is displayed in a display mode different from that of the low-probability time-saving non-game state (see, for example, FIG. 109 (1)). Further, at this time, the BGM corresponding to the stage in the high-probability time-saving gaming state is output from the speaker 156.

In addition, in the variation effect example 3, it has been explained that the sound is not output from the speaker 156 when the number "666" which is the decorative symbol 41 is fixedly stopped, but the present invention is not limited to this. The BGM may be output from the speaker 156 even when the number "666", which is the decorative symbol 41, is fixedly stopped.

Further, in the variable staging example 3, three decorative symbols 41 having low decorativeness are temporarily stopped (see FIG. 109 (7)), and then the decorative symbols 41 with high decorativeness are displayed, but the present invention is not limited to this. ..
For example, after temporarily stopping the three decorative symbols 41 having low decorativeness, the three decorative symbols 41 having low decorativeness may be fixedly stopped, and then the jackpot game may be performed. That is, it is not necessary to use the highly decorative decorative symbol 41 to notify that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a big hit.

Further, in the variable production example 3, during the round in the jackpot game, the BGM corresponding to the jackpot game continues to flow from the speaker 156, but when the music as the BGM is played by one song during the round, this music is played again from the beginning. You may make it flow.

(Variable staging example 4)
112 and 111 are diagrams showing one aspect of the effect performed by the effect control unit 130 m using the image display unit 114 or the like.
Next, another specific example (variation effect example 4) of the variation effect of the decorative symbol 41 will be described with reference to FIGS. 112 and 111.
Further, in the following description, the points different from each of the above-mentioned processes and each effect will be mainly described, and the points that match each of the above-mentioned processes and each effect may be omitted.

First, as shown in FIG. 112 (1), the staging control unit 130m terminates the variation of the previous special symbol, and the image display unit 114 definitely stops the decorative symbol 41 "213". ing. Further, at this time, the special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol 1st display 221. Further, at this time, the first special symbol second display 133 is stopped and displayed. Further, at this time, in the first special symbol holding first display 218, the holding number is displayed by the lighting mode corresponding to "4" which is the number of holdings in the first special symbol first display 221. .. Further, at this time, the first special symbol holding first display 135 is displayed in a lighting mode corresponding to "4", which is the number of holdings for winning a prize in the first starting port 121. At this time, the light emitting unit 137 is turned off. At this time, the BGM is output from the speaker 156.

Then, as shown in FIG. 112 (2), the variation of the decorative symbol 41 is started with the start of the variation display of the next special symbol. Further, at this time, three reserved images 52 are displayed. Further, at this time, the hold number display 55 of the first starting port 10 indicates “3”. Further, at this time, the special symbol is variablely displayed on the first special symbol display 221. Further, at this time, the first special symbol second display 133 is displayed in a variable manner. Further, at this time, in the first special symbol holding first display 218, the holding number is displayed according to the lighting mode corresponding to "3" which is the number of holdings in the first special symbol first display 221. Further, at this time, the first special symbol holding first display 135 is displayed in a lighting mode corresponding to "3", which is the number of holdings for winning a prize in the first starting port 10. At this time, the light emitting unit 137 emits white light. At this time, the BGM is output from the speaker 156.

Next, as shown in FIG. 112 (3), the reach effect is executed. More specifically, after the number "4" which is the left decorative symbol 41 is temporarily stopped, the number "4" which is the right decorative symbol 41 is temporarily stopped to be in the reach state.

Then, when the gaming machine 1 is turned off, the image display unit 114 is turned off as shown in FIG. 112 (4). At this time, the special symbol is turned off in the first special symbol first display 221. At this time, the first special symbol second display 133, the first special symbol hold first display 218, and the second special symbol second display 135 are turned off. At this time, the light emitting unit 137 is turned off. Further, at this time, no sound is output from the speaker 156.

Then, in the state where the RAM clear switch 58c is OFF, the power off state of the gaming machine 1 is resolved. That is, in the variation effect example 4, the non-initialization return is performed. In this case, a command for controlling the power-on at the time of restoration is transmitted from the main control board 110 to the staging control unit 130m. As a result, as shown in FIG. 111 (5), the returning image 62 and the game continuation instruction image 81 are displayed on the image display unit 114. Further, at this time, the special symbol is variablely displayed on the first special symbol 1st display 221. Further, at this time, in the first special symbol holding first display 218, the holding number is displayed according to the lighting mode corresponding to "3" which is the number of holdings in the first special symbol first display 221. On the other hand, the first special symbol second display 133 and the first special symbol hold second display 135 are maintained in a state of being turned off. Further, the light emitting unit 137 maintains the state of being turned off. Further, the speaker 156 maintains a state in which no sound is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 111 (6), the first special symbol second display 133 is displayed in a variable manner. Further, at this time, the first special symbol holding second indicator 135 is displayed in a lighting mode corresponding to "3", which is the number of holdings for winning a prize in the first starting port 10. Further, the light emitting unit 137 maintains the state of being turned off. Further, the speaker 156 maintains a state in which no sound is output. After that, until the special symbol stops fluctuating, the image display unit 114, the first special symbol first display 221 and the first special symbol hold first display 218, the first special symbol second display 133, and the first special Each of the symbol hold second display 135, the light emitting unit 137, and the speaker 156 maintains these states.

Then, as the fluctuation of the special symbol stops, as shown in FIG. 111 (7), the number "315", which is the three highly decorative decorative symbols 41, is fixedly stopped. In addition, the small symbol 56 stops as the special symbol stops changing. At this time, the combination "315" of the small symbols 56 matches the combination of the decorative symbols 41. Further, at this time, three reserved images 52 are displayed. Further, at this time, the hold number display 55 of the first starting port 10 indicates “3”. Further, at this time, the variable image 51 is not displayed on the image display unit 114. Further, at this time, the special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol 1st display 221. In addition, the first special symbol second display 133 is stopped and displayed. Further, at this time, in the first special symbol holding first display 218, the holding number is displayed according to the lighting mode corresponding to "3" which is the number of holdings in the first special symbol first display 221. Further, at this time, the first special symbol holding second indicator 135 is displayed in a lighting mode corresponding to "3", which is the number of holdings for winning a prize in the first starting port 10. Further, the light emitting unit 137 maintains the state of being turned off. Further, the speaker 156 maintains a state in which no sound is output.

Then, as shown in FIG. 111 (8), the variation of the decorative symbol 41 is started with the start of the variation display of the next special symbol. Further, at this time, the second and third reserved images 52 move toward the display position of the variable image 51. Further, at this time, the first reserved image 52 moves to the display position of the variable image 51, so that the variable image 51 is displayed. Further, at this time, the hold number display 55 of the first starting port 10 indicates “2”. Further, at this time, the special symbol is variablely displayed on the first special symbol 1st display 221. Further, at this time, the first special symbol second display 133 is displayed in a variable manner. Further, at this time, in the first special symbol holding first display 218, the holding number is displayed according to the lighting mode corresponding to "2" which is the number of holdings in the first special symbol first display 221. Further, at this time, the first special symbol holding second indicator 135 is displayed in a lighting mode corresponding to "2", which is the number of holdings for winning a prize in the first starting port 10. At this time, the light emitting unit 137 emits white light. At this time, the BGM is output from the speaker 156.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the display content on the image display unit 114 from the return to the display of the predetermined image on the image display unit 114 in the case where the first return is performed and the case where the second return is performed. Is different. Here, the first return is, for example, an initialization return. Further, the second return is, for example, a non-initialization return when the hold is stored in the main RAM 110c. Further, examples of the predetermined image include a decorative symbol 41, a hold number display 55, a small symbol 56, a stage image 61, and the like.
In this case, it is recognized whether the initialization restoration or the non-initialization restoration when the hold has occurred is performed before the predetermined image is displayed.

Further, in the present embodiment, the return from the power off state of the gaming machine 1 is the first return, which is the return when the hold is not stored in the main RAM 110c, and the hold is stored in the main RAM 110c. There is a second return, which is a return. The display content on the image display unit 114 from the return to the display of the predetermined image on the image display unit 114 differs between the case where the first return is performed and the case where the second return is performed.

In this case, for example, when the power is turned off during the game by the player and then the power off state is resolved, the player confirms the display contents on the image display unit 114 until the predetermined image is displayed. This makes it possible to recognize whether or not a hold has occurred. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from misidentifying that the hold has not occurred even though the hold has occurred.

In addition to the returning image 62, for example, when the power-off state is resolved after the gaming machine 1 is turned off when the variation effect is being executed and the hold is not generated. An image consisting of text such as "No hold has occurred" may be displayed. That is, when the power off state of the gaming machine 1 is resolved when the variable effect is being executed and the hold has not occurred, when the variable effect is not being executed and the hold has not occurred. The image display unit 114 is different from both the case where the power-off state of the gaming machine 1 is resolved and the case where the power-off state of the gaming machine 1 is resolved when the variable effect is being executed and a hold occurs. It may be displayed.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the game machine 1 recovers from the power off state when the hold is stored in the main RAM 110c, the effect control unit 130m is stored in the main RAM 110c when the power is off. After displaying the number of reserved images 52 corresponding to the number of reserved images 52 on the image display unit 114, the number of reserved images 52 is reduced as the displayed reserved images 52 are moved and displayed.

In this case, the number of held images 52 displayed on the image display unit 114 after the power off state is resolved matches the number of holds recognized by the player as the number of holds immediately before the power off state. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable about the number of holdings when resuming the game after the power off state is resolved.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the effect control unit 130m displays the decorative symbol 41 on the image display unit 114 when the gaming machine 1 returns from the power off state when the hold is stored in the main control board 110. The variable image 51 is not displayed, the reserved image 52 is displayed according to the signal transmitted from the main control board 110, and the variable image 51 is displayed along with the movement display of the displayed reserved image 52. The main control board 110 is regarded as a main control means for controlling the progress of the game. Further, the staging control unit 130m is regarded as a sub control means for controlling the staging. Further, the variation image 51 is captured as an execution image suggesting the content of information regarding the determination related to the variation display during execution.
In this case, after the power off state is resolved, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable about the number of holdings, and it becomes easier to understand the start timing of the next fluctuation. Therefore, when the player restarts the game, the game progresses. It is possible to suppress feeling uncomfortable about the condition.

In the variation effect example 4, the light emitting unit 137 is turned off when the non-initialization return is performed and the decorative symbol 41 is displayed (see FIG. 111 (7)), but the present invention is not limited to this.
For example, the light emitting unit 137 may blink when the deinitialization return is performed and the decorative symbol 41 is displayed. That is, the light emitting mode of the light emitting unit 137 may be different between immediately before the gaming machine 1 is turned off and when the non-initialization recovery is performed.

Further, in the variation effect example 4, it has been described that the returning image 62 and the game continuation instruction image 81 are displayed when the non-initialization return is performed after the game machine 1 is turned off. Not limited to this.
For example, when the menu display explanation image 63 is displayed, when a variable effect is being performed, when a jackpot game is being performed, or when a customer waiting effect is being performed, the power supply for restoration is performed. A command for controlling the closing may be transmitted from the main control board 110 to the staging control unit 130m. In this case, the staging control unit 130m may restrict the display of the image being displayed on the image display unit 114 to display the returning image 62.

(Variable staging example 5)
114 to 116 are diagrams showing one aspect of the effect performed by the effect control unit 130 m using the image display unit 114 or the like.
Next, another specific example (variation effect example 5) of the variation effect of the decorative symbol 41 will be described with reference to FIGS. 114 to 116.
Further, in the following description, the points different from each of the above-mentioned processing examples and each effect will be mainly described, and the points that match each of the above-mentioned processing examples and each effect may be omitted.

First, as shown in FIG. 114 (1), the decorative symbol 41 is fixedly stopped in the image display unit 114 as the variation of the previous special symbol is completed by the staging control unit 130m.
Next, as shown in FIG. 114 (2), the variation of the decorative symbol 41 is started with the start of the variation display of the next special symbol. At this time, the change effect is executed. More specifically, when the change effect is executed, the third reserved image 52 is displayed in blue.

Next, as shown in FIG. 114 (3), the number "351", which is the three decorative symbols 41, is fixedly stopped. At this time, the chance eye display effect is executed. More specifically, by executing the chance eye display effect, the entire three decorative symbols 41 are displayed in blue.
Next, as shown in FIG. 114 (4), the change of the decorative symbol 41 is started with the start of the change of the next special symbol.

Then, when the gaming machine 1 is turned off, the image display unit 114 is turned off as shown in FIG. 114 (5).
Then, in the state where the RAM clear switch 58c is OFF, the power off state of the gaming machine 1 is resolved. That is, in the variation effect example 5, the non-initialization return is performed. In this case, as shown in FIG. 114 (6), the returning image 62 and the game continuation instruction image 81 are displayed on the image display unit 114.

Then, as the fluctuation of the special symbol stops, as shown in FIG. 114 (7), the number "315", which is the three highly decorative decorative symbols 41, is fixedly stopped. At this time, the chance eye display effect is not executed. At this time, two reserved images 52 are displayed. Here, the second reserved image 52, that is, the reserved image 52 (see FIG. 107 (4)) displayed in blue immediately before the gaming machine 1 is turned off is displayed in white. Further, at this time, the variable image 51 is not displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 114 (8), the change of the decorative symbol 41 is started with the start of the change of the next special symbol.
Next, as shown in FIG. 115 (9), the next fluctuation expectation effect is performed. In the next fluctuation expectation effect, the preview image 82 is displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 115 (10), the number "412", which is the three decorative symbols 41, is fixedly stopped. At this time, the chance eye display effect is not executed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 115 (11), the change of the decorative symbol 41 starts with the start of the change of the next special symbol. At this time, the change effect is executed. More specifically, the display color of the variable image 51 changes from white to red due to the change effect.
Next, as shown in FIG. 115 (12), the reach effect is executed. More specifically, after the number "4" which is the left decorative symbol 41 is temporarily stopped, the number "4" which is the right decorative symbol 41 is temporarily stopped to be in the reach state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 115 (13), the SP reach effect is executed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 115 (14), the SPSP reach effect is executed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 115 (15), the intermediate decorative symbol 41 temporarily stops at the number "5".
Next, as shown in FIG. 115 (16), the three highly decorative decorative symbols 41 are temporarily stopped.

Then, as the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped, as shown in FIG. 116 (17), the three decorative symbols 41 are fixedly stopped. The combination "454" of the decorative symbols 41 is an example of a combination when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is out of order. In addition, the small symbol 56 also stops as the fluctuation of the special symbol stops. At this time, the combination "454" of the small symbols 56 matches the combination of the decorative symbols 41.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the gaming machine 1 is turned off during the display of the hold image 52 whose display mode has changed due to the change effect, and then the non-initialization return is performed, the display mode has changed. The display mode of the image 52 returns to the display mode before the change effect is performed. Further, although the change effect is not performed during the display of the hold image 52, the change effect is performed when the hold image 52 moves and is displayed as the variable image 51.

For example, in the case of performing a notice effect of "changing the display color of the reserved image 52 to blue by the first change effect and changing the display color of the variable image 51 to red by the second change effect", the power is turned off. Information on the display color of the reserved image 52 at the time may not be stored in the sub RAM 130c. In this case, the effect control unit 130m cannot recognize whether the reserved image 52, which is the target of the advance notice effect, is displayed in white or blue immediately before the power off state after the power off state is resolved. Then, for example, if the hold image 52 is displayed in white immediately before the power off state, but the hold image 52 is displayed in blue after the power off state is resolved, the player may feel uncomfortable. Therefore, in the present embodiment, after the power off state is resolved, the reserved image 52 is displayed in the display mode before the change effect is performed, thereby suppressing the player from giving a sense of discomfort. On the other hand, when the reserved image 52 is moved and displayed as the variable image 51, the advance notice effect is performed based on the information stored in the sub RAM 130c, and the variable image 51 is displayed in red for execution. It suppresses the decline in the player's interest due to the fact that the notice production that was supposed to be done is not performed.
After the power off state is resolved, the change effect for the variable image 51 may not be performed.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned off at the stage where the first of the three chance eye display effects is performed, and then the non-initialization return is performed, the second and subsequent chances are performed. The next fluctuation expectation effect is performed without performing the eye display effect. That is, if the gaming machine 1 is turned off during the execution of the advance notice effect and then the deinitialization return is performed, the advance notice effect that was supposed to be executed is not continued. Then, it is possible to execute a notice effect different from the advance notice effect that was supposed to be executed.

For example, in the case of performing the advance notice effect of "performing the third chance eye display effect", the information regarding the number of times the chance eye display effect has been executed may not be stored in the sub RAM 130c when the power is turned off. In this case, the effect control unit 130m cannot recognize the number of times the chance eye display effect has been executed immediately before the power off state after the power off state is resolved. Then, for example, even though the chance-eye display effect was performed once immediately before the power-off state, if the chance-eye display effect is performed three more times after the power-off state is resolved, the player feels uncomfortable. There is a risk. Therefore, in the present embodiment, after the power off state is resolved, the advance notice effect that was supposed to be executed is not continued, thereby suppressing the player from giving a sense of discomfort. In addition, based on the information stored in the sub RAM 130c that "performs a notice effect", the notice effect that was supposed to be executed is performed by performing a notice effect different from the notice effect that was supposed to be executed. It suppresses the decline in the interest of the player due to the absence.

(Variable staging example 6)
FIGS. 117 and 118 are diagrams showing one aspect of the staging performed by the staging control unit 130m using the image display unit 114 or the like.
Next, another specific example (variation effect example 6) of the variation effect of the decorative symbol 41 will be described with reference to FIGS. 117 and 118.
The variation effect example 6 is the same variation effect as the variation effect example 3 (see FIGS. 109 to 111). Further, in the following description, the points different from each of the above-mentioned processing examples and each effect will be mainly described, and the points that match each of the above-mentioned processing examples and each effect may be omitted.

First, as shown in FIG. 117 (1), the decorative symbol 41 is fixedly stopped in the image display unit 114 as the variation of the previous special symbol is completed by the staging control unit 130m. Further, at this time, BGM corresponding to the type of the stage image 61 is output from the speaker 156.
Then, as shown in FIG. 117 (2), the variation of the decorative symbol 41 is started with the start of the variation display of the next special symbol. At this time, the BGM is output from the speaker 156.

Next, as shown in FIG. 117 (3), the reach effect is executed. More specifically, after the number "6" which is the left decorative symbol 41 is temporarily stopped, the number "6" which is the right decorative symbol 41 is temporarily stopped to be in the reach state. At this time, the BGM is output from the speaker 156.

Then, when the gaming machine 1 is turned off, the image display unit 114 is turned off as shown in FIG. 117 (4). Further, at this time, no sound is output from the speaker 156.
Then, in the state where the RAM clear switch 58c is OFF, the power off state of the gaming machine 1 is resolved. That is, in the variation effect example 6, the non-initialization return is performed. In this case, as shown in FIG. 117 (5), the returning image 62 and the game continuation instruction image 81 are displayed on the image display unit 114. Further, at this time, the speaker 156 maintains a state in which no sound is output. After that, the image display unit 114 and the speaker 156 maintain these states until the special symbol stops fluctuating.

Then, as the fluctuation of the special symbol stops, as shown in FIG. 117 (6), the number "222", which is the three highly decorative decorative symbols 41, is fixedly stopped. The combination of numbers "222" of the decorative symbol 41 is an example of a combination when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a big hit. Further, "222" is displayed as the small symbol 56. That is, the display of the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 are in the same state with the combination of "222". Further, since the timing of the fixed stop is the same for the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56, the time from the start of the display to the fixed stop is the same. At this time, the stage image 61 is displayed. Further, at this time, the speaker 156 maintains a state in which no sound is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 117 (7), the opening image 70 and the right-handed image 71 are displayed on the image display unit 114. At this time, the BGM corresponding to the opening image 70 is output from the speaker 156.
Next, as shown in FIG. 117 (8), when the jackpot game is started, the image display unit 114 displays a round image 72, a music selection image 73, a round number image 74, and a point number image 75. And the hit image 88 are displayed. In the image 72 during the round, the character that is the subject of the gaming machine 1 is lowering his right hand. Further, in the round number image 74, the text "Round 1" is displayed. Further, in the point number image 75, the text "50Pt" is displayed. Further, in the hit image 88, the number "2" is displayed. Further, at this time, the BGM corresponding to the jackpot game is output from the speaker 156.

Next, as shown in FIG. 118 (9), the highly accurate fanning effect is started. In the high-accuracy fanning effect, the high-accuracy fanning image 76 is displayed. Further, at this time, the text "Round 2" is displayed in the round number image 74. Further, at this time, the text "150Pt" is displayed in the point number image 75. Further, at this time, the BGM corresponding to the jackpot game is output from the speaker 156.

Then, when the gaming machine 1 is turned off, the image display unit 114 is turned off as shown in FIG. 118 (10). Further, at this time, no sound is output from the speaker 156.
Then, in the state where the RAM clear switch 58c is OFF, the power off state of the gaming machine 1 is resolved. That is, the non-initialization return is performed. In this case, as shown in FIG. 118 (11), the returning image 62, the game continuation instruction image 81, and the returning right-handed image 83 are displayed on the image display unit 114. Further, at this time, the speaker 156 maintains a state in which no sound is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 118 (12), the right-handed image 71, the round image 72, the round number image 74, and the point number image 75 are displayed on the image display unit 114. At this time, in the image 72 during the round, a character different from the character displayed before the execution of the high-accuracy fanning effect (see FIG. 117 (8)) is lowering his right hand. That is, with the progress of the jackpot game, the display content of the moving image in the image 72 during the round has changed from the display content before the execution of the high-accuracy fanning effect. Further, at this time, the text "Round 2" is displayed in the round number image 74. Further, at this time, the text "200Pt" is displayed in the point number image 75. At this time, the high-accuracy notification effect is not executed. Further, at this time, the BGM corresponding to the jackpot game is output from the speaker 156 from the beginning. That is, the content of the BGM that was flowing at the start of the jackpot game (see FIG. 117 (8)) is output again.

Next, as shown in FIG. 118 (13), in the in-round image 72, the character in the in-round image 72 displayed at the time of “Round 2” (see FIG. 118 (12)) raises his right hand. .. That is, as the jackpot game progresses, the display content in the image 72 during the round changes. Further, at this time, the text "Round 8" is displayed in the round number image 74. Further, at this time, the text "750Pt" is displayed in the point number image 75. In this jackpot game, the character selection image 79 is not displayed. Further, at this time, the BGM corresponding to the jackpot game is output from the speaker 156.
Then, when the jackpot game is completed, the high-accuracy start image 80 is displayed as shown in FIG. 118 (14). Further, at this time, the BGM corresponding to the high accuracy start image 80 is output from the speaker 156.

Next, in the high-probability time-saving gaming state, as shown in FIG. 118 (15), the decorative symbol 41 (“315”) having low decorativeness is fixedly stopped in the image display unit 114. The decorative symbol 41 displayed at this time is a sequence of numbers "222" (see FIG. 117 (6)) that was finally confirmed and stopped before the jackpot game was executed, that is, when the jackpot was won. It is a different order from. Then, the small symbol 56 is also fixedly stopped by the arrangement of the numbers of "315" like the decorative symbol 41. Further, at this time, the BGM corresponding to the stage in the high-probability time-saving gaming state is output from the speaker 156.
Then, for example, when the game ball wins in the second starting opening 11a, as shown in FIG. 118 (16), the decorative symbol 41 starts to change with the start of the variation display of the special symbol. Further, at this time, the BGM corresponding to the stage in the high-probability time-saving gaming state is output from the speaker 156.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the game machine 1 does not turn off during the execution of the variation effect determined to perform the jackpot game, the effect control unit 130m next to the variation effect during the execution. The decorative symbol 41 for starting is displayed in a sequence of predetermined symbols, and when the gaming machine 1 returns after the power is turned off during the execution of the variation effect determined to perform the special game, the variation during execution is executed. The decorative symbol 41 that starts the next variation effect of the effect includes and displays different symbols.

For example, when the power is turned off, the sub RAM 130c may not store information on which combination the numbers of the decorative symbols 41 are to be displayed when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a big hit. Further, the types of jackpot symbols included in the fluctuation start command transmitted from the main control board 110 to the staging control unit 130m do not correspond to all types of the decorative symbols 41. Therefore, the staging control unit 130m cannot recognize which combination is used to display the number of the decorative symbol 41 before the power off state when the power off state is resolved. Then, in this case, at the start of the "next fluctuation" of the fluctuation in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a big hit, for example, the number is different from the combination of the decorative symbols 41 that was intended to be displayed before the power off state. When the decorative symbols 41 are displayed side by side, the player may mistakenly think that he has won the jackpot in this "next fluctuation". Therefore, at the start of this "next fluctuation", by displaying three decorative symbols 41 in a line containing different symbols, it is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding that the jackpot was won in the "next fluctuation". , It suppresses the player from feeling uncomfortable when resuming the game.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the game machine 1 is not turned off during the execution of the jackpot game, the effect control unit 130m displays a special effect image on the image display unit 114 during the execution of the jackpot game, and the jackpot game. When the gaming machine 1 returns after the power is turned off during the execution of the jackpot game, an image different from the special effect image is displayed without displaying the special effect image during the execution of the jackpot game. Examples of the special effect image include a round middle image 72, a music selection image 73, a round number image 74, a point number image 75, a high accuracy fanning image 76, a high accuracy notification image 77, a character selection image 79, and a high accuracy start image 80. , The hit image 88 and the like.

For example, when a power-off state occurs during the execution of the jackpot game, information regarding the progress of the effect in the jackpot game at the time of the power-off state may not be stored in the sub RAM 130c. Therefore, the effect control unit 130 m cannot recognize the progress of the effect during the jackpot game when the power off state is resolved. Then, in this case, if the effect image that should have been displayed when the game machine 1 is not turned off is displayed when it is not suitable for the progress of the effect during the jackpot game, the player feels uncomfortable. There is a risk. Therefore, in the present embodiment, after the power off state is resolved, the effect image that should have been displayed when the game machine 1 is not in the power off state is not displayed, so that the player feels uncomfortable when restarting the game. Suppresses having.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the effect control unit 130 m returns after the game machine 1 is turned off during the execution of the variation effect when it is determined that the jackpot game is to be performed, the effect control unit 130m is used for the effect during execution. The running variation effect is terminated without temporarily stopping the decorative symbol 41.

If the game machine 1 is turned off during the execution of the game by the player, the effect is temporarily interrupted. Therefore, even after the power cut state is resolved, the effect related to the fluctuation that was performed immediately before the power cut state is performed. , It becomes easy for the player to have a sense of discomfort with the production. Therefore, in the present embodiment, after the power-off state is resolved, the player can play the game by limiting the pseudo-effect using the decorative symbol 41 related to the fluctuation that was performed immediately before the power-off state. It suppresses the feeling of strangeness when resuming.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the game machine 1 is in the power-off state and the power-off state is resolved during the execution of the jackpot game, the round number image 74 and the point number image 75 are displayed. Further, the display content in the round number image 74 at this time corresponds to the progress of the jackpot game. Further, the display content in the point number image 75 corresponds to the number of prize balls due to the game ball winning in the large prize opening 13a.

In the present embodiment, each time the round in the jackpot game progresses, the information regarding the progress of the round is stored in the sub RAM 130c. Further, each time a game ball wins a prize in the large prize opening 13a, information regarding the number of prize balls due to the winning is stored in the sub RAM 130c. Therefore, even when the game machine 1 is in the power-off state, after the power-off state is resolved, the staging control unit 130m has the number of rounds image 74 and the number of points based on the information stored in the sub RAM 130c. The image 75 is displayed in a display mode according to the situation of the jackpot game. In this case, even when the power off state occurs, the player can be made to recognize the situation of the jackpot game after the power off state is resolved.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the game machine 1 is in the power-off state and the power-off state is resolved during the execution of the variable effect in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a big hit, before the power-off state is reached. The stage image 61 displayed in is displayed again, but no sound is output from the speaker 156 at this time.

If the sound is output after the game machine 1 is turned off, the player may feel that the warning sound is output, which may cause anxiety to the player. Therefore, in the present embodiment, by displaying the stage image 61 when the power off state is resolved, the player is made to recognize that the display content on the image display unit 114 has returned to before the power off state, and the power is supplied. It suppresses giving the player anxiety that a disconnection has occurred.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the game machine 1 is in the power-off state and the power-off state is resolved during the execution of the jackpot game, before the decorative symbol 41, the stage image 61, etc. are displayed, that is, Before returning from the power off state, an effect is performed to encourage the player to play the game.

When the power off state is resolved, the control of the jackpot game by the main control board 110 may be started before the effect by the effect control unit 130 m is started. In this case, if the player does not restart the game even though the jackpot game is being performed, the player may be disadvantaged. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the power off state is resolved, the player is disadvantaged by encouraging the player to play the game before the effect performed before the power off state is restored. Is suppressed.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the gaming machine 1 is in the power-off state and the power-off state is resolved during the execution of the jackpot game, the BGM corresponding to the jackpot game is output from the beginning. In this case, the player can recognize that the jackpot game is being performed by listening to the BGM output after the power off state is resolved.

It is not necessary to output the BGM corresponding to the jackpot game from the beginning after the power off state is resolved. For example, every time the power off state occurs and then disappears, it may be output from a predetermined place in the BGM, for example, rust of a musical piece. That is, it suffices if the BGM is output from the same place each time the power off state is generated and then resolved.

(Variation effect example 6 modification)
FIG. 119 is a diagram showing a modified example of the variation effect example 6.
In the variation effect example 6, the effect performed when the power cut state occurs and the power cut state is resolved during the variable effect has been described, but the effect performed when the power cut state is resolved is not limited to these. ..
Hereinafter, a modified example of the variation effect example 6 will be described with reference to FIG. 119. In the following description, the points different from each of the above-mentioned processing examples and each effect will be mainly described, and the points that match each of the above-mentioned processing examples and each effect may be omitted.

First, in this modified example, the same effect as described with reference to FIGS. 117 (1) to 117 (5) in the variable effect example 6 is performed. That is, after the variation of the special symbol is started and the reach state is reached, the gaming machine 1 is turned off and the non-initialization return is performed. In this case, as shown in FIG. 119 (1), the returning image 62 and the game continuation instruction image 81 are displayed. Further, at this time, no sound is output from the speaker 156. After that, the image display unit 114 and the speaker 156 maintain these states until the special symbol stops fluctuating.

Then, as the fluctuation of the special symbol stops, as shown in FIG. 119 (2), the number "315", which is the three highly decorative decorative symbols 41, is fixedly stopped. Further, "315" is displayed as the small symbol 56. That is, the display of the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 is in a state of matching with the combination of "315". Further, at this time, the speaker 156 maintains a state in which no sound is output.

Then, at the start of the big hit game, as shown in FIG. 119 (3), the big hit notification image 84, the game start notification image 85, the game execution instruction image 86, and right-handed hitting on the image display unit 114. The instruction image 87 is displayed. Further, at this time, the speaker 156 outputs the BGM corresponding to the jackpot game and the BGM corresponding to the jackpot notification image 84. That is, the BGM output from the speaker 156 at this time is different from the BGM output in the jackpot game (see FIG. 110 (11)) performed after the fluctuation in which the power off state does not occur.
In this jackpot game, none of the opening image 70, the round image 72, the music selection image 73, the round number image 74, the point number image 75, the character selection image 79, and the high probability start image 80 is displayed. .. In addition, in this jackpot game, a high-accuracy fanning effect and a high-accuracy notification effect are not performed.

Then, when the game machine 1 is turned off during the execution of the jackpot game, the image display unit 114 is turned off as shown in FIG. 119 (4). Further, at this time, no sound is output from the speaker 156.
Then, in the state where the RAM clear switch 58c is OFF, the power off state of the gaming machine 1 is resolved. In this case, as shown in FIG. 119 (5), the returning image 62, the game continuation instruction image 81, and the returning right-handed image 83 are displayed on the image display unit 114. Further, at this time, the speaker 156 maintains a state in which no sound is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 119 (6), the jackpot notification image 84, the game start notification image 85, the game execution instruction image 86, and the right-handed instruction image 87 are displayed on the image display unit 114. .. At this time, the speaker 156 outputs the BGM corresponding to the jackpot game, and the BGM corresponding to the jackpot notification image 84 from the beginning. That is, the content of the BGM that was output at the start of the jackpot game (see FIG. 119 (3)) is output again. After that, the image display unit 114 and the speaker 156 maintain these states until the jackpot game is completed. Even in this case, the prize balls are paid out according to the winning of the big winning opening 13a during the big hit game.

Then, when the jackpot game is completed, in the high-probability time-saving game state, as shown in FIG. 119 (7), the decorative symbol 41 (“315”) having low decorativeness is fixedly stopped on the image display unit 114. The decorative symbol 41 displayed at this time corresponds to a sequence of numbers that are finally confirmed and stopped before the jackpot game is executed, that is, when the jackpot is won. Then, the small symbol 56 is also fixedly stopped by the arrangement of the numbers of "315" like the decorative symbol 41. Further, at this time, the BGM corresponding to the stage in the high-probability time-saving gaming state is output from the speaker 156.
Then, for example, when the game ball wins in the second starting opening 11a, as shown in FIG. 119 (8), the decorative symbol 41 starts to change with the start of the variation display of the special symbol.

As described above, in this modification, when the game machine 1 is in the power-off state and the power-off state is resolved during the execution of the variation effect in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a big hit, the special symbol When the fluctuation is stopped, three decorative symbols 41 are displayed in a row including different symbols.

For example, when the power is turned off, the sub RAM 130c may not store information on which combination the numbers of the decorative symbols 41 are to be displayed when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a big hit. Further, the types of jackpot symbols included in the fluctuation start command transmitted from the main control board 110 to the staging control unit 130m do not correspond to all types of the decorative symbols 41. Therefore, the staging control unit 130m cannot recognize which combination is used to display the number of the decorative symbol 41 before the power off state when the power off state is resolved. Then, in this case, when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a big hit and the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped, for example, the arrangement of numbers is different from the combination of the decorative symbols 41 that was intended to be displayed before the power is turned off. When the decorative symbol 41 is displayed, the player may mistakenly think that the special symbol lottery has won the jackpot in a "variation different" from the variation of the special symbol in which the lottery result is the jackpot. Therefore, when the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped, three decorative symbols 41 including different symbols are displayed to prevent the player from misunderstanding that the jackpot was won in the "different variation".

Further, in this modification, when the game machine 1 is in the power-off state and the power-off state is resolved during the execution of the variable effect in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a big hit, the big hit game is being executed. , The jackpot notification image 84, the game start notification image 85, the game execution instruction image 86, the right-handed instruction image 87, and other images that are not displayed when the power off state does not occur are displayed.

In the jackpot game, the lottery result of the special symbol lottery may be a jackpot, and the effect corresponding to the type of the decorative symbol 41 prepared by the variation effect related to the variation of the special symbol may be performed. Therefore, if the effect control unit 130 m cannot recognize which combination the decorative symbol 41 is intended to be displayed when the power off state is resolved, it may not be able to recognize the type of effect to be performed in the subsequent jackpot game. .. Therefore, in the present embodiment, during the execution of the jackpot game after the power-off state is resolved, the jackpot after the power-off state occurs by displaying an image different from the case where the power-off state does not occur. It suppresses giving a sense of discomfort to the player in the game.

Further, in the present embodiment, as in the variation effect example 6 and the modified example, when the gaming machine 1 is in the power-off state and the power-off state is resolved during the change of the special symbol, the special symbol is being changed. In, the time for displaying the three decorative symbols 41 is shorter than in the case where the power off state does not occur. In this case, it is possible to prevent the player who sees the three decorative symbols 41 displayed after the power off state is resolved from feeling uncomfortable.

In addition, in the variation effect example 6 and the modification example, the jackpot game may be performed without displaying the three decorative symbols 41 after the power off state is resolved. Shortening the time for displaying the three decorative symbols 41 also includes not displaying the three decorative symbols 41 (0 seconds). Further, in this case, the small symbol 56 may be stopped. That is, after the power off state is resolved, the three decorative symbols 41 may not be displayed, while the small symbol 56 may be displayed before the jackpot game is performed.

Further, in the modified example, it has been described that in the jackpot game, a BGM different from the BGM output in the jackpot game (see FIG. 110 (11)) performed after the fluctuation in which the power supply is not cut off is output. Not limited to. That is, the same BGM may be output in the big hit game regardless of whether or not the power is cut off during the change of the special symbol in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a big hit or in the big hit game.

Further, in the variable effect example 6 and the modified example, the decorative symbol 41 that is fixedly stopped after the power off state is resolved is a highly decorative decorative symbol 41, but the present invention is not limited to this.
For example, after the power off state is resolved, the three decorative symbols 41 having low decorativeness as shown in FIG. 109 (7) may be fixedly stopped, and then the jackpot game may be performed. Even in this case, the decorative symbol 41 is not temporarily stopped after the power off state is resolved.

(Modification example 1 of the production in the jackpot game)
120 and 121 are effects performed by the effect control unit 130 m using the image display unit 114 and the like, and are diagrams showing a modified example of the effect in the jackpot game.
Next, with reference to FIGS. 120 and 121, a modified example (modified example 1) will be described with respect to the effect in the jackpot game. In the following description, the points different from each of the above-mentioned processing examples and each effect will be mainly described, and the points that match each of the above-mentioned processing examples and each effect may be omitted.

First, when the jackpot game is started, as shown in FIG. 120 (1), the image display unit 114 has a right-handed image 71, a round middle image 72, a music selection image 73, a round number image 74, and a point number image. 75 and the hit image 88 are displayed. In the image 72 during the round, the character that is the subject of the gaming machine 1 is lowering his right hand. Further, in the round number image 74, the text "Round 1" is displayed. Further, in the point number image 75, the text "50Pt" is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 120 (2), the highly accurate fanning effect is started. In the high-accuracy fanning effect, the high-accuracy fanning image 76 is displayed. Further, at this time, the text "Round 2" is displayed in the round number image 74. Further, at this time, the text "150Pt" is displayed in the point number image 75.

Then, when the gaming machine 1 is turned off, the image display unit 114 is turned off as shown in FIG. 120 (3).
Then, when the power off state is resolved in the state where the RAM clear switch 58c is OFF, as shown in FIG. 120 (4), the image display unit 114 shows the returning image 62, the game continuation instruction image 81, and the returning image. The right-handed image 83 is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 120 (5), the right-handed image 71, the round image 72, the music selection image 73, the point number image 75, and the hit image 88 are displayed on the image display unit 114. On the other hand, the round number image 74 is not displayed. At this time, in the image 72 during the round, the character that is the subject of the gaming machine 1 is lowering his right hand. That is, the display content in the image 72 during the round is the display content when the jackpot game is started (see FIG. 120 (1)). Further, at this time, the text "0Pt" is displayed on the point number image 75. After that, for example, when a game ball wins a prize in the large winning opening 13a, the number of prize balls due to the winning is displayed on the point number image 75. That is, in the point number image 75, the number of prize balls after returning from the power off state is displayed. Further, at this time, the character "?" Is displayed in the hit image 88.

Then, when the gaming machine 1 is turned off, the image display unit 114 is turned off as shown in FIG. 120 (6).
Then, when the power off state is resolved in the state where the RAM clear switch 58c is OFF, as shown in FIG. 120 (7), the image display unit 114 shows the returning image 62, the game continuation instruction image 81, and the returning image. The right-handed image 83 is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 120 (8), the right-handed image 71, the round image 72, the music selection image 73, the point number image 75, and the hit image 88 are displayed on the image display unit 114. At this time, in the image 72 during the round, the character that is the subject of the gaming machine 1 is lowering his right hand. That is, the display content in the image 72 during the round is the display content when the jackpot game is started (see FIG. 120 (1)). Further, at this time, the text "0Pt" is displayed on the point number image 75.
Then, when the jackpot game is completed, the high accuracy start image 80 is displayed as shown in FIG. 121 (9).

Next, in the high-probability time-saving gaming state, as shown in FIG. 121 (10), the decorative symbol 41 (“315”) having low decorativeness is fixedly stopped in the image display unit 114. Then, the small symbol 56 is also fixedly stopped by the arrangement of the numbers of "315" like the decorative symbol 41.
Then, for example, when the game ball wins in the second starting opening 11a, as shown in FIG. 121 (11), the decorative symbol 41 starts to change with the start of the variation display of the special symbol.

As described above, in the first modification, when the power cut state occurs and the power cut state is resolved during the execution of the jackpot game, the round number image 74 is not displayed thereafter. In this case, when the power off state is resolved, the player misidentifies the progress of the jackpot game by displaying the round number image 74 even though the staging control unit 130m does not recognize the progress of the jackpot game. Can be suppressed.

(Modification example 2 of the production in the jackpot game)
122 and 123 are the effects performed by the effect control unit 130 m using the image display unit 114 and the like, and are diagrams showing other modified examples of the effects in the jackpot game.
Next, another modified example (modified example 2) will be described with reference to FIGS. 122 and 123 for the effect in the jackpot game. In the following description, the points different from each of the above-mentioned processing examples and each effect will be mainly described, and the points that match each of the above-mentioned processing examples and each effect may be omitted.

First, when the jackpot game is started, as shown in FIG. 122 (1), the image display unit 114 has a right-handed image 71, a round middle image 72, a music selection image 73, a round number image 74, and a point number image. 75 and the hit image 88 are displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 122 (2), the highly accurate fanning effect is started. In the high-accuracy fanning effect, the high-accuracy fanning image 76 is displayed.

Then, when the gaming machine 1 is turned off, the image display unit 114 is turned off as shown in FIG. 122 (3).
Then, when the power off state is resolved in the state where the RAM clear switch 58c is OFF, as shown in FIG. 122 (4), the image display unit 114 shows the returning image 62, the game continuation instruction image 81, and the returning image. The right-handed image 83 is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 122 (5), the jackpot notification image 84, the game start notification image 85, the game execution instruction image 86, and the right-handed instruction image 87 are displayed on the image display unit 114. .. The round number image 74, the point number image 75, the hit image 88, and the like are not displayed.

Then, when the gaming machine 1 is turned off, the image display unit 114 is turned off as shown in FIG. 122 (6).
Then, when the power off state is resolved in the state where the RAM clear switch 58c is OFF, as shown in FIG. 122 (7), the image display unit 114 shows the returning image 62, the game continuation instruction image 81, and the returning image. The right-handed image 83 is displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 122 (8), the jackpot notification image 84, the game start notification image 85, the game execution instruction image 86, and the right-handed instruction image 87 are displayed on the image display unit 114. ..

Then, when the jackpot game is completed, in the high-probability time-saving game state, as shown in FIG. 123 (9), the decorative symbol 41 (“315”) having low decorativeness is fixedly stopped in the image display unit 114. .. Then, the small symbol 56 is also fixedly stopped by the arrangement of the numbers of "315" like the decorative symbol 41.
Then, for example, when the game ball wins in the second starting opening 11a, as shown in FIG. 123 (10), the decorative symbol 41 starts to change with the start of the variation display of the special symbol.

(Non-initialization test operation processing when the movable staging member malfunctions)
124 and 125 are diagrams showing an example of non-initialization test operation processing when a malfunction of the movable staging member 115 has occurred.
Next, an example of the non-initialization test operation process will be described with reference to FIGS. 124 and 125. In the following description, the points different from each of the above-mentioned processing examples and each effect will be mainly described, and the points that match each of the above-mentioned processing examples and each effect may be omitted.

First, as shown in FIG. 124 (1), the decorative symbol 41 is fixedly stopped in the image display unit 114 as the variation of the previous special symbol is completed by the staging control unit 130m.
Then, as shown in FIG. 124 (2), the variation of the decorative symbol 41 is started with the start of the variation display of the next special symbol.
Next, as shown in FIG. 124 (3), the reach effect is executed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 124 (4), the SP reach effect is executed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 124 (5), the SPSP reach effect is executed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 124 (6), an operation effect is performed. In the operation effect, the button operation image 89 is displayed.
Then, when the player operates the effect button 161 while the button operation image 89 is displayed, the character operation effect is performed as shown in FIG. 124 (7). In the accessory movement effect, the left movable effect member 115A, the middle movable effect member 115B, and the right movable effect member 115C each operate so as to cover a part of the image display unit 114.

Then, when the gaming machine 1 is turned off, the image display unit 114 is turned off as shown in FIG. 124 (8). At this time, the left movable effect member 115A, the middle movable effect member 115B, and the right movable effect member 115C stop operating while partially covering the image display unit 114.

Next, when the power off state is resolved while the RAM clear switch 58c is OFF, the returning image 62 and the game continuation instruction image 81 are displayed on the image display unit 114 as shown in FIG. 125 (9). To. Further, at this time, the left movable effect member 115A and the middle movable effect member 115B return to the positions before the accessory operation effect is performed. On the other hand, in the right movable effect member 115C, a malfunction has occurred, and the position does not return to the position before the accessory operation effect is performed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 125 (10), a non-initialization test operation process is performed. In the non-initialization test operation process, the left movable effect member 115A and the middle movable effect member 115B each operate so as to cover a part of the image display unit 114. On the other hand, the right movable staging member 115C maintains a non-operating state.
Then, as shown in FIG. 125 (11), the non-initialization test operation process by the left movable effect member 115A and the middle movable effect member 115B is completed. On the other hand, in the right movable staging member 115C, the state of covering a part of the image display unit 114 is maintained. At this time, the decorative symbol 41, the reserved number display 55, and the small symbol 56 are displayed.

(Modification example 1 of non-initialization test operation processing)
FIG. 126 is a diagram showing a modified example of the non-initialization test operation process when the movable effect member 115 has a malfunction.
Next, another example (modification example 1) of the non-initialization test operation process will be described with reference to FIG. 126. In the following description, the points different from each of the above-mentioned processing examples and each effect will be mainly described, and the points that match each of the above-mentioned processing examples and each effect may be omitted.

First, in this modification, the same effect as described with reference to FIGS. 124 (1) to 124 (5) is performed. That is, the variation of the special symbol is started, and the reach effect, the SP reach effect, and the SPSP reach effect are performed. Then, as shown in FIG. 126 (1), the operation effect is performed. In the operation effect, the button operation image 89 is displayed.

Then, when the player operates the effect button 161 while the button operation image 89 is displayed, the character operation effect is performed as shown in FIG. 126 (2). In this accessory movement effect, the left movable effect member 115A, the middle movable effect member 115B, and the right movable effect member 115C move to the front side of the image display unit 114.
Subsequently, in the accessory movement effect, as shown in FIG. 126 (3), the left movable effect member 115A, the middle movable effect member 115B, and the right movable effect member 115C move to the right, respectively.

Then, when the gaming machine 1 is turned off, the image display unit 114 is turned off as shown in FIG. 126 (4). At this time, the left movable effect member 115A, the middle movable effect member 115B, and the right movable effect member 115C stop operating while partially covering the image display unit 114.

When the power off state is resolved while the RAM clear switch 58c is OFF, the returning image 62 and the game continuation instruction image 81 are displayed on the image display unit 114 as shown in FIG. 126 (5). .. Further, at this time, the middle movable effect member 115B and the right movable effect member 115C return to the positions before the accessory operation effect is performed. On the other hand, in the left movable effect member 115A, a malfunction has occurred, and the position does not return to the position before the accessory operation effect is performed. The position of the left movable effect member 115A at this time is the position where the left movable effect member 115A and the middle movable effect member 115B come into contact with each other when the middle movable effect member 115B performs an operation by the non-initialization test operation process. be.
In this case, as shown in FIG. 126 (6), none of the left movable effect member 115A, the middle movable effect member 115B, and the right movable effect member 115C is operated by the non-initialization test operation process. Further, the left movable staging member 115A maintains a state of covering a part of the image display unit 114. At this time, the decorative symbol 41, the reserved number display 55, and the small symbol 56 are displayed.

As described above, in the first modification, when the power supply disconnection state occurs during the operation of the movable production member 115 (when the power supply disconnection state is abnormal), the abnormality of the movable production member 115 continues even after the power supply disconnection state is resolved. When the non-initialization test operation process is performed and one movable effect member 115 comes into contact with another movable effect member 115, the operation of any of the movable effect members 115 is restricted.
In this case, it is possible to suppress secondary damage caused by contact between one movable staging member 115 and another movable staging member 115 by performing a non-initialization test operation process after the power off state is resolved. can.

(Modification example 2 of non-initialization test operation processing)
FIG. 127 is a diagram showing another modification of the non-initialization test operation process when the movable effect member 115 has a malfunction.
Next, another example (modification example 2) of the non-initialization test operation process will be described with reference to FIG. 114. In the following description, the points different from each of the above-mentioned processing examples and each effect will be mainly described, and the points that match each of the above-mentioned processing examples and each effect may be omitted.

First, in this modification, the same effect as described with reference to FIGS. 126 (1) to 126 (3) is performed. That is, the change of the special symbol is started, and then the character movement effect is performed. Then, when the gaming machine 1 is turned off, the image display unit 114 is turned off as shown in FIG. 127 (1). At this time, the left movable effect member 115A, the middle movable effect member 115B, and the right movable effect member 115C stop operating while partially covering the image display unit 114.

When the power off state is resolved while the RAM clear switch 58c is OFF, the returning image 62 and the game continuation instruction image 81 are displayed on the image display unit 114 as shown in FIG. 127 (2). .. Further, at this time, the middle movable effect member 115B and the right movable effect member 115C return to the positions before the accessory operation effect is performed. On the other hand, in the left movable effect member 115A, a malfunction has occurred, and the position does not return to the position before the accessory operation effect is performed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 127 (3), a non-initialization test operation process is performed. In this case, the middle movable effect member 115B and the right movable effect member 115C each operate so as to cover a part of the image display unit 114. On the other hand, the left movable staging member 115A does not operate by the non-initialization test operation process. Further, at this time, the contact of the medium movable effect member 115B with the left movable effect member 115A hinders the operation of the medium movable effect member 115B by the non-initialization test operation process.

Then, as shown in FIG. 127 (4), the non-initialization test operation process by the middle movable effect member 115B and the right movable effect member 115C is completed. On the other hand, the left movable staging member 115A maintains a state of covering a part of the image display unit 114. At this time, the decorative symbol 41, the reserved number display 55, and the small symbol 56 are displayed.

As described above, in the modification 2, when the power supply disconnection state occurs during the operation of the movable production member 115 (when the power supply disconnection state is abnormal), the abnormality of the movable production member 115 continues even after the power supply disconnection state is resolved. Even if one movable staging member 115 and another movable staging member 115 come into contact with each other when the non-initialization test operation process is performed, the movable staging member 115 located at the initial position is not affected. Perform the operation by the initialization test process.
In this case, when the other movable effect member 115 comes into contact with the one movable effect member 115 whose abnormality continues, the abnormality of the one movable effect member 115 whose abnormality continues may be eliminated. be.

In the above, an operation example when the non-initialization test operation process is performed has been described with reference to FIGS. 124, 125, 126, and 127, but the operation example is not limited to this, and the initialization test operation process is not limited to this. Even when the above is performed, the same operation as the operation example described with reference to FIGS. 124, 125, 126, and 127 may be performed.

In the operation example of the non-initialization test operation process, if the movable effect member 115 malfunctions after the gaming machine 1 is turned off, an alarm indicating that the malfunction has occurred is issued from the speaker 156. It may be output or a warning image indicating that a malfunction has occurred may be displayed on the image display unit 114.

(Variable staging example 7)
FIG. 128 is a diagram showing one aspect of the effect performed by the effect control unit 130 m using the image display unit 114 or the like.
Next, another specific example (variation effect example 7) of the variation effect of the decorative symbol 41 will be described with reference to FIG. 128.
The variation effect shown in FIG. 115 is a variation effect executed in a high-probability time-saving gaming state. Further, in the following description, the points different from each of the above-mentioned processing examples and each effect will be mainly described, and the points that match each of the above-mentioned processing examples and each effect may be omitted.

First, as shown in FIG. 128 (1), the staging control unit 130m terminates the variation of the previous special symbol, and the image display unit 114 definitely stops the decorative symbol 41 having low decorativeness. There is.
Then, as shown in FIG. 128 (2), the variation of the decorative symbol 41 is started with the start of the variation display of the next special symbol.

Then, when the gaming machine 1 is turned off, the image display unit 114 is turned off as shown in FIG. 128 (3).
Then, in the state where the RAM clear switch 58c is OFF, the power off state of the gaming machine 1 is resolved. That is, in the variation effect example 7, the non-initialization return is performed. In this case, as shown in FIG. 128 (4), the returning image 62 and the game continuation instruction image 81 are displayed on the image display unit 114. Further, at this time, the background on the display screen of the image display unit 114 is a case where the non-initialization return is performed after the game machine 1 is turned off during the fluctuation effect of the low-probability time-saving non-game state (FIG. 117 (FIG. 117). It is displayed in a different color from 5)). In the illustrated example, the background color on the display screen of the image display unit 114 is displayed in blue. Further, at this time, the right-handed image 83 during the return is displayed on the image display unit 114.

Then, as the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped, as shown in FIG. 128 (5), the number "315", which is the three decorative symbols 41 having low decorativeness, is fixedly stopped. In addition, the small symbol 56 stops as the special symbol stops changing. At this time, the combination "315" of the small symbols 56 matches the combination of the decorative symbols 41. Further, at this time, one reserved image 52 is displayed. Further, at this time, the hold number display 55 of the second starting port 11a indicates "1". Further, at this time, the variable image 51 is not displayed on the image display unit 114.

Then, as shown in FIG. 128 (6), the variation of the decorative symbol 41 is started with the start of the variation display of the next special symbol. Further, at this time, the first reserved image 52 moves to the display position of the variable image 51, so that the variable image 51 is displayed. Further, at this time, the hold number display 55 of the second starting port 11a indicates "0".

As described above, in the present embodiment, the display content of the image display unit 114 is different between the low-probability time-saving non-game state and the high-probability time-saving gaming state when the non-initialization return is performed.
In addition, in the variation effect example 7, it has been explained that when the non-initialization return is performed, the returning right-handed image 83 (see FIG. 128 (4)) is displayed together with the returning image 62, but the limitation is limited to this. Not done. As an image displayed together with the returning image 62, for example, a right-handed image 71 (see FIG. 128 (5)) may be displayed.

(Event when the signal line is not connected)
FIG. 129 is a diagram illustrating an event when the signal line is not connected.
Next, with reference to FIG. 129, an event when the signal line connecting the two functional units is not connected will be described. In the following description, the points different from each of the above-mentioned processing examples and each effect will be mainly described, and the points that match each of the above-mentioned processing examples and each effect may be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 129 (1), the decorative symbol 41 is fixedly stopped on the screen of the image display unit 114 as the variation of the previous special symbol is completed by the staging control unit 130m. At this time, the BGM is output from the speaker 156. Further, at this time, the game control board and the fraud detection control board are connected by a signal line. More specifically, the game control board and the fraud detection control board are connected by a signal line via a connector.

The fraud detection control board is a board that controls the detection of fraud in the game by the player. A radio wave detection means, a magnetic detection means, and a vibration detection means are connected to the fraud detection control board.
The radio wave detecting means detects an abnormal radio wave. For example, when the radio wave detecting means detects a radio wave having a power density equal to or higher than a predetermined value, it notifies the game control board that an abnormal radio wave has been detected via a signal line.
The magnetic detection means detects anomalous magnetism. For example, when the magnetic detection means detects magnetism having a magnetic flux density equal to or higher than a predetermined value, it notifies the game control board that abnormal magnetism has been detected via a signal line.
The vibration detecting means detects abnormal vibration. For example, when the vibration detecting means detects a vibration having an acceleration equal to or higher than a predetermined value, the vibration detecting means notifies the game control board via a signal line that the abnormal vibration has been detected.

When the main control board 110 configured in the main control board receives a notification regarding an abnormality from the fraud detection control board, it notifies an error according to the type of the received notification.
Further, the main control board is provided with a connection detection sensor. The connection detection sensor is a sensor that detects the presence or absence of a connection between the main control board and the fraud detection control board.

Next, as shown in FIG. 129 (2), the variation of the decorative symbol 41 is started with the start of the variation display of the next special symbol. Further, at this time, the BGM corresponding to the fluctuation effect is output from the speaker 156.

Then, as shown in FIG. 129 (3), the connector connecting the main control board and the fraud detection control board is disconnected, so that the main control board and the fraud detection control board are not connected. In this case, the connection detection sensor provided on the main control board detects the disconnection of the signal line connecting the main control board and the fraud detection control board. Then, when the disconnection of the signal line connecting the main control board and the fraud detection control board is detected, the main control board 110 displays the radio wave error notification image 90 and the magnetic error notification image 91 on the image display unit 114. , Vibration error notification image 92 is displayed. Further, the speaker 156 ends the output of the BGM according to the fluctuation effect, and outputs a notification sound indicating that a radio wave error has occurred, a notification sound indicating that a magnetic error has occurred, and a notification sound indicating that a vibration error has occurred. Let me.

The radio wave error notification image 90 is an image that notifies or suggests that a radio wave error has occurred. The radio wave error notification image 90 is an image displayed when the main control board 110 receives a notification of detection of an abnormal radio wave from the radio wave detecting means.
The magnetic error notification image 91 is an image that notifies or suggests that a magnetic error has occurred. The timing error notification image 91 is an image displayed when the main control board 110 receives a notification of abnormal magnetism detection from the magnetic detection means.
The vibration error notification image 92 is an image that notifies or suggests that a vibration error has occurred. The vibration error notification image 92 is an image displayed when the main control board 110 receives a notification of detection of abnormal vibration from the vibration detecting means.

After that, when the main control board and the fraud detection control board are reconnected by connecting the connector to the signal line, the radio wave error notification image 90, the magnetic error notification image 91, and the vibration error notification are notified. The image 92 may be hidden, the error notification sound may not be output, and the decorative symbol 41 or the like may be displayed again. Further, even when the main control board and the fraud detection control board are reconnected, the radio wave error notification image 90, the magnetic error notification image 91, and the vibration error notification image 92 are displayed, and the error notification sound is output. May be continued.

(Event 2 when the signal line is not connected)
FIG. 130 is a diagram illustrating an event when the signal line is not connected.
Next, with reference to FIG. 130, an event (event 2) when the signal line connecting the two functional units is not connected will be described. In the following description, the points different from each of the above-mentioned processing examples and each effect will be mainly described, and the points that match each of the above-mentioned processing examples and each effect may be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 130 (1), the decorative symbol 41 is fixedly stopped on the screen of the image display unit 114 as the variation of the previous special symbol is completed by the staging control unit 130m. At this time, the BGM is output from the speaker 156. Further, at this time, the game control board and the staging control board are connected by a signal line. More specifically, the main control board and the staging control board are connected by a signal line via a connector.

Next, as shown in FIG. 130 (2), the variation of the decorative symbol 41 is started with the start of the variation display of the next special symbol. Further, at this time, the BGM corresponding to the fluctuation effect is output from the speaker 156.

Then, as shown in FIG. 130 (3), the connector connecting the main control board and the staging control board is disconnected, so that the main control board and the staging control board are not connected. Even in this case, the display of the decorative symbol 41 is continued on the image display unit 114. More specifically, the three decorative symbols 41 are temporarily stopped. Further, at this time, the notification regarding various errors is not performed. Further, at this time, the BGM corresponding to the fluctuation effect is output from the speaker 156.

Then, as shown in FIG. 130 (4), the main control board and the staging control board are reconnected by connecting the connector to the signal line. Even in this case, notification of various errors is not performed. Then, as the fluctuation of the special symbol stops, the number "421", which is the three decorative symbols 41, is fixedly stopped. Further, at this time, the BGM corresponding to the fluctuation effect is output from the speaker 156.

(Event 3 when the signal line is not connected)
FIG. 131 is a diagram illustrating an event when the signal line is not connected.
Next, with reference to FIG. 131, an event (event 3) when the signal line connecting the two functional units is not connected will be described. In the following description, the points different from each of the above-mentioned processing examples and each effect will be mainly described, and the points that match each of the above-mentioned processing examples and each effect may be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 131 (1), the decorative symbol 41 is fixedly stopped on the screen of the image display unit 114 as the variation of the previous special symbol is completed by the staging control unit 130m. At this time, the BGM is output from the speaker 156. Further, at this time, the main control board and the switch are connected by a signal line. More specifically, the main control board and the switch are connected by a signal line via a connector. This switch may be, for example, the first start port detection switch 10a. Further, the switch may be the second start port detection switch 11c or the gate detection switch 12a.
Further, the main control board is provided with a connection detection sensor. The connection detection sensor is a sensor that detects the presence or absence of a connection between the main control board and the switch.

Next, as shown in FIG. 131 (2), the variation of the decorative symbol 41 is started with the start of the variation display of the next special symbol. Further, at this time, the BGM corresponding to the fluctuation effect is output from the speaker 156.

Then, as shown in FIG. 131 (3), the connector connecting the main control board and the switch is disconnected, so that the main control board and the switch are not connected. In this case, the connection detection sensor provided on the main control board detects the disconnection of the signal line connecting the main control board and the switch. Then, when it is detected that the signal line connecting the main control board and the switch is not connected, the main control unit 110A causes the image display unit 114 to display the disconnection error notification image 93. Further, the speaker 156 ends the output of the BGM corresponding to the fluctuation effect, and outputs a notification sound indicating that a disconnection error has occurred.
The disconnection error notification image 93 is an image that notifies or suggests that an error related to the non-connection of the signal line has occurred.

After that, when the connector is connected to the signal line and the main control board and the switch are reconnected, the disconnection error notification image 93 is hidden and the disconnection error notification sound is output. It disappears, and the decorative symbol 41 and the like may be displayed again. Further, even when the main control board and the switch are reconnected, the display of the disconnection error notification image 93 and the output of the disconnection error notification sound may be continued.
Further, the image displayed when the non-connection of the signal line connecting the main control board and the switch is detected is not limited to the disconnection error notification image 93. When it is detected that the signal line connecting the game control board and the first start port detection switch 10a is not connected, an image notifying the error of the first start port detection switch 10a may be displayed. That is, depending on the type of switch, an image notifying the error of the switch in which unconnected is detected may be displayed. In other words, when the unconnected signal line connecting the main control board and the switch is detected, at least one of the connection error and the connection destination error may be notified.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the disconnection of the predetermined signal line connected to the main control means is detected during the output of the predetermined effect sound, the output sound is terminated and the predetermined notification is given. Sound can be output. In this case, even during the output of the predetermined effect sound, the predetermined notification sound can be notified in preference to the effect sound.

In the event described with reference to FIGS. 129 to 131, the case where the decorative symbol 41 is changing has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. That is, when the signal line connecting the two functional units is not connected even during the customer waiting effect or the execution of the jackpot game, it is the same as the event described with reference to FIGS. 83 to 85. An event may occur.

Further, although the description is omitted, in each variation effect example and its modification, and in the operation example and its modification in the non-initialization return processing, after the power off state is resolved, FIGS. 100, 101, 124, and FIGS. The non-initialization return processing and the non-initialization test operation processing described with reference to 125, 126, and 127 may be performed.

Further, in the present embodiment, an example in which light is emitted as a normal light emitting mode has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. That is, the normal light emitting mode may be a non-light emitting mode. That is, the normal light emitting mode includes a mode that does not emit light.

Further, the movable staging member 115 may be provided on the frame member 150 or may be provided on the game board 4. That is, the movable staging member 115 can be regarded as a first light emitting unit capable of emitting light and also as a second light emitting unit capable of emitting light.

The various effects of the gaming machine 1 and the initial operations of the various drive sources have been described above, but it is not particularly mentioned that all or part of the explained contents are applied to or combined with other effects and controls. It is also possible. In addition, various processing examples, variation effect examples, and modification examples have been mentioned, but there is no mention in this document of applying or combining the contents of such processing examples, variation effect examples, and modification examples to other effects. It is possible even in some cases. Further, it is possible to combine various processing examples, variation staging examples, and modification examples, or to replace some of them even if there is no reference to this document.

[Technical Features of the Present Invention]
(Technical Features of the Invention Related to Vibration Production)
In the conventional gaming machine, based on the determination information acquired based on the establishment of the starting condition, it is determined whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player, and the gaming machine that executes the game effect according to the result of the determination. Is common. In such a gaming machine, there is known one that executes an effect by using a predetermined effect device (effect button, movable effect member, etc.) (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2019-033816). However, a gaming machine as described in the above patent document has a problem that the interest in gaming is low.

The first configuration that achieves the above object of the present invention is realized as the following gaming machine. This game machine has a determination means for determining whether or not to perform a special game based on the game information acquired by the acquisition means when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and a determination means based on the game information before the determination is performed. A pre-determination means for preliminarily determining whether or not to perform the special game, an effect control means capable of executing a game effect according to the result of the determination and the result of the pre-determination, and an operation operable by the player. The effect control means includes means, and the effect control means includes a specific effect (game effect with reach) that executes a second effect (post-reach effect) after the first effect (pre-reach effect), and the operation means for the player. It is possible to execute an operation promotion effect (displaying an operation promotion image) that prompts an operation and a vibration effect that vibrates the operation means. The vibration effect includes a first vibration effect (vibration with a button operation) and the vibration effect. The second vibration effect (vibration without button operation) in which the effect mode (vibration intensity / vibration time) is different from the first vibration effect, and the third vibration effect (button vibration notice at the start of fluctuation) executed based on the preliminary determination. 36 to 38), and the first vibration effect (vibration with button operation) is more than the case where the second vibration effect (vibration without button operation: dialogue, step-up: FIGS. 46, 47) is executed. : Decision, re-lottery, revival: When the operation promotion effect (FIG. 51, FIG. 55, FIG. 58) is executed, the execution period (operation valid period) of the operation promotion effect (display of the operation promotion image) is longer and easier to execute. (Vibration without button operation has no operation valid period), The third vibration effect (button vibration notice at the start of fluctuation) is the second effect (after reach) when the specific effect (game effect with reach) is executed. The first effect (pre-reach effect) is easier to execute than the effect (effect) (button vibration warning effect (button vibration notice at the start of fluctuation) in FIGS. 13, 37 and 38), FIG. 59, FIG. 75).

A second configuration that achieves the above object of the present invention is realized as the following gaming machine. This game machine has a determination means for determining whether or not to perform a special game based on the game information acquired by the acquisition means when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and a determination means based on the game information before the determination is performed. A pre-determination means for preliminarily determining whether or not to perform the special game, an effect control means capable of executing a game effect according to the result of the determination and the result of the pre-determination, and an operation operable by the player. The effect control means comprises means and a plurality of movable effect objects (movable effect members), and the effect control means includes an operation promotion effect (display of an operation promotion image) for urging a player to operate the operation means. It is possible to execute a vibration effect that vibrates the operating means and a function effect that operates the effect accessory. The vibration effect includes a first vibration effect (vibration with button operation) and the first vibration effect. A second vibration effect (vibration without button operation) having a different effect mode (vibration intensity / vibration time) and a third vibration effect (button vibration notice at the start of fluctuation) executed based on the prior determination: FIGS. 36 to 36. 38, Button vibration notice effect at the time of winning: S665 in FIG. 36, FIG. 59), and the first vibration effect (vibration with button operation) is higher than the case where the second vibration effect (vibration without button operation) is executed. ) Is executed for a longer period (operation valid period) of the operation promotion effect (display of the operation promotion image), and the third vibration effect (button vibration notice at the start of fluctuation, at the time of winning) is more likely to be executed. The first vibration effect (vibration with button operation: decision) is easier to execute for a longer period of time than the button vibration notice (button vibration at the start of fluctuation) for 1 second (weak notice) and 3 seconds (weak notice). (Strong notice), FIG. 51), the first vibration effect (vibration with button operation: decision) is executed more than when the third vibration effect (button vibration at the start of fluctuation, button vibration at the time of winning) is executed. It is characterized in that it is easier to execute a predetermined bonus effect (decision bonus action: two or more bonuses are activated) (FIG. 37, FIG. 38, FIG. 51, FIG. 67 (7)). ..

A third configuration that achieves the above object of the present invention is realized as the following gaming machine. This gaming machine can execute a determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game based on the game information acquired by the acquisition means when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and a game effect according to the result of the determination. The operation means includes an effect control means and an operation means that can be operated by the player, and the operation means has a first operation mode (single push) and a second operation mode (continuous hit / long press) different from the first operation mode. ), And when it is determined by the determination that the effect control means executes the special game (big hit), the operation mode of the operation means (single push / continuous hit / length). A special effect (decision effect) that suggests the possibility of executing the special game in an effect mode (battle effect / mission effect) according to the push), and a vibration effect (decision success vibration effect) that vibrates the operating means. Is possible, and the special effect (decision effect) is executed in the first effect mode (battle effect) corresponding to the first operation mode (single push), and the second operation mode (continuous hit / length). The special effect (decision effect) is executed in the second effect mode (mission effect) according to the push), and the vibration effect (decision success vibration effect) is executed after the operation means is operated. It is characterized in that the start timings are different (FIG. 52).

A fourth configuration that achieves the above object of the present invention is realized as the following gaming machine. This game machine has a determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game based on the game information acquired by the acquisition means when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and a game in which a symbol is variablely displayed according to the result of the determination. The effect control means is provided with an effect control means capable of executing the effect and an operation means that can be operated by the player, and the effect control means can be controlled into a first effect mode (normal) and a second effect mode (probability change). Yes, it is possible to execute an operation promotion effect (display of an operation promotion image) that urges the player to operate the operation means during the game effect, and the game effect is reached by the first symbol (even number, pinch symbol). The first game effect in which the effect is executed, the second game effect in which the reach effect is executed by the second symbol (an odd number symbol other than "7"), and the reach effect are executed by the third symbol ("7" symbol). The third game effect to be performed and the fourth game effect (reversal "7" symbol) in which the first symbol (even number, pinch symbol) is displayed and then the third symbol ("7" symbol) is displayed. The operation promotion effect (display of the operation promotion image) includes a first operation promotion effect (single push promotion image) and a second operation promotion effect (continuous hit / long press / revival operation promotion image). The second effect mode (probability change) is better than the first effect mode (normal) in the fourth game effect (reversal 7) based on the second operation promotion effect (continuous hit / long press / revival operation promotion image). ) Is easy to execute (Fig. 7: Jackpot symbol TB, Fig. 12: Special figure fluctuation PTB, Fig. 42: Normal effect PTB, Fig. 43: Probability change effect PTB, Fig. 58: Resurrection effect PTB, Fig. 71: Reversal "7". Production example).

A fifth configuration that achieves the above object of the present invention is realized as the following gaming machine. This game machine includes an effect control means capable of executing a game effect, an operation means (button / lever) that can be operated by the player, and a sound output means (speaker) capable of outputting a predetermined effect sound. The effect control means vibrates the operation means when the operation promotion effect (display of the operation promotion image) for urging the player to operate the operation means and the operation promotion effect (display of the operation promotion image) are performed. Vibration effect (successful decision vibration effect / successful resurrection vibration effect) can be executed, and the operation promotion effect includes the first operation promotion effect (button image at the time of button determination / resurrection) and the second operation promotion. There is an effect (lever image at the time of lever determination / revival), and when the first operation promotion effect (button image at the time of button determination / revival) is executed, the vibration effect (decision success vibration effect / revival success) is executed. When the vibration effect) is performed, the first effect sound (success sound effect A) is output (FIGS. 51 and 58), and the second operation promotion effect (lever image at the time of lever determination / revival) is executed. In this case, when the vibration effect (decision success vibration effect / resurrection success vibration effect) is performed, a second effect sound (success effect sound B) different from the first effect sound is output (FIGS. 51 and 58). It is characterized by that.

A sixth configuration that achieves the above object of the present invention is realized as the following gaming machine. This game machine is based on a determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game based on the game information acquired by the acquisition means when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and a determination means based on the game information before the determination is made. The player can operate the pre-determination means for preliminarily determining whether or not to perform the special game, the effect control means capable of executing the game effect according to the result of the determination and the result of the pre-determination, and the player. The effect control means can be controlled into a first effect mode (normal) and a second effect mode (probability change), and a vibration effect (button operation, pattern alignment) that vibrates the operation means. , Pre-reading notice (button vibration at the start of fluctuation, button vibration at the time of winning) can be executed, and the vibration effect includes the first vibration effect (vibration with button operation) and the first vibration effect and effect mode (vibration). There is a second vibration effect (vibration without button operation) with different intensity / vibration time) and a third vibration effect (button vibration at the start of fluctuation, button vibration at the time of winning) executed based on the preliminary determination. The rate at which the third vibration effect (button vibration at the start of fluctuation) is executed differs between the first effect mode (normal) and the second effect mode (probability change) (FIG. 37, 38: normal> probability change). It is characterized by.

◆ The seventh configuration that achieves the above object of the present invention is realized as the following gaming machine. This gaming machine has a determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game based on the game information acquired by the acquisition means when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and the symbol is variablely displayed when the start condition is satisfied, and the determination is made. The effect control means is provided with an effect control means capable of executing a game effect of stopping and displaying a symbol in a display mode indicating the result of the above, and an operation means that can be operated by the player, and the effect control means is a special indicating the execution of the special game. In the game effect (big hit game effect) in which the symbols are stopped and displayed in the display mode (big hit symbol alignment), a special effect (decision success effect) suggesting the execution of the special game and a vibration effect (decision) that vibrates the operation means. (Successful vibration effect) is feasible, and the symbols in the special display mode (big hit symbol alignment) are different from the first display embodiment (even symbol alignment) and the first display embodiment (odd number symbol alignment). ), And even if the symbol is displayed in the first display mode (even-numbered symbol alignment), the symbol is displayed in the second display mode (odd-numbered symbol alignment). Even if there is, the effect mode of the vibration effect (decision success vibration effect) executed when the predetermined effect (success effect image) is performed along with the execution of the special effect (decision success effect) is the same (vibration intensity is the same). It is characterized by (strong vibration) (FIG. 51).

The eighth configuration that achieves the above object of the present invention is realized as the following gaming machine. This game machine can execute a determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game based on the game information acquired by the acquisition means when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and a game effect according to the result of the determination. The effect control means is provided with an effect control means and an operation means that can be operated by the player, and the effect control means can be controlled in a first effect mode (normal) and a second effect mode (probability change), and the player can control the effect. An operation promotion effect (display of an operation promotion image) for encouraging the operation of the operation means and a predetermined effect (display of an image suggesting the degree of expectation and development) accompanying the execution of the operation promotion effect (display of the operation promotion image). It is possible to execute a special effect (cut-in, development, decision, etc.) to execute the above operation and a vibration effect (button operation vibration) that vibrates the operation means. The white button image) and the second operation promotion effect (red button image) having different expectations for the special game to be executed from the first operation promotion effect, the first effect mode (normal) and the first effect. Expectation that the special game is executed when the second operation promotion effect (red button image) and the vibration effect (button operation vibration: cut-in, development, determination) are executed in the two effect modes (probability change). It is characterized in that the degrees are different (FIG. 6: jackpot probability TB, FIG. 49: development, FIG. 50: cut-in, FIG. 51: decision).

A ninth configuration that achieves the above object of the present invention is realized as the following gaming machine. This game machine has a determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game based on the game information acquired by the acquisition means when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and an effect capable of executing the game effect according to the result of the determination. The effect control means includes a control means and an operation means that can be operated by the player, and the effect control means performs a second effect (post-reach effect) after the first effect (pre-reach effect). The effect) and the vibration effect that vibrates the operating means can be executed, and in the specific effect (game effect with reach), the vibration effect is executed at the time of the first effect (pre-reach effect). In some cases, the vibration effect is executed during the second effect (post-reach effect) (FIG. 73), and the vibration effect includes the first vibration effect (vibration time is short: 1 second). , There is a second vibration effect (vibration time longer: 3 seconds or more) whose execution period is longer than the first vibration effect, and in the case of the first effect (pre-reach effect), the second vibration effect (vibration time). The first vibration effect (short vibration time: look-ahead, dialogue, step-up, pseudo) is easier to execute than (long) (FIGS. 45 to 48: pre-reach notice TB, FIG. 73).
In the case of the second effect (post-reach effect), the second vibration effect (long vibration time: decision, re-lottery, revival) is easier to execute than the first vibration effect (short vibration time) (the vibration time is long). 42 and 43: Column of effect composition of variable effect PTB, FIG. 51: decision, FIG. 55: re-lottery, FIG. 58: resurrection, FIG. 73).

A tenth configuration that achieves the above object of the present invention is realized as the following gaming machine. This game machine has a determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game based on the game information acquired by the acquisition means when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and an effect capable of executing the game effect according to the result of the determination. The effect control means includes a control means and an operation means that can be operated by the player, and the effect control means executes a second effect (post-reach effect) after the first effect (pre-reach / mid-reach effect). It is possible to execute a game effect with reach) and a vibration effect that vibrates the operating means. The vibration effect includes a first vibration effect (weak vibration in a short time / strong vibration in a short time) and the first vibration effect. There is a second vibration effect (strong vibration for a long time) that is different from the first vibration effect, and when the specific effect (game effect with reach) is executed, the first effect (before reach / during reach). When the first special effect (line notice / cut-in) is executed according to the operation of the operation means at the time of the effect), the operation of the operation means is performed during the second effect (post-reach effect). When the second special effect (decision effect, re-lottery effect, resurrection effect) is executed accordingly, the second vibration effect (strong vibration of 3 seconds or more) is more likely to be executed (FIGS. 42 and 43 :). The column of the effect composition of the variable effect PTB, FIGS. 45 to 48: notice TB before reach, FIG. 50: cut-in, FIG. 51: decision, FIG. 55: re-lottery, FIG. 58: resurrection, FIG. 75). ..

The eleventh configuration that achieves the above object of the present invention is realized as the following gaming machine. This game machine is based on a determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game based on the game information acquired by the acquisition means when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and the game information before the determination is made. The player can operate the pre-determination means for preliminarily determining whether or not to perform the special game, and the effect control means capable of executing the game effect according to the result of the determination and the result of the pre-determination. The staging control means can be controlled into a first staging mode (normal) and a second staging mode (probability variation), and the first staging mode (normal) and the second staging mode can be controlled. In any of the (probability change) effect modes, a continuous notice (effect notice effect, character operation notice) in which a predetermined effect (effect image, character operation) is performed over a vibration effect that vibrates the operating means and a plurality of game effects. The second number of times (three times) is larger than the first number of times (two times) in the first effect mode (normal) and the second effect mode (probability change). ) When a continuous advance notice for performing a predetermined effect (effect image, character operation) is executed in the game effect (FIGS. 39 and 40), the first effect mode is higher than that in the second effect mode (probability change). In the case of (normal), the reach effect (normal reach, SP reach and SPSP reach) is more likely to be executed in the game effect to be announced, and the special game is less likely to be executed (preliminary determination in FIGS. 11 to 13 and the relevant case). Selectivity of reach effect in case of loss in judgment: normal> probability change), in the second effect mode (probability change) than in the first effect mode (normal), the game effect to be announced When the reach effect is executed, the vibration effect (big hit confirmed vibration effect) is easily executed (selection rate of button vibration notice effect at the time of big hit in FIGS. 37 and 38: normal <probability change).

A twelfth configuration that achieves the above object of the present invention is realized as the following gaming machine. This game machine has a determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game based on the game information acquired by the acquisition means when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and an effect capable of executing the game effect according to the result of the determination. The effect control means includes a control means and an operation means that can be operated by the player, and the effect control means causes a light emission effect (light emission accompanying the display of the operation promotion image) that causes the operation means to emit light and the operation means to vibrate. Vibration effect (button operation vibration) can be executed, and in the light emission effect, the first light emission effect (white / red light emission) that causes the operation means to emit light in the first light emission mode and the operation means are the first. There is a second light emission effect (rainbow light emission) that emits light in the second light emission mode, and any of the first light emission effect (white / red light emission) and the second light emission effect (rainbow light emission) is executed. However, the vibration effect (button operation vibration) can be executed (FIGS. 46 to 51, 55, 58), and the vibration effect (button operation vibration) is the first light emission effect (white / red light emission). The effect mode (vibration intensity / vibration time) is different depending on whether the second light emission effect (rainbow light emission) is executed (the rainbow is stronger than white / red). Long time: FIG. 46-FIG. 51, FIG. 54, FIG. 55, FIG. 58).

A thirteenth configuration that achieves the above object of the present invention is realized as the following gaming machine. This game machine is based on a determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game based on the game information acquired by the acquisition means when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and a determination means based on the game information before the determination is made. The effect control is provided with a pre-determination means for preliminarily determining whether or not to perform the special game, and an effect control means capable of executing a game effect according to the result of the determination and the result of the pre-determination. The means can be controlled into a first effect mode (normal) and a second effect mode (probability change), and the first effect mode (normal) and the second effect mode (probability change) are used for a plurality of games. It is possible to execute a continuous notice (effect notice effect, character action notice effect) for performing a predetermined effect (effect image, character action) over the effect, and the game effect may be executed by the special game. Is executed in either the first effect pattern (with reach) suggesting that the special game is not executed or the second effect pattern (without reach) suggesting that the special game is not executed, and in the first effect mode (normal). In the case of the second effect mode (probability change), the continuous notice of performing the predetermined effect in the first number of times (2 times) of the game effect is smaller than that of the second number of times (3 times). In addition, the second effect pattern (without reach) is likely to be executed in the game effect to be announced (preliminary determination in FIGS. 11 to 13 and selection rate of reach effect in case of loss in the determination: normal> probability change, FIG. 37. , FIG. 38 is characterized in that the execution rate of the notice effect is normal <probability change, FIG. 39, FIG. 40) due to the normal fluctuation of the notice target.

A fourteenth configuration that achieves the above object of the present invention is realized as the following gaming machine. This game machine is based on a determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game based on the game information acquired by the acquisition means when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and a determination means based on the game information before the determination is made. The effect control is provided with a pre-determination means for preliminarily determining whether or not to perform the special game, and an effect control means capable of executing a game effect according to the result of the determination and the result of the pre-determination. The means can be controlled into a first effect mode (normal) and a second effect mode (probability change), and the first effect mode (normal) and the second effect mode (probability change) are used for a plurality of games. It is possible to execute a continuous notice (effect notice effect, character action notice effect) for performing a predetermined effect (effect image, character action) over the effect, and the game effect may be executed by the special game. Is executed in either the first effect pattern (with reach) suggesting that the special game is not executed or the second effect pattern (without reach) suggesting that the special game is not executed, and in the second effect mode (probability change). In the case where the continuous advance notice for performing a predetermined effect is executed in the game effect of the first number of times (2 times), which is less than the second number of times (3 times), in the first effect mode (normal). In addition, the first effect pattern (with reach) is likely to be executed in the game effect to be announced (preliminary determination in FIGS. 11 to 13 and selection rate of reach effect in case of loss in the determination, FIGS. 37 and 38. It is characterized by the execution ratio of the notice effect, FIG. 39, FIG. 40) due to the normal fluctuation of the loss of the notice target.

A fifteenth configuration that achieves the above object of the present invention is realized as the following gaming machine. This game machine is based on a determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game based on the game information acquired by the acquisition means when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and a determination means based on the game information before the determination is made. The effect control is provided with a pre-determination means for preliminarily determining whether or not to perform the special game, and an effect control means capable of executing a game effect according to the result of the determination and the result of the pre-determination. The means can be controlled into a first effect mode (normal) and a second effect mode (probability change), and the first effect mode (normal) and the second effect mode (probability change) are used for a plurality of games. It is possible to execute a continuous notice (effect notice effect, character action notice effect) for performing a predetermined effect (effect image, character action) over the effect, and the game effect may be executed by the special game. Is executed in either the first effect pattern (with reach) suggesting that the special game is not executed or the second effect pattern (without reach) suggesting that the special game is not executed, and in the second effect mode (probability change). In the case where the continuous advance notice for performing a predetermined effect is executed in the game effect of the second number of times (three times), which is larger than the first number of times (two times), in the first effect mode (normal). In addition, the first effect pattern (with reach) is likely to be executed in the game effect to be announced (preliminary determination in FIGS. 11 to 13 and selection rate of reach effect in case of loss in the determination, FIGS. 37 and 38. It is characterized by the execution ratio of the notice effect, FIG. 39, FIG. 40) due to the normal fluctuation of the loss of the notice target.

The sixteenth configuration that achieves the above object of the present invention is realized as the following gaming machine. This game machine is based on a determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game based on the game information acquired by the acquisition means when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and a determination means based on the game information before the determination is made. The effect control is provided with a pre-determination means for preliminarily determining whether or not to perform the special game, and an effect control means capable of executing a game effect according to the result of the determination and the result of the pre-determination. The means can be controlled into a first effect mode (normal) and a second effect mode (probability change), and the first effect mode (normal) and the second effect mode (probability change) are used for a plurality of games. It is possible to execute a continuous notice (effect notice effect, character action notice effect) for performing a predetermined effect (effect image, character action) over the effect, and the game effect is likely to execute the special game. Is executed in either the first effect pattern (with reach) suggesting that the special game is not executed or the second effect pattern (without reach) suggesting that the special game is not executed, and in the first effect mode (normal). In the case of the second effect mode (probability change), a continuous notice of performing a predetermined effect in the second number of times (three times) of the game effect, which is larger than the first number of times (two times), is executed. In addition, the second effect pattern (without reach) is likely to be executed in the game effect to be announced (preliminary determination in FIGS. 11 to 13 and selection rate of reach effect in case of loss in the determination, FIGS. 37 and 38. It is characterized by the execution ratio of the notice effect, FIG. 39, FIG. 40) due to the normal fluctuation of the loss of the notice target.

(Technical Features of the Invention Related to the Initial Operation of Various Drive Sources)
In the conventional gaming machine, when recovering from a power failure, the operation in the initial state is started regardless of the operation before the power is cut off. In such a gaming machine, when returning from the power off state, there may be a plurality of modes of this return, so it is difficult to recognize which mode the gaming machine has returned from the power off state.

The first configuration that achieves the above object of the present invention is realized as the following gaming machine. This gaming machine includes a storage means for storing information about the game (for example, the main RAM 110c), an effect control means for operating the effect means for executing the effect (for example, the frame lamp 157) (for example, the effect control unit 300), and the effect control unit 300. The information stored in the storage means (for example, the main RAM 110c) is initialized when the gaming machine is restored from the power off state (for example, the state of FIG. 100 (2)). There are a first return accompanied by (for example, the initialization return of FIG. 103 (5)) and a second return without the initialization (for example, the non-initialization return of FIG. 101 (5)). When the first return (for example, the initialization return of FIG. 103 (5)) is performed, the means (for example, the staging control unit 130m) performs the second return (for example, the non-initialization return of FIG. 101 (5)). ) Is performed, and the staging means (for example, the frame lamp 157) is operated by an operation mode (for example, the light emission mode of FIG. 103 (5)).
With such a configuration, it is possible to recognize in which mode the gaming machine has recovered from the power off state.

◆ The second configuration that achieves the above objectives is realized as the following gaming machine. The gaming machine includes a storage means for storing information about the game (for example, the main RAM 110c), an operation means that can be operated by the player (for example, the effect button 161), and an operable movable effect member (for example, the movable effect member 115). ) Is activated, and the gaming machine is provided with an effect control unit (for example, an effect control unit 130 m). The first return with initialization of the information stored in the storage means (for example, the main RAM 110c) (for example, the initialization return of FIG. 103 (5)) and the second return without the initialization (for example, FIG. There is a non-initialization return of 101 (5), and when the effect control means (for example, the effect control unit 130 m) performs the first return (for example, the initialization return of FIG. 103 (5)). The operating means (for example, the effect button 161) and the movable effect member (for example, the movable effect member 115) are different from the case where the second return (for example, the non-initialization return in FIG. 101 (5)) is performed. It is operated by a special operating mode (for example, the operating mode of FIG. 103 (5)), and the operating mode of the operating means (for example, the effect button 161) is changed from the special operating mode (for example, the operating mode of FIG. 103 (5)). When changing to the normal operating mode (for example, the operating mode of FIG. 103 (8)), the operating mode of the movable effect member (for example, the movable effect member 115) is also the operation of the special operating mode (for example, the operation of FIG. 103 (5)). The mode) is changed to a normal operating mode (for example, the operating mode of FIG. 103 (8)).
With such a configuration, it is possible to recognize in which mode the gaming machine has recovered from the power off state.

◆ The third configuration that achieves the above objectives is realized as the following gaming machine. This gaming machine has a gaming frame (for example, a frame member 150) having a first light emitting unit (for example, a frame lamp 157) capable of emitting light, and a second light emitting unit (for example, a board lamp 116) capable of emitting light. A gaming machine comprising a gaming board (for example, a gaming board 4) forming an area (for example, a gaming area 4a) and a storage means (for example, a main RAM 110c) for storing information about a game. In the recovery from the power off state (for example, the state of FIG. 100 (2)), the first recovery (for example, FIG. 103 (5)) accompanied by the initialization of the information stored in the storage means (for example, the main RAM 110c) is performed. ) And the second return without the initialization (for example, the non-initialization return in FIG. 101 (5)), and the first return (for example, the initialization in FIG. 103 (5)). When the return) is performed, the first light emitting unit (for example, the frame lamp 157) and the second light emitting unit (for example, the panel lamp 116) are subjected to the second return (for example, deinitialization of FIG. 101 (5)). The light is emitted by a special light emitting mode (for example, the light emitting mode of FIG. 103 (5)) different from the case where the return) is performed, and the light emitting mode of the first light emitting unit (for example, the frame lamp 157) is the special light emitting mode (for example). , The light emitting mode of the second light emitting unit (for example, the panel lamp 116) is also the special light emitting mode (for example, when the light emitting mode of FIG. 103 (5) is changed to the normal light emitting mode (light emitting mode of FIG. 103 (8)). For example, the light emitting mode of FIG. 103 (5) is changed to the normal light emitting mode (light emitting mode of FIG. 103 (8)).
With such a configuration, it is possible to recognize in which mode the gaming machine has recovered from the power off state.

◆ The fourth configuration that achieves the above objectives is realized as the following gaming machine. This gaming machine has a storage means for storing information about the game (for example, main RAM 110c) and a plurality of movable movable parts (for example, left movable effect member 115A, middle movable effect member 115B, right movable effect member 115C). A gaming machine provided with an effect control means (for example, an effect control unit 130 m) to be operated, and the storage means for returning from the power off state of the game machine (for example, the state of FIG. 100 (2)). (For example, the first return with initialization of the information stored in the main RAM 110c) (for example, the initialization return of FIG. 103 (5)) and the second return without the initialization (for example, FIG. 101 (for example)). 5) There is a non-initialization return), and the effect control means (for example, the effect control unit 130 m) has the plurality of movable units (for example, left movable effect member 115A, middle movable effect member 115B, right movable effect member). At least one of 115C) is subjected to the first return (for example, the initialization return of FIG. 103 (5)) and the second return (for example, the non-initialization return of FIG. 101 (5)). The plurality of movable parts (for example, left movable effect member 115A, middle movable effect member 115B, right movable effect member 115C) are moved by the same movement mode (for example, the movement mode of FIG. 103 (6)) as in the case where ), The first return (for example, the initialization return of FIG. 103 (5)) and the second return (for example, the non-initialization return of FIG. 101 (5)) are performed on at least one of the movable parts. ) Is performed in a different mode (for example, the mode of FIG. 103 (5)).
With such a configuration, it is possible to recognize in which mode the gaming machine has recovered from the power off state.

◆ The fifth configuration that achieves the above objectives is realized as the following gaming machine. The gaming machine has a storage means for storing information about the game (for example, RAM 203) and a first image (for example, a stage) when the gaming machine returns from the power off state (for example, the state of FIG. 100 (2)). A display means (for example, an image display unit 114) that displays an image 61) and then displays a second image (for example, a customer waiting image 65) different from the first image (for example, a stage image 61). The game machine is provided with a first return (for example, initialization return in FIG. 103 (5)) accompanied by initialization of information stored in the storage means (for example, main RAM 110c). There is a second return without the initialization (for example, the non-initialization return in FIG. 101 (5)), and the first return (for example, the initialization return in FIG. 103 (5)) is performed. In the case where the second return (for example, the non-initialization return in FIG. 101 (5)) is performed, the second image (for example, the customer) is displayed after the first image (for example, the stage image 61) is displayed. Time until the waiting image 65) is displayed (for example, the total time of time T1, time T2, time T3, and time T4 in FIG. 102, and the total time of time T6, time T8, time T9, and time T10). Is characterized by different.
With such a configuration, it is possible to recognize in which mode the gaming machine has recovered from the power off state.

◆ The sixth configuration that achieves the above objectives is realized as the following gaming machine. This gaming machine has a determination means (for example, main CPU 110a) for determining whether or not to perform a special game based on the establishment of a start condition, and a storage means (for example, main RAM 110c) for storing information about the game. The storage means (for example, the main RAM 110c) is a game machine provided, and stores the information related to the determination as a hold storage, and returns from the power off state of the game machine (for example, the state of FIG. 102 (2)). The first return (for example, the initialization return of FIG. 102 (4)) accompanied by the initialization of the information stored in the storage means (for example, the main RAM 110c) and the recovery without the initialization. There is a second return (for example, non-initialization return in FIG. 113 (5)), which is the return when the hold storage is stored in the storage means (for example, the main RAM 110c), and the first return. In the case where (for example, the initialization return of FIG. 112 (4)) is performed and the case where the second return (for example, the non-initialization return of FIG. 103 (5)) is performed, the display means (for example, from the return). For example, the display contents (for example, the display contents and figures of FIG. 102 (4)) in the display means (for example, the image display unit 114) until the predetermined image (for example, the decorative symbol 41) is displayed on the image display unit 114). The display content of 113 (5)) is different.
With such a configuration, it is possible to recognize in which mode the gaming machine has recovered from the power off state.

◆ The seventh configuration that achieves the above objectives is realized as the following gaming machine. This gaming machine has a determination means (for example, main CPU 110a) for determining whether or not to perform a special game based on the establishment of a start condition, and a hold storage means (for example, main RAM 110c) for holding and storing information related to the determination. The holding storage means (for example, the main RAM 110c) stores the holding storage when returning from the power off state (for example, the state of FIG. 102 (2)) of the gaming machine. The first return (for example, the non-initialization return in FIG. 100 (4)), which is the return when not performed, and the hold storage when the hold storage is stored in the hold storage means (for example, the main RAM 110c). There is a second return (for example, the non-initialization return in FIG. 113 (5)) which is a return, and the first return (for example, the non-initialization return in FIG. 102 (4)) is performed, and the first return. 2 In the case where the return (for example, the non-initialization return of FIG. 113 (5)) is performed, a predetermined image (for example, the decorative symbol 41) is displayed on the display means (for example, the image display unit 114) from the return. It is characterized in that the display contents (for example, the display contents of FIG. 102 (4) and the display contents of FIG. 113 (5)) in the display means (for example, the image display unit 114) up to the above are different.
With such a configuration, it is possible to recognize in which mode the gaming machine has recovered from the power off state.

◆ The eighth configuration that achieves the above objectives is realized as the following gaming machine. This gaming machine has a determination means (for example, main CPU 110a) for determining whether or not to perform a special game based on the establishment of a start condition, and a hold storage means (for example, a hold storage means) capable of storing a predetermined number of information related to the determination as hold storage. For example, the gaming machine including the main RAM 110c) and the effect control means (for example, the effect control unit 130 m) for performing the effect, wherein the effect control means (for example, the effect control unit 130 m) is the hold storage means. (For example, when the gaming machine recovers from the power-off state (for example, the state of FIG. 112 (4)) when the hold storage is stored in the main RAM 110c), the power-off state (for example, FIG. 112 (4)) is restored. )), The number of reserved images (for example, the reserved image 52 in FIG. 113 (7)) corresponding to the number of the reserved storages stored in the reserved storage means (for example, the main RAM 110c) is displayed. (For example, after displaying on the image display unit 114), the holding image (for example, holding) is accompanied by the moving display (for example, the display of FIG. 113 (8)) of the displayed holding image (for example, the holding image 52). It is characterized by reducing the number of images 52).
With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player who resumes the game after returning from the power off state of the gaming machine from feeling uncomfortable.

◆ The ninth configuration that achieves the above objectives is realized as the following gaming machine. This gaming machine has a main control means (for example, a main control board 110) that controls the progress of a game, and a sub that controls an effect according to a signal transmitted from the main control means (for example, the main control board 110). A gaming machine including a control means (for example, an effect control unit 130 m), and whether or not the main control means (for example, the main control board 110) performs a special game based on the establishment of a starting condition. Can be stored, a predetermined number of information related to the determination can be stored as a hold storage, and the sub control means (for example, the effect control unit 130 m) is stored in the main control means (for example, the main control board 110). The number of reserved images (for example, the reserved image 52) corresponding to the number of the reserved memories can be displayed on the display means (for example, the image display unit 114), and a design (for example, decoration) according to the result of the determination can be displayed. During the variation display of the symbol 41), an execution image (for example, a variation image 51) suggesting the content of the information related to the determination related to the variation display during execution can be displayed on the display means (for example, the image display unit 114). Yes, when the gaming machine recovers from the power off state (for example, the state of FIG. 112 (4)) when the hold storage is stored in the main control means (for example, the main control board 110), the display means. (For example, when the symbol (for example, the decorative symbol 41) is displayed on the image display unit 114 (for example, in the case of FIG. 113 (7)), the execution image (for example, the variable image 51) is not displayed, and the said. The reserved image (for example, the reserved image 52) is displayed in response to the signal transmitted from the main control means (for example, the main control board 110), and the displayed reserved image (for example, the reserved image 52) is moved and displayed (for example). For example, the execution image (for example, the variable image 51) is displayed along with the display of FIG. 113 (8).
With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player who resumes the game after returning from the power off state of the gaming machine from feeling uncomfortable.

◆ The tenth configuration that achieves the above object is realized as the following gaming machine. This gaming machine has a plurality of symbols (for example, for example) on a determination means (for example, main CPU 110a) for determining whether or not to perform a special game in a game and a display means (for example, an image display unit 114) based on the establishment of a start condition. A gaming machine including an effect control means (for example, an effect control unit 130 m) for performing a variable effect for displaying a decorative symbol 41), and the effect control means (for example, an effect control unit 130 m) is the special game. If the game machine does not turn off during the execution of the variation effect determined to be performed, the symbol (for example, the decorative symbol 41) that starts the next variation effect of the executing variation effect is a predetermined sequence of symbols. (For example, the arrangement of the decorative symbols 41 in FIG. 111 (18)), and the gaming machine is in the power off state (for example, the state in FIG. 117 (4)) during the execution of the variation effect determined to perform the special game. ), The symbol (for example, the decorative symbol 41) that starts the next variation effect of the running variation effect is a sequence including different symbols (for example, the decorative symbol 41 of FIG. 118 (15)). It is characterized by displaying by (arrangement).
With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player who resumes the game after returning from the power off state of the gaming machine from feeling uncomfortable.

◆ The eleventh configuration that achieves the above object is realized as the following gaming machine. This gaming machine has a determination means (for example, main CPU 110a) for determining whether or not to perform a special game based on the establishment of a start condition, and an effect control means (for example, an effect) for performing an effect according to the result of the determination. A game machine including a control unit 130 m), wherein the effect control means (for example, the effect control unit 130 m) is a game machine of the special game when the game machine is not turned off during the execution of the special game. A special effect image (for example, a high-accuracy notification image 77) is displayed on a display means (for example, an image display unit 114) during execution, and the gaming machine is in a power-off state (for example, FIG. 118 (10)) during execution of the special game. )), The special effect image (for example, the high accuracy notification image 77) is not displayed during the execution of the special game. It is characterized in that an image different from the above (for example, a right-handed image 83 during return) is displayed.
With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player who resumes the game after returning from the power off state of the gaming machine from feeling uncomfortable.

◆ The twelfth configuration that achieves the above object is realized as the following gaming machine. This gaming machine has a determination means (for example, main CPU 110a) for determining whether or not to perform a special game based on the establishment of a start condition, and a symbol (for example, decoration) which is variablely displayed according to the result of the determination. The gaming machine is provided with an effect control means (for example, an effect control unit 130 m) that temporarily stops the symbol 41) and then stops the effect, and the effect control means (for example, the effect control unit 130 m) is provided. When it is determined that the special game is to be performed and the gaming machine returns after the power is turned off (for example, the state of FIG. 117 (4)) during the execution of the variation effect, the variation effect being executed is being executed. It is characterized in that the running variation effect (for example, the variation effect of FIG. 117 (6)) is terminated without temporarily stopping the symbol (for example, the decorative symbol 41).
With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player who resumes the game after returning from the power off state of the gaming machine from feeling uncomfortable.

The gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine, but can also be used for a rotating cylinder type gaming machine (so-called slot machine). Furthermore, it can also be used for a ball game machine and an arrange ball game machine.

It should also be considered that the embodiments disclosed this time are exemplary in all respects and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is shown by the scope of claims rather than the above description, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to the scope of claims.

1 Game machine 6a Effect button 16 Image display devices 17A to 17C Movable effect member 110 Main control board 130 Effect control board 130 m Effect control unit 140 Image control unit 150 Lamp control unit

Claims (1)

A determination means for determining whether or not to perform a special game based on the game information acquired by the acquisition means when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and a determination means.
Before the determination is made, a pre-determination means for preliminarily determining whether or not to perform the special game based on the game information, and
An effect control means capable of executing a game effect according to the result of the determination and the result of the preliminary determination.
Operation means that can be operated by the player,
Equipped with multiple movable production characters,
The staging control means
It is possible to execute an operation promotion effect that urges the player to operate the operation means, a vibration effect that vibrates the operation means, and a character effect that activates the effect character.
For the vibration effect,
There are a first vibration effect, a second vibration effect whose effect mode is different from that of the first vibration effect, and a third vibration effect executed based on the prior determination.
When the first vibration effect is executed, the execution period of the operation promotion effect is longer and easier to execute than when the second vibration effect is executed.
The first vibration effect has a longer execution period and is more likely to be executed than the third vibration effect.
A gaming machine characterized in that a predetermined character effect is more likely to be executed when the first vibration effect is executed than when the third vibration effect is executed.

Images